Docstoc

Fort Bragg North Carolina - PDF

Document Sample
Fort Bragg North Carolina - PDF Powered By Docstoc
					US Army Corps
                    Fort Bragg
of Engineers
Savannah District   North Carolina



Solicitation Number
W912HN-11-R-0022
SOF C4 Facility
FY-11, PN 66362
Volume 2 of 3
Technical Provisions - Divisions 08 through 23
April 2011




          THIS SOLICITATION IS UNRESTRICTED PURSUANT TO THE
       "BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY DEVELOPMENT REFORM ACT OF 1988"
                          (PUBLIC LAW 100-656)




                    U.S. ARMY ENGINEER DISTRICT, SAVANNAH
                               CORPS OF ENGINEERS
                          100 WEST OGLETHORPE AVENUE
                          SAVANNAH, GEORGIA 31401-3640
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


                                  PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 01   00   60           JSOC SECURITY
 01   11   00           SUMMARY OF WORK
 01   32   01.00   10   PROJECT SCHEDULE
 01   33   00           SUBMITAL PROCEDURES
 01   33   29           LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION
 01   35   26           GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
 01   42   00           SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
 01   45   00.00   10   QUALITY CONTROL
 01   45   00.10   10   QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)
 01   45   35           SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS
 01   50   00           TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
 01   57   19.11        INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT
 01   57   20.00   10   ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
 01   57   23           TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
 01   58   00           PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
 01   62   35           RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
 01   74   19           CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
 01   78   00           CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
 01   78   23           OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
 01   83   16           EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

 02 41 00               DEMOLITION

 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

 03   15   13.00 10     EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION JOINTS, AND WATERSTOPS
 03   30   00           CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
 03   33   00           CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
 03   45   00           PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

 04 20 00               MASONRY

 DIVISION 05 - METALS

 05   05   23           WELDING, STRUCTURAL
 05   12   00           STRUCTURAL STEEL
 05   21   19           OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING
 05   21   23           STEEL JOIST GIRDER FRAMING
 05   30   00           STEEL DECKS
 05   50   13           MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
 05   51   00           METAL STAIRS
 05   51   33           METAL LADDERS
 05   52   00           METAL RAILINGS

 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

 06 10 00               ROUGH CARPENTRY
 06 41 16.00 10         LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK
 06 61 16               SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS

 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION


                           PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



 07   13   53      ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
 07   19   00      WATER REPELLENTS
 07   21   13      BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION
 07   21   16      MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
 07   22   00      ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
 07   26   60      BOARD STOCK AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
 07   52   00      MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
 07   60   00      FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
 07   81   00      *1 SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING
 07   84   00      FIRESTOPPING
 07   92   00      JOINT SEALANTS

 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

 08   11   13      STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
 08   12   16      INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES AND STOREFRONT FRAMING
 08   14   00      WOOD DOORS
 08   33   23      OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
 08   34   01      FORCED ENTRY RESISTANT COMPONENTS
 08   39   54      BLAST RESISTANT DOORS
 08   41   13      ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
 08   44   00      GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
 08   71   00      DOOR HARDWARE
 08   81   00      GLAZING
 08   91   00      METAL WALL LOUVERS

 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

 09   06   90      COLOR SCHEDULE
 09   22   00      SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
 09   29   00      GYPSUM BOARD
 09   30   00      CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE
 09   51   00      ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
 09   65   00      RESILIENT FLOORING
 09   68   13      CARPET TILE
 09   69   13      RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING
 09   72   00      WALL COVERINGS
 09   90   00      PAINTS AND COATINGS

 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

 10   10   00      VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES
 10   14   02      INTERIOR SIGNAGE
 10   21   13      TOILET COMPARTMENTS
 10   22   26.33   FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
 10   26   13      WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
 10   28   13      TOILET ACCESSORIES
 10   44   13      FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
 10   51   13      METAL LOCKERS

 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

 12 21 00          *1 WINDOW BLINDS
 12 48 13.13       ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS

 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

 13 48 00.00 10    SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT


                      PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

 14 24 00               HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

 21 13 13.00 10         WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
 21 13 18.00 10         PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, FIRE PROTECTION
 21 22 00.00 20         CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING

 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

 22   00   00           PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
 22   07   19           PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
 22   14   29           SUMP PUMPS
 22   33   30.00 10     SOLAR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT

 DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

 23   00   00           AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
 23   03   00.00 20     BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
 23   05   15           COMMON PIPING FOR HVAC
 23   05   48           VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
                        EQUIPMENT
 23   05   93           TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
 23   07   00           THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
 23   08   00.00 10     COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
 23   09   13.34        CONTROL VALVES, SELF-CONTAINED
 23   09   23           LONWorks DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL
                        BUILDING SYSTEMS
 23   11   25           FACILITY GAS PIPING
 23   21   13.00 20     LOW TEMPERATURE WATER LTW HEATING SYSTEM
 23   25   00           CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
 23   31   13           METAL DUCTS
 23   34   23           HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
 23   36   00           AIR TERMINAL UNITS
 23   37   13.00 40     DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLS
 23   41   13           PANEL FILTERS
 23   52   43.00 20     LOW PRESSURE WATER HEATING BOILERS (UNDER 800,000 BTU/HR
                        OUTPUT)
 23   64   10           WATER CHILLERS, VAPOR COMPRESSION TYPE
 23   64   26           CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
 23   65   00           COOLING TOWERS
 23   72   26.00 10     DESICCANT COOLING SYSTEMS
 23   73   13           MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
 23   81   23.00 20     COMPUTER ROOM AIR HANDLING UNITS
 23   82   00.00 20     TERMINAL HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
 23   82   16           AIR COILS

 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

 26   00   00.00   20   BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
 26   05   48.00   10   SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
 26   05   71.00   40   LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
 26   09   23.00   40   LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
 26   14   50           MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM
 26   20   00           INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
 26   23   00.00   40   SWITCHGEAR


                           PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 26 23 00.00 41       SWITCHBOARDS
 26 26 53             STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY POWER DISTRIBUTION
                      UNIT
 26   28   01.00 10   COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
 26   29   23         VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS
 26   32   15.00 10   DIESEL-GENERATOR SET STATIONARY WITH AUXILIARIES
 26   33   53.00 20   UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
 26   51   00         INTERIOR LIGHTING

 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

 27 05 28.36 40       CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
 27 10 00             BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

 28 05 26.00 40       GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
 28 31 76             INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

 31 00 00             EARTHWORK
 31 05 19             GEOTEXTILE
 31 05 23             GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT OF PAVEMENT BASE COURSE, AND/OR
                      SUBGRADE IMPROVEMENT
 31 11 00             CLEARING AND GRUBBING
 31 31 16             SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL

 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

 32 05 33             LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT
 32 12 17             HOT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
 32 13 13.06          PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR ROADS AND SITE
                      FACILITIES
 32   16   13         SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
 32   17   24.00 10   PAVEMENT MARKINGS
 32   31   13.53      HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
 32   92   19         SEEDING
 32   92   23         SODDING
 32   93   00         EXTERIOR PLANTS

 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

 33   11   00         WATER DISTRIBUTION
 33   30   00         SANITARY SEWERS
 33   32   13.14      PACKAGED SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS, GRINDER PUMP TYPE
 33   40   00         STORM DRAINAGE
 33   51   00.00 20   NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION

 -- End of Project Table of Contents --




                         PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 08 11 13

                             STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

                                        08/08

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

            AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS D1.1/D1.1M                     (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                  (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                    Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                    Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                    the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM A 879/A 879M                  (2006) Standard Specification for Steel
                                    Sheet, zinc Coated by the Electrolytic
                                    Process for Applications Requiring
                                    Designation of the Coating Mass on Each
                                    Surface

 ASTM A 924/A 924M                  (2010) Standard Specification for General
                                    Requirements for Steel Sheet,
                                    Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM C 578                         (2010) Standard Specification for Rigid,
                                    Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

 ASTM C 591                         (2009) Standard Specification for Unfaced
                                    Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
                                    Thermal Insulation

 ASTM C 612                         (2010) Mineral Fiber Block and Board
                                    Thermal Insulation

 ASTM D 2863                        (2009) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
                                    Concentration to Support Candle-Like
                                    Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)

            BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

 ANSI/BHMA A156.115                 (2006) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors
                                    and Steel Frames

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 105                           (2010) Installation of Smoke Door


                            SECTION 08 11 13    Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


                                    Assemblies

 NFPA 252                           (2007) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
                                    Door Assemblies

 NFPA 80                            (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
                                    and Other Opening Protectives

            STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)

 SDI/DOOR 111                       (2009) Recommended Selection and Usage
                                    Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and
                                    Accessories

 SDI/DOOR 113                       (2001; R 2006) Determining the Steady
                                    State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door
                                    and Frame Assemblies

 SDI/DOOR A250.11                   (2001) Recommended Erection Instructions
                                    for Steel Frames

 SDI/DOOR A250.4                    (2001) Test Procedure and Acceptance
                                    Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
                                    Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware
                                    Reinforcings

 SDI/DOOR A250.6                    (2003) Hardware on Steel Doors
                                    (Reinforcement - Application)

 SDI/DOOR A250.8                    (2003; R2008) Recommended Specifications
                                    for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

            UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 10B                             (2008; Rev thru Apr 2009) Fire Tests of
                                    Door Assemblies

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Doors; G

            Frames; G

            Accessories; G

            Weatherstripping; G

            Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware
            provisions, method of glazing, and installation details.

            Schedule of doors; G


                             SECTION 08 11 13    Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



             Schedule of frames; G

             Submit door and frame locations.

         SD-03 Product Data

             Doors

             Frames

             Accessories

             Weatherstripping

             Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames,
             and accessories. Include data and details on door construction,
             panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
             construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in
             lieu of "standard steel doors," provide additional details and
             data sufficient for comparison to SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.

1.3     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective
 wrappings or packaging. Strap knock-down frames in bundles. Provide
 temporary steel spreaders securely fastened to the bottom of each welded
 frame. Store doors and frames on platforms under cover in clean, dry,
 ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4 inch airspace between
 doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces
 dry. Replace damaged materials with new.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     STANDARD STEEL DOORS

 SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive
 door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. Undercut where indicated.
 Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush and sealed to prevent water
 intrusion. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.1.1     Classification - Level, Performance, Model

2.1.1.1     Standard Duty Doors

 SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, of size(s)
 and design(s) indicated and core construction as required by the
 manufacturer. Provide where shown.

2.1.1.2     Heavy Duty Doors

 SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, with core
 construction as required by the manufacturer for exterior doors, of size(s)
 and design(s) indicated. Where vertical stiffener cores are required, the
 space between the stiffeners shall be filled with mineral board
 insulation. Provide Level 2 where indicated.




                                SECTION 08 11 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2     INSULATED STEEL DOOR SYSTEMS

 Insulated steel doors shall have a core of polyurethane foam and an R
 factor of 10.0 or more (based on a k value of 0.16); face sheets, edges,
 and frames of galvanized steel not lighter than 23 gage, 16 gage, and 16
 gage respectively; magnetic weatherstripping; nonremovable-pin hinges;
 thermal-break aluminum threshold; and vinyl door bottom. Doors and frames
 shall receive phosphate treatment, rust-inhibitive primer, and baked
 acrylic enamel finish. Doors shall have been tested in accordance with
 SDI/DOOR A250.4 and shall have met the requirements for Level C. Prepare
 doors to receive specified hardware.Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick.
 Provide insulated steel doors and frames where shown

2.3     SOUND RATED STEEL DOORS

 Doors shall have a Sound Transmission Class (STC) as indicated on the
 drawings.

2.4     ACCESSORIES

2.4.1     Astragals

 For pairs of exterior steel doors which will not have aluminum astragals or
 removable mullions, as specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE provide
 overlapping steel astragals with the doors.

2.4     INSULATION CORES

 Insulated cores shall be of type specified, and provide an apparent
 U-factor of .48 in accordance with SDI/DOOR 113 and shall conform to:

        a.   Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam: ASTM C 591, Type I or II,
             foamed-in-place or in board form, with oxygen index of not less
             than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2863; or

        b.   Rigid Polystyrene Foam Board:    ASTM C 578, Type I or II; or

        c.   Mineral board:   ASTM C 612, Type I.

2.5     STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

 SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2 or 3, except as otherwise specified. Form frames
 to sizes and shapes indicated, with welded corners or knock-down
 field-assembled corners. Provide steel frames for doors unless otherwise
 indicated.

2.5.1     Welded Frames

 Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or
 continuously weld stops and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.

 Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural
 Welding Code Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with
 the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded.

 All exterior frames are to be welded.




                                SECTION 08 11 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.5.2     Knock-Down Frames

 Design corners for simple field assembly by concealed tenons, splice
 plates, or interlocking joints that produce square, rigid corners and a
 tight fit and maintain the alignment of adjoining members. Provide
 locknuts for bolted connections.

2.5.3     Mullions and Transom Bars

 Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and be a
 member with heads and jambs butt-welded thereto or knock-down for field
 assembly. Bottom of door mullions shall have adjustable floor anchors and
 spreader connections.

2.5.4     Stops and Beads

 Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel. Provide for glazed and other
 openings in standard steel frames. Secure beads to frames with oval-head,
 countersunk Phillips self-tapping sheet metal screws or concealed clips and
 fasteners. Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on center. Miter
 molded shapes at corners. Butt or miter square or rectangular beads at
 corners.

2.5.5     Anchors

 Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide
 steel anchors, zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not
 lighter than 18 gage.

2.5.5.1      Wall Anchors

 Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more
 than 7.5 feet in height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for
 each additional 2.5 feet or fraction thereof.

        a.   Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps
             or 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;

        b.   Stud partitions: Weld or otherwise securely fasten anchors to
             backs of frames. Design anchors to be fastened to wood studs with
             nails, to closed steel studs with sheet metal screws, and to open
             steel studs by wiring or welding;

        c.   Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete
             or masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111;
             and

2.5.5.2      Floor Anchors

 Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each
 jamb member. Where floor fill occurs, terminate bottom of frames at the
 indicated finished floor levels and support by adjustable extension clips
 resting on and anchored to the structural slabs.

2.6     FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES

 NFPA 80 and this specification. The requirements of NFPA 80 shall take
 precedence over details indicated or specified.



                                SECTION 08 11 13   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.6.1     Labels

 Fire doors and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories
 (UL), Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM), or Warnock Hersey
 International (WHI) attesting to the rating required. Testing shall be in
 accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10B. Labels shall be metal with raised
 letters, and shall bear the name or file number of the door and frame
 manufacturer. Labels shall be permanently affixed at the factory to frames
 and to the hinge edge of the door. Door labels shall not be painted.

2.6.2     Astragal on Fire Doors

 On pairs of labeled fire doors, conform to NFPA 80 and UL requirements.   On
 smoke control doors, conform to NFPA 105.

2.7     WEATHERSTRIPPING

 As specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.

2.8     HARDWARE PREPARATION

 Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6.
 Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors
 and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of
 SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6. For additional requirements refer to
 ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the
 project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware
 into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the
 requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8, as applicable. Punch door frames, with
 the exception of frames that will have weatherstripping to receive a
 minimum of two rubber or vinyl door silencers on lock side of single doors
 and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors. Set lock strikes
 out to provide clearance for silencers.

2.9     FINISHES

2.9.1     Factory-Primed Finish

 All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, chemically
 treated and factory primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in
 SDI/DOOR A250.8, or paintable A25 galvannealed steel without primer. Where
 coating is removed by welding, apply touchup of factory primer.

2.9.2     Hot-Dip Zinc-Coated and Factory-Primed Finish

 Fabricate exterior doors and frames from hot dipped zinc coated steel,
 alloyed type, that complies with ASTM A 924/A 924Mand ASTM A 653/A 653M.
 The coating weight shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements for
 coatings having 0.4 ounces per square foot, total both sides, i.e., A40.
 Repair damaged zinc-coated surfaces by the application of zinc dust paint.
 Thoroughly clean and chemically treat to insure maximum paint adhesion.
 Factory prime as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.

2.9.3     Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories

 Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with
 ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. Phosphate treat
 and factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.



                               SECTION 08 11 13   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.10     FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP

 Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance,
 and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp,
 and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with
 joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress exposed
 welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for use with
 the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed and in
 true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Design frames in
 exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow sufficient space between the
 inside back of trim and masonry to receive calking compound.

2.10.1     Grouted Frames

 For frames to be installed in exterior walls and to be filled with mortar
 or grout, fill the stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout
 out of the stops and to facilitate installation of stop-applied head and
 jamb seals.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

3.1.1     Frames

 Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace
 securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with
 expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall
 anchors to adjoining construction. Backfill frames with mortar. Coat
 inside of frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material. For frames
 in exterior walls, ensure that stops are filled with rigid insulation
 before grout is placed.

3.1.2     Doors

 Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
 After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.

3.1.3     Fire Doors and Frames

 Install fire doors and frames, including hardware, in accordance with
 NFPA 80.

3.2     PROTECTION

 Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames
 prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as
 directed. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean
 thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same
 type used for shop coat.

3.3     CLEANING

 Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly.
 Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.

          -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 08 11 13   Page 7
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



                                   SECTION 08 12 16

                INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES AND STOREFRONT FRAMING
                                        08/08

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

             AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

 AAMA 2603                            (2002) Voluntary Specification,
                                      Performance Requirements and Test
                                      Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings
                                      on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 36/A 36M                      (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                      Structural Steel

 ASTM B 209                           (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                      and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

 ASTM B 221                           (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                      and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                                      Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

1.2   RELATED DOCUMENTS

 Doors are specified in 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS, door hardware specified in
 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE and glazing is specified in 08 81 00 GLAZING.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Doors, windows and frames; G

             Show elevations of each window and frame type, opening
             identification number, metal gages, details of frame construction,
             methods of anchorage, glazing details, provisions for and location
             of hardware, and details of installation. Use same reference
             numbers for openings as contract drawings.

         SD-03 Product Data

             Factory finish, glazing gaskets, accessories


                               SECTION 08 12 16   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



            Color chart for finish indicating manufacturer's standard colors

        SD-04 Samples

            Finish sample

        SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

            Doors and frames

            Submit detail specifications and instructions for installation,
            adjustments, cleaning, and maintenance.

1.4     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver frames and storefront in cartons to provide protection during
 transit and storage at project site.

 Inspect frames and glazing upon delivery for damage. Repair minor damage to
 pre-finished products by means as recommended by manufacturer. Replace
 frames that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

 Store frames at project site under cover and as near as possible to final
 installation location. Do not use covering material that will cause
 discoloration of aluminum finish.

1.5     QUALITY CONTROL

1.5.1     Single Source Responsibility

 Provide aluminum frames, aluminum and accessories produced by a single
 manufacturer for each type of product indicated.

1.5.2     Manufacturer's Qualifications

 Manufacturer shall demonstrate previous experience in manufacturing
 of interior aluminum door and office fronts framing for a period of not
 less than 10 years on comparable sized project.

1.6     ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

 Do not begin installation of frames or glazing until area of work has been
 completely enclosed and interior is protected from the elements.

 Maintain temperature and humidity in areas of installation within
 reasonable limits, as close as possible to final occupancy. If necessary,
 provide temperature control and ventilation to maintain required
 environmental conditions.

1.7     WARRANTY

 Warrant against defects in manufacturing of materials for a period of 2
 years from date of substantial completion.

 Warrant framing finish against defects, including cracking, flaking,
 blistering, peeling, and excessive fading, chalking and non-uniformity
 in color for a period of 5 years.



                               SECTION 08 12 16   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES

 Aluminum door and window frames of size, design, and location indicated.
 Provide frames, framing members, subframes, transoms, adjoining sidelights,
 adjoining window wall, trim, and accessories.

2.2     MATERIALS

2.2.1     Aluminum

 Meeting requirements of ASTM B221, 6063T5 alloy, and as otherwise required
 to assure compliance with dimensional tolerances and maintain color
 uniformity. Billets shall be composed of at least 33% recycled aluminum.

2.2.2     Anchorage Devices, Clips and Fasteners

 Manufacturer's standard type, compatible with materials being secured.

2.2.3     Accessories

 As necessary for complete system.

2.2.4     Anchors

 Stainless steel or steel with hot-dipped galvanized finish.

2.2.5     Aluminum Alloy for Frames

  ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. ASTM B 209, alloy and temper
 best suited for aluminum sheets and strips.

2.2.6     Fasteners

 Hard aluminum or stainless steel.

2.2.7     Structural Steel

 ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.2.8     Aluminum Paint

 Aluminum frame manufacturer's standard aluminum paint.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     FABRICATION

3.1.1     Aluminum Frames

 Extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately as indicated. Provide
 removable glass stops and glazing beads for frames accommodating fixed
 glass. Use countersunk stainless steel Phillips screws for exposed
 fastenings, and space not more than 12 inches on center. Mill joints in
 frame members to a hairline fit, reinforce, and secure mechanically.




                             SECTION 08 12 16   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.1.2   Extruded Aluminum Frame Fabrication

          Utilize adjustable angle vertical mullion for segmented curved
          OfficeFronts.

          Utilize reduced profile corner section for 90 degree corners.

          Assemble all door frames, sidelights, and window units with screws
          utilizing internal screw spline system, insert into the drywall
          rough opening, and then attach perimeter flanges.

          Assemble all sidelights and windows without the use of clips.

          Do not exceed maximum size of window or door to meet applicable
          code requirements.

          Factory pre-machine door frame jambs and prepare for hardware,
          with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as
          required, and fastened within frame with concealed screws.

3.1.3   Welding and Fastening

 Where possible, locate welds on unexposed surfaces. Dress welds on exposed
 surfaces smoothly. Select welding rods, filler wire, and flux to produce a
 uniform texture and color in finished work. Remove flux and spatter from
 surfaces immediately after welding. Exposed screws or bolts will be
 permitted only in inconspicuous locations, and shall have countersunk
 heads. Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware in place.

3.1.4   Anchors

 On the backs of subframes, provide anchors of the sizes and shapes
 indicated for securing subframes to adjacent construction. Anchor transom
 bars at ends and mullions at head and sill. Reinforce vertical mullions
 with structural steel members of sufficient length to extend up to the
 overhead structural slab or framing and secure thereto in accordance with
 manufacturer's recommendation. Place anchors near top and bottom of each
 jamb and at intermediate points not more than 25 inches apart.

3.1.5   Provisions for Hardware

 Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Deliver hardware templates
 and hardware (except field-applied hardware) to the door manufacturer for
 use in fabrication of wood doors and aluminum frames. Cut, reinforce,
 drill, and tap doors and frames at the factory to receive template
 hardware. Provide doors to receive surface-applied hardware, except push
 plates, kick plates, and mop plates, with reinforcing only; drill and tap
 in the field. Provide hardware reinforcements of stainless steel or steel
 with hot-dipped galvanized finish, and secure with stainless steel screws.

3.1.6   Provisions for Glazing

 Provide extruded aluminum snap-in glazing beads on interior side of doors.
 Provide extruded aluminum, theft-proof, snap-in glazing beads or fixed
 glazing beads on exterior or security side of doors. Glazing beads shall
 have vinyl insert glazing gaskets. Design glazing beads to receive glass
 of thickness indicated or specified.




                           SECTION 08 12 16   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


3.1.7     Finishes

 Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of organic coating.

3.1.7.1     Factory Finish

 Factory finish extruded frame and door components so that all parts exposed
 to view upon completion of installation are uniform in finish and color.
 Exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes.

3.1.7.2     Factory Applied Paint Finish

 Comply with AAMA(2603)603.8 and AA-DAF-45, factory applied backed enamel
 coating.

        Color: White, from manufacturer's standard colors.

3.1.7.3     Organic Coating

 Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces. Provide a baked enamel finish
 in accordance with AAMA 2603 with total dry film thickness not less than
 0.8 mil.

3.2     EXAMINATION

 Examine project conditions and verify that project is ready for work of
 this section to proceed. Do not proceed with installation until
 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

 Verify wall thickness does not exceed manufacturer's recommended tolerances
 of specified throat size.

3.3     INSTALLATION

 Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive
 doors, transoms, adjoining sidelights, and, adjoining window walls. Anchor
 frames to adjacent construction as indicated and in accordance with
 manufacturer's printed instructions. Anchor bottom of each frame to rough
 floor construction with 3/32 inch thick stainless steel angle clips secured
 to back of each jamb and to floor construction; use stainless steel bolts
 and expansion rivets for fastening clip anchors. After erection and
 glazing and door installation, adjust doors and hardware to operate
 properly.

 Comply with frame manufacturer's printed installation instructions and
 approved shop drawings. Do not attempt installation in areas where wall
 thickness exceeds tolerances of specified throat size.

 Install frames plumb and square, free from warp or twist, securely anchored
 to substrates with fasteners recommended by frame manufacturer. Maintain
 dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. Ensure joints are
 hairline tight and surfaces flush with adjacent components.

 Install glass in accordance with Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.




                              SECTION 08 12 16   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


3.4     PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

3.4.1     Dissimilar Metals

 Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless
 steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact to
 dissimilar metals.

3.4.1.1     Protection

 Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless
 steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact to
 dissimilar metals.

  a.    Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous
        paint.

  b.    Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and the
        dissimilar metal.

  c.    Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of
        aluminum paint.

  d.    Use a nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.

3.5     ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

 Upon completion of installation, clean frame surfaces in accordance with
 manufacturer's written recommended procedure. Do not use abrasive,
 caustic, or acid cleaning agents.

 Protect exposed portions of aluminum surfaces from damage by plaster, lime,
 acid, cement, and other contaminants.

 Touch up marred areas so that touch-up is not visible from a distance of 4
 feet. Remove and replace frames that cannot be satisfactorily adjusted.

3.6     PROTECTION

 Protect as required to assure that frames and doors will be without damage
 until Substantial Completion. Protect doors and frames from damage and
 from contamination by other materials such as cement mortar. Prior to
 completion and acceptance of the work, restore damaged frames to original
 condition, or replace with new ones.

3.7     EXAMINATION

 Examine project conditions and verify that project is ready for work of
 this section to proceed. Do not proceed with installation until
 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

 Verify wall thickness does not exceed manufacturer's recommended tolerances
 of specified throat size.

          -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 08 12 16   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022




                                   SECTION 08 14 00

                                      WOOD DOORS
                                         07/06

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

             ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)

 AWI Qual Stds                        (8th Edition) AWI Quality Standards

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM E 283                           (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
                                      Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
                                      and Doors Under Specified Pressure
                                      Differences Across the Specimen

 ASTM E 90                            (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory
                                      Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
                                      Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

             NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 80                              (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
                                      and Other Opening Protectives

             WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA)

 WDMA I.S. 1-A                        (1997) Architectural Wood Flush Doors

 WDMA I.S. 4                          (2000) Water-Repellent Preservative
                                      Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork

 WDMA TM-5                            (1990) Split Resistance Test Method

 WDMA TM-7                            (1990) Cycle Slam Test Method

 WDMA TM-8                            (1990) Hinge Loading Test Method

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES.

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Doors; G

             Submit drawings or catalog data showing each type of door unit.
             Drawings and data shall indicate door type and construction,


                               SECTION 08 14 00    Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          sizes, thickness.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Doors;

          Accessories

          Sample warranty

          Sound transmission class rating

          Fire resistance rating

      SD-04 Samples

          Doors

          Prior to the delivery of wood doors, submit a sample section of
          each type of door which shows the stile, rail, veneer, finish, and
          core construction.

          Door finish colors

          Refer to finish legend and door schedule for specific colors.

          Submit a minimum of three color samples for approval by the
          Contracting Officer.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Split resistance

          Cycle-slam

          Hinge loading resistance

          Submit split resistance test report for doors tested in accordance
          with WDMA TM-5, cycle-slam test report for doors tested in
          accordance with WDMA TM-7, and hinge loading resistance test
          report for doors tested in accordance with WDMA TM-8.

1.3   SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION

 Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
 Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
 Certfication shall be performed annually and shall be currrent.

1.4   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver doors to the site in an undamaged condition and protect against
 damage and dampness. Stack doors flat under cover. Support on blocking, a
 minimum of 4 inch thick, located at each end and at the midpoint of the
 door. Store doors in a well-ventilated building so that they will not be
 exposed to excessive moisture, heat, dryness, direct sunlight, or extreme
 changes of temperature and humidity. Do not store in a building under
 construction until concrete, masonry work, and plaster are dry. Replace
 defective or damaged doors with new ones.



                             SECTION 08 14 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


1.5      WARRANTY

 Warrant doors free of defects as set forth in the door manufacturer's
 standard door warranty.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      DOORS

 Provide doors of the types, sizes, and designs indicated. All wood veneer
 surfaces and wood components shall be FSC Certified as requireed by project
 LEED reuqirements.

2.1.1     Flush Doors

 Conform to WDMA I.S. 1-A for flush doors. Provide hollow core doors with
 lock blocks and 1 inch minimum thickness hinge stile. Hardwood stile edge
 bands of doors receives a natural finish, compatible with face veneer.
 Provide mill option for stile edge of doors scheduled to be painted. No
 visible finger joints will be accepted in stile edge bands. When used,
 locate finger-joints under hardware.

2.1.1.1     Interior Flush Doors

 Provide particleboard core, Type II flush doors conforming to WDMA I.S. 1-A
 with faces of good grade premium natural birch. Hardwood veneers shall be
 rotary cut.

2.1.2     Acoustical Doors

 WDMA I.S. 1-A, solid core, constructed to provide Sound Transmission Class
 rating of 45 & 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90.

2.2      ACCESSORIES

2.2.1     Weatherstripping

 Provide weatherstripping that is a standard cataloged product of a
 manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of this specialized item.
 Provide weatherstripping looped neoprene or vinyl held in an extruded
 non-ferrous metal housing. Air leakage of weatherstripped doors not to
 exceed 0.5 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when
 tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.

2.2.2     Additional Hardware Reinforcement

 Provide the minimum lock blocks to secure the specified hardware. The
 measurement of top, bottom, and intermediate rail blocks are a minimum 125
 mm 5 inch by full core width. Comply with the manufacturer's labeling
 requirements for reinforcement blocking, but not mineral material similar
 to the core.

2.3     FABRICATION

2.3.1     Marking

 Stamp each door with a brand, stamp, or other identifying mark indicating
 quality and construction of the door.



                             SECTION 08 14 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3.2     Quality and Construction

 Identify the standard on which the construction of the door was based and
 identify doors having a Type I glue bond.

2.3.3     Preservative Treatment

 Treat doors scheduled for restrooms, janitor closets and other possible wet
 locations including exterior doors with a water-repellent preservative
 treatment and so marketed at the manufacturer's plant in accordance with
 WDMA I.S. 4.

2.3.4     Adhesives and Bonds

 WDMA I.S. 1-A. Use Type II bond for interior doors.        Provide a nonstaining
 adhesive on doors with a natural finish.

2.3.5     Prefitting

 Provide factory prefinished and factory prefitted doors for     the specified
 hardware, door frame and door-swing indicated. Machine and      size doors at
 the factory by the door manufacturer in accordance with the     standards under
 which the doors are produced and manufactured. Provide the      door
 manufacturer with the necessary hardware samples, and frame     and hardware
 schedules to coordinate the work.

2.3.6     Finishes

2.3.6.1     Field Painting

 Factory prime or seal doors, and field paint.

2.3.6.2     Factory Finish

 Provide doors finished at the factory by the door manufacturer as follows:
 AWI Qual Stds Section 1500, specification for System No. 4 Conversion
 varnish alkyd urea or System No. 5 Vinyl catalyzed. The coating is
 AWI Qual Stds premium, medium rubbed sheen, closed grain effect. Use stain
 when required to produce the finish specified for color. Seal edges,
 cutouts, trim, and wood accessories, and apply two coats of finish
 compatible with the door face finish. Touch-up finishes that are scratched
 or marred, or where exposed fastener holes are filled, in accordance with
 the door manufacturer's instructions. Match color and sheen of factory
 finish using materials compatible for field application.

2.3.6.3     Color

 Provide door finish colors as indicated from the door and finish schedules.

2.3.7     Water-Resistant Sealer

 Provide manufacturer's standard water-resistant sealer compatible with the
 specified finishes.

2.4     SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

 Meet or exceed the following minimum performance criteria of stiles of "B"
 and "C" label fire doors utilizing standard mortise leaf hinges:



                                SECTION 08 14 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


         a.    Split resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less than 500
               pounds load when tested in accordance with WDMA TM-5.

         b.    Cycle-slam: 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other
               visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with the
               requirements of WDMA TM-7.

         c.    Hinge loading resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less
               than 700 pounds load when tested for direct screw withdrawal in
               accordance with WDMA TM-8 using a No. 12, 1-1/4 inch long, steel,
               fully threaded wood screw. Drill 5/32 inch pilot hole, use 1-1/2
               inch opening around screw for bearing surface, and engage screw
               full, except for last 1/8 inch. Do not use a steel plate to
               reinforce screw area.

PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

 Before installation, seal top and bottom edges of doors with the approved
 water-resistant sealer. Seal cuts made on the job immediately after
 cutting using approved water-resistant sealer. Fit, trim, and hang doors
 with a 1/16 inch minimum, 1/8 inch maximum clearance at sides and top, and a
  3/16 inch minimum, 1/4 inch maximum clearance over thresholds. Provide
 3/8 inch minimum, 7/16 inch maximum clearance at bottom where no threshold
 occurs. Bevel edges of doors at the rate of 1/8 inch in 2 inch. Door warp
 shall not exceed1/4 inch when measured in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1-A.

3.1.1     Fire Doors

 Install fire doors in accordance with NFPA 80.       Do not paint over labels.

3.1.2     Weatherstripping

 Install doors in strict accordance with the door manufacturer's printed
 installation instructions and details. Weatherstrip exterior swing-type
 doors at sills, heads and jambs to provide weathertight installation.
 Apply weatherstripping at sills to bottom rails of doors and hold in place
 with a brass or bronze plate. Apply weatherstripping to door frames at
 jambs and head. Shape weatherstripping at sills to suit the threshold.
 Meeting stiles of exterior double-doors shall be made weathertight by means
 of a looped vinyl or neoprene strip in an extruded nonferrous metal housing
 applied to the edge of one door leaf.

          -- End of Section --




                               SECTION 08 14 00   Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



                              SECTION 08 33 23

                           OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
                                    07/07

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

 ASCE 7-05                        (2006; Errata 2007) Minimum Design Loads
                                  for Buildings and Other Structures

          ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME B29.400                     (2001; R 2008) Combination, "H" Type Mill
                                  Chains, and Sprockets

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 153/A 153M                (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
                                  Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
                                  Hardware

 ASTM A 27/A 27M                  (2008) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Castings, Carbon, for General Application

 ASTM A 307                       (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                  Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
                                  Strength

 ASTM A 36/A 36M                  (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                  Structural Steel

 ASTM A 48/A 48M                  (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for
                                  Gray Iron Castings

 ASTM A 53/A 53M                  (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
                                  Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
                                  Welded and Seamless

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                  Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                  the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM A 780/A 780M                (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of
                                  Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
                                  Galvanized Coatings

 ASTM A 924/A 924M                (2010) Standard Specification for General
                                  Requirements for Steel Sheet,
                                  Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process


                          SECTION 08 33 23   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



 ASTM D 2000                        (2008) Standard Classification System for
                                    Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

 ASTM E 330                         (2002) Structural Performance of Exterior
                                    Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain
                                    Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
                                    Difference

 ASTM F 568M                        (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                    and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
                                    Fasteners

            NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

 NEMA ICS 2                         (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for
                                    Industrial Control and Systems:
                                    Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
                                    Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC
                                    or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect
                                    Devices for Use in Industrial Control
                                    Equipment

 NEMA ICS 6                         (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial
                                    Controls and Systems Enclosures

 NEMA MG 1                          (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
                                    and Generators

 NEMA ST 1                          (1988; R 1997) Standard for Specialty
                                    Transformers (Except General Purpose Type)

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 70                            (2011) National Electrical Code

1.2     DESCRIPTION

 Overhead coiling doors to be counterbalanced doors by methods of
 manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical
 torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring
 barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or
 self-lubricating bearings for rotating members. Doors to be coiling type,
 with interlocking slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides,
 hood, and operating mechanisms, and designed for use on openings as
 indicated.

1.3     PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1     Wind Loading

 Design and fabricate door assembly to withstand the wind loading pressure
 of at least 20 pounds per square foot (for overhead door 625 series) with a
 maximum deflection of 1/120 of the opening width. Provide test data
 showing compliance with ASTM E 330. Sound engineering principles may be
 used to interpolate or extrapolate test results to door sizes not
 specifically tested Complete assembly must meet or exceed the requirements
 of ASCE 7-05.



                             SECTION 08 33 23   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


1.3.2     Operational Cycle Life

 All portions of the door, hardware and operating mechanism that are subject
 to movement, wear, or stress fatigue must be designed to operate through a
 minimum number of 10 cycles per day. One complete cycle of door operation
 is defined as when the door is in the closed position, moves to the fully
 open position, and returns to the closed position.

1.4     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Provide fabrication drawings that show complete assembly with
            hardware and framing details for the following items:

            Overhead Coiling Doors; G

            Counterbalancing Mechanism; G

            Electric Door Operators; G

            Bottom Bar; G

            Guides; G

            Mounting Brackets; G

            Overhead Drum; G

            Hood; G

            Factory Finish; G

            Submit Installation Drawings in accordance with paragraph
            entitled, "Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies," of this section.

        SD-03 Product Data

            Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items listing
            all accessories including supports, locks and latches, and weather
            stripping.

            Overhead Coiling Doors

            Hardware

            Counterbalancing Mechanism

            Electric Door Operators

        SD-05 Design Data

            Submit equipment and performance data for the following items in


                               SECTION 08 33 23   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Performance
          Requirements," of this section.

          Overhead Coiling Doors

          Hardware

          Counterbalancing Mechanism

          Electric Door Operators

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door
          Assemblies , including the following items:

          Materials

          Devices

          Procedures

          Manufacture's Brochures

          Parts Lists

          Cleaning

1.5   OVERHEAD COILING DOOR DETAIL SHOP DRAWINGS

 Provide installation drawings for overhead coiling door assemblies which
 show elevations of each door type, shape and thickness of materials,
 finishes, details of joints and connections, and details of guides and
 fittings, rough opening dimensions, location and description of hardware,
 anchorage locations, and counterbalancing mechanism and door operator
 details. Show locations of replaceable fusible links wiring diagrams for
 power, signal and controls. Include a schedule showing the location of
 each door with the drawings.

 Contractor must submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30
 calendar days prior to testing the Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies.
 Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days
 prior to contract completion.

 Provide operation and maintenance manuals which are consistent with
 manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
 general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Provide test data
 that is legible and of good quality.

1.6   WARRANTY, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

 Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door
 Assemblies, including the following items:

      Materials

      Devices

      Electric Door Operators


                           SECTION 08 33 23   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


         Hood

         Counterbalancing Mechanism

         Factory Finish

         Procedures

         Manufacture's Brochures

         Parts Lists

 Contractor must furnish a written guarantee that the helical spring and
 counterbalance mechanism are free from defects in material and workmanship
 and that they will remain so for not less than two years after completion
 and acceptance of the project.

 Contractor must warrant that upon notification by the Government, he will
 immediately make good any defects in material, workmanship, and door
 operation within the same time period covered by the guarantee, at no cost
 to the Government.

1.7     DELIVERY AND STORAGE

 Delivered doors to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering with the
 brands and names clearly marked thereon. Store doors in a dry location
 that is adequately ventilated and free from dirt and dust, water, and other
 contaminants, and in a manner that permits easy access for inspection and
 handling.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

2.1.1     Curtain Materials and Construction

 Provide curtain slats which are fabricated from steel sheets conforming to
 ASTM A 653/A 653M, Grade A, with the additional requirement of a minimum
 yield point of 33,000 psi. Provide sheets which are galvanized in
 accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.

 Fabricate doors from interlocking cold-rolled slats, with section profiles
 as specified, designed to withstand the specified wind loading. Provide
 slats which are continuous without splices for the width of the door.

 Provide slats filled with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation
 complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and
 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enlose insulation completely
 within slat faces on interior surface of slats.

2.1.2     Curtain Bottom Bar

 Curtain bottom bars must be pairs of angles from the manufacturer's
 standard steel, stainless and aluminum extrusions not less than 2.0 by 2.0
 inches by 0.188 inch. Steel extrusions must conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M.
 Stainless steel extrusions conforming to ASTM A 666, Type 304. Aluminum
 extrusions conforming to ASTM B 221 or(ASTM B 221M). Galvanize angles and
 fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.
 Coat welds and abrasions with paint conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M.


                               SECTION 08 33 23   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.1.3    Locks

 Provide end and/or wind locks of cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M,
 Grade B; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 153/A 153M
 and ASTM A 924/A 924M and secured at every other curtain slat.

2.1.4    Weather Stripping

 Weather-stripping at the door-head and jamb must be 1/8-inch thick sheet
 of natural or neoprene rubber with air baffles, secured to the insides of
 hoods with galvanized-steel fasteners through continuous galvanized-steel
 pressure bars at least 5/8-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick.

 Threshold weather-stripping must be 1/8-inch thick sheet natural or
 neoprene rubber secured to the bottom bars.

 Provide weather-stripping of natural or neoprene rubber conforming to
 ASTM D 2000.

2.1.5    Locking Devices

 Slide Bolt to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock,
 located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

2.1.6    Safety Interlock

 Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power
 supply when door is locked.

2.1.7     Overhead Drum

 Fabricate drums from nominal 0.028-inch thick, hot-dip galvanized steel
 sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

2.2     HARDWARE

 All hardware must conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 307, ASTM F 568M,
 and ASTM A 27/A 27M.

2.2.1    Guides

 Fabricate curtain jamb guides from the manufacturer's standard angles or
 channels of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise
 indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow
 curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for
 track adjustment.

2.2.2    Equipment Supports

 Fabricate door-operating equipment supports from the manufacturer's
 standard steel shapes and plates conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, galvanized
 in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Size the
 shapes and plates in accordance with the industry standards for the size,
 weight, and type of door installation..

2.3     COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

 Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an


                              SECTION 08 33 23   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel
 shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with
 barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or self-lubricating bearings for rotating
 members.

2.3.1    Brackets

 Provide the manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron
 or cold-rolled steel with one located at each end of the counterbalance
 barrel conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M.

2.3.2    Counterbalance Barrels

 Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,
 structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, conforming to
 ASTM A 53/A 53M, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support
 rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel
 deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load.

2.3.3    Spring Balance

 One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs
 installed within the barrel capable of producing sufficient torque to
 assure easy operation of the door curtain. Provide and size springs to
 counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
 outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel
 barrel plugs.

2.3.4    Torsion Rod for Counter Balance

 Fabricate rod from the manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to
 hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

2.5     ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

 Provide electrical wiring and door operating controls conforming to the
 applicable requirements of NFPA 70.

 Electric door-operator assemblies must be the sizes and capacities
 recommended and provided by the door manufacturer for specified doors.
 Assemblies must be complete with electric motors and factory-prewired motor
 controls, starter, gear reduction units, solenoid-operated brakes, clutch,
 remote-control stations, manual or automatic control devices, and
 accessories as required for proper operation of the doors.

 Design the operators so that motors may be removed without disturbing the
 limit-switch adjustment and affecting the emergency auxiliary operators.

 Provide a manual operator of crank-gear or chain-gear mechanisms with a
 release clutch to permit manual operation of doors in case of power
 failure. Arrange the emergency manual operator so that it may be put into
 and out of operation from floor level, and its use will not affect the
 adjustment of the limit switches. Provide an electrical or mechanical
 device which will automatically disconnect the motor from the operating
 mechanism when the emergency manual operating mechanism is engaged.

2.5.1    Door-Operator Types

 Provide an operator which is mounted to the right or left door head plate


                               SECTION 08 33 23   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 with the operator on coil side of the door-hood assembly and connected to
 the door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Front clearance is
 required for this type of mounting.

2.4   Electric Motors

 Provide motors which are the high-starting-torque, reversible,
 constant-duty electrical type with overload protection of sufficient torque
 and horsepower to move the door in either direction from any position and
 produce a door-travel speed of not less than 8 nor more than 12 inches per
 second without exceeding thehorsepower rating.

 Provide motors which conform to NEMA MG 1 designation, temperature rating,
 service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency to the requirements
 specified.

2.5   Motor Bearings

 Bearings must be bronze-sleeve or heavy-duty ball or roller antifriction
 type with full provisions for the type of thrust imposed by the specific
 duty load.

 Pre-lubricate and factory seal bearings in motors less than 1/2 horsepower.

 Equip motors coupled to worm-gear reduction units with either ball or
 roller bearings.

 Equip bearings in motors 1/2 horsepower or larger with lubrication service
 fittings. Fit lubrication fittings with color-coded plastic or metal dust
 caps.

 In any motor, bearings that are lubricated at the factory for extended duty
 periods do not need to be lubricated for a given number of operating
 hours. Display this information on an appropriate tag or label on the
 motor with instructions for lubrication cycle maintenance.

2.6   Motor Starters, Controls, and Enclosures

 Each door motor must have a factory-wired, unfused, disconnect switch; a
 reversing, across-the-line magnetic starter with thermal overload
 protection; 120-volt operating coils with a control transformer limit
 switch; and a safety interlock assembled in a NEMA ICS 6 type enclosure as
 specified herein. Control equipment must conform to NEMA ICS 2.

 Provide adjustable switches, electrically interlocked with the motor
 controls and set to stop the door automatically at the fully open and fully
 closed position.

2.7   Control Enclosures

 Provide control enclosures that conform to NEMA ICS 6 for general purpose
 NEMA Type 1.

2.8   Transformer

 Provide starters with 230/460 to 115 volt control transformers with one
 secondary fuse when it is required to reduce the voltage on control
 circuits to 120 volts or less. Provide transformer that conforms to
 NEMA ST 1.


                           SECTION 08 33 23   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.9    Safety-Edge Device

 Provide each door with a pneumatic safety device extending the full width
 of the door and located within a U-section neoprene or rubber astragal
 mounted on the bottom rail of the bottom door section. Device must
 immediately stop and reverse the door upon contact with an obstruction in
 the door opening during downward travel and cause the door to return to
 full-open position. Safety device is not a substitute for a limit switch.

 Connect safety device to the control circuit through a retracting safety
 cord and reel.

2.10    Remote-Control Stations

 Provide interior remote control stations which are full-guarded,
 momentary-contact three-button, heavy-duty, surface-mounted NEMA ICS 6 type
 enclosures as specified. Mark buttons "OPEN," "CLOSE," and "STOP." The
 "CLOSE" button must be the type requiring a constant pressure to maintain
 the closing motion of the door. When the door is in motion and the "STOP"
 button is pressed, the door must stop instantly and remain in the stopped
 position; from the stopped position, the door may then be operated in
 either direction.

2.11    Speed-Reduction Units

 Provide speed-reduction units consisting of hardened-steel worm and bronze
 worm gear assemblies running in oil or grease and encased in a sealed
 casing, coupled to the motor through a flexible coupling. Drive shafts
 must rotate on ball- or roller-bearing assemblies that are integral with
 the unit.

 Provide minimum ratings of speed reduction units which are in accordance
 with AGMA provisions for class of service.

 Ground worm gears to provide accurate thread form; machine teeth for all
 other types of gearing. Surface harden all gears.

 Provide bearings which are the antifriction type equipped with oil seals.

2.12    Chain Drives

 Provide roller chains that are power-transmission series steel roller type
 conforming to ASME B29.400, with a minimum safety factor of 10 times the
 design load.

 Roller-chain side bars, rollers, pins, and bushings must be heat-treated or
 otherwise hardened.

 Provide chain sprockets that are high-carbon steel with machine-cut
 hardened teeth, finished bore and keyseat, and hollow-head setscrews.

2.13    Brakes

 Provide brakes which are 360-degree shoe brakes or shoe and drum brakes,
 solenoid-operated and electrically interlocked to the control circuit to
 set automatically when power is interrupted.




                            SECTION 08 33 23   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.14     Clutches

 Clutches must be the 4-inch diameter, multiple face, externally adjustable
 friction type or adjustable centrifugal type.

2.15     SURFACE FINISHING

 Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
 Products" for recommendations for applying and designating factory applied
 finishes. Noticeable variations in the same metal component are not
 acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are
 acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are
 assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL

 Install overhead coiling door assembly, anchors and inserts for guides,
 brackets, motors, switches, hardware, and other accessories in accordance
 with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
 Upon completion of installation, doors must be free from all distortion.

 Install overhead coiling doors, motors, hoods, and operators at the
 mounting locations as indicated for each door in the contract documents and
 as required by the manufacturer.

 Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible
 routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility and as
 required by the manufacturer.

3.2     ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS

 After installation, adjust hardware and moving parts. Lubricate bearings
 and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer to provide smooth
 operating functions for ease movement, free of warping, twisting, or
 distortion of the door assembly.

 Adjust seals to provide weather-tight fit around entire perimeter.

 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup
 service and checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

 Test the door opening and closing operation when activated by controls or
 alarm-connected fire-release system. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace
 damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Reset door-closing
 mechanism after successful test.

 Test and make final adjustment of new doors at no additional cost to the
 Government.

3.2.1     Maintenance and Adjustment

 Not more than 90 calendar days after completion and acceptance of the
 project, the Contractor must examine, lubricate, test, and re-adjust doors
 as required for proper operation.




                             SECTION 08 33 23   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.2.2   CLEANING

 Clean aluminum doors in accordance with manufacturer's approved
 instructions.

        -- End of Section --




                          SECTION 08 33 23   Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022




                              SECTION 08 34 01

                      FORCED ENTRY RESISTANT COMPONENTS
                                    08/09

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS D1.1/D1.1M                   (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM C 1036                      (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
                                  Glass

 ASTM C 1048                      (2004) Standard Specification for
                                  Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
                                  Coated and Uncoated Glass

 ASTM C 1172                      (2009) Standard Specification for
                                  Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

 ASTM D 1003                      (2007e1) Haze and Luminous Transmittance
                                  of Transparent Plastics

 ASTM D 1044                      (2008) Resistance of Transparent Plastics
                                  to Surface Abrasion

 ASTM D 3951                      (1998; R 2004) Commercial Packaging

 ASTM D 4093                      (1995; R 2005e1) Photoelastic Measurements
                                  of Birefringence and Residual Strains in
                                  Transparent or Translucent Plastic
                                  Materials

 ASTM D 905                       (2008e1) Strength Properties of Adhesive
                                  Bonds in Shear by Compression Loading

 ASTM E 1300                      (2009a) Determining Load Resistance of
                                  Glass in Buildings

 ASTM E 90                        (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory
                                  Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
                                  Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

 ASTM F 428                       (2009) Intensity of Scratches on Aerospace
                                  Glass Enclosures

 ASTM F 520                       (1997; R 2004) Environmental Resistance of
                                  Aerospace Transparencies


                          SECTION 08 34 01   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



 ASTM F 521                         (1983; R 2004) Bond Integrity of
                                    Transparent Laminates

 ASTM F 548                         (2009) Intensity of Scratches on Aerospace
                                    Transparent Plastics

 ASTM F 735                         (2006) Abrasion Resistance of Transparent
                                    Plastics and Coatings Using the
                                    Oscillating Sand Method

            BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

 ANSI/BHMA A156.1                   (2006) Butts and Hinges

 ANSI/BHMA A156.115                 (2006) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors
                                    and Steel Frames

 ANSI/BHMA A156.13                  (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000

 ANSI/BHMA A156.18                  (2006) Materials and Finishes

 ANSI/BHMA A156.4                   (2008) Door Controls - Closers

 ANSI/BHMA A156.5                   (2001) Auxiliary Locks and Associated
                                    Products

 ANSI/BHMA A156.8                   (2005) Door Controls - Overhead Stops and
                                    Holders

            GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

 GANA Glazing Manual                (2004) Glazing Manual

            NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

 NAAMM HMMA 801                     (2005) Glossary of Terms for Hollow Metal
                                    Doors and Frames

 NAAMM HMMA 802                     (1992) Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors
                                    and Frames

 NAAMM HMMA 810                     (1987) Hollow Metal Doors

 NAAMM HMMA 820                     (1987) Hollow Metal Frames

 NAAMM HMMA 830                     (2002) Hardware Selection    for Hollow
                                    Metal Doors and Frames

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 80                            (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
                                    and Other Opening Protectives

 NFPA 80A                           (2007) Recommended Practice for Protection
                                    of Buildings from Exterior Fire Exposures




                            SECTION 08 34 01   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


             UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 10B                              (2008; Rev thru Apr 2009) Fire Tests of
                                     Door Assemblies

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1     General Requirements

 Components covered in this specification are designed to resist forced
 entry attacks with increasing severity levels of hand, power, and thermal
 tools and weapons and explosives. The components include forced entry
 resistant personnel door/frame assemblies. Each type of forced entry
 resistant component shall be a complete assembly produced by a single
 manufacturer. Movable and operable components shall operate smoothly and
 freely. Items for exterior installation shall be designed to resist water
 and vapor penetration or entrapment. Submit manufacturer's descriptive
 data, installation instructions, and certificate and test report showing
 compliance with the specified forced entry test standard as specified in
 paragraph COMPONENT TEST REQUIREMENTS for all components. Following
 approval of manufacturer's descriptive data, submit a schedule listing the
 items and components to be furnished. Manufacturer's certificate shall be
 submitted indicating that compliance with the installation instructions and
 drawings will provide the specified degree of forced entry resistance.

1.2.2     Other Submittal Requirements

 The following shall be submitted:

        a.   Manufacturer's descriptive data and finish samples.

        b. The forced entry resistant door lock functions, for selection by
        the Contracting Officer.

        c.   Airflow calculations for louvers.

        d. Manufacturer's certificates attesting that components conform to
        the requirements on drawings and in specifications.

        e. Testing reports from independent testing laboratories indicating
        conformance to regulatory requirements.

        f.   Certificate, in lieu of a label, for fire rated doors.

        g. Certificate indicating compliance with the requirements for doors
        of the type and fire rating class.

        h. Manufacturer certification that compliance with the installation
        instructions and/or drawings will provide the specified degree of
        forced entry resistance.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:



                              SECTION 08 34 01   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Installation; G

      SD-03 Product Data

          Forced Entry Resistant Components
          Installation
          Components

      SD-07 Certificates

          Forced Entry Resistant Components

1.4   QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Qualify welding procedures, welders, and welding operators in accordance
 with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Forced entry resistant components shall be certified
 as resistant to the forced entry test standards indicated herein. Forced
 entry resistant components shall be tested as specified below. The test
 results and certification thereof shall be approved by the Contracting
 Officer before delivery of the component to the job site.

 Class 5-V- Vault Door: Shall be resistant to 20 man-hours surreptitious
 entry, 30 man-minutes covert and 10 man-minutes forced entry.

1.5   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver Components to the job site with the manufacturer's name, and model
 number clearly marked thereon. Components shall be delivered, stored, and
 handled so as not to be damaged or deformed and shall be in accordance with
 ASTM D 3951. Components shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to
 the faces, edges, corners, ends, and glazing where applicable. Abraded,
 scarred, or rusty areas shall be cleaned, repaired, or replaced immediately
 upon detection of the damage. Replace damaged components that cannot be
 restored. Components and equipment shall be stored in a dry location on
 platforms or pallets that are ventilated adequately, free of dust, water,
 and other contaminants, and stored in a manner which permits easy access
 for inspection and handling. Submit lists including schedule of components
 to be incorporated in the work with manufacturer's model or catalog
 numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information,
 threat level designated, and number of items provided. Listing of similar
 products that have been satisfactorily in use for two years or more,
 including name of purchasers, locations of installations, dates of
 installations, and service organizations.

1.6   SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

 When testing of a previously untested component is specified, allow
 sufficient lead time so that testing will not delay construction. The test
 results and component shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before
 delivery of the component to the job site.

1.7   WARRANTY

 Manufacturer's warranty for 5 years shall be furnished for glazing
 materials. Warranty shall provide for replacement and installation of
 glazing if delamination, discoloration, or cracking or crazing occurs.



                            SECTION 08 34 01   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     COMPONENTS

 Each type of forced entry resistant component shall be the standard product
 of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and
 shall duplicate items that have been tested and approved in accordance with
 the forced entry test standard specified in paragraph COMPONENT TEST
 REQUIREMENTS.

2.2     FORCED ENTRY RESISTANT PERSONNEL DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES

 Doors and frames shall be factory fabricated assemblies of indicated
 sizes. Doors shall be of steel, hardened steel, or be reinforced
 internally with steel shapes and clad with aluminum. Interior composition
 and reinforcement shall be determined by the manufacturer. Rubber
 silencers shall be installed on door frames. Exterior doors shall have top
 edges closed flush and sealed against water penetration, be insulated, and
 provided with weatherstripping and thresholds. Locks and hinges shall be
 the same or equal in performance and number as the hardware used on the
 tested door. Lock and hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer as a
 complete assembly. Frames shall be furnished by the door fabricator, with
 anchorage to wall construction completely specified as to number of
 anchors, anchor size, material, and length.

2.2.1     Fire Rated Doors

 Provide fire rated doors at locations indicated. Door assemblies shall
 comply with the forced entry test standard specified and shall bear the
 listing identification label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or a
 nationally recognized testing laboratory that is qualified to perform tests
 of fire door assemblies in accordance with UL 10B, and that has a listing
 service for the tested assemblies. Door assemblies include door, hardware,
 frame, closers, and glazing. A certificate indicating that the units were
 inspected in accordance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 80Amay be furnished in lieu
 of label. For oversized doors, a certificate from Underwriters'
 Laboratories, Inc. or a nationally recognized testing laboratory may be
 furnished in lieu of label. The certificate shall state that oversized
 doors are manufactured in compliance with the requirements for doors of the
 type and fire rating class. Manufacturer's descriptive data shall be
 submitted.

2.2.2     Sound Rated Doors

 Provide sound rated doors at locations indicated. Door assemblies shall
 comply with the forced entry test standard specified and shall consist of
 door, hardware, frame, threshold, and adjustable gaskets. The assembly
 shall have a laboratory Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating as indicated
 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90. Submit manufacturer's
 descriptive data, test report, and certification of the test report showing
 compliance with the specified requirements.

2.2.3     Door and Frame Fabrication

 The subsurfaces shall be flat, parallel, and plumb after fabrication.
 Doors shall be reinforced in accordance with manufacturer's design. Door
 frames shall be anchored as specified by the door manufacturer. Coordinate
 the door manufacturer's requirements for welding to wall reinforcement or
 casting frame embedments into wall before wall is placed. Steel door


                              SECTION 08 34 01   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 frames shall be mitered or coped and welded at the corners with welds
 ground smooth. Where structural channel frames are used the size, weight,
 stops, welding, and anchorage into surrounding construction shall be
 specified and tested along with the door as an assembly. Any necessary
 reinforcements in the door and the frame shall be made in the factory.
 Door and frame shall be drilled and tapped as required for the specified
 hardware. Frame channels shall be mitered or coped and welded at corners
 with full penetration groove welds. Exposed welds shall be dressed
 smooth. Hollow metal doors and frames shall be manufactured in accordance
 with NAAMM HMMA 801, NAAMM HMMA 802, NAAMM HMMA 810, and NAAMM HMMA 820 as
 a standard of quality, and shall meet the specified forced entry testing
 standard.

2.2.4     Door Glazing

 For glazing in door, stop height and rabbet depth shall be as required to
 accommodate the glazing material that is resistant to the forced entry test
 standard specified. The assembly shall be tested with the specified
 glazing and stops installed. Exterior (attack side) glazing stops shall be
 welded or integral to the frame. Interior (protected side) glazing stops
 shall be removable stops attached with high-strength alloy steel machine
 screws with tamper-resistant heads or as required by the manufacturer.
 Glazing is specified in paragraph Forced Entry Resistant Glazing Materials.

2.2.5     Preparation for Hardware

 Prepare doors and frames for hardware in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 830.
 Surface applied hardware shall be drilled and tapped in the field.

2.2.6     Hardware

 Hardware for forced entry resistant door assemblies shall be provided by
 the door assembly manufacturer to ensure a complete forced entry resistant
 assembly. Where test standard requires hardware to be tested with the door
 assembly, locks and hinges shall be included in the labeling and/or test
 certification. Locks and hinges shall be the same or equal in performance,
 quality, grade, and quantity as used on the successfully tested door
 assembly in accordance with the specified forced entry testing standard.
 Provide certification that the locks, latches, and hinges provide the same
 degree of forced entry resistance as required by the specified forced entry
 testing standard. Keying shall be as specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR
 HARDWARE.

2.2.6.1     Locks and Latchsets

 The door manufacturer shall submit available lock functions for selection
 of function by the Contracting Officer. Mortise lock and latchsets shall
 be, as a minimum, series 1000, operational Grade 1, Security Grade 1 or 1A,
 and shall conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.13. Strikes for mortise locks and
 latches (including deadbolt locks), as a minimum, shall conform to
 ANSI/BHMA A156.115 except strikes shall be rectangular (without curved
 lip). Mortise-type locks and latches for doors 1-3/4 inches thick and over
 shall have adjustable bevel fronts or otherwise conform to the shape of the
 door. Mortise locks shall have armored fronts. Mortise locks and latches
 shall have full escutcheon, through-bolted, extruded stainless steel trim.
 Lock finish shall be 630 in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.18.




                             SECTION 08 34 01   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2.6.2     Hinges

 Steel doors and frames required to resist the "very low" or "low" threat
 severity level that are up to and including 7 feet 0 inches high shall, as
 a minimum, be equipped with three Grade 1 hinges in accordance with
 ANSI/BHMA A156.1, minimum size 5 inches high, heavy, double, or triple
 weight as required for weight of door. For each additional 12 inches of
 door height beyond 7 feet 0 inches, provide a minimum of one more hinge.
 Hinges shall be full mortise, half mortise, full surface, or half surface
 design as recommended by the manufacturer for frame and door design and
 shall be tamperproof unless mounted on the protected side of the door.
 Hinges shall have nonremovable pins. Spot welding of hinge pin will not be
 acceptable. Provide hinge manufacturer's certification that the hinge
 supplied meets applicable test requirements for ANSI/BHMA A156.1 type
 number of hinge specified and that the hinge is suitable for the size and
 weight of the door assembly on which it will be utilized. Continuous extra
 heavy-duty piano-type hinge sized to carry the weight of the door without
 sagging is permitted. If continuous piano-type hinges are provided with
 the door, independent laboratory reports covering both the door weight
 capacity and a 2,500,000 cycle testing to match the ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Grade
 1 requirements shall be furnished by the Contractor. Interior door hinges
 shall be furnished in prime coated steel. Exterior door hinges shall be
 furnished in nonferrous metal or stainless steel.

2.2.6.3     Electric Strikes

 Where required, provide electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.5
 Grade 1. Furnish strike boxes with deadbolt and latch strikes for Grade
 1. Strikes shall be fail secure.

2.2.6.4     Door Closers

 Closers shall be extra heavy duty of size and type recommended by the
 manufacturer and shall be Grade 1 conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4. Door
 closer finish shall be 600 in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.18.

2.2.6.5     Door Stops and Holders

 Door stops and holders shall be extra heavy duty, conforming to
 ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Type C08511 overhead surface mounted type.

2.2.7     Frame Anchors

 Provide jamb and head anchors with door/frame assembly as specified by the
 manufacturer and forced entry resistant to the same degree as the
 component. Coordinate concrete work with component manufacturers when the
 manufacturer specifies frame anchors to be embedded into a concrete or
 concrete masonry unit surface during construction.

2.2.8     Weatherstripping

 Provide head and jambs of exterior doors with compression-type neoprene
 bulb or closed-cell neoprene adjustable type weatherstripping. Door stops
 shall be weatherstripped with a surface-mounted sponge neoprene strip in
 bronze housing not less than 0.070 inch thick installed to make contact
 with the door. Install weatherstripping in conformance with the
 manufacturer's directions after completion of finish painting.




                               SECTION 08 34 01   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3     Forced Entry Resistant Glazing Material

 Glazing material shall be glass, and shall conform to applicable
 requirements ASTM C 1036, ASTM E 1300, and ASTM C 1048. Glazing materials
 shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of the following
 test procedures: ASTM D 905, ASTM D 1003, ASTM F 428, ASTM F 548,
 ASTM D 4093, and ASTM F 520. Plastic glazing shall be acrylic plastic
 sheets, polycarbonate plastic sheets, or approved equal. Plastic glazing
 shall be smooth and clear on both sides. Glazing material shall be factory
 installed. Factory-glazed components shall be covered to protect them from
 damage during adjacent finish work.

2.3.1     Laminated Glass

 Laminated glass shall be all glass laminated construction conforming to
 applicable sections of ASTM C 1172. The adhesive interlayer material for
 bonding glass to glass shall be chemically compatible with surfaces which
 are to be bonded. Materials selected for lamination purposes shall be
 tested in accordance with the following testing procedures: ASTM D 905,
 ASTM D 1044, ASTM F 735, ASTM D 4093, ASTM F 521, ASTM F 520, and
 ASTM D 1003. Glass plies used in the lamination shall be annealed float
 glass conforming to Type I, quality q3, Class 1, ASTM C 1036 or
 heat-strengthened or fully heat-tempered float glass, Condition A, Type I,
 quality q3, Class 1, ASTM C 1048.

2.3.2     Glass/Plastic Laminate Glazing

 Glass/plastic laminated glazing materials shall be glass/plastic laminated
 construction or glass-clad plastic "sandwich" construction conforming to
 applicable sections of ASTM C 1172.

2.3.3     Glass/Plastic Air-Gap Glazing

 Forced entry resistant glass/plastic air-gap glazing shall consist of an
 assembly in which glass forms the exterior and interior (protected side)
 layer, separated by an air space from the laminated plastic plies. Glass
 plies shall be annealed float glass conforming to Type I, quality q3, Class
 1, ASTM C 1036 or heat-strengthened or fully heat-tempered float glass,
 Condition A, Type I, quality q3, Class 1, ASTM C 1048. Plastic plies shall
 consist of laminated ultraviolet stabilized polycarbonate sheets,
 conforming to paragraph Polycarbonate Plastic Sheets and/or acrylic sheets
 for use "as cast" and in stretching operations with improved moisture
 absorption resistance conforming to paragraph Acrylic Plastic Sheets.

2.4     Adhesive Interlayer Materials

 Adhesive interlayer material for bonding laminates (glass-glass,
 glass-plastic, or plastic-plastic bonds) shall be chemically compatible
 with the surfaces bonded. Interlayer materials may be polyvinyl butyral,
 cast-in-place urethane, proprietary materials, sheet from urethane and
 other materials. Polyvinyl butyral shall not be used to bond
 polycarbonate. Adhesives shall conform to ASTM D 905 and the
 manufacturer's recommendations.

2.5     Sealants

 Sealants for glazings shall be chemically compatible with the glazing
 materials they are in contact with and shall have no deleterious effects to
 the glazing materials or to the adhesives used in glazing laminates.


                             SECTION 08 34 01     Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 Sealants shall conform to the glazing manufacturer's recommendations and
 the requirements of GANA Glazing Manual.

2.6     ACCESSORIES

 Provide accessories for the installation of components into the surrounding
 structure. Anchorage shall be forced entry resistant to the same degree as
 the component. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
 recommended instructions. Materials, parts, bolts, anchors, supports,
 braces, fasteners, and connections necessary for completion of the work.

2.7     LABELING

 Forced entry resistant components shall be plainly and permanently labeled
 as to the applicable forced entry test standard and level within the test
 standard under which the component was tested and approved. Label shall be
 visible only from the protected side after component installation and shall
 include the following information: (1) manufacturer's name or identifying
 symbol; (2) model number, control number, or equivalent; (3) date of
 manufacture with the week, month or quarter, and year (this may be
 abbreviated or be in a traceable code such as the lot number); (4) correct
 mounting position (by removable label); and (5) forced entry resistant
 rating by indicating the test standard, level within the test standard (if
 any), and minutes of attack time withstood (if variable in the standard).

2.8     SHOP/FACTORY FINISHING

 Unless otherwise specified, all factory or manufactured components shall be
 shop finished as indicated below.

2.8.1     Ferrous Metal

 Surfaces of ferrous metal, except galvanized and stainless steel surfaces,
 shall be cleaned and factory primed for painting. Finish painting shall be
 in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Prior to shop
 painting, clean surfaces with solvents to remove grease and oil and with
 power wire-brushing or sandblasting to remove loose rust, loose mill scale,
 and other foreign substances. Surfaces of items to be embedded in concrete
 shall not be shop painted.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     EXAMINATION

 Field verify dimensions of rough openings for components and that surfaces
 of openings are level, plumb, and provide required clearances. Components
 shall be examined for racking, twisting, and other malformation and
 corrected prior to installation. Replace damaged components that cannot be
 corrected. Protect surrounding work prior to installation of forced entry
 resistant components. Surrounding work, which is damaged as a result of
 the installation of forced entry resistant components, shall be repaired in
 an approved manner prior to acceptance. Protect glazed units from damage
 during adjacent work.

3.2     FABRICATION

 Components shall be constructed, assembled, welded, and equipped with all
 hardware and accessories required to complete the assembly in the shop of a
 competent fabricator.


                             SECTION 08 34 01   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



3.3   FASTENERS

 Fasteners exposed to view shall match in color and finish and shall
 harmonize with the material to which fasteners are applied. Holes for
 bolts and screws shall be drilled or neatly punched. Poor matching of
 holes shall be cause for rejection of the work. Fasteners shall be
 concealed where practicable. Unless otherwise specified, fasteners shall
 conform to Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.

3.4   CORROSION PROTECTION - DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

 Contact surfaces between dissimilar metals in contact with concrete,
 masonry, pressure-treated wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting
 shall be given a protective coating in accordance with Section 09 90 00
 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.5   INSTALLATION

 The finished work shall be free from defects. Components shall be
 installed plumb and level and secured rigidly in place. Components shall
 be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer's recommended
 instructions. Operable parts of components shall be tested for smooth
 operation in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Coordinate frame
 embedments into the construction where required by the component
 manufacturer. Materials which incur damage as a result of adjacent finish
 work shall be replaced or repaired as specified above. Window assemblies,
 which are not specified as factory glazed, shall have glazing installed in
 accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and the manufacturer's recommended
 instructions. Field glazing shall occur only after concrete, masonry,
 ceiling, electrical, mechanical, plumbing and adjacent finish work has been
 completed. The Contractor is responsible for proper installation of forced
 entry resistant door assemblies so that operating clearances and bearing
 surfaces conform to the manufacturer's instructions. The bottom of door
 frames shall be secured to the floor slab in accordance with the
 manufacturer's recommendations. Weatherstripping and thresholds shall be
 installed at exterior door openings to provide a weathertight
 installation. Submit Drawings showing (1) anchorage of components and
 appurtenances into the actual surrounding construction, (2) clearances for
 operation, and (3) hardware location and installation details. Submit
 complete drawings for forced entry resistant prefabricated guardhouses.
 Submit a copy of installation instructions and recommended cleaning and
 maintenance instructions.

3.6   MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

 The manufacturer shall provide the services of a manufacturer's
 representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and
 operation of the component specified. At the request of the Contracting
 Officer, the representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment,
 and operation (if operable) of the component. The representative shall be
 onsite 1 working days.

3.7   ADJUSTING/CLEANING

 Adjustments shall be made to assure smooth operation. Units shall be
 weathertight when closed and locked. All Components shall be cleaned in
 accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Only cleanser recommended by
 the manufacturer shall be used to clean polycarbonate, plastic, and applied


                           SECTION 08 34 01   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                        W912HN-11-R-0022


 hardcoats.

        -- End of Section --




                          SECTION 08 34 01   Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 08 39 54

                              BLAST RESISTANT DOORS
                                      08/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

 ABMA 11                            (1990; R 1999) Load Ratings and Fatigue
                                    Life for Roller Bearings

 ABMA 9                             (1990; R 2000) Load Ratings and Fatigue
                                    Life for Ball Bearings

            AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS A2.4                           (2007) Standard Symbols for Welding,
                                    Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

 AWS A5.4/A5.4M                     (2006) Stainless Steel Electrodes for
                                    Shielded Metal Arc Welding

 AWS D1.1/D1.1M                     (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel

 AWS D1.3/D1.3M                     (2008; Errata 2008) Structural Welding
                                    Code - Sheet Steel

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 307                         (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                    Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
                                    Strength

 ASTM A 325                         (2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
                                    120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

 ASTM A 354                         (2007a) Standard Specification for
                                    Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts,
                                    Studs, and Other Externally Threaded
                                    Fasteners

 ASTM A 449                         (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,
                                    Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
                                    120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
                                    General Use

 ASTM A 490                         (2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
                                    Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength


                            SECTION 08 39 54   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



 ASTM A 534                       (2004) Standard Specification for
                                  Carburizing Steels for Anti-Friction
                                  Bearings

 ASTM A 563                       (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                  and Alloy Steel Nuts

 ASTM A 574                       (2008) Standard Specification for Alloy
                                  Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws

 ASTM A 606/A 606M                (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
                                  Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
                                  Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                  Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                  the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM A 792/A 792M                (2010) Standard Specification for General
                                  Requirements for Steel Sheet,
                                  Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM E 283                       (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
                                  Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
                                  and Doors Under Specified Pressure
                                  Differences Across the Specimen

 ASTM F 436                       (2009) Hardened Steel Washers

 ASTM F 568M                      (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                  and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
                                  Fasteners

 ASTM F 835                       (2004e1) Alloy Steel Socket Button and
                                  Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screws

          BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

 BHMA A156.13                     (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000

 BHMA A156.3                      (2008) Exit Devices

 BHMA A156.4                      (2008) Door Controls - Closers

 BHMA A156.8                      (2005) Door Controls - Overhead Stops and
                                  Holders

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Provide a blast resistant door which fits a Door Description as follows:
 Hollow metal doors shall be flush mounted in frames. Doors shall be the
 manually operated, side hinged, swinging type. Each door assembly shall
 include the door, frame, anchors, hardware, and accessories and shall be
 provided by a single manufacturer. Frames and anchors shall be capable of
 transferring blast and rebound reactions to the adjacent supporting
 structure. Resistance to blast shall be demonstrated either by design


                           SECTION 08 39 54   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 calculations or tests on prototype door assemblies.

1.2.1     Design Requirements

1.2.1.1     Static Material Strength

 Obtain the static values for minimum yield strength (or yield point) and
 (ultimate) tensile strength for steel from the applicable material
 specification. For tensile strength specified in terms of a tensile
 strength range, the lowest tensile strength specified shall be selected for
 design. The expected yield stress for steel sheet and strip used in design
 shall be computed as 1.21 times the specified static yield point.

1.2.1.2     Dynamic Material Strength

 Compute the dynamic material strength by applying a dynamic increase factor
 that accounts for the increase in material strength due to strain rate
 effects.

1.2.1.3     Dynamic Analysis and Deformation

 Design the door using an equivalent single degree of freedom or other
 approved dynamic analysis method. The maximum door deformation shall be
 selected by the door manufacturer except that the maximum deformation in
 flexure shall not exceed the deformation limits specified or indicated.

1.2.1.4     Rebound Resistance

 Rebound resistance shall be the specified or indicated percentage of the
 door resistance at initial peak response.

1.2.2     Blast Effects

1.2.2.1     Overpressure

 The spatial distribution of overpressure shall be uniform unless otherwise
 specified or indicated. For overpressure specified or indicated without
 duration, the overpressure waveform shall have a zero rise time and
 infinite duration.

1.2.2.2     Overpressure Direction

 For overpressure identified as seating and for overpressure directions not
 otherwise specified or indicated, the positive phase overpressure shall be
 in the direction that causes the door to seat toward the frame.

1.2.2.3     Fragment Resistance

 For doors specified or indicated to resist fragments, design the door and
 the door and frame interface to prevent fragment perforation and the
 latches and latching mechanism shall be shielded from fragment damage. The
 fragment impact point shall be anywhere on the door and frame face exposed
 to overpressure.

1.2.3     Blast Door Operation

 Measure the force required to set the door in motion from the 90-degree
 open position, and measure the force required to engage and release the
 latches at the latch handle with the door in the normal closed position.


                                SECTION 08 39 54   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



1.3   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Installation; G

          Detailed fabrication and assembly drawings for special doors or
          standard doors with appreciable modifications, indicating the door
          location and showing dimensions, materials, fabrication methods,
          hardware, and accessories in sufficient detail to enable the
          Contracting Officer to check compliance with contract documents.
          These drawings need not be submitted for standard doors for which
          manufacturer's catalog data is submitted. Weld symbols used shall
          conform to AWS A2.4.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Door Description

            Data on standard blast doors consisting of catalog cuts,
          brochures, circulars, specifications, and product data that show
          complete dimensions and completely describe overpressure ratings,
          rebound ratings, doors, frames, anchors, hardware, and
          accessories. Manufacturer's instructions for installation and
          field testing.

          Design Requirements

            Detailed structural analysis and design calculations
          demonstrating resistance to blast when blast resistance is not
          demonstrated by prototype tests. Design calculations shall
          demonstrate adequacy under the blast effects specified or
          indicated. Include in the design calculations a sketch of the
          overpressure waveform; dimensioned sketches of blast resisting
          elements such as door members, frame members, latches, and hinges;
          section properties for blast resisting members including built-up
          sections; the standard under which steel is produced; static and
          dynamic material strength properties; the resistance, stiffness,
          mass, elastic natural period, and elastic deflection for flexural
          members; and the peak deflection, peak support rotation, and time
          to peak deflection for door members in flexure. Design
          calculations shall cover initial response, rebound, and all
          secondary items such as shear, welds, local buckling, web
          crippling, hinges, and latches.

          Manufacturer's Field Service

            Information describing training to be provided, training aids to
          be used, and background data on the personnel conducting the
          training.

      SD-06 Test Reports


                             SECTION 08 39 54   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



          Tests
          Tests, Inspections, and Verifications

            Shop and field operating test reports that include values for
          opening and closing forces and times, forces required to operate
          latches, and a description of all operating tests performed.

          Fire Rating Test and Inspection

            A letter may be submitted by the testing laboratory (in lieu of
          a UL listing for fire door assemblies) which identifies the
          submitted product by manufacturer and type or model and certifies
          that it has tested a sample assembly and issued a current listing.

          Prototype Static Test
          Prototype Blast Test

            Certified test reports demonstrating blast resistance. Include
          in the test reports the name and location of the testing agency or
          laboratory, a description of the testing apparatus, the date of
          the tests, a description of the door specimen tested, descriptions
          of loadings, the value of measured peak door deflection and peak
          permanent set and analysis and interpretation of test results.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Materials

            Steel mill reports covering the number, chemical composition,
          and tension properties for structural quality steels. When blast
          resistance is demonstrated by calculations, a certificate stating
          that the door assembly provided was manufactured using the same
          materials, dimensions, and tolerances shown in the calculations.
          When blast resistance is demonstrated by prototype testing, a
          certificate stating that door and frame provided was manufactured
          using the same materials, dimensions, and tolerances as the tested
          prototype and listing the hardware and frame anchors required to
          achieve blast resistance. Each certificate shall be signed by an
          official authorized to certify in behalf of the manufacturer and
          shall identify the door assembly and date of shipment or delivery
          to which the certificate applies.

            Certification or test report for thermal insulated doors listing
          the type of hardware used to achieve the rating.

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Door Description

            Information bound in manual form consisting of manufacturer's
          safety precautions, preventative maintenance and schedules,
          troubleshooting procedures, special tools, parts list, and spare
          parts data. All material shall be cross referenced to the door
          designations shown on the drawings.

1.4   QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Welders, welding operators, and weld inspectors shall be qualified in


                             SECTION 08 39 54   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M except that welders performing arc welding
 of steel sheet and strip shall be qualified in accordance with
 AWS D1.3/D1.3M.

1.5     DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING

 Store door assemblies, delivered and placed in storage, with protection
 from weather and dirt, dust, and contaminants.

1.6     WARRANTY

 Furnish manufacturer's written warranty covering the blast door assembly
 for 2 years after acceptance by the Government. Warranty shall provide for
 repair and replacement of the blast door assembly and individual hardware
 and accessory items in the event of malfunction due to defects in design,
 materials, and workmanship except that the warranty need not cover finishes
 provided by others.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

 Only structural quality steel materials, for which tension properties have
 been obtained, shall be used to resist blast except that commercial quality
 steel sheet and strip shall be permitted for prototype tested hollow metal
 doors. Select steel used in the door, door frame, and door frame anchors,
 and non stainless steel fasteners that resist blast, from the materials
 specified.

2.1.1     Steel Sheet and Strip

 Steel sheet and strip shall conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Type A, B, and C;
 ASTM A 653/A 653M; ASTM A 606/A 606M; or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Grades 33, 37,
 40, and 50.

2.1.2     Fasteners

 Steel studs and bolts shall conform to ASTM A 307, ASTM A 325, ASTM A 354,
 ASTM A 449, or ASTM A 490 as applicable. Steel nuts shall conform to
 ASTM A 563. Hardened circular, beveled, and clipped washers shall conform
 to ASTM F 436. Steel hex cap screws shall conform to ASTM F 568M. Steel
 socket-headed cap screws shall conform to ASTM A 574. Steel button and
 flat-headed countersunk cap screws shall conform to ASTM F 835.

2.2     HARDWARE

2.2.1     General Requirements

 Hinges shall be specially manufactured to support the door and to resist
 blast induced loading. The number of hinges shall be determined by the
 blast door manufacturer. Welds used in hinges shall be continuous. Attach
 hinges to the door and frame using mechanical fasteners, except that full
 surface hinges for doors with locks shall be attached to the door and frame
 by welding or approved tamper-resistant mechanical fasteners and hinges for
 doors with locks shall have approved nonremovable pins. Load ratings and
 fatigue life for ball and roller bearings shall be determined in accordance
 with ABMA 9 and ABMA 11 as applicable and, unless otherwise approved, the
 bearing steel shall conform to ASTM A 534. Hinges shall be capable of
 operating for the minimum number of cycles specified without failure or


                             SECTION 08 39 54   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 excessive wear under the door service loads where one cycle consists of
 swinging the door back and forth between the normal closed position and the
 90-degree open position, where failure or excessive wear means that the
 latches do not seat properly or the door does not swing smoothly due to
 hinge failure or wear, and where door service loads consist of the door
 weight plus any loads produced by hardware. Rolling bearings shall be
 factory grease lubricated and either sealed or provided with easily
 accessible lubrication fittings.

2.2.1.1     Hinge Description

 Hinge Type 1 shall be capable of smooth operation for a minimum of 250,000
 cycles. This type of hinge shall be provided with structural quality steel
 pins and leafs and either rolling bearings in both the thrust and radial
 directions or hardened steel washer (disc) thrust bearings and rolling
 radial bearings except that rolling thrust bearings and metallic journal
 radial bearings shall be permitted for hollow metal doors when the
 specified overpressure is less than 3 psi.

2.2.2     Latching System

2.2.2.1     Latching Points

 The number of latching points shall be determined by the door
 manufacturer.For jamb latching points, latching points shall be provided at
 the jambs only.

2.2.2.2     Latching System Operation

 Latching systems shall be capable of operating for the same number of
 cycles specified for the door hinges where one latch operating cycle
 consists of engaging and releasing using the handle. Latches shall remain
 engaged until manually released and shall not release under blast loads or
 rebound. Manually operated latches shall remain in the released position
 until manually engaged. Self-latching latches shall provide
 self-activating engagement when the door is swung to the normal closed
 position. Handles shall release latches under a clockwise motion.

2.2.2.3     Latching Mechanism

 Latching mechanisms for hollow metal doors shall be mounted on the seating
 face of the door and safety covered.

2.2.2.4     Safety Cover

 Safety covers shall consist of steel housings that enclose the latching
 mechanism such that only the operating rods are exposed.

2.2.2.5     Latches

 Latches (latch bolts) shall be manufactured of structural quality steel and
 the latch bolt throw shall not be less than 3/4 inch. Latch bolts shall be
 the sliding type in which the latch bolt slides into a matching strike in
 the door frame or the lever type in which the latch bolt rotates into a
 groove in the frame as specified or indicated except that latches for doors
 with mortise lock and latch sets and exit devices shall be the sliding
 type. Manually operated latches shall draw the door toward the frame
 during latching.



                                SECTION 08 39 54   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2.2.6     Handle

 Handles for doors with mortise lock and latch sets shall be manufactured of
 steel castings or stainless steel. Latch handles shall be firmly fastened
 to axles. Lever handles shall be perpendicular to the door edge when
 latches are engaged. Single lever handles shall be located at the stile
 opposite the hinges.

2.2.3     Mortise Lock and Latch Set

 Lever handles shall release latches using a torque not exceeding 27 lb-inch.
 Latches (latch bolts) shall be located at the stiles and operated from a
 single lever handle. Only one deadbolt shall be provided. The deadbolt
 shall be manufactured of structural quality steel and the deadbolt throw
 shall not be less than 1 inch. Mortise locks shall be provided with
 armored fronts. The function numbers for mortise locks shall be as defined
 in BHMA A156.13.

2.2.4     Keying

 Keying shall conform to Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Change keys for
 locks shall be stamped with change number and the inscription "U.S.
 Property - Do Not Duplicate." Unless otherwise specified, two change keys
 shall be provided for each lock. Locks shall be furnished with the
 manufacturer's standard construction key system.

2.2.5     Exit Device

 Latches (latch bolts) shall release by depressing the actuation bar using a
 force of not more than 15 lbf applied perpendicular to the door in the
 swing direction. The exit device shall conform to the finish test values
 specified in BHMA A156.3 and shall be of plain design with straight,
 beveled, or smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges. A touch bar may be
 provided in lieu of a conventional actuation bar (cross bar). The function
 numbers for exit devices shall be as defined in BHMA A156.3.

2.2.6     Door Stop

 Door stops shall be designed to resist the impact of the door. The stop
 shall not scratch or scar the door finish when the door is opened against
 the stop.

2.2.7     Surface Door Closer

 The surface door closer shall conform to BHMA A156.4.      The size and grade
 shall be selected by the door manufacturer.

2.2.8     Overhead Door Holder

 Overhead door holder shall be surface mounted. The holder shall have a
 spring or other device to cushion the door action and shall limit the door
 swing at 110 degrees. The holder shall have a built-in, hold-open
 capability at the swing limit specified. Overhead door holders for hollow
 metal doors weighing less than 200 pounds shall conform to BHMA A156.8.

2.2.9     Door Silencer

 Rubber door silencers shall cushion the impact of the door against the
 frame so that steel-to-steel contact is not made during closing.


                                SECTION 08 39 54   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.3     ACCESSORIES

2.3.1     Subframe

 At the Contractor's option, a subframe can be provided and built into the
 structure prior to installation of the frame. The subframe and subframe
 anchors shall be capable of transferring blast and rebound reactions to the
 adjacent structure, and the frame shall be capable of transferring these
 reactions to the subframe. The subframe shall be fabricated in the same
 manner specified for the frame.

2.3.2     Nameplate

 Each door assembly shall have a permanently affixed nameplate that displays
 the manufacturer's name, place and year of manufacture, and the applicable
 peak overpressure, impulse, and rebound rating.

2.3.3     Removable Threshold

 The sill shall be flush with the adjacent floor when the threshold is
 removed. The removable threshold shall be attached using approved
 countersunk mechanical fasteners.

2.3.4     Self-Rescue Kit

 Self-rescue kits shall contain illustrated instructions, nonadjustable
 wrenches, screwdrivers, jacks, and all other tools required to open the
 blast door from the seating face to a width of at least 12 inches. The
 jack capacity shall not be less than 75,000 lbf. Tools shall be securely
 mounted in a steel frame using wing nuts or other approved fasteners. The
 self-rescue kit frame shall be fabricated in the same manner specified for
 the door frame and shall be securely anchored to the wall at the location
 indicated or as directed.

2.4     FABRICATION

2.4.1     Shop Assembly

 Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M except that arc welding
 of steel sheet and strip shall be in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
 Stainless steel shall be welded using electrodes conforming to
 AWS A5.4/A5.4M. Fabricated steel shall be well-formed to shape and size,
 with sharp lines and angles. Intermediate and corner joints shall be coped
 or mitered. Exposed welds shall be dressed smooth. Hollow metal door
 frames shall be pressed steel or structural steel with welded joints.
 Steel frames or subframes installed in masonry walls shall be provided with
 adjustable anchors. Hollow metal doors shall be of unitized grid
 construction with welded grid junctions and shall have flat, one-piece face
 sheets spot welded to each face of the grid system. The edges of hollow
 metal doors shall be closed with seams continuously welded. Hollow metal
 doors shall be neat in appearance, free from warpage and buckle, and
 suitable reinforcing shall be provided for hardware.

2.4.2     Thermal Insulation

 The interior cells between the unitized grid shall be completely filled
 with thermal insulation material. The U value through the door (panel)
 shall not exceed 0.24 Btu per square foot per hour per degree F.


                                SECTION 08 39 54   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022



2.4.3     Shop Finishing

 Shop priming of steel surfaces shall conform to Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND
 COATINGS, except that surfaces that will be embedded in concrete need not
 be primed and hollow metal doors shall be either dipped in primer after
 welding is completed, or exposed surfaces shall be primed and interior
 surfaces coated with an approved rust inhibitor.

2.4.4     Clearance

 The lateral clearance between hollow metal doors and frames shall not exceed
  1/8 inch at the head and jambs and the clearance between the meeting edges
 of pairs of doors shall not exceed 1/4 inch. The clearance between the
 door bottom and threshold shall not exceed 3/4 inch.

2.5     BLAST DOOR ASSEMBLIES

2.5.1     Door Metal

2.5.1.1     Type

 Type shall be hollow metal.

2.5.1.2     Overpressure

 Overpressure shall be 2 psi in the seating direction.

2.5.1.3     Rebound

 Rebound resistance shall be 50 percent.

2.5.1.4     Vision Panel

 Openings marked on the door schedule to contain a vision panel shall be
 equipped with a blast resistant 24 inch x 4 inch (clear opening) vision
 lite with reflective film on exterior. The door leaf will have factory
 prepared cutouts and reinforcements. Suitable glass and glazing materials,
 either wire or laminated glass shall be included, with the glass composite
 and thickness determined by the blast door manufacturer.

2.6     TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS

2.6.1     Prototype Static Test

 Static tests on prototype door assemblies shall demonstrate that the door
 will resist the blast overpressure. Static tests will be accepted only if
 the door and frame proposed are manufactured using the same materials,
 dimensions, and tolerances as those in the prototype static test and the
 static overpressure used in the test is at least two times the blast
 overpressure. Static test reports shall be supplemented with calculations
 that demonstrate rebound resistance when rebound is not tested.

2.6.2     Prototype Blast Test

 Blast tests   on the prototype door assembly shall demonstrate that the door
 will resist   the overpressure waveform. Blast tests will be accepted only
 if the door   and frame proposed are manufactured using the same materials,
 dimensions,   and tolerances as those in the prototype blast tests. The rise


                            SECTION 08 39 54    Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 time of the test waveform shall be zero or subject to approval. For
 overpressure with finite duration, the overpressure waveform used in the
 test shall exceed the overpressure waveform in both peak overpressure and
 impulse and the blast test report shall be supplemented with calculations
 that demonstrate the specified or indicated rebound resistance when the
 positive phase waveform duration in the test exceeds the positive phase
 duration specified or indicated.

2.6.3     Shop Operating Test

 Prior to shipment, each door assembly shall be fully erected in a
 supporting structure and tested for proper operation. Such testing shall
 include opening, closing, and operating all moving parts to ensure smooth
 operation and proper clearance, fit, and seating. Determine the operating
 forces and opening and closing times. Notify the Contracting Officer at
 least 7 calendar days prior to the start of testing and all doors.

2.6.4     Air Leakage Test

 Factory test each door assembly for which thermal insulation is specified
 for air leakage rate in accordance with ASTM E 283. The rate of air
 leakage per unit length of crack shall not exceed 0.20 cfm using a pressure
 difference of 1.57 psf. Prototype tests can be substituted for door
 assembly tests when the prototype door, frame, and hardware tested are
 equivalent to that provided or when otherwise approved.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

 Install doors and frames in accordance with the manufacturer's written
 instructions. Pressed steel frames for hollow metal doors shall be fully
 grouted. Exposed surfaces shall be finish painted in accordance with
 Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.2      TESTS

 After installation is completed, field test each door for operation,
 clearance, fit, and seating by operating the door and hardware through at
 least 10 operating cycles. Test door and hardware operation using the
 forces specified. Provide personnel and equipment required to perform
 field testing. Unless waived, perform all field tests in the presence of
 the Contracting Officer. After testing is completed, prepare test reports
 and furnish three copies.

3.3      MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE

 Perform installation and testing of door assemblies under the supervision
 of the door manufacturer's erection engineer. Upon completion of the work,
 and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, provide the services
 of one engineer and other technical personnel, as required, for a period of
 not less than 4 hours to instruct Government personnel in the operation and
 maintenance of the blast doors and all other items furnished under this
 specification. Include in the instructions videotapes and use of the
 operation and maintenance manual. Submit an instruction outline and
 procedure for approval prior to scheduling the instruction. Provide one
 copy of all instruction material at the time of instruction.

          -- End of Section --


                             SECTION 08 39 54   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                W912HN-11-R-0022




                  SECTION 08 39 54   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



                                  SECTION 08 41 13

                     ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
                                       08/10

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   SUMMARY

 This Specification includes aluminum entrances, glass and glazing, door
 hardware, and components.

 Type of Aluminum Entrance includes:

         Impact Resistance Entrances; medium stile, 3-1/2 inch vertical face
         dimension, 1-3/4 inch depth, interior structural silicone glazed, high
         traffic/impact resistant applications.

1.2   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

 AAMA 503                            (2008) Voluntary Specification for Field
                                     Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts,
                                     Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems

 AAMA 800                            (2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test
                                     Methods for Sealants

             AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI Z97.1                          (2009) Safety Glazing Materials Used in
                                     Buildings - Safety Performance
                                     Specifications and Methods of Test

             AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

 ASCE/SEI 7-05                       (2005; R 2006) Minimum Design Loads for
                                     Buildings and Other Structures

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM B 221                          (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                     and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                                     Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

 ASTM B 221M                         (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                     and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                                     Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)

 ASTM E 330                          (2002) Structural Performance of Exterior
                                     Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain
                                     Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
                                     Difference


                              SECTION 08 41 13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



 ASTM E 331                            (2000; R 2009) Water Penetration of
                                       Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
                                       Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
                                       Pressure Difference

            GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

 GANA Glazing Manual                   (2004) Glazing Manual

            U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 16 CFR 1201                           Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
                                       Materials

            UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 325                                (2002; R 2010) Door, Drapery, Gate,
                                       Louver, and Window Operators and Systems

1.3     ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

 Within 30 days of the Contract Award, submit the following for review and
 approval by the Contracting Officer:

        Listing of Product Installations

        Sample Warranty

        Finish and Color Samples

        Manufacturer's Catalog Data

        Installation Drawings

        Fabrication Drawings for custom fabrications

 Concurrently submit certified test reports showing compliance with
 specified performance characteristics and UL 325 for the following:

1.3.1     Deflection

 Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
 characteristics as follows:

        The maximum allowable deflection in any member when tested in
        accordance with ASTM E 330 with allowable stress in accordance with AA
        Specifications for Aluminum Structures is L/175 or 3/4 inches maximum.

1.3.2     Structural

 Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
 characteristics as follows:

  a.    Corner strength per dual moment load test procedure and obtain
        certification by an independent testing laboratory to ensure weld
        compliance and corner integrity.

  b.    Test and certify test results per AAMA 503, ASTM E 1105, ASTM E 783,


                                SECTION 08 41 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


       ASTM E 331, and make available upon request.

1.3.2.1    Uniform Load

 Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
 characteristics as follows:

  a.   Apply a static air design load of 4.07 kilopascal 65 psf for 9/16 inch
       laminated infill in the positive and negative direction in accordance
       with AAMA 501, and ASTM E 330.

  b.   No deflections are allowed to exceed l/180 of the span of any framing
       member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified
       design load, no glass breakage is allowed.

1.3.2.2    Impact Resistance

 Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
 characteristics as follows:

       Large Missile, tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886 at a door opening
       of 7 foot - 0 inch by 8 foot - 0 inch.

1.4    SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

       SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

           Sample Warranty;

           Listing of Product Installations;

       SD-02 Shop Drawings

           Installation Drawings

           Fabrication Drawings

       SD-03 Product Data

           Manufacturer's Catalog Data

       SD-04 Samples

           Finish and Color Samples

       SD-06 Test Reports

           Certified Test Reports

       SD-07 Certificates

           Manufacturer's Product Warranty



                               SECTION 08 41 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


1.5     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1     Qualifications

1.5.1.1     Installer Qualifications

 Provide documentation of Installer experience as determined by Contractor
 to perform work of this section, who has specialized in the installation of
 work similar to that required for this project, and who is acceptable to
 product manufacturer.

1.5.1.2     Manufacturer Qualifications

 Ensure manufacturer is capable of providing field service representation
 during construction, approving acceptable installer and approving
 application method.

1.5.2     Pre-Installation Meetings

 Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate
 conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's
 warranty requirements.

1.5.3     Single Source Responsibility

 Provide design, structural engineering, and custom fabrication for door
 portal system and supply of all components, materials, and products based
 on a single manufacturer of sole responsibility. Provision of products
 from numerous sources for site assembly without complete single source
 design and supply responsibility is not acceptable. Work items and
 components to be fabricated or supplied by single source are:

  a.    Door assemblies to be installed in door portal as specified in Section
        08 14 00 WOOD DOORS.

  b.    Glazed wall to be constructed around door portal as specified in
        Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.

  c.    Door operating hardware to be installed on or within door portal as
        specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.

  d.    Glass as specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.

1.6     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.6.1     Ordering

 Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements
 to avoid construction delays.

1.6.2     Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading

 Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged
 containers with identification labels intact.

1.6.3     Storage and Protection

 Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
 Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect


                             SECTION 08 41 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


 storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities,
 and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

1.7     PROJECT CONDITIONS/ SITE CONDITIONS

1.7.1     Field Measurements

 Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
 fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field
 measurements, fabrication scheduled with construction progress to avoid
 construction delays.

1.8     DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

 Design, size components, and install door portal system to withstand these
 loads without breakage, loss, failure of seals, product deterioration, and
 other defects.

  a.     Dead and Live Loads: Determined by ASCE/SEI 7-05 and calculated in
         accordance with applicable codes.

  b.     Seismic loads: Design and install system to comply with applicable
         seismic requirements for project location as defined by of ICC IBC.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     MATERIALS

2.1.1     Aluminum (Entrances and Components)

2.1.1.1     Material Standard

 ASTM B 221 ASTM B 221M; 6063-T5 alloy and tempered

 Provide door stile and rail face dimensions of the entrance doors as
 follows:

   Vertical Stile        Top Rail            Bottom Rail
   3-1/2 inches          3-1/2 inches        6-1/2 inches

 Provide major portions of the door members at .125 inches nominal in
 thickness and glazing molding to be .050 inches thick.

2.1.1.2     Tolerances

 Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional
 dimensions of entrance members are nominal and in compliance with Aluminum
 Standards and Data, published by The Aluminum Association.

 Provide either EPDM elastomeric extrusions or thermoplastic elastomer
 glazing gaskets. Structural silicone sealant is required.

2.2     MANUFACTURERS

 Manufacturers are acceptable providing they meet the requirements specified
 in this section and project drawings.




                                SECTION 08 41 13   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3     ACCESSORIES

2.3.1     Fasteners

 Provide stainless steel where exposed.

2.3.2     Perimeter Anchors

 When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and
 aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.

2.4     RELATED MATERIALS

2.4.1     Sealants

 Refer to Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.        Ensure all sealants conform to
 AAMA 800.

2.4.2     Glass

 Refer to Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     EXAMINATION

3.1.1     Site Verification of Conditions

 Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under
 other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
 manufacturer's instructions.

 Verify openings are sized to receive storefront system and sill plate is
 level in accordance with manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.

3.1.2     Field Measurements

 Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
 fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field
 measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
 construction delays.

3.2     Preparation

 Field verify dimensions prior to fabricating door portal assembly
 components.

 Coordinate requirements for locations of blockouts for anchorage of door
 portal columns and other embedded components with Section 03 30 00
 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

 Coordinate erection of door portal with installation of surrounding glass
 wall and door assemblies. Ensure adequate provision is made for support
 and anchorage of assembly components.

3.2.1     Adjacent Surfaces Protection

 Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product
 installation.


                               SECTION 08 41 13   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



3.2.2     Aluminum Surface Protection

 Protect aluminum surfaces from contact with lime, mortar, cement, acids,
 and other harmful contaminants.

3.3     Adjusting

 Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation, and as recommended by the
 manufacturer.

3.4     Related Products Installation Requirements

3.4.1     Sealants (Perimeter)

 Refer to Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.4.2     Glass

 Refer to Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.

3.4.3     Reference

 ANSI Z97.1, 16 CFR 1201 and GANA Glazing Manual.

3.5     PROTECTION AND CLEANING

3.5.1     Protection

 Protect installed product's finish surfaces from damage during
 construction. Protect aluminum storefront system from damage from grinding
 and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful
 contaminants.

3.5.2     Cleaning

 Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in
 accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance.
 Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

3.6     WARRANTY

 Submit three signed copies of Manufacturer's Product Warranty for entrance
 system as follows:

        Warranty Period: Two years from Date of Substantial Completion of the
        project, provided that the Limited Warranty begins in no event later
        than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. In addition,
        support welded door corner construction with a limited lifetime
        warranty for the life of the door under normal use.

        Ensure Warranty language is identical to "As Approved" version of the
        sample warranty submitted and returned from the Contracting Officer.

          -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 08 41 13   Page 7
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



                                SECTION 08 44 00

                                GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
                                      04/08

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

 AA ADM-105                         (2005; Errata 2005) Aluminum Design Manual

 AA ASD1                            (2009) Aluminum Standards and Data

 AA DAF-45                          (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
                                    for Aluminum Finishes

            AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

 AAMA 609 & 610                     (2009) Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for
                                    Architecturally Finished Aluminum

 AAMA 611                           (1998; R 2004) Voluntary Specification for
                                    Anodized Architectural Aluminum

 AAMA 800                           (2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test
                                    Methods for Sealants

 AAMA CW-10                         (2004) Care and Handling of Architectural
                                    Aluminum from Shop to Site

 AAMA MCWM-1                        (1989) Metal Curtain Wall Manual

            AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

 AISC/AISI 121                      (2004) Standard Definitions for Use in the
                                    Design of Steel Structures

 AISI SG03-3                        (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)
                                    Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set

            AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

 ASCE 7-10                          (2010) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
                                    and Other Structures

            AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS A5.10/A5.10M                   (1999; R 2007) Specification for Bare
                                    Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding
                                    Electrodes and Rods

 AWS D1.1/D1.1M                     (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel


                            SECTION 08 44 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 1011/A 1011M              (2010) Standard Specification for Steel,
                                  Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
                                  Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
                                  High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
                                  Formability and Ultra-High Strength

 ASTM A 123/A 123M                (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
                                  (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
                                  Steel Products

 ASTM A 153/A 153M                (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
                                  Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
                                  Hardware

 ASTM A 167                       (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                  Stainless and Heat-Resisting
                                  Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
                                  Strip

 ASTM A 242/A 242M                (2004; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                  High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel

 ASTM A 36/A 36M                  (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                  Structural Steel

 ASTM A 424/A 424M                (2009) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Sheet for Porcelain Enameling

 ASTM A 501                       (2007) Standard Specification for
                                  Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
                                  Steel Structural Tubing

 ASTM A 572/A 572M                (2007) Standard Specification for
                                  High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
                                  Structural Steel

 ASTM A 588/A 588M                (2005) Standard Specification for
                                  High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
                                  with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point,
                                  with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

 ASTM A 606/A 606M                (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
                                  Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
                                  Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

 ASTM A 611                       (1997) Standard Specification for
                                  Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon,
                                  Cold-Rolled

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                  Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                  the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM B 108/B 108M                (2008) Standard Specification for


                          SECTION 08 44 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                         W912HN-11-R-0022


                            Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

 ASTM B 136                 (1984; R 2008e1) Standard Method for
                            Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic
                            Coatings on Aluminum

 ASTM B 137                 (1995; R 2009) Standard Test Method for
                            Measurement of Coating Mass Per Unit Area
                            on Anodically Coated Aluminum

 ASTM B 152/B 152M          (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
                            Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar

 ASTM B 209                 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                            and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

 ASTM B 211                 (2003) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                            and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire

 ASTM B 221                 (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                            and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                            Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

 ASTM B 244                 (2009) Standard Method for Measurement of
                            Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum
                            and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on
                            Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current
                            Instruments

 ASTM B 26/B 26M            (2009) Standard Specification for
                            Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

 ASTM B 316/B 316M          (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                            and Aluminum-Alloy Rivet and Cold-Heading
                            Wire and Rods

 ASTM B 85/B 85M            (2009) Standard Specification for
                            Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings

 ASTM C 1036                (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
                            Glass

 ASTM C 1048                (2004) Standard Specification for
                            Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
                            Coated and Uncoated Glass

 ASTM C 542                 (2005) Lock-Strip Gaskets

 ASTM C 864                 (2005) Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal
                            Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers

 ASTM C 920                 (2010) Standard Specification for
                            Elastomeric Joint Sealants

 ASTM D 1037                (2006a) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base
                            Fiber and Particle Panel Materials

 ASTM D 1730                (2009) Standard Practices for Preparation
                            of Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Surfaces


                     SECTION 08 44 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


                                     for Painting

 ASTM E 34                           (1994; R 2002) Chemical Analysis of
                                     Aluminum and Aluminum-Base Alloys

          NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

 NAAMM MFM                           (1988) Metal Finishes Manual

          THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

 SSPC SP 1                           (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning

 SSPC SP 3                           (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning

 SSPC SP 7/NACE No.4                 (2007) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

          U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 CID A-A-344                         (Rev B; Notice 1) Lacquer (Clear Gloss)

          U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 16 CFR 1201                         Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
                                     Materials

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Installation Drawings; G

          Shop-Painting Aluminum

          Shop-Painting Steel

      SD-03 Product Data

          Preventive Maintenance and Inspection

          Metals For Fabrication

          Nonskinning Sealing Compound

          Metal Accessories

          Sealants and Calkings

          Canopy Assembly

          Masonry Anchorage Devices

          Sample warranties


                            SECTION 08 44 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022



        SD-05 Design Data

            Calculations; G

            Finish; G

            Exposed-to-View Aluminum Finish; G

            Porcelain-Enamel; G

            Seismic Calculations; G

        SD-11 Closeout Submittals

            WARRANTY

1.3     REQUIREMENT FOR DESIGN DATA

 Submit structural for canopy assembly.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1     Testing Requirements

 The components listed below shall be tested in accordance with the
 requirements below, and meet performance requirements specified.

  a.    Joint and Glazing Sealants:   Perform tests as required by applicable
        publications referenced.

  b.    Preformed Compression Gaskets and Seals:     ASTM C 864.

  c.    Preformed Lock-strip Gaskets: ASTM C 542, modified as follows: Heat
        age specimens seven days at 158 degrees F, in zipped or locked position
        under full design compression. Unzip, cool for one hour, re-zip, and
        test lip seal pressure, which must be minimum 2.5 pounds per linear inch
         on any extruded or corner specimen.

  d.    Anodized Finishes: Stain resistance, coating weight, and coating
        thickness tests, ASTM B 136, ASTM B 137, and ASTM B 244, respectively.

1.4.2     Mockup

1.4.2.1     Construction

 Construct at manufacturer's plant full size wall unit which incorporates
 horizontal and vertical joints, framing, glazing, and other accessories as
 detailed and specified. Mock-up unit size and design shall be as indicated.

1.4.2.2     Performance Test

 Conduct after approval of visual aspects has been obtained.       Finished work
 shall match approved mock-up.

1.4.2.3     Approved Mock-Up

 After completion and approval of test results transport mock-up to job site
 and install, where directed, for reference during construction.


                               SECTION 08 44 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



1.4.3     Deflection and Structural Tests

 No framing member shall have a permanent deformation in excess of 0.2
 percent of its clear span when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 for a
 minimum test period of 10 seconds at 1.5 times the design wind pressures
 specified.

1.4.4     Delamination Test

 Adhesively bonded metal-faced panels shall show no evidence of
 delamination, warpage or other deterioration or damage when subjected to
 the six "Accelerated Aging Cycles" specified in ASTM D 1037.

1.5     Tolerances

 Design and erect canopy to accommodate tolerances in building frame and
 other contiguous work as indicated or specified. Provide with the
 following tolerances:

  a.    Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop
        drawings: 1/8 inch per 12 feet of length up to not more than 1/2 inch
        in any total length.

  b.    Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members
        abutting end to end in line: 1/16 inch.

1.6     Structural Requirements

 No member shall deflect in a direction parallel to the plane of the wall,
 when carrying its full design load, more than an amount which will reduce
 the edge cover or glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension. No
 member after deflection under full design load, shall have a clearance
 between itself and the top of the panel, glass, sash, or other part
 immediately below it less than 1/8 inch; the clearance between the member
 and an operable window or door shall be minimum 1/16 inch.

1.7     QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

 Welding shall be performed by certified welders qualified in accordance
 with AWS D1.1/D1.1M using procedures, materials, and equipment of the type
 required for the work.

1.8     DELIVERY AND STORAGE

 Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store with a
 minimum of handling in accordance with recommendations contained in
 AAMA CW-10. Storage spaces shall be dry locations with adequate
 ventilation, free from heavy dust, not subject to combustion products or
 sources of water, and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling.
 Deliver calking and sealing compounds to the job site in sealed containers
 labeled to show the designated name, formula or specifications number; lot
 number; color; date of manufacturer; shelf life; and curing time when
 applicable.

1.8.1     Protective Covering

 Prior to shipment from the factory, place knocked-down lineal members in
 cardboard containers and cover finished surfaces of aluminum with


                                SECTION 08 44 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


 protective covering of adhesive paper, waterproof tape, or strippable
 plastic. Covering shall not chip, peel, or flake due to temperature or
 weather, shall protect against discoloration and surface damage from
 transportation, and storage, and shall be resistant to alkaline mortar and
 plaster. Do not cover aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with
 sealants after installation.

1.8.2    Identification

 Prior to delivery, mark wall components to correspond with shop and
 erection drawings placement location and erection.

1.9     WARRANTY

 Guarantee insulating glass units not to develop material obstruction of
 vision as a result of dust or film formation on the inner glass surface
 caused by failure of the seal, other than through glass breakage, within a
 period of 5 years from date of acceptance of work by the Government.
 Replace units failing to comply with the terms of this guarantee with new
 units without additional cost to the Government. The Contractor shall
 require the manufacturer to execute their warranties in writing directly to
 the Government.

1.9.1    Sample Warranties

 Provide glazing assemblies material and workmanship warranties meeting
 specified requirements. Provide revision or amendment to standard membrane
 manufacturer warranty to comply with the specified requirements.

  a.    Project Warranty: Refer to Section 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK and
        Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for project warranty provisions.

  b.    Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance,
        Manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized
        company official manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a
        limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents.

  c.    Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard    form in which manufacturer
        agrees to repair or replace components on   which finishes fail within
        specified warranty period. Warranty does    not include normal
        weathering. Determine warranty on finish    by type of finish selected.

  d.    Beneficiary:   Issue warranty in the legal name of the project Owner.

  e.    Warranty Period: 5 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion,
        covering complete canopy system for failure to meet specified
        requirements.

  f.    Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine
        acceptability of manufacturer's warranty documents.

1.10    INTERPRETATION OF AWS CODE

 Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL applies to work specified in this
 section.

 AWS code, when referred to herein, shall mean AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
 Welding Code - Steel" with the following modification:



                              SECTION 08 44 00   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


 Revise AWS code Section 1, "General Provisions," Paragraph 1.1 as follows:
 References to the need for approval shall mean "Approval by the Contracting
 Officer" and references to the "Building Commissioner" shall mean the
 "Contracting Officer."

1.11     PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.11.1     Allowable Design Stresses

 Aluminum-alloy framing member allowable design stresses shall be in
 accordance with the requirements of AA ADM-105 pertaining to building type
 structures made of the specified aluminum alloy.

 Hot-rolled structural-steel member allowable design stresses and design
 rules shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC/AISI 121
 pertaining to the specified structural steel.

 Cold-formed light-gage steel structural member allowable design stresses
 and design rules shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISI SG03-3
 SG570 pertaining to structural members formed from the specified
 structural-steel sheet or strip.

1.11.2     Design Wind Load

 Design windload shall be 45 pounds per square foot.      Design windload shall
 be in accordance with ASCE 7-10.

1.12     DRAWINGS

 Installation Drawings shall include the following information for canopy
 assemblies.

 Location and details of anchorage devices that are to be cast-in-place in
 concrete and masonry construction.

 Panel dimensions, thicknesses and kinds of materials, edge details, details
 of installation in canopy framing, and other pertinent construction and
 erection details.

1.13     MANUFACTURER'S INFORMATION

 Preventive Maintenance and Inspection shall consist of the aluminum
 manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and application methods,
 including detrimental effects to the aluminum finish when improperly
 applied.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     MATERIALS

2.1.1     Aluminum

 Shall be free from defects impairing strength or durability of surface
 finish. Provide standard alloys shall conform to standards and
 designations of AA ASD1. Special alloys, not covered by the following ASTM
 specifications, shall conform to standards and designations recommended by
 the manufacturer for the purpose intended.




                              SECTION 08 44 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.1.1    Wrought Aluminum Alloys

 Shall be those which include aluminum alloying elements not exceeding the
 following maximum limits when tested and additional in accordance with
 ASTM E 34. These limits apply to both bare products and the core of clad
 products. The cladding of clad products shall be within the same limits
 except that the maximum zinc limit may be 2.5 percent in order to assure
 that the cladding is anodic to the core. Special wrought alloys with a
 silicon content not more than 7.0 percent will be acceptable for limited
 structural uses where special appearance is required:

          ALLOY                            PERCENT

          Silicon                            1.5

          Magnesium, Manganese, and
          Chromium combined                  6.0

          Iron                               1.0

          Copper                             0.4

          Zinc                               1.0

 Within the chemical composition limits set forth above, wrought aluminum
 alloys shall conform to the following:

  a.   Extruded bars, rods, shapes and tubes:         ASTM B 221.

  b.   Sheet and Plate:     ASTM B 209.

2.1.1.2    Cast Aluminum Alloys

 Provide those in which the alloying elements are silicon, magnesium,
 manganese, or a combination of these. Other elements shall not exceed the
 following limits:

             ELEMENT                 PERCENT

             Iron                     1.2

             Copper                   0.4

             Nickel                   0.4

             Titanium                 0.2

             Others (total)           0.5

 Within the chemical composition limits set forth above, cast aluminum
 alloys shall conform to the following:

  a.   Sand castings:     ASTM B 26/B 26M.

  b.   Die casting:     ASTM B 85/B 85M.

  c.   Permanent mold castings:     ASTM B 108/B 108M.




                               SECTION 08 44 00      Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.1.3     Welding Rods and Electrodes

 Provide welding rods and bare electrodes shall conform to AWS A5.10/A5.10M
 as recommended by the manufacturer of the aluminum base metal alloy being
 used.

2.1.1.4     Finish

 Anodized finish on aluminum surfaces shall match in appearance or fall
 within the two extremes of color range of the approved samples. The
 following designation of finishes refer to standard finishes as defined in
 the NAAMM MFM. Aluminum used for framing shall have a color anodized
 finish designation AA-MIO-C22-A34 and AA-MIOC22-A44, meeting the
 requirements of AAMA 611.

2.1.1.5     Strength

 Aluminum extrusions for framing members used in canopy shall have a minimum
 ultimate tensile strength of 22,000 psi and a minimum yield strength of
 16,000 psi.

2.1.2     Bronze

 Bronze sheets, tubes, and drawn shapes shall be commercial bronze, alloy
 No. 220. Extruded shapes shall be architectural bronze, alloy No. 385.
 Rolled or drawn rods shall be commercial bronze, alloy No. 220 or
 architectural bronze, alloy No. 385.

2.1.3     Copper

 Conform to ASTM B 152/B 152M, hot or cold-rolled of the temper suitable for
 the respective forming operations.

2.1.4     Carbon Steel

 Conform to the following specifications:

  a.    Rolled shapes, plates, and bars:     ASTM A 36/A 36M.

  b.    Galvanized sheets:     ASTM A 653/A 653M.

  c.    Sheets for porcelain enameling:     ASTM A 424/A 424M.

  d.    Other sheets:    ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 611.

2.1.5     Stainless Steel

 Conform to ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, and finish in accordance with the
 NAAMM MFM conform to Metal Finishes Manual as follows:

  a.    Concealed flashings:    Dead soft fully annealed, 2 D finish.

  b.    Exposed work:    No. 4 finish to match approved sample.

2.1.6     Weathering High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel

 Weathering steel shall be a high-strength, low-alloy steel conforming to
 ASTM A 242/A 242M, ASTM A 588/A 588M, ASTM A 606/A 606M, and
 ASTM A 1011/A 1011M as applicable to the shapes and thicknesses required.


                               SECTION 08 44 00     Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                                       W912HN-11-R-0022


 In addition, the steel shall be capable of developing a tightly adhered
 protective oxide coating when left unpainted and subjected to atmospheric
 exposure. Provide steel that conforms to the manufacturer's published
 mechanical properties and chemical composition. Perform cleaning, surface
 preparation, handling, bolting, riveting, and welding of weathering steel
 in strict accordance with the specification and recommendations of the
 steel manufacturer.

2.1.7     High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel

 Conform to ASTM A 572/A 572M for structural shapes, plates, and bars.

2.1.8     Metal Fasteners

 Provide fasteners as specified in paragraph entitled "Fastener Metals for
 Joining Various Metal Combinations" in "Part 2 - Products" of the
 AAMA MCWM-1. Fastener metals used in connection with weathering steel
 shall be of type recommended by the weathering steel manufacturer. Use
 metals for fasteners shall be chemically and galvanically compatible with
 contiguous materials.

2.1.9     Joint Sealants and Accessories

 Provide manufacturer's standard colors as closely matching the adjacent
 surfaces as possible.

2.1.9.1     Elastomeric, Single or Multiple Component

 ASTM C 920, Type S, single component or Type M, multiple component. Use
 Grade NS, nonsag type in joints on vertical surfaces and use Grade P,
 self-leveling or flow type, in joints on horizontal surfaces.

2.1.9.2     Single Component Silicone Rubber Base

 ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS (Silicone).

2.1.9.3     Solvents and Primers

 Provide material which is quick drying, colorless, nonstaining, compatible
 with compound used, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Where primer
 is specified or recommended by sealant manufacturer, tests related to that
 material shall include primer.

2.1.9.4     Backing Material

 Provide material which is nonstaining, nonabsorbent, and compatible with
 sealing compound. Closed cell resilient urethane, polyvinylchloride or
 polyethylene foam; closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber; closed cell
 neoprene or butyl rod; or polychloroprene tubes or beads.

2.1.9.5     Bond Preventive Materials

 Provide polyethylene tape with pressure-sensitive adhesive; aluminum foil
 or waxed paper.

2.1.9.6     Preformed Sealing Compound

 Provide nonskinning type conforming to AAMA 800.           Tapes, beads, ribbons or
 other shapes as required.


                               SECTION 08 44 00   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



2.1.10     Glass and Glazing

 Materials are specified under Section 08 81 00 GLAZING. Conform to
 ASTM C 1036, except ASTM C 1048. All glazing material must be certified as
 meeting 16 CFR 1201.

2.1.10.1     Glass Sizes and Clearances

 Sizes indicated are nominal. Verify actual sizes required by measuring
 frames. Coordinate dimensions for glass and glass holding members to meet
 applicable minimum clearances as recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not
 nip to remove flares or to reduce oversized dimensions.

2.1.10.2     Clear Primary Float Glass

 Provide Type I, Class I, quality q3, 1/2 inch thick.

2.1.10.3     Heat-Absorbing Glass

 Clean cut, Type I, Class 2, style A in color, as indicated.

2.1.10.4     Glass Setting Materials

  a.     Sealants and preformed sealing compounds: Shall be as specified under
         paragraph entitled "Joint Sealant and Accessories."

  b.     Preformed compression gaskets and seals: ASTM C 864, color indicated.
         Gaskets shall have durable compatible, and colorfast coating.

  c.     Preformed lock-strip type gaskets: ASTM C 542, factory formed, color
         indicated. Provide separate filler or locking strips, approximately 10
         Shore "A" Durometer points harder than gasket body, and insure
         permanent and continuous pressure of sealing lips.Butt or miter grooves
         45 degrees.

  d.     Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacer shims: Fabricate from neoprene
         or other materials recommended by glass manufacturer compatible with
         compounds, sealants, or gaskets used. Unless otherwise recommended by
         the glass manufacturer, shore "A" Durometer hardness for setting and
         edge blocks shall be 90 plus or minus 5; for spacer shims, 50 plus or
         minus 5.

2.1.11     Paint and Finishes

2.1.11.1     Primer

 Zinc-molydate, alkyd type.

2.2      METALS FOR FABRICATION

2.2.1     Aluminum-Alloy Extrusions

 Extrusions shall conform to ASTM B 221.

 Extrusions to receive an integral-color anodic coating shall be the alloy
 and temper recommended by the aluminum producer for the specified finish
 with integral-color anodic coating and have mechanical properties equal to
 or exceeding those of 6063-T5.


                               SECTION 08 44 00   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.2.2     Aluminum-Alloy Sheets and Plates

 Unless otherwise specified, sheets and plates shall conform to ASTM B 209,
 Alloy 3003-H16.

 Sheets and plates to receive a clear anodic coating shall conform to
 ASTM B 209, Alloy 5005-H16.

 Sheets and plates to receive an integral-color anodic coating shall be the
 alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer for the specified
 coating and have mechanical properties equal to or exceeding those of
 5005-H16.

2.2.3     Structural Steel

 Hot-rolled shapes, plates, and bars shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M.

 Hot-formed tubing shall conform to ASTM A 501.

 Sheet and strip for cold-formed, light-gage, structural members shall
 conform to ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.2.4     Metals for Fasteners

 Provide aluminum-alloy bolts and screws made from rod conforming to
 ASTM B 211, Alloy 2024-T351.

 Provide aluminum-alloy nuts made from rod conforming to ASTM B 211, Alloy
 6061-T6.

 Provide aluminum-alloy washers made from sheet conforming to ASTM B 209,
 Alloy 2024-T4.

 Provide aluminum-alloy rivets made from rod or wire conforming to
 ASTM B 316/B 316M, Alloy 6053-T61.

 Provide steel fasteners made from corrosion-resistant chromium-nickel Type
 302, 303, 304, 305, or 316 with the form and condition best suited for the
 work.

2.3     NONSKINNING SEALING COMPOUND

 Sealing compound shall be nonskinning, gun-grade type conforming to AAMA 800.

2.4     FABRICATION

2.4.1     Workmanship

 Metal Accessories shall be accurately formed; joints, except those designed
 to accommodate movement, accurately fitted and rigidly assembled.

 Insofar as practical, fitting and assembly of the work shall be done in the
 manufacturer's plant. Mark work that cannot be permanently
 factory-assembled before shipment to ensure proper assembly at the site.

2.4.2     Shop-Painting Aluminum

 Shop prime aluminum surfaces that will come in contact with dissimilar


                             SECTION 08 44 00   Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


 metals, masonry, concrete, or wood.

 Prepare aluminum surfaces for painting in accordance with ASTM D 1730, Type
 B, Method 2 or 3.

 Give aluminum surfaces one shop coat of paint applied to dry, clean,
 surfaces to provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 1.5 mils.

2.4.3     Shop-Painting Steel

 Shop prime surfaces of concealed steel.

 Remove scale, rust, and other deleterious materials. Remove heavy rust and
 loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SSPC SP 7/NACE No.4.
 Remove oil, grease, and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP 1.

 Give steel surfaces two coats of paint; the second coat shall have a color
 different from the first coat. Apply paint to dry, clean, surfaces to
 provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 1.5 mils for the first
 coat and 1 mil for the second coat.

2.4.4     Depth of Glazing Rabbets

 Depth of glazing rabbets for openings to receive glass materials or panels
 shall be as follows:

                                                              MINIMUM
                   NOMINAL                                    RABBET
        MATERIAL   THICKNESS          MAXIMUM SIZE            DEPTH

        Single-    Double strength    Up to 5 square feet     3/8 inch
        glass
        lights     Double strength    Over 5 square feet      1/2 inch

                   1/8 inch           Up to 5 square feet     3/8 inch

                   1/8 inch           5 to 25 square feet     1/2 inch

                   1/8 inch           25 to 70 square feet    5/8 inch

                   3/16 inch          Up to 25 square feet    1/2 inch

                   3/16 inch          Over 25 square feet     5/8 inch

                   7/32 inch          All sizes               5/8 inch

                   1/4 inch           Up to 100 square feet   5/8 inch

                   1/4 inch           Over 100 square feet    3/4 inch

                   5/16 inch          All sizes               3/4 inch

                   3/8 inch           All sizes               7/8 inch

                   1/2 inch           All sizes               7/8 inch

                   3/4 inch           All sizes               7/8 inch

        Double-    All thicknesses    Up to 25 square feet    5/8 inch


                               SECTION 08 44 00   Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022



                                                              MINIMUM
                   NOMINAL                                    RABBET
        MATERIAL   THICKNESS           MAXIMUM SIZE           DEPTH
        glazing
        units      All thicknesses     25 to 70 square feet   3/4 inch

        Panels     Up to 1 inch        All sizes              5/8 inch

                   1 to 1-1/2          All sizes              3/4 inch
                   inches

2.4.5     Finish

 Exposed-to-View Aluminum Finish of surfaces must be:

 Frosted finish with lacquer coating: Medium-matte chemical etch and a
 clear methacrylate lacquer coating applied in two coats with interim drying
 to provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 0.6 mil. Lacquer
 shall be nonyellowing and conform to CID A-A-344. Finish shall be AA
 C22-RIX, in accordance with AA DAF-45.

 Frosted finish with Class II clear anodic coating: Medium-matte chemical
 etch and Architectural Class II (0.4- to 0.7-mil thickness) anodic coating
 producing a natural aluminum color. Finish shall be AA C22-A31 in
 accordance with AA DAF-45.

 Frosted finish with Class I clear anodic coating: Medium-matte chemical
 etch and Architectural Class I (0.7-mil and greater thickness) anodic
 coating producing a natural aluminum color. Finish shall be AA C22-A41 in
 accordance with AA DAF-45.

 Polished frosted finish with Class II clear anodic coating: Smooth
 specular-buffed mechanical, followed by a medium-matte chemical etch and
 Architectural Class II (0.4- to 0.7-mil thickness) anodic coating producing
 a natural aluminum color. Finish shall be AA M21-C22-A31 in accordance
 with AA DAF-45.

 Polished frosted finish with integral-color anodic coating: Smooth
 specular buffed mechanical, followed by nonetching inhibitive alkaline
 cleaning, medium-matte chemical etch, and Architectural Class I ( 0.7-mil
 and greater thickness) anodic coating producing an integral-color finish.
 Color shall be: FS 20059 - Brown

 Match aluminum-finish color and appearance to that of the sample approved
 for use in the project within the aluminum producer's standard color range.

 Test the anodic coating on aluminum for thickness in accordance with
 ASTM B 244.

 Test anodically coated aluminum for the weight of the coating in accordance
 with ASTM B 137.

 Test the resistance of anodically coated aluminum to staining by dyes in
 accordance with ASTM B 136.




                                SECTION 08 44 00   Page 15
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL

 Install canopy and accessories in accordance with the approved drawings and
 as specified.

3.2     FABRICATION

 Provide canopy components of the materials and thickness indicated or
 specified. The details indicated are representative of the required design
 and profiles. Acceptable designs may differ from that shown if the
 proposed system components conform to the limiting dimensions indicated and
 the requirements specified herein. Unless specifically indicated or
 specified otherwise, the methods of fabrication and assembly shall be at
 the discretion of the canopy manufacturer. Perform fitting and assembling
 of components in the shop to the maximum extent practicable. Provide
 anchorage devices shall permit adjustment in three directions. Exposed
 fastenings used on finished surfaces shall be truss head, flat head, or
 oval head screws or bolts.

3.2.1     Joints

 Provide welded or mechanical fasteners as indicated or specified. Match
 joints in exposed work to produce continuity of line and design. Bed-joints
 or rabbets receiving calking or sealing material shall be minimum 3/4 inch
 deep and 3/8 inch wide at mid ambient temperature range.

3.2.2     Welding

 Conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use methods and electrodes recommended by
 manufacturers of base metal alloys. Provide welding rods of an alloy that
 matches the color of the metal being welded. Protect glass and other
 finish from exposure to welding spatter. Ground and finish weld beads on
 exposed metal surfaces to minimize mismatch and to blend with finish on
 adjacent parent metal. If flux is used in welding aluminum, completely
 remove it immediately upon completion of welding operations. Do not use
 exposed welds on aluminum surfaces.

3.2.3     Soldering and Brazing

 Provide as recommended by suppliers.    Solder only for filling or sealing
 joints.

3.2.4     Ventilation and Drainage

 Provide internal ventilation drainage system of weeps or based on
 principles of pressure equalization to ventilate the wall internally and to
 discharge condensation and water leakage to exterior as inconspicuously as
 possible. Flashings and other materials used internally shall be
 nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nonbleeding.

3.2.5     Protection and Treatment of Metals

3.2.5.1     General

 Remove from metal surfaces lubricants used in fabrication and clean off
 other extraneous material before leaving the shop.



                            SECTION 08 44 00   Page 16
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.2.5.2     Galvanic Action

 Provide protection against galvanic action wherever dissimilar metals are
 in contact, except in the case of aluminum in permanent contact with zinc,
 stainless steel, or relatively small areas of white bronze. Paint contact
 surfaces with one coat bituminous paint or apply appropriate calking
 material or nonabsorptive, noncorrosive, and nonstaining tape or gasket
 between contact surfaces.

3.2.5.3     Protection for Aluminum

 Protect aluminum which is placed in contact with, built into, or which will
 receive drainage from masonry, lime mortar, concrete, or plaster with one
 coat of alkali-resistant bituminous paint. Where aluminum is contacted by
 absorptive materials subject to repeated wetting or treated with
 preservative noncompatible with aluminum, apply two coats of aluminum
 paint, to such materials and seal joints with approved calking compound.

3.3     INSTALLATION

 Installation and erection of glazed wall system and all components shall be
 performed under direct supervision of and in accordance with approved
 recommendations and instructions of wall system manufacturer or fabricator.

3.3.1     Bench Marks and Reference Points

 Establish and permanently mark bench marks for elevations and building line
 offsets for alignment at convenient points on each floor level. Should any
 error or discrepancy be discovered in location of the marks, stop erection
 work in that area until discrepancies have been corrected.

3.3.2     Verifying Conditions and Adjacent Surfaces

 After establishment of lines and grades and prior to system installation
 examine supporting structural elements. Verify governing dimensions,
 including floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances
 between canopy and structural frames, and other permissible dimensional
 tolerances in the building frame.

3.3.3     Sealing

 Seal exterior metal to metal joints between members of windows, frames,
 mullions, and mullion covers. Remove excess sealant.

3.3.4     Joint Sealants

3.3.4.1     Surface Preparation

 Surfaces to be primed and sealed shall be clean, dry to the touch, free
 from frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign
 matter. Enclose joints on three sides. Clean out grooves to proper depth.
 Joint dimensions shall conform to approved detail drawings with a tolerance
 of plus 1/8 inch. Do not apply compound unless ambient temperature is
 between 40 and 90 degrees F. Clean out loose particles and mortar just
 before sealing. Remove protective coatings or coverings from surfaces in
 contact with sealants before applying sealants or tapes. Solvents used to
 remove coatings shall be of type that leave no residue on metals.




                              SECTION 08 44 00   Page 17
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.3.4.2     Applications

 Match approved sample. Force compound into grooves with sufficient
 pressure to fill grooves solidly. Sealing compound shall be uniformly
 smooth and free of wrinkles and, unless indicated otherwise, tooled and
 left sufficiently convex to result in a flush joint when dry. Do not trim
 edges of sealing material after joints are tooled. Mix only amount of
 multi-component sealant which can be installed within four hours, but at no
 time shall this amount exceed 5 gallons.

3.3.4.3     Primer

 Apply to masonry, concrete, wood, and other surfaces as recommended by
 sealant manufacturer. Do not apply primer to surfaces which will be
 exposed after calking is completed.

3.3.4.4     Backing

 Tightly pack in bottom of joints which are over 1/2 inch in depth with
 specified backing material to depth indicated or specified. Roll backing
 material of hose or rod stock into joints to prevent lengthwise stretching.

3.3.4.5     Bond Prevention

 Install bond preventive material at back or bottom of joint cavities in
 which no backstop material is required, covering full width and length of
 joint cavities.

3.3.4.6     Protection and Cleaning

 Remove compound smears from surfaces of materials adjacent to sealed joints
 as the work progresses. Use masking tape on each side of joint where
 texture of adjacent material will be difficult to clean. Remove masking
 tape immediately after filling joint. Scrape off fresh compound from
 adjacent surfaces immediately and rub clean with approved solvent. Upon
 completion of calking and sealing, remove remaining smears, stains, and
 other soiling, and leave the work in clean neat condition.

3.3.5     Glass

 Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as modified
 herein.

3.3.5.1     Inspection of Sash and Frames

 Before installing glass, inspect sash and frames to receive glass for
 defects such as dimensional variations, glass clearances, open joints, or
 other conditions that will prevent satisfactory glass installation. Do not
 proceed with installation until defects have been corrected.

3.3.5.2     Preparation of Glass and Rabbets

 Clean sealing surfaces at perimeter of glass and sealing surfaces of
 rabbets and stop beads before applying glazing compound, sealing compound,
 glazing tape, or gaskets. Use only approved solvents and cleaning agents
 recommended by compound or gasket manufacturer.




                              SECTION 08 44 00   Page 18
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


3.3.5.3     Positioning Glass

 Set glass from inside the building unless otherwise indicated or specified.
 Maintain specified edge clearances and glass bite at perimeter. Maintain
 position of glass in rabbet and provide required sealant thickness on both
 sides of glass. For glass dimensions larger than 50 united inches, provide
 setting blocks at sill and spacer shims on all four sides; locate setting
 blocks one quarter way in from each jamb edge of glass. Where setting
 blocks and spacer shims are set into glazing compound or sealant, butter
 with compound or sealant, place in position, and allow to firmly set prior
 to installation of glass.

3.3.5.4     Setting Methods

 Apply glazing compound, glazing sealant, glazing tape, and gaskets
 uniformly with accurately formed corners and bevels. Remove excess
 compound from glass and sash. Use only recommended thinners, cleaners, and
 solvents. Strip surplus compound from both sides of glass and tool at
 slight angle to shed water and provide clean sight lines. Secure stop
 beads in place with suitable fastenings. Do not apply compound or sealant
 at temperatures lower than 40 degrees F, or on damp, dirty, or dusty
 surfaces. After glazing, fix ventilators in sash so they cannot be
 operated until compound or sealant has set.

  a.    Use sealant glazing to completely fill channel on edges and on both
        sides of glass.

  b.    Use lock-strip gasket glazing, with lock-strip glazing gaskets .
        Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using
        special tools and lubricants. When lock-strip type gaskets are used
        for glazing insulating glass units, follow glass manufacturer's
        recommendations regarding horizontal wall supports between vertical
        units, setting blocks, weep holes, and the use of supplementary wet
        sealants.

3.3.5.5     Void Space

 Heat absorbing, insulating, spandrel, and tempered glass, and glass of
 other types that exceed 100 united inches in size: Provide void space at
 head and jamb to allow glass to expand or move without exuding the sealant.

3.4     FINISHES

3.4.1     Galvanizing

 Conform to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, and ASTM A 653/A 653M, as
 applicable.

3.4.1.1     Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces

 Repair zinc coated surfaces damaged by welding or other means with
 galvanizing repair paint or by application of stick or thick paste material
 specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved.

3.4.2     Shop Cleaning and Painting

3.4.2.1     Cleaning

 Clean steel and iron work by power wire brushing or other approved manual


                              SECTION 08 44 00   Page 19
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 or mechanical means, for removal of rust, loose paint, scale, and
 deleterious substances. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated
 with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other foreign matter, with solvents until
 thoroughly clean. Cleaning steel embedded in concrete is not required.

3.4.2.2     Painting Steel or Iron Surfaces

 Apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Apply additional
 shop coat of specified paint, to which a small amount of tinting material
 has been added, on surfaces that will be concealed in the finished
 construction or that will not be accessible for finish painting. Accomplish
 painting in dry weather or under cover, and on steel or iron surfaces that
 are free from moisture and frost. Do not paint surfaces of items to be
 embedded in concrete. Recoat damaged surfaces upon completion of work.
 Prime coat steel immediately after cleaning. Do not apply bituminous
 protective coatings to items to be finish painted.

3.4.2.3     Painting Weathering Steel

 Clean and paint surfaces which will not be exposed to the weather with one
 shop or field coat of specified primer, or other approved rust-inhibitive
 primer. Clean and strip-paint weathering steel contact surface to be
 covered by structural or compression gaskets or sealants with one coat to
 insure positive seal.

3.5     FIELD TESTS

 Conduct field check test for water leakage on designated wall areas after
 erection.

3.6     CLEANING AND PROTECTION

3.6.1     General

 At the completion of the installation, clean the work to remove mastic
 smears and other foreign materials.

3.6.2     Glass

 Upon completion of wall system installation, thoroughly wash glass surfaces
 on both sides and remove labels, paint spots, putty, compounds, and other
 defacements. Replace cracked, broken, and defective glass with new glass
 at no additional cost to the Government.

3.6.3     Aluminum Surfaces

 Protection methods, cleaning, and maintenance shall be in accordance with
 AAMA 609 & 610.

3.6.4     Other Metal Surfaces

 After installation, protect windows, panels, and other exposed surfaces
 from disfiguration, contamination, contact with harmful materials, and from
 other construction hazards that will interfere with their operation, or
 damage their appearance or finish. Protection methods must be in
 accordance with recommendations of product manufacturers or of the
 respective trade association. Remove paper or tape factory applied
 protection immediately after installation. Clean surfaces of mortar,
 plaster, paint, smears of sealants, and other foreign matter to present


                              SECTION 08 44 00   Page 20
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022


 neat appearance and prevent fouling of operation. In addition, wash with a
 stiff fiber brush, soap and water, and thoroughly rinse. Where surfaces
 become stained or discolored, clean or restore finish in accordance with
 recommendations of product manufacturer or the respective trade association.

3.6.5     Porcelain-Enamel Surfaces

 Wash surfaces with clean water and soap and rinsed with clean water.          Do
 not use acid solutions, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives.

3.7     SCHEDULE

 Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical
 conversion of inch-pound measurements, and not on metric measurement
 commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound
 and metric measurements are as follows:

  PRODUCTS             INCH-POUND            METRIC

  Glass               1/4 inch              6 mm

3.8     MATERIALS EMBEDDED IN OTHER CONSTRUCTION

 Install materials to be embedded in precast concrete and panels prior to
 the installation of the canopy. Provide setting drawings, templates, and
 instructions for installation.

3.9     FASTENING TO CONSTRUCTION-IN-PLACE

 Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for fastening work to
 construction-in-place. Provide fasteners as specified.

3.10     SETTING MASONRY ANCHORAGE DEVICES

 Set devices in masonry or concrete-in-place construction in accordance with
 the manufacturer's printed instructions. Leave drilled holes rough and
 free of drill dust.

3.11     FIELD-WELDING STEEL AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

 Procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, the appearance and quality
 of the welds made, and the methods used in correcting welding work shall
 conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

 After completion of welding, clean and paint field welds and scarred
 surfaces on steel work and on adjacent ferrous-metal surfaces. Paint shall
 be the same as that used for shop painting.

3.12     INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

 Install canopy within the following tolerances:

              Deviation in location from that         Plus or minus 1/4 inch
              indicated on the drawings

              Deviation from the plumb or
              horizontal

                   In 12 feet of length               Not more than 1/8 inch


                             SECTION 08 44 00      Page 21
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



                  In any total length              Not more than 1/2 inch

              Offset from true alignment at        Not more than 1/16 inch
              joints between abutting members
              in line

3.13     PLACING CANOPY FRAMING MEMBERS

 Install members plumb, level, and within the limits of the installation
 tolerances specified.

 Connect members to building framing. Provide supporting brackets
 adjustments for the accurate location of canopy components. Adjustable
 connections shall be rigidly fixed after members have been positioned.

3.14     PANEL INSTALLATION

 Panels shall be set with a glazing-tape back bed, two-component elastomeric
 sealing-compound heel bead, glazing-tape bedding of the stop, and
 two-component elastomeric sealing-compound topping bead on both sides of
 the panel. Face and edge clearances shall not be less than 1/8 inch.
 Remove excess sealing compound on both sides of the canopy opening with a
 glazing knife at a slight angle over the rabbet leg or applied stop.
 Install applied stops on the top side of the canopy and secured with screws.

3.15     INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS

3.15.1     Finished Canopy Requirements

 Canopy work shall be rejected for any of the following deficiencies:

 Finish of exposed-to-view aluminum having color and appearance that are
 outside the color and appearance range of the approved samples.

 Installed canopy components having stained, discolored, abraded, or
 otherwise damaged exposed-to-view surfaces that cannot be cleaned or
 repaired.

 Aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials that are not
 protected as specified.

3.15.2     Repair of Defective Work

 Remove and replace defective work with canopy materials that meet the
 specifications at no expense to the Government.

          -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 08 44 00   Page 22
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 08 71 00

                                  DOOR HARDWARE
                                      08/08

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM E 283                         (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
                                    Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
                                    and Doors Under Specified Pressure
                                    Differences Across the Specimen

            BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

 ANSI/BHMA A156.13                  (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000

 ANSI/BHMA A156.15                  (2006) Release Devices -- Closer Holder,
                                    Electromagnetic and Electromechanical

 ANSI/BHMA A156.21                  (2009) American National Standard for
                                    Thresholds

 ANSI/BHMA A156.3                   (2008) Exit Devices

 ANSI/BHMA A156.4                   (2008) Door Controls - Closers

 ANSI/BHMA A156.5                   (2001) Auxiliary Locks and Associated
                                    Products

 ANSI/BHMA A156.7                   (2009) Template Hinge Dimensions

 ANSI/BHMA A156.8                   (2005) Door Controls - Overhead Stops and
                                    Holders

 BHMA A156.1                        (2006) Butts and Hinges

 BHMA A156.16                       (2008) Auxiliary Hardware

 BHMA A156.18                       (2006) Materials and Finishes

 BHMA A156.22                       (2005) Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems

 BHMA A156.6                        (2005) Architectural Door Trim

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 101                           (2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code

 NFPA 80                            (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors


                            SECTION 08 71 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


                                       and Other Opening Protectives

           STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)

 SDI/DOOR A250.8                       (2003; R2008) Recommended Specifications
                                       for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

           UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 14C                                (2006; R 2008) Standard for Swinging
                                       Hardware for Standard Tin-Clad Fire Doors
                                       Mounted Singly and in Pairs

 UL Bld Mat Dir                        (2009) Building Materials Directory

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES.

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

           Hardware schedule;G

           Keying system; G

      SD-03 Product Data

           Hardware items

      SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

           Installation

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

           Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1

           Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION
           AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

      SD-11 Closeout Submittals

      Key Bitting

1.3   HARDWARE SCHEDULE

 A.   Manufacturer's Abbreviations:

 1.   CR   -   Corbin Russwin
 2.   MC   -   McKinney
 3.   NO   -   Norton
 4.   PE   -   Pemko
 5.   RO   -   Rockwood
 6.   RX   -   Rixson
 7.   SN   -   Securitron

 Hardware Set 1      Not Used



                                SECTION 08 71 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 Doors: S2-41

    3   Hinges                 A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP               26D
    1   Storeroom Lock         F07 Less Outside Trim (Locked Inside) 630
    1   Closer/Stop            C02061 PT 4G                          689
    1   Protection Plate       J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E             US32D
    1   Door Position Switch   GFGI
    1   Raindrip               R3Y035 x Door width + 4"
    1   Gasket                 ROE154 x LAR
    1   Threshold              J36130 x LAR


 Hardware Set 2

    Doors: 101B, 101C, 101D

    3   Hinges                 A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP     26D
    1   Closer                 C02021                      689
    1   Concealed OH Stop      C01541                      630
    1   Protection Plate       J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Door Position Switch   GFGI
    1   Rain Drip              R3Y035 x Door Width + 4"
    1   Gasket                 ROE154 x LAR
    1   Door Bottom Sweep      R3B435 x LAR
    1   Threshold              J32130 x LAR

 Note: Sound gasket by door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.


    Hardware Set 3

    Doors: S1-12, S2-12F

    3   Hinges                 A5111 5 X 4 1/2 NRP                    26D
    1   Alarmed Exit Device    Type 1, Function 01 w/Local Alarm      630
    1   Closer                 C02021                                 689
    1   Concealed OH Stop      C01541                                 630
    1   Protection Plate       J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK              US32D
    1   Door Position Switch   GFGI
    1   Raindrip               R3Y035 Door width + 4"
    1   Door Bottom Sweep      R3B435 x LAR
    1   Threshold              J32130 x LAR

   Note: Sound gasket by door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.


 Hardware Set 4

 Doors: S3-01

    3   Hinges                 A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP                26D
    1   Alarmed Exit Device    Type 1, Function 01 w/Local Alarm      630
    1   Closer                 C02021                                 689
    1   Concealed OH Stop      C01541                                 630
    1   Protection Plate       J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK              US32D
    1   Door Position Switch   GFGI
    1   Raindrip               R3Y035 Door width + 4"
    1   Door Bottom Sweep      R3B435 x LAR
    1   Threshold              J32130 x LAR


                           SECTION 08 71 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



   Note: Sound gasket by door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.


    Hardware Set 5

    Doors: 031-A, 041-A, 043-C

    3   Hinges                   A5111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP     26D
    1   Storeroom Lock           F07                         630
    1   Closer/Stop              C02061 PT 4G                689
    1   Protection Plate         J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    1   Door Position Switch     GFGI
    1   Raindrip                 R3Y035 x Door width + 4"
    1   Gasket                   ROE154 x LAR
    1   Threshold                J36130 x LAR


    Hardware Set 6

    Doors: 101-A

    3   Butt Hinge               A8111 5 X 4 1/2             26D     MC
    1   Storeroom Lock           F07                         630     CR
    1   Protection Plate         J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D   RO
    1   Wall Bumper              L02251                      US26D   RO
    3   Door Silencers           L03011                              MC


    Hardware Set 7

 Doors: 104-A

    6   Butt Hinges              A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    2   Push/Pull Bar Set        J504                        630
    2   Closer                   C02041                      689
    2   Protection Plate         J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    2   Wall Bumper              L02251                      US26D
    2   Door Silencers           L03011

   Note: Perimeter gasket by doo/frame manufacturer.


    Hardware Set 8

    Doors: 104-B

    6   Butt Hinges              A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    2   Door Pull                J302                        630
    2   Push Plate               J405                        630
    2   Closer                   C02021                      689
    2   Protection Plate         J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    2   Wall Bumper              L02251                      US26D
    2   Door Silencers           L03011


    Hardware Set 9

    Doors: S2-11


                            SECTION 08 71 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2                 26D
    1   Fire Exit Device        Type 1, Function 14 Fire Rated      630
    1   Closer/Stop             C02061 PT 4G                        689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK           US32D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR                        PE


    Hardware Set 10

 Doors: S2-21, S1-21

    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 5 X 4 1/2                     26D
    1   Fire Exit Device        Type 1, Function 14 Fire Rated      630
    1   Closer                  C02011                              689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK           US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                              US26D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR


    Hardware Set 11

    Doors: S2-01, S1-11, S2-21, S1-21, S2-31, S1-31

    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2                 26D
    1   Fire Exit Device        Type 1, Function 14 Fire Rated      630
    1   Closer                  C02011                              689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK           US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                              US26D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR


    Hardware Set 11-A

    Doors: S3-02

    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 ½ NRP             26D
    1   Fire Exit Device        Type 1, Func 01 w/Local Alarm x Fire Rated
                                                                  630
    1   Closer                  C02011                            689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK         US32D
    1   Door Position Switch    GFGI
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                            US26D
    1   Raindrip                R3Y035 x Door width + 4"
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR
    1   Threshold               J36130 x LAR


 Hardware Set 12 Not Used

 Hardware Set 13

    Doors: 039A

    6   Hinges                  A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP     26D
    2   Flush Bolts             L04251                      US26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    2   Closer                  C02021                      689


                            SECTION 08 71 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    2   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    2   Door Position Switch    GFGI

 Note: Sound gasketing including threshold by Acoustic door manufacturer to
 comply with STC rating and applicable fire label.


    Hardware Set 14

    Doors: 208, 310

    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Door Pull               J302                        630
    1   Push Plate              J405                        630
    1   Closer/Stop             C02061 PT 4G                689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    1   Sound Seal              322 CSN x LAR
    1   Auto Door Bottom        4301 CNBL x LAR
    1   Threshold               154 A x LAR

 Note: SCIF entrance. High security lock and associated security equipment
 by government/security section. Sound gasketing by Acoustic door
 manufacturer to comply with STC rating.


    Hardware Set 15

    Doors: 001

    6   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    2   Flush Bolts             L04251                      US26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    1   Concealed OH Stop       C01541                      630
    1   Dust Proof Strike       L04021                      US26D
    2   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 16

    Doors: 006

    6   Hinges                  A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D     MC
    1   Exit Device             Type 7, Function 04         630
    1   Exit Device             Type 7, Function 01         630
    2   Closer                  C02011                      689     NO
    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D   RO
    2   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D   RO
    2   Door Silencers          L03011                              MC
    2   Door Position Switch    GFGI                                SN


    Hardware Set 16-A

    Doors: 002, 004

    6   Hinges                  A8111 4 1/2    X 4 1/2               26D


                            SECTION 08 71 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


    2   Flush Bolts             L04251                              US26D
    1   Electrified Lock        A156.13 Series 1000 x Fail Secure   630
    2   Closer                  C02011/C02021 as req'd              689
    1   Coordinator             A156.3, Type 21                     PC
    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E           US32D
    2   Wall Bumper             L02251                              US26D
    1   Dust Proof Strike       L04021                              US26D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR
    2   Astragal                ROE155 x LAR
    2   Auto Door Bottom        R3C335 x LAR
    1   Threshold               J32330
    2   Door Position Switch    GFGI                                        SN

 Note: Card reade, power transfer, power supply and associated equipment by
 government/security section.


 Hardware Set 17

    Doors: 231, 131, 331

    6   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    2   Closer                  C02011                      689
    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    2   OH Stop                 C01541                      US26D
    1   Dust Proof Strike       L04021                      US26D
    2   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 18

    Doors: 202, 302, 309-B, 327, 213, 127, 227

    3   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 19

    Doors: 036

    3   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 20

    Doors: 053, 224, 242, 205

    6   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    2   Flush Bolts             L04251/557 as req'd         US26D


                            SECTION 08 71 00   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    1   Coordinator             A156.3, Type 21             PC
    2   Closer                  C02011/C02021 as req'd      689
    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    2   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    1   Dust Proof Strike       L04021                      US26D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR
    2   Astragal                ROE155 x LAR


    Hardware Set 21

    Doors: 147, 219, 309-A, 320, 333, 338, 339

    3   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR


    Hardware Set 22

    Doors: Not Used

    Hardware Set 23

    Doors: 218-A, 236

    6   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    2   Flush Bolts             L04251                      US26D
    1   Office Lock             F04                         630
    1   Core                    Per Facility Key System     630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    2   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 1" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    2   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    1   Dust Proof Strike       570                         US26D
    2   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 24

 Doors: 047, 055, 102, 106, 107, 108, 110, 111, 112, 117, 118, 120, 121,
 124, 135, 139, 143, 145, 214, 216, 220, 222, 233, 235, 238, 240, 243, 245,
 247, 249, 305, 307, 313, 314, 316, 324, 335, 343, 345, 347, 353, 355, 357

    3   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Office Lock             F04                         630
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 25

 Doors: 033, 051, 113, 119, 122, 210, 218-B, 237, 239, 308, 309-C, 309-D,
 312, 318, 337, 341, 351



                            SECTION 08 71 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


    3   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Office Lock             F04                         630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 26

    Doors: 137, 141, 153, 241

    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Office Lock             F04                         630
    1   Closer                  C02021                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 27

    Doors: 026, 126, 133, 138, 215, 226, 253, 317, 326, 359

    3   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Passage Set             F01                         630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 28

    Doors: 032, 130, 230, 330

    3   Butt Hinge              A8112 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Privacy Set             F22 x Occupanct Indicator   630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 29

 Doors: Not Used

    Hardware Set 30

    Doors: 034, 132, 134, 232, 234, 332, 334

    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D
    1   Door Pull               J405                        US32D
    1   Push Plate              J302                        US32D
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Protection Plate        J102 6" x 1" LDW 4BE CSK    US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D


                           SECTION 08 71 00    Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 31

 Doors: Not Used

    Hardware Set 32

 Doors: Not Used

    Hardware Set 32-A

    Doors: 115, 125, 225, 325

    3   Hinges                  A8111 5 X 4 1/2             26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR


 Hardware Set 33

    Doors: 123, 128, 223, 228, 319, 323, 328

    3   Hinges                  A8111 5 X 4 1/2             26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    1   Closer                  C02021                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


    Hardware Set 34

    Doors: 028

    3   Hinges                  A8111 4 1/2 X 4 ½ NRP       26D
    1   Storeroom Lock          F07                         630
    1   Closer/Stop             C02021 PT 4G                689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    1   Door Position Switch    GFGI
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR
    1   Door Sweep              R3A155


    Hardware Set 34-A

    Doors: 103, 109, 129, 203, 229, 303, 329

    3   Hinges                  A8111 5 X 4 ½ NRP           26D
    1   Office Lock             F04                         630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    1   Gasket                  ROE154 x LAR




                           SECTION 08 71 00   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


 Hardware Set 35

   Doors: Not Used

 Hardware Set 36

    Doors: 103, 109, 129, 203, 229, 303, 329

    3   Hinges                  A8111 5 X 4 ½               26D
    1   Classroom Lock          F05                         630
    1   Closer                  C02011                      689
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW CSK B4E   US32D
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D
    3   Door Silencers          L03011


 Hardware Set 37

    Doors: Not Used

 Hardware Set 38

    Doors: Not Used

    Hardware Set 39

    Doors: Not Used

 Hardware Set 40

    Doors: Not Used

 Hardware Set 41

    Doors: Not Used

 Hardware Set 42

    Doors: 105, 136-A, 136-B, 207, 209, 211, 217-A, 217-B, 251, 315-A,
 315-B, 336-A, 336-B

    3   Butt Hinges             A8111 4 1/2 X 4 1/2         26D     MC
    1   Office Lock             F04                         630     CR
    1   Closer                  Co2011/c02021 as req'd      689     NO
    1   Protection Plate        J102 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK   US32D   RO
    1   Wall Bumper             L02251                      US26D   RO

 Note: Door, frame, threshold, door bottom, hinges (if required) and sound
 gasketing by Acoustic door manufacturer to comply with STC rating.


 Hardware Set 43

    Doors: Roof Hatch Stair 1

    1   Padlock                 As required                 630
    1   Door Position Switch    GFGI




                           SECTION 08 71 00   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022


 Hardware Set 44

      Doors: 031-B, 043-A, 043-B, 041-B

      1        Door Position Switch   GFGI

 Note: All hardware by door manufacturer.


1.4       KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS

 Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer prior to completion of
 the work. Include:

          a.    Complete listing of all keys (AA1, AA2, etc.).

          b.    Complete listing of all key cuts (AA1-123456, AA2-123458).

          c.    Tabulation showing which key fits which door.

          d.    Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers.

          e.    Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in
                each master system.

1.5       QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1       Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications

 Provide, as far as feasible, locks, hinges, and closers of one lock, hinge,
 or closer manufacturer's make. Modify hardware as necessary to provide
 features indicated or specified.

1.5.1       Key Shop Drawings Coordination Meeting

 Prior to the submission of the key shop drawing, the
 Contracting Officer, Contractor, Door Hardware subcontractor, using
 Activity and Base Locksmith shall meet to discuss key requirements for the
 facility.

1.6       DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary
 appurtenances including fasteners and instructions. Mark each individual
 container with item number as shown in hardware schedule. Deliver
 permanent keys and removable cores to the Contracting Officer, either
 directly or by certified mail. Deliver construction master keys with the
 locks.

PART 2         PRODUCTS

2.1       TEMPLATE HARDWARE

 Provide hardware to be applied to metal or to prefinished doors
 manufactured to template. Promptly furnish template information or
 templates to door and frame manufacturers. Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7 for
 template hinges. Coordinate hardware items to prevent interference with
 other hardware.



                                SECTION 08 71 00   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2     HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS

 Provide all hardware necessary to meet the requirements of NFPA 80 for fire
 doors and NFPA 101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements
 indicated, even if such hardware is not specifically mentioned under
 paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule." Conform to UL 14C for swinging
 hardware for the tin-clad fire doors. Provide the label of Underwriters
 Laboratories, Inc. for such hardware listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or labeled
 and listed by another testing laboratory acceptable to the Contracting
 Officer.

2.3     HARDWARE ITEMS

 Clearly and permanently mark with the manufacturer's name or trademark,
 hinges, pivots, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts and closers where the
 identifying mark will be visible after the item is installed. For closers
 with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath the cover.

2.3.1     Hinges

 BHMA A156.1, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. Construct
 loose pin hinges for exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors so
 that pins will be nonremovable when door is closed. Other antifriction
 bearing hinges may be provided in lieu of ball-bearing hinges.

2.3.4     Locks and Latches

2.3.4.1     Mortise Locks and Latches

 ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, Security Grade 2.
 Install knobs and roses of mortise locks with screwless shanks and no
 exposed screws.

2.3.4.6     Auxiliary Locks

 ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

2.3.2     Exit Devices

 ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type and
 vertical rod devices. Provide open back strikes for pairs of doors with
 mortise and vertical rod devices. Provide touch bars in lieu of
 conventional crossbars and arms.

2.3.7 Lock Cylinders (Mortise, Rim and Bored)

 Lock cylinders shall comply with BEMA A156.5. Lock cylinder shall have
 not less than seven pins. Cylinders shall have key removable type cores.
 An extension of the existing keying system shall be provided. Keyway "D".
 The existing locks were manufactured by Best and have interchangeable
 cores, construction interchangeable cores shall be provided. Disassembly of
 knob or lockset shall not be required to remove core from lockset. All
 locks, exit devices and padlocks shall accept interchangeable
 cores.

2.3.8     Keying System

 Locks shall be keyed in sets or subsets as schedule. Locks shall be
 furnished with ma nufacturers standard construction key system. Change keys


                              SECTION 08 71 00   Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 for locks shall be stamped with the change number and the inscription "US
 Property - Do Not Duplicate." Keys shall be supplied as follows:

    Locks:                     2   change keys each lock.
    Master keyed sets:         2   keys each set.
    Grand master keys:         2   total.
    Construction keys:         2   total.
    Blank keys:               15   total.

2.3.3     Lock Trim

 Cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design.

2.3.3.1     Lever Handles

 Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs where indicated in paragraph
 entitled "Hardware Schedule". Conform to the minimum requirements of
 ANSI/BHMA A156.13 for mortise locks of lever handles for exit devices.
 Provide lever handle locks with a breakaway feature (such as a weakened
 spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable damage to the lock when
 force in excess of that specified in ANSI/BHMA A156.13 is applied to the
 lever handle. Provide lever handles return to within 1/2 inch of the door
 face.

2.3.3.2     Texture

 Provide knurled or abrasive coated knobs or lever handles where specified
 in paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule" for doors which are accessible to
 blind persons and which lead to dangerous areas.

2.3.4     Door Bolts

 BHMA A156.16. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom bolts, except for doors
 having metal thresholds. Automatic latching flush bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3,
 Type 25.

2.3.5     Closers

 ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with PT 4C. Provide with
 brackets, arms, mounting devices, fasteners, full size covers, except at
 storefront mounting, and other features necessary for the particular
 application. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer's
 recommendations, or provide multi-size closers, Sizes 1 through 6, and list
 sizes in the Hardware Schedule. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty.

2.3.5.1     Identification Marking

 Engrave each closer with manufacturer's name or trademark, date of
 manufacture, and manufacturer's size designation located to be visible
 after installation.

2.3.6     Overhead Holders

 ANSI/BHMA A156.8.

2.3.7     Closer Holder-Release Devices

 ANSI/BHMA A156.15.



                             SECTION 08 71 00   Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3.8     Door Protection Plates

 BHMA A156.6.

2.3.8.1     Sizes of Mop and Kick Plates

  2 inch less than door width for single doors; one inch less than door
 width for pairs of doors. Provide 10 inch kick plates for flush doors and
 one inch less than height of bottom rail for panel doors. Provide a minimum
 36 inch armor plates for flush doors and completely cover lower panels of
 panel doors, except 16 inch high armor plates on fire doors. Provide 6 inch
  mop plates.

2.3.17     Door Stops and Silencers

 BHMA A156.16. Silencers Type L03011.      Provide three silencers for each
 single door, two for each pair.

2.3.19     Thresholds

 ANSI/BHMA A156.21. Use J35100, with vinyl or silicone rubber insert in
 face of stop, for exterior doors opening out, unless specified otherwise.

2.3.9     Weather Stripping Gasketing

 BHMA A156.22. Provide the type and function designation where specified in
 paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule". Provide a set to include head and
 jamb seals, sweep strips, and, for pairs of doors, astragals. Air leakage
 of weather stripped doors not to exceed 0.5 cubic feet per minute of air
 per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
 Provide weather stripping with one of the following:

2.3.9.1     Extruded Aluminum Retainers

 Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.050 inch wall thickness with
 vinyl, neoprene, silicone rubber, or polyurethane inserts. Provide bronze
 anodized aluminum.

2.3.9.2     Interlocking Type

 Zinc or bronze not less than 0.018 inch thick.

2.3.9.3     Spring Tension Type

 Spring bronze or stainless steel not less than 0.008 inch thick.

2.3.22     Rain Drips

 Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.08 inch thick, bronze anodized.     Set
 drips in sealant and fasten with stainless steel screws.

2.3.10     Door Rain Drips

 Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 5/8 inch projection.     Align bottom with
 bottom edge of door.

2.3.11     Overhead Rain Drips

 Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 2-1/2 inch projection, with length equal


                             SECTION 08 71 00   Page 15
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 to overall width of door frame.    Align bottom with door frame rabbet.

2.3.12     Special Tools

 Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging
 keys, required to service and adjust hardware items.

2.4     FASTENERS

 Provide fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with
 hardware. Provide stainless steel or nonferrous metal fasteners that are
 exposed to weather. Provide fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a
 permanent installation.

2.5     FINISHES

 BHMA A156.18. Provide hardware in BHMA 630 finish (satin stainless steel),
 unless specified otherwise. Provide items not manufactured in stainless
 steel in BHMA 626 finish (satin chromium plated) over brass or bronze,
 except aluminum paint finish for surface door closers. Provide hinges for
 exterior doors in stainless steel with BHMA 630 finish or chromium plated
 brass or bronze with BHMA 626 finish. Furnish exit devices in BHMA 626
 finish in lieu of BHMA 630 finish except where BHMA 630 is specified under
 paragraph entitled "Hardware Sets". Match exposed parts of concealed
 closers to lock and door trim. Match hardware finish for aluminum doors to
 the doors.

2.6     KEY CABINET AND CONTROL SYSTEM

 ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Type required to yield a capacity (number of hooks) 50
 percent greater than the number of key changes used for door locks.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

 Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed installation
 instructions. Fasten hardware to wood surfaces with full-threaded wood
 screws or sheet metal screws. Provide machine screws set in expansion
 shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry surfaces.
 Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core
 construction. Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory
 installation.

3.1.1     Weather Stripping Installation

 Handle and install weather stripping to prevent damage. Provide full
 contact, weather-tight seals. Operate doors without binding.

3.1.1.1     Stop-Applied Weather Stripping

 Fasten in place with color-matched sheet metal screws not more than       9 inch
 on center after doors and frames have been finish painted.

3.1.1.2     Interlocking Type Weather Stripping

 Provide interlocking, self-adjusting type on heads and jambs and flexible
 hook type at sills. Nail weather stripping to door one inch on center and
 to heads and jambs at 4 inch on center


                            SECTION 08 71 00   Page 16
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



3.1.2     Soundproofing Installation

 Install as specified for stop-applied weather stripping.

3.1.2     Threshold Installation

 Extend thresholds the full width of the opening and notch end for jamb
 stops. Set thresholds in a full bed of sealant and anchor to floor with
 cadmium-plated, countersunk, steel screws in expansion sleeves.

3.2     FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS

 Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 for fire doors, NFPA 101 for
 exit doors.

3.3     HARDWARE LOCATIONS

 SDI/DOOR A250.8, unless indicated or specified otherwise.

        a.   Kick and Armor Plates: Push side of single-acting doors.   Both
             sides of double-acting doors.

        b.   Mop Plates:   Bottom flush with bottom of door.

3.4     KEY CABINET AND CONTROL SYSTEM

 Locate where indicated. Tag one set of file keys and one set of duplicate
 keys. Place other keys in appropriately marked envelopes, or tag each
 key. Furnish complete instructions for setup and use of key control
 system. On tags and envelopes, indicate door and room numbers or master or
 grand master key.

3.5     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

 After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and
 other damage until acceptance of work. Submit notice of testing 15 days
 before scheduled, so that testing can be witnessed by the Contracting
 Officer. Adjust hinges, locks, latches, bolts, holders, closers, and other
 items to operate properly. Demonstrate that permanent keys operate
 respective locks, and give keys to the Contracting Officer. Correct,
 repair, and finish, as directed, errors in cutting and fitting and damage
 to adjoining work.


          -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 08 71 00   Page 17
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



                                SECTION 08 81 00

                                        GLAZING
                                         02/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1     REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM C 1036                        (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
                                    Glass

 ASTM C 509                         (2006) Elastomeric Cellular Preformed
                                    Gasket and Sealing Material

 ASTM D 2287                        (1996; R 2010) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride
                                    Polymer and Copolymer Molding and
                                    Extrusion Compounds

 ASTM D 395                         (2003; R 2008) Standard Test Methods for
                                    Rubber Property - Compression Set

            GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

 GANA Glazing Manual                (2004) Glazing Manual

 GANA Sealant Manual                (2008) Sealant Manual

            INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)

 IGMA TB-3001                       (1990) Guidelines for Sloped Glazing

 IGMA TM-3000                       (1997) Glazing Guidelines for Sealed
                                    Insulating Glass Units

            U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

 LEED                               (2009) Leadership in Energy and
                                    Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
                                    Rating System for New Construction
                                    (LEED-NC) v3.0

            U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 16 CFR 1201                        Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
                                    Materials

1.2     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office


                            SECTION 08 81 00      Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Installation; G

               Drawings showing complete details of the proposed setting
             methods, mullion details, edge blocking, size of openings, frame
             details, materials, and types and thickness of glass.

         SD-03 Product Data

             Glazing Accessories

               Manufacturer's descriptive product data, handling and storage
             recommendations, installation instructions, and cleaning
             instructions.

         SD-04 Samples

             Glazing Tape

             Sealant

         SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

             Setting and sealing materials

             Glass setting

               Submit glass manufacturer's recommendations for setting and
             sealing materials and for installation of each type of glazing
             material specified.

         SD-11 Closeout Submittals

             Local/Regional Materials; LEED

               LEED (tm) documentation relative to local/regional materials
             credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
             Documentation Notebook.

1.3   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver products to the site in unopened containers, labeled plainly with
 manufacturers' names and brands. Store glass and setting materials in
 safe, enclosed dry locations and do not unpack until needed for
 installation. Handle and install materials in a manner that will protect
 them from damage.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1   GLASS

 ASTM C 1036, unless specified otherwise. In doors and sidelights, provide
 safety glazing material conforming to 16 CFR 1201.




                               SECTION 08 81 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.1     Clear Glass

 For interior glazing 3/8 inch thick laminated glass should be used.

 Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q4 (A).

2.1.2     Mirrors

2.1.2.1     Glass Mirrors

 Glass for mirrors shall be Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear,
 Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Glass shall
 be coated on one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating,
 and mirror backing paint. Silver coating shall be highly adhesive pure
 silver coating of a thickness which shall provide reflectivity of 83
 percent or more of incident light when viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass,
 and shall be free of pinholes or other defects. Copper protective coating
 shall be pure bright reflective copper, homogeneous without sludge,
 pinholes or other defects, and shall be of proper thickness to prevent
 "adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Mirror backing paint shall
 consist of two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint , and
 shall be baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and
 copper coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.

2.2     Sealants

 Provide elastomeric sealants.

2.3     Preformed Channels

 Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer for
 the particular condition.

2.4     Sealing Tapes

 Preformed, semisolid, PVC-based material of proper size and compressibility
 for the particular condition, complying with ASTM D 2287. Use only where
 glazing rabbet is designed for tape and tape is recommended by the glass or
 sealant manufacturer. Provide spacer shims for use with compressible
 tapes. Tapes shall be chemically compatible with the product being set.

2.5     Setting Blocks and Edge Blocks

 Closed-cell neoprene setting blocks shall be dense extruded type conforming
 to ASTM C 509 and ASTM D 395, Method B, Shore A durometer between 70 and
 90. Edge blocking shall be Shore A durometer of 50 (+ or - 5). Silicone
 setting blocks shall be required when blocks are in contact with silicone
 sealant. Profiles, lengths and locations shall be as required and
 recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Block color shall be black.

2.6     Silicone Caulk Joints

 Where indicated, provide 1/4" wide clear silicone butt glazing joints.

2.7     Accessories

 Provide as required for a complete installation, including glazing points,
 clips, shims, angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide noncorroding metal
 accessories. Provide primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by the


                                SECTION 08 81 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 glass and sealant manufacturers.

2.8     MIRROR ACCESSORIES

2.8.1     Mirror Frames

 Mirrors shall be provided with mirror frames (J-mold channels) fabricated
 of one-piece roll-formed Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 brushed satin
 finish and concealed fasteners which will keep mirrors snug to wall.
 Frames shall be 1-1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 inch continuous at top and bottom of
 mirrors. Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall construction material
 shall be provided with mirror frames.

2.8.2     Mirror Clips

 Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall construction material shall be
 provided with clips.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     PREPARATION

 Preparation, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to
 applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual,
 IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations.   Determine
 the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by measuring the actual
 opening to receive the glass. Grind smooth in the shop glass edges that
 will be exposed in finish work. Leave labels in place until the
 installation is approved, except remove applied labels on heat-absorbing
 glass and on insulating glass units as soon as glass is installed. Securely
 fix movable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing
 compound has thoroughly set.

3.2      GLASS SETTING

 Shop glaze or field glaze items to be glazed using glass of the quality and
 thickness specified or indicated. Glazing, unless otherwise specified or
 approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the
 GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and
 manufacturer's recommendations. Handle and install glazing materials in
 accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use beads or stops which are
 furnished with items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. Verify
 products are properly installed, connected, and adjusted.

3.2.1     Sheet Glass

 Cut and set with the visible lines or waves horizontal.

3.3     PROTECTION

 Glass work shall be protected immediately after installation. Glazed
 openings shall be identified with suitable warning tapes, cloth or paper
 flags, attached with non-staining adhesives.

3.4     WASTE MANAGEMENT

 Disposal and recycling of waste materials, including corrugated cardboard
 recycling, shall be in accordance with the Waste Management Plan.



                             SECTION 08 81 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


3.5   SCHEDULE

 Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical
 conversion of inch-pound measurements, and not on metric measurement
 commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound
 and metric measurements are as follows:

 PRODUCTS                       INCH-POUND              METRIC

 Glass                           1/8 inch               3 mm
                                 3/16 inch              4.5 mm
                                 7/32 inch              6 mm
                                 1/4 inch               6 mm
                                 3/8 inch               10 mm

 Interlayer                      0.015 inch             0.38 mm

 Glazing Channels                1/4 inch               6 mm


         -- End of Section --




                            SECTION 08 81 00   Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



                                   SECTION 08 91 00

                                  METAL WALL LOUVERS
                                         08/08

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

 AMCA 500-D                           (1998) Laboratory Methods of Testing
                                      Dampers for Rating

 AMCA 511                             (1999; R 2004) Certified Ratings Program
                                      for Air Control Devices

             ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

 AA DAF-45                            (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
                                      for Aluminum Finishes

             AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

 AAMA 611                             (1998; R 2004) Voluntary Specification for
                                      Anodized Architectural Aluminum

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM B 221                           (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                      and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                                      Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Wall louvers; G

         SD-03 Product Data

             Metal Wall Louvers

         SD-04 Samples

             Wall louvers




                               SECTION 08 91 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


1.3     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

 Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store
 materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and
 protection against dampness. Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches,
 and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

1.4     DETAIL DRAWINGS

 Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of wall
 louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, fastenings, and profiles.

1.5     COLOR SAMPLES

 Colors of finishes for wall louvers and door louvers shall closely
 approximate colors indicated. Where color is not indicated, submit the
 manufacturer's standard colors to the Contracting Officer for selection.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     MATERIALS

2.1.1     Extruded Aluminum

 ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or -T52.

2.2      METAL WALL LOUVERS

 Weather resistant type, with bird screens and made to withstand a wind load
 of not less than 30 pounds per square foot. Wall louvers shall bear the
 AMCA certified ratings program seal for air performance and water
 penetration in accordance with AMCA 500-D and AMCA 511. The rating shall
 show a water penetration of 0.20 or less ounce per square foot of free area
 at a free velocity of 800 feet per minute. The louver must handle 5000cfm
 with a maximum velocity of 650fpm, and a maximum pressure drop of 0.10" wc.
 There must be a minimum of 8 s.f. of open free area on the louver.

2.2.1     Extruded Aluminum Louvers

 Fabricated of extruded 6063-T5 or -T52 aluminum with a wall thickness of
 not less than 0.081 inch.

2.2.2     Formed Metal Louvers

 Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, or
 aluminum sheet not less than 0.08 inch thick.

2.2.3     Mullions and Mullion Covers

 Same material and finish as louvers. Provide mullions for all louvers more
 than 5 feet in width at not more than 5 feet on centers. Provide mullions
 covers on both faces of joints between louvers.

2.2.4     Screens and Frames

 For aluminum louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 14 or 16 gage aluminum
 or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screening. For steel
 louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 12 or 16 gage zinc-coated steel; 1/2
 inch square mesh, 16 gage copper; or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage


                               SECTION 08 91 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 zinc-coated steel or copper bird screening. Mount screens in removable,
 rewirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers.

2.3     BLANK OFF PANELS

 Provide blank off panels at any and all unused portions of a louver.

2.4     FINISHES

2.4.1     Aluminum

 Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be factory finished with an anodic
 coating. Color shall be as indicated. Louvers shall have the same finish.

2.4.1.1     Anodic Coating

 Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and provide an anodized finish conforming
 to AA DAF-45 and AAMA 611. Finish shall be:

         a. Architectural Class II (0.4 mil to 0.7 mil), designation
         AA-M10-C22-A34, electrolytically deposited color anodized.

2.4.2     Steel

 Provide factory-applied coating. Clean and phosphate treat exposed
 surfaces and apply rust-inhibitive primer and baked enamel finish coat, one
 mil minimum total dry film thickness, color as indicated.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

3.1.1     Wall Louvers

 Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap anchors, or jamb fasteners
 as appropriate for the wall construction and in accordance with
 manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2     PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

3.2.1     Aluminum

 Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint the dissimilar metal
 with a primer and two coats of aluminum paint.

3.2.2     Metal

 Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials
 with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.


          -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 08 91 00   Page 3
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022




                                 SECTION 09 06 90

                                  COLOR SCHEDULE
                                       05/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 This section covers only the color of the exterior and interior materials
 and products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The
 word "color", as used herein, includes surface color and pattern.
 Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other
 appropriate sections of the specifications. Specific locations where the
 various materials are required are shown on the drawings. Items not
 designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections.
 When color is not designated for items, the Contractor shall propose a
 color for approval.

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-04 Samples

             Color Schedule; G

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1   REFERENCE TO MANUFACTURER'S COLOR

 Where color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, an equivalent
 color by another manufacturer may be submitted for approval. Manufacturers
 and materials specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal
 colors from other manufacturers.

2.2      COLOR SCHEDULE

 The color schedule lists the colors, patterns and textures required for
 exterior and interior finishes, including both factory applied and field
 applied colors. Submit 3 sets of color boards, 120 days after the
 Contractor is given Notice to proceed, complying with the following
 requirements:

         a. Color boards shall reflect all actual finish textures, patterns,
         and colors required for this contract.

         b. Materials shall be labeled with the finish type, manufacturer's
         name, pattern, and color reference.

         c. Samples shall be on size 8-1/2 by 11 inch boards with a maximum
         spread of size 25-1/2 by 33 inches for foldouts.



                             SECTION 09 06 90   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


        d. Samples for this color board are required in addition to samples
        requested in other specification sections.

        e.   Color boards shall be submitted to the following address(es):

        Robert Flemming
        Fort Bragg DPW
        Building 3-1634, Butner Road
        Ft. Bragg, NC 28307-0069

2.2.1     Exterior Walls

 Exterior wall colors shall apply to exterior wall surfaces including
 recesses at entrances and projecting vestibules. Conduit shall be painted
 to closely match the adjacent surface color. Wall color shall be provided
 to match the colors listed below.

2.2.1.1   Precast Concrete: White sand mix to match existing JSOC precast
structures. Submit sample for Fort Bragg DPW approval.

2.2.2     Exterior Trim

 Exterior trim shall be provided to match the colors listed below.

2.2.2.1      Steel Doors and Door Frames: FS-26173 Medium Gray

2.2.2.2      Coping: Clear aluminum

2.2.2.3   Precast Concrete : white sand custom mix to match existing JSOC
precast structures. Submit sample for Fort Bragg DPW approval.

2.2.2.4      Caulking and Sealants: Match adjacent finish color

2.2.2.5      Stringers and Stair Framing: Clear galvanized steel

2.2.2.6      Control Joints: Match adjacent finish color

2.2.2.7      Handrails: FS-20059 Bragg Brown

2.2.2.8      Signage: As indicated on signage drawings

2.2.3     Metal: FS-20059 Bragg Brown

2.2.4     Interior Floor Finishes

 Provide flooring materials to match the colors listed below.




                              SECTION 09 06 90   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2.4.1     Carpet Tile

            a.   Shaw,   Prisma 59463, Opaque Black 63500
            b.   Shaw,   Portland 59449, Urchin 49305
            c.   Shaw,   Glitz 59360, Black Cashmere 60505
            d.   Shaw,   TruColors 59368, Ebony 68500

2.2.4.2     Resilient Floor:

            a. Forbo, Marmoleum Real, Lava 139
            b. Forbo, Marmoleum Real, Slate Grey 3137

2.2.4.3     Stair Treads, Kick Strips, and Risers: Roppe, #123 Charcoal

2.2.4.4     Porcelain Tile: Crossville, Color Blox EC, I See the Moon E1117

2.2.4.5     Grout:

            a. Mapei, #47 Charcoal

2.2.4.6     High Pressure Plastic Laminate: Nevamar, Gray Graphite GA 6001 FT

2.2.4.7     Industrial Floor Coating: Clear Sealed Concrete

2.2.5     Interior Base Finishes

 Provide base materials to match the colors listed below.

2.2.5.1     Resilient Base and Moldings: Roppe, #123 Charcoal

2.2.5.2     Porcelain Tile: Crossville, Color Blox EC, Slinky E1103

2.2.5.3     Grout: Mapei, #01 Alabaster

2.2.6     Interior Wall Finishes

 Interior wall color shall apply to the entire wall surface, including
 reveals, vertical furred spaces, grilles, diffusers, electrical and access
 panels, and piping and conduit adjacent to wall surfaces unless otherwise
 specified. Items not specified in other paragraphs shall be painted to
 match adjacent wall surface. Provide wall materials to match the colors
 listed below.




                                 SECTION 09 06 90   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2.6.1     Paint:

            a. Benjamin Moore, Cloud White, OC-130
            b. Sherwin Williams, Web Gray, SW7075

2.2.6.2     Fabric Wall Covering

            a. Maharam, 398460 Expression, 102 Gossamerz
            b. Maharam, 399381 Inox Texture, 027 Gunsmoke

2.2.6.3     Porcelain Tile:

            a. Crossville, Color Blox EC, Slinky E1103
            b. Crossville, Color Blox EC, I See the Moon, E1117

2.2.6.4     Tile Grout: Mapei, #01 Alabaster

2.2.6.5     Dry-Erase Paint: DesignTex, Write-Up H2O, Clear

2.2.7     Interior Ceiling Finishes

 Ceiling colors shall apply to ceiling surfaces including soffits, furred
 down areas, grilles, diffusers, registers, and access panels. Ceiling
 color shall also apply to joist, underside of roof deck, and conduit and
 piping where joists and deck are exposed and required to be painted.
 Provide ceiling materials to match the colors listed below.

2.2.7.1     Acoustical Tile and Grid: White

2.2.7.2     Paint: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66

2.2.7.3     Metal Deck: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66

2.2.7.4     Structural Framing: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66

2.2.8     Interior Trim

 Provide interior trim to match the colors listed below.




                              SECTION 09 06 90   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2.8.1     Steel Doors: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66

2.2.8.2     Steel Door Frames: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66

2.2.8.3     Wood Doors: Benjamin Moore, Snow White SC-66

2.2.8.4     Wood Stain: Clear Ash Maple

2.2.8.5     Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Factory Finish White

2.2.8.6     Handrails: Dark gray, to match stairtreads

2.2.8.7     Ladders: Dark gray, to match stairtreads

2.2.8.8     Metal Stairs: Clear galvanized steel

2.2.8.9     Exposed Ductwork: White

2.2.8.10     Closet Shelving: White

2.2.9     Interior Miscellaneous

 Provide miscellaneous items to match the colors listed below.

2.2.9.1     Toilet Partitions and Urinal Screens: Alabaster

2.2.9.2     Plastic Laminate:

            a. Formica, 912-58 Storm
            b. Formica, 923-58 Surf

2.2.9.3     Solid Surfacing Material

            a. Corian, Silverite
            b. Corian, Terra Collection

2.2.9.4     Casework: White Melanine Interior

2.2.9.5     Signage Message Color: As indicated on signage drawings

2.2.9.6     Signage Background Color: As indicated on signage drawings

2.2.9.7     Operable Partitions: Fabric: Maharam, 399381 Inox Texture, 028
Pavement

2.2.9.8     Corner Guards: Clear

2.2.9.9     Wall Switch Handles and Standard Receptacle Bodies: White

2.2.9.10     Electrical Device Cover Plates: White

2.2.9.11     Electrical Panels: White

2.2.9.12     Shower Curtain: White

2.2.9.13     Metal Lockers:   Standard Manufacturer's Gray

 Text



                                SECTION 09 06 90   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3   PLACEMENT SCHEDULE

 Placement of color shall be in accordance with the following schedule:

 Refer to plan.

PART 3    EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

         -- End of Section --




                            SECTION 09 06 90   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022



                                  SECTION    09 22 00

                       SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
                                       02/10

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 463/A 463M                      (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                        Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
                                        Process

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                      (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                        Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                        Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                        the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM C 645                             (2009a) Nonstructural Steel Framing Members

 ASTM C 754                             (2009a) Installation of Steel Framing
                                        Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
                                        Panel Products

 ASTM C 841                             (2003; R 2008e1) Installation of Interior
                                        Lathing and Furring

 ASTM C 847                             (2010) Standard Specification for Metal
                                        Lath

             NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

 NAAMM ML/SFA 920                       (1991) Metal Lathing and Furring

             UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL Fire Resistance                     (2010) Fire Resistance Directory

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Metal support systems; G

               Submit for the erection of metal framing, furring, and ceiling
             suspension systems. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, and


                               SECTION 09 22 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


            fastenings.

1.3     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the job site and store in ventilated dry locations.
 Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. If
 materials are stored outdoors, stack materials off the ground, supported on
 a level platform, and fully protected from the weather. Handle materials
 carefully to prevent damage. Remove damaged items and provide new items.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     MATERIALS

 Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating
 ASTM A 653/A 653M, G-60; aluminum coating ASTM A 463/A 463M, T1-25; or a
 55-percent aluminum-zinc coating. Provide support systems and attachments
 per UFC 3-310-04, "Seismic Design for Buildings" in seismic zones.

2.1.1     Materials for Attachment of Lath

2.1.1.1     Wall Furring

 ASTM C 841, and ASTM C 847.

2.1.1.2     Non-loadbearing Wall Framing

 NAAMM ML/SFA 920.

2.1.2     Materials for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard

2.1.2.1     Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring

 ASTM C 645, but not thinner than 0.0179 inch thickness, with 0.0329 inch
 minimum thickness supporting wall hung items such as cabinetwork, equipment
 and fixtures 0.0329 inch thickness. The ASTM certified third party testing
 statement for equivalent thicknesses shall not apply.

2.1.2.2     Furring Structural Steel Columns

 ASTM C 645. Steel (furring) clips and support angles listed in
 UL Fire Resistance may be provided in lieu of steel studs for erection of
 gypsum wallboard around structural steel columns.

2.1.2.3     Z-Furring Channels with Wall Insulation

 Not lighter than 26 gage galvanized steel, Z-shaped, with 1-1/4 inch and
 3/4 inch flanges and depth as required by the insulation thickness provided.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

3.1.1     Systems for Attachment of Lath

3.1.1.1     Wall Furring

 ASTM C 841, except as indicated otherwise.



                             SECTION 09 22 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


3.1.1.2     Non-loadbearing Wall Framing

 NAAMM ML/SFA 920, except provide framing members 16 inches o.c. unless
 indicated otherwise.

3.1.2     Systems for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard

3.1.2.1     Non-loadbearing Wall Framing and Furring

 ASTM C 754, except as indicated otherwise.

3.1.2.2     Furring Structural Steel Columns

 Install studs or galvanized steel clips and support angles for erection of
 gypsum wallboard around structural steel columns in accordance with the
 UL Fire Resistance, design number(s) of the fire resistance rating
 indicated.

3.1.2.3     Z-Furring Channels with Wall Insulation

 Install Z-furring channels vertically spaced not more than 24 inches o.c.
 Locate Z-furring channels at interior and exterior corners in accordance
 with manufacturer's printed erection instructions. Fasten furring channels
 to masonry and concrete walls with powder-driven fasteners or hardened
 concrete steel nails through narrow flange of channel. Space fasteners not
 more than 24 inches o.c.

3.2     ERECTION TOLERANCES

 Provide framing members which will be covered by finish materials such as
 wallboard, plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, within the
 following limits:

  a.    Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;

  b.    Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;

  c.    Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and

  d.    Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.

 Provide framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in
 dry-set mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive within
 the following limits:

  a.    Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;

  b.    Plates and runners: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;

  c.    Studs: 1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and

  d.    Face of framing members: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.

          -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 09 22 00   Page 3
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022




                                 SECTION 09 29 00

                                   GYPSUM BOARD
                                       08/09

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI A108.11                       (1992) Interior Installation of
                                    Cementitious Backer Units

 ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1          (2005) Specification for the Installation
                                    of Ceramic Tile

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM C 1002                        (2007) Standard Specification for Steel
                                    Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
                                    Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
                                    Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel
                                    Studs

 ASTM C 1047                        (2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
                                    Gypsum Veneer Base

 ASTM C 1177/C 1177M                (2008) Standard Specification for Glass
                                    Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing

 ASTM C 1178/C 1178M                (2008) Standard Specification for Glass
                                    Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel

 ASTM C 1396/C 1396M                (2009a) Standard Specification for Gypsum
                                    Board

 ASTM C 36/C 36M                    (2003e1) Gypsum Wallboard

 ASTM C 442/C 442M                  (2004e1) Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum
                                    Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board

 ASTM C 475/C 475M                  (2002; R 2007) Joint Compound and Joint
                                    Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board

 ASTM C 840                         (2008) Application and Finishing of Gypsum
                                    Board

 ASTM C 954                         (2007) Steel Drill Screws for the
                                    Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
                                    Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from
                                    0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)


                             SECTION 09 29 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


                                    in Thickness

 ASTM D 1037                        (2006a) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base
                                    Fiber and Particle Panel Materials

 ASTM D 1149                        (2007) Standard Test Method for Rubber
                                    Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in
                                    a Chamber

 ASTM D 226/D 226M                  (2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
                                    Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 2394                        (2005e1) Simulated Service Testing of Wood
                                    and Wood-Base Finish Flooring

 ASTM D 412                         (2006ae2) Standard Test Methods for
                                    Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
                                    Elastomers - Tension

 ASTM D 5420                        (2004) Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid
                                    Plastic Specimen by Means of a Strike
                                    Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner
                                    Impact)

 ASTM D 624                         (2000; R 2007) Tear Strength of
                                    Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
                                    Thermoplastic Elastomers

 ASTM E 695                         (2003; R 2009) Measuring Relative
                                    Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof
                                    Construction to Impact Loading

 ASTM E 84                          (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
                                    Burning Characteristics of Building
                                    Materials

          GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

 GA 214                             (2007) Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board
                                    Finish

 GA 216                             (2007) Application and Finishing of Gypsum
                                    Board

 GA 253                             (2007) Application of Gypsum Sheathing

          UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL Fire Resistance                 (2010) Fire Resistance Directory

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:



                          SECTION 09 29 00    Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


      SD-03 Product Data

          Cementitious backer units

          Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board

          Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board

          Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing

          Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant

          Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

          Accessories

          Submit for each type of gypsum board and for cementitious backer
          units.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Asbestos Free Materials

          Certify that gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types,
          cementitious backer units, and joint treating materials do not
          contain asbestos.

      SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

          Material Safety Data Sheets

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Manufacturer maintenance instructions

          Waste Management

      SD-11 Closeout Submittals

          Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)

            LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
          in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

          Gypsum Board; (LEED)

            LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
          accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

          Adhesives; (LEED)

            LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in
          accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.




                             SECTION 09 29 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


1.3     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.3.1     Delivery

 Deliver materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles with
 each bearing the brand name, applicable standard designation, and name of
 manufacturer, or supplier.

1.3.2     Storage

 Keep materials dry by storing inside a sheltered building. Where necessary
 to store gypsum board and cementitious backer units outside, store off the
 ground, properly supported on a level platform, and protected from direct
 exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.
 Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Store per
 manufacturer's recommendations for allowable temperature and humidity
 range.    Do not store panels near materials that may offgas or emit
 harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.

1.3.3     Handling

 Neatly stack gypsum board and cementitious backer units flat to prevent
 sagging or damage to the edges, ends, and surfaces.

1.4     ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1.4.1     Temperature

 Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 50 degrees F in the
 structure for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and following the
 application of gypsum board, cementitious backer units, and joint treatment
 materials, or the bonding of adhesives.

1.4.2     Exposure to Weather

 Protect gypsum board and cementitious backer unit products from direct
 exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.

1.5     SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1     Local/Regional Materials

 Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
 manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
 from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Gypsum
 board materials may be locally available.

1.6     QUALIFICATIONS

 Furnish type of gypsum board work specialized by the installer with a
 minimum of 3 years of documented successful experience.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     MATERIALS

 Conform to specifications, standards and requirements specified. Provide
 gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types, cementitious backing units,


                                SECTION 09 29 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 and joint treating materials manufactured from asbestos free materials only.

2.1.1     Gypsum Board

 ASTM C 36/C 36M and ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Gypsum board shall contain a
 minimum of 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 40
 percent post-industrial recycled content. Paper facings shall contain 100
 percent post-consumer recycled paper content. Gypsum cores shall contain a
 minimum of 95 percent post-industrial recycled gypsum content. See Section
 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content
 requirements. Gypsum board may contain post-consumer or post-industrial
 recycled content.

2.1.1.1     Regular

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered.

2.1.1.2     Foil-Backed

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.

2.1.1.3     Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)

 48 inch wide,    5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.

2.1.2     Gypsum Backing Board

 ASTM C 442/C 442M, gypsum backing board shall be used as a base in a
 multilayer system.

2.1.2.1     Regular

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.

2.1.2.2     Foil-Backed

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.

2.1.2.3     Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.

2.1.3     Regular Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board

 ASTM C 1396/C 1396M

2.1.3.1     Regular

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.

2.1.3.2     Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.

2.1.4     Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board

 ASTM C 1178/C 1178M




                             SECTION 09 29 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.4.1    Regular

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.

2.1.5     Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing

 Exceeds physical properties of ASTM C 1396/C 1396M and ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
 Provide 5/8 inch, gypsum sheathing. Provide gypsum board of with a
 noncombustible water-resistant core, with glass mat surfaces embedded to
 the gypsum core or reinforcing embedded throughout the gypsum core. Warrant
 gypsum sheathing board for at least six months against delamination due to
 direct weather exposure. Provide continuous, asphalt impregnated, building
 felt to cover exterior face of sheathing. Seal all joints, seams, and
 penetrations with compatible sealant.

2.1.5.1     Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant

 Provide sealant compatible with gypsum sheathing, rubber washers for
 masonry veneer anchors, and other associated cavity wall components such as
 anchors and through wall flashing. Provide sealants for gypsum sheathing
 board edge seams and veneer anchor penetrations recommended by the gypsum
 sheathing manufacturer and have the following performance requirements:

  a.    ASTM D 412: Tensile Strength, 80 psi
  b.    ASTM D 412: Ultimate Tensile Strength (maximum elongation), 170 psi
  c.    ASTM D 624: Tear Strength, dieB, 27 ppi
  d.    ASTM D 1149: Joint Movement Capability after 14 Days cure, plus or
        minus 50 percent.

2.1.6     Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

 48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
 Reinforced gypsum panel with imbedded fiber mesh or lexan backing testing
 in accordance with the following tests. Provide fasteners that meet
 manufacturer requirements and specifications stated within this section.
 Impact resistant gypsum board, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84,
 have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50
 or less for a flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed
 rating of 100 or less for all construction applications.

2.1.6.1    Structural Failure Test

 ASTM E 695 or ASTM D 2394 for structural failure (drop penetration).
 ASTM E 695 using a 60 lb sand filled leather bag, resisting no less than
 300 ft. lb. cumulative impact energy before failure or ASTM D 2394 using
 5.5 inch hemispherical projectile resisting no less than 264 ft. lb. before
 failure. Provide test specimen stud spacing a minimum 16 inch on center.

2.1.6.2    Indentation Test

 ASTM D 5420 or ASTM D 1037 for indentation resistance. ASTM D 5420 using a
 32 oz weight with a 5/8 inch hemispherical impacting head dropped once 3
 feet creating not more than 0.137 inch indentation or ASTM D 1037 using no
 less than 470 lb weight applied to the 0.438 inch diameter ball to create
 not more than a 0.0197 inch indentation depth.

2.1.7     Cementitious Backer Units

 ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1.


                              SECTION 09 29 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



2.1.8     Joint Treatment Materials

 ASTM C 475/C 475M. Use all purpose joint and containing inert fillers and
 natural binders, including lime compound. Pre-mixed compounds shall be
 free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives, biocides and other slow
 releasing compounds.

2.1.8.1     All-Purpose Compound

 Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a
 finishing compound and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.

2.1.8.2     Setting or Hardening Type Compound

 Specifically formulated and manufactured for use with fiber glass mesh tape.

2.1.8.3     Joint Tape

 Use cross-laminated, tapered edge, reinforced paper, or fiber glass mesh
 tape recommended by the manufacturer.

2.1.9     Screws

 ASTM C 1002, Type "G", Type "S" or Type "W" steel drill screws for
 fastening gypsum board to gypsum board, wood framing members and steel
 framing members less than 0.033 inch thick. ASTM C 954 steel drill screws
 for fastening gypsum board to steel framing members 0.033 to 0.112 inch
 thick. Provide cementitious backer unit screws with a polymer coating.

2.1.10     Staples

 No. 16 USS gage flattened galvanized wire staples with 7/16 inch wide crown
 outside measurement and divergent point for base ply of two-ply gypsum
 board application. Use as follows:

  Length of Legs (inch)                 Thickness of Gypsum Board (inch)

         1 1/4                                        5/8

2.1.11     Adhesives

 Do not use adhesive containing benzene, carbon tetrachloride, or
 trichloroethylene. Adhesive shall contain a maximum VOC content of 50
 grams per liter. Adhesive must meet the requirements of LEED low emitting
 materials credit.

2.1.11.1     Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Board to Metal Framing

 Type recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.

2.1.11.2     Adhesive for Laminating

 Adhesive attachment is not permitted for multi-layer gypsum boards. For
 laminating gypsum studs to face panels, provide adhesive recommended by
 gypsum board manufacturer.




                             SECTION 09 29 00    Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.12     Accessories

 ASTM C 1047. Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed
 for intended use. Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not
 acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials
 that may adversely affect bond of joint treatment. Provide prefinished or
 job decorated materials.

2.1.13     Asphalt Impregnated Building Felt

 Provide a 15 lb asphalt moisture barrier over gypsum sheathing. Conforming
 to ASTM D 226/D 226M Type 1 (No. 15) for asphalt impregnated building felt.

2.1.14     Water

 Provide clean, fresh, and potable water.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     EXAMINATION

3.1.1     Framing and Furring

 Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and
 spacing to provide a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board and
 cementitious backer units. Verify that all blocking, headers and supports
 are in place to support plumbing fixtures and to receive soap dishes, grab
 bars, towel racks, and similar items. Do not proceed with work until
 framing and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board and
 cementitious backer units.

3.1.2     Gypsum Board and Framing

 Verify that surfaces of gypsum board and framing to be bonded with an
 adhesive are free of dust, dirt, grease, and any other foreign matter.   Do
 not proceed with work until surfaces are acceptable for application of
 gypsum board with adhesive.

3.1.3     Masonry and Concrete Walls

 Verify that surfaces of masonry and concrete walls to receive gypsum board
 applied with adhesive are dry, free of dust, oil, form release agents,
 protrusions and voids, and any other foreign matter. Do not proceed with
 work until surfaces are acceptable for application of gypsum board with
 adhesive.

3.2     APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD

 Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with
 ASTM C 840 or GA 216 and the requirements specified. Apply gypsum board
 with separate panels in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger
 end joints of adjoining panels. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints.
 Use gypsum board of maximum practical length; select panel sizes to
 minimize waste. Cut out gypsum board to make neat, close, and tight joints
 around openings. In vertical application of gypsum board, provide panels
 in lengths required to reach full height of vertical surfaces in one
 continuous piece. Lay out panels to minimize waste; reuse cutoffs whenever
 feasible. Surfaces of gypsum board and substrate members may be bonded
 together with an adhesive, except where prohibited by fire rating(s).


                                SECTION 09 29 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 Treat edges of cutouts for plumbing pipes, screwheads, and joints with
 water-resistant compound as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer.
 Provide type of gypsum board for use in each system specified herein as
 indicated.

3.2.1     Adhesive Application to Interior Masonry or Concrete Walls

 Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VI or GA 216.

3.2.2     Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing and Furring

 Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VIII or GA 216.

3.2.3     Gypsum Board for Wall Tile or Tile Base Applied with Adhesive

 In dry areas (areas other than shower enclosures, apply glass mat
 water-resistant gypsum tile backing board or water-resistant gypsum backing
 board in accordance with ASTM C 840, System X or GA 216.

3.2.4     Glass Mat Covered or Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing

 Apply gypsum sheathing in accordance to gypsum association publications
 GA 253. Follow gypsum sheathing manufacturer's requirements of design
 details for joints and fasteners and be properly installed to protect the
 substrate from moisture intrusion. Do not leave exposed surfaces of the
 gypsum sheathing beyond the manufacturer's recommendation without a weather
 barrier cladding. Provide continuous asphalt impregnated building felt
 over sheathing surface in single fashion with edges and ends lapped a
 minimum of 6 inch. Property flash the openings. Seal all joints, seams,
 and penetrations with a compatible silicone sealant.

3.2.5     Control Joints

 Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in
 accordance with ASTM C 840, System XIII or GA 216. Fill control joints
 between studs in fire-rated construction with firesafing insulation to
 match the fire-rating of construction.

3.2.6     Application of Foil-Backed Gypsum Board

 Apply foil-backed gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, System XIV or
 GA 216.

3.2.7     Application of Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

 Apply in accordance with applicable system of ASTM C 840 as specified or
 GA 216. Follow manufacturers written instructions on how to cut, drill and
 attach board.

3.3     APPLICATION OF CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

3.3.1     Application

 In wet areas (shower enclosures) apply cementitious backer units in
 accordance with ANSI A108.11. Place a 15 lb asphalt impregnated,
 continuous felt paper membrane behind cementitious backer units, between
 backer units and studs or base layer of gypsum board. Place membrane with
 a minimum 6 inch overlap of sheets laid shingle style.



                             SECTION 09 29 00   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


3.3.2     Joint Treatment

 ANSI A108.11.

3.4     FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD

 Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and
 GA 216. Finish plenum areas above ceilings to Level 1 in accordance with
 GA 214. Finish water resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,
 to receive ceramic tile to Level 2 in accordance with GA 214. Finish walls
 and ceilings to receive a heavy-grade wall covering or heave textured
 finish before painting to Level 3 in accordance with GA 214. Finish walls
 and ceilings without critical lighting to receive flat paints, light
 textures, or wall coverings to Level 4 in accordance with GA 214. Finish
 all gypsum board walls, partitions and ceilings to Level 5 in accordance
 with GA 214. Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment.
 Tool joints as smoothly as possible to minimize sanding and dust. Do not
 use fiber glass mesh tape with conventional drying type joint compounds;
 use setting or hardening type compounds only. Provide treatment for
 water-resistant gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board
 manufacturer. Protect workers, building occupants, and HVAC systems from
 gypsum dust.

3.4.1     Uniform Surface

 Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semigloss or gloss paint
 finish, or where severe, up or down lighting conditions occur, finish
 gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level 5. In accordance with
 GA 214 Level 5, apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire
 gypsum board surface, after the two-coat joint and fastener treatment is
 complete and dry.

3.5     SEALING

 Seal openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through
 gypsum board and cementitious backer units as specified in Section 07 92 00
 JOINT SEALANTS Apply material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board
 or cementitious backer units.

3.5.1     Sealing for Glass Mat or Reinforced Gypsum Board Sheathing

 Apply silicone sealant in a 3/8 inch bead to all joints and trowel flat.
 Apply enough of the same sealant to all fasteners penetrating through the
 glass mat gypsum board surface to completely cover the penetration when
 troweled flat. Do not place construction and materials behind sheathing
 until a visual inspection of sealed joints during daylight hours has been
 completed by Contracting Officer.

3.6     FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES

 Wherever fire-rated construction is indicated, provide materials and
 application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, wall and
 ceiling framing in accordance with the specifications contained in
 UL Fire Resistance for the Design Number(s) indicated. Joints of
 fire-rated gypsum board enclosures shall be closed and sealed in accordance
 with UL test requirements or GA requirements. Seal penetrations through
 rated partitions and ceilings tight in accordance with tested systems.




                            SECTION 09 29 00   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.7   PATCHING

 Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance,
 ready to receive finishes.

3.8   WASTE MANAGEMENT

 As specified in Waste Management Plan.

 Identify manufacturer's policy for collection or return of remaining
 construction scrap, unused material, and packaging material. Institute
 demolition and construction recycling to take advantage of manufacturer's
 programs. When such a service is not available, seek local recyclers to
 reclaim the materials.

        -- End of Section --




                          SECTION 09 29 00   Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 09 30 00

                    CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE
                                      01/07

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM C 1026                        (1987; R 2002) Standard Test Method for
                                    Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile
                                    to Freeze-Thaw Cycling

 ASTM C 1027                        (1999; R 2004) Standard Test Method for
                                    Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of
                                    Glazed Ceramic Tile

 ASTM C 1028                        (2007) Standard Test Method for
                                    Determining the Static Coefficient of
                                    Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like
                                    Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer
                                    Pull-Meter Method

 ASTM C 373                         (1988; R 2006) Water Absorption, Bulk
                                    Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent
                                    Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware
                                    Products

 ASTM C 482                         (2002; R 2009) Bond Strength of Ceramic
                                    Tile to Portland Cement

 ASTM C 501                         (1984; R 2002) Relative Resistance to Wear
                                    of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber
                                    Abraser

 ASTM C 648                         (2004; R 2009) Breaking Strength of
                                    Ceramic Tile

 ASTM D 2103                        (2008) Standard Specification for
                                    Polyethylene Film and Sheeting

 ASTM D 226/D 226M                  (2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
                                    Roofing and Waterproofing

            TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA (TCNA)

 TCA Hdbk                           (2007) Handbook for Ceramic Tile
                                    Installation




                            SECTION 09 30 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


            U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 36 CFR 1191                         Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
                                     Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
                                     Facilities

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1     General Requirements

1.2.2     Local/Regional Materials

 Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
 manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
 from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Tile
 materials may be locally available.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Detail Drawings

              Drawings showing ceramic tile pattern elevations and floor plans.

        SD-03 Product Data

            Tile
            Setting-Bed
            Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive

              Manufacturer's catalog data and preprinted installation and
            cleaning instructions.

        SD-04 Samples

            Tile
            Accessories
            Marble Thresholds
            Grout

              Samples of sufficient size to show color range, pattern, type
            and joints.

        SD-07 Certificates

            Tile
            Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive

              Certificates indicating conformance with specified
            requirements. Furnish a master grade certificate for tile.



                              SECTION 09 30 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


         SD-11 Closeout Submittals

                Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)

                  LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
                in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
                Documentation Notebook.

                Tile; (LEED)

                Reinforcing Wire Fabric; (LEED)

                  LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
                accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
                Documentation Notebook.

                Adhesives; (LEED)

                  LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in
                accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
                Documentation Notebook.

1.4   QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Dimension and draw detail drawings at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
 Include drawings of pattern at inside corners, outside corners, termination
 points and location of all equipment items such as thermostats, switch
 plates, mirrors and toilet accessories mounted on surface.

1.5   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened
 containers with seals unbroken and labels and hallmarks intact. Protect
 materials from weather, and store them under cover in accordance with
 manufacturer's printed instructions.

1.6   ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

 Do not perform ceramic tile work unless the substrate and ambient
 temperature is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Maintain temperature above
  50 degrees F while the work is being performed and for at least 7 days
 after completion of the work. When temporary heaters are used, ventilate
 the area to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new tilework.

1.7   WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a 1-year period.

1.8   EXTRA MATERIALS

 Supply an extra two percent of each type tile used in clean and marked
 cartons.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      TILE

 Conform to TCA Hdbk for standard grade tile.        Provide grade sealed


                                SECTION 09 30 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 containers. Mark seals with the marks on the signed master grade
 certificate. Provide an impact resistant tile with a minimum floor
 breaking strength for wall tile of 90 pound and for floor tile of 250 pound
 in accordance with ASTM C 648. The manufacturer will provide a frost
 resistant rating for tile used in cold climate projects as determined by
 ASTM C 1026. Provide a 0.50 maximum percent water absorption in accordance
 with ASTM C 373. Provide a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50 wet and
 dry in accordance with ASTM C 1028. Identify floor tile as Class
 III-Medium Heavy Traffic, durability classification as rated by the
 manufacturer when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1027 for abrasion
 resistance as related to foot traffic. Coordinate the color with Section
 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. Tile shall contain a minimum of 5 percent
 post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 20 percent post-industrial
 recycled content, unless specified otherwise. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Tile may
 contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

2.1     Porcelain Tile

 Furnish an unglazed porcelain tile and trim with the color extending
 uniformly through the body of the tile. Porcelain tile shall contain a
 minimum of 70 percent post-industrial feldspar recycled content. Provide a
 nominal size varies as indicated on drawings by 5/16 inch thick. Criteria
 for tile to meet or exceed is as follows: Abrasive wear in accordance with
 ASTM C 501 and bonding strength in accordance with ASTM C 482. Comply with
 36 CFR 1191 for coefficient of friction for interior tiled floors.
 Coordinate color with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE.

2.2     MORTAR, GROUT, AND ADHESIVE

 Interior adhesives, sealants, primers and sealants used as filler must meet
 the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. Conform to the
 following for mortar, grout, adhesive, and sealant:

2.2.1     Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

 TCA Hdbk.

2.2.2     Ceramic Tile Grout

 TCA Hdbk; petroleum-free and plastic-free sand portland cement grout.

2.2.3     Organic Adhesive

 TCA Hdbk, Type I. Water-resistant. Comply with applicable regulations
 regarding toxic and hazardous materials and as specified.

2.2.4     Sealants

 Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials
 and as specified.

2.3     MEMBRANE MATERIALS

 Conform to ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type 1 for 15 pound waterproofing membrane,
 asphalt-saturated building felt. Conform to ASTM D 2103 4 mil for
 polyethylene film.




                               SECTION 09 30 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                           W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     PREPARATORY WORK AND WORKMANSHIP

 Inspect surface to receive tile in conformance to the requirements of
 TCA Hdbk for surface conditions for the type setting bed specified and for
 workmanship. Provide variations of tiled surfaces that fall within maximum
 values shown below:

              TYPE                     WALLS                         FLOORS

  Dry-Set Mortar                    1/8   inch   in   8   ft.      1/8    inch   in   10 ft.
  Organic Adhesives                 1/8   inch   in   8   ft.      1/16   inch   in   3 ft.
  Latex Portland Cement Mortar      1/8   inch   in   8   ft.      1/8    inch   in   10 ft.
  Epoxy                             1/8   inch   in   8   ft.      1/8    inch   in   10 ft.

3.2     GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

 Do not start tile work until roughing in for mechanical and electrical work
 has been completed and tested, and built-in items requiring membrane
 waterproofing have been installed and tested. Do not start floor tile
 installation in spaces requiring wall tile until after wall tile has been
 installed. Apply tile in colors and patterns indicated in the area shown
 on the drawings. Install tile with the respective surfaces in true even
 planes to the elevations and grades shown. Provide special shapes as
 required for sills, jambs, recesses, offsets, external corners, and other
 conditions to provide a complete and neatly finished installation. Solidly
 back tile bases and coves with mortar.

3.3     INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE

 Install wall tile in accordance with the TCA Hdbk. Method for wall to be W
 244 C-09.

3.3.1     Dry-Set Mortar and Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

 Use Dry-set or Latex-Portland Cement to install tile in accordance with
 TCA Hdbk. Use Latex Portland Cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.

3.3.2     Organic Adhesive

 Conform to TCA Hdbk for the organic adhesive installation of ceramic tile.

3.3.3     Furan Mortar and Grout

 Conform to TCA Hdbk for furan mortar and grout installation.

3.4     INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE

 Install floor tile in accordance with TCA Hdbk. Method for floor tile to
 be F 122-09. Install shower receptors in accordance with TCA Hdbk method
 B414.

3.4.1     Dry-Set and Latex-Portland Cement

 Use dry-set or Latex-Portland cement mortar to install tile directly over
 properly cured, plane, clean concrete slabs in accordance with TCA Hdbk.
 Use Latex Portland cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.



                             SECTION 09 30 00             Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.4.2     Ceramic Tile Grout

 Prepare and install ceramic tile grout in accordance with TCA Hdbk.

3.4.3     Waterproofing

 Shower pans are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.

3.5     EXPANSION JOINTS

 Form and seal joints as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.5.1     Walls

 Provide expansion joints at control joints in backing material. Wherever
 backing material changes, install an expansion joint to separate the
 different materials.

3.5.2     Floors

 Provide expansion joints over construction joints, control joints, and
 expansion joints in concrete slabs. Provide expansion joints where tile
 abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs and columns and
 at intervals of 24 to 36 feet each way in large interior floor areas and 12
 to 16 feet each way in large exterior areas or areas exposed to direct
 sunlight or moisture. Extend expansion joints through setting-beds and
 fill.

3.6     CLEANING AND PROTECTING

 Upon completion, thoroughly clean tile surfaces in accordance with
 manufacturer's approved cleaning instructions. Do not use acid for
 cleaning glazed tile. Clean floor tile with resinous grout or with factory
 mixed grout in accordance with printed instructions of the grout
 manufacturer. After the grout has set, provide a protective coat of a
 noncorrosive soap or other approved method of protection for tile wall
 surfaces. Cover tiled floor areas with building paper before foot traffic
 is permitted over the finished tile floors. Provide board walkways on
 tiled floors that are to be continuously used as passageways by workmen.
 Replace damaged or defective tiles.

3.7     WASTE MANAGEMENT

 Separate waste, including metal and cardboard, in accordance with the Waste
 Management Plan and recycle or reuse. Place materials defined as hazardous
 or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers,
 in designated containers and areas. Close and seal tightly partly used
 sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
 fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place materials defined as
 hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and
 containers, in designated containers and areas and dispose of properly.

          -- End of Section --




                               SECTION 09 30 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022




                              SECTION 09 51 00

                             ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
                                    10/07

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 1008/A 1008M              (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel,
                                  Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
                                  High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
                                  Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
                                  Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened

 ASTM A 489                       (2004e1) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                  Steel Lifting Eyes

 ASTM A 641/A 641M                (2009a) Standard Specification for
                                  Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                  Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                  Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                  the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM B 633                       (2007) Standard Specification for
                                  Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
                                  and Steel

 ASTM C 423                       (2008a) Sound Absorption and Sound
                                  Absorption Coefficients by the
                                  Reverberation Room Method

 ASTM C 635/C 635M                (2007) Manufacture, Performance, and
                                  Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for
                                  Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings

 ASTM C 636/C 636M                (2008) Standard Practice for Installation
                                  of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
                                  Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels

 ASTM C 834                       (2005) Latex Sealants

 ASTM E 1264                      (2008) Acoustical Ceiling Products

 ASTM E 1477                      (1998a; R 2008) Luminous Reflectance
                                  Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of
                                  Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers

 ASTM E 580/E 580M                (2009a) Application of Ceiling Suspension


                          SECTION 09 51 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


                                       Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
                                       Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
                                       Restraint

 ASTM E 795                            (2005) Mounting Test Specimens During
                                       Sound Absorption Tests

            U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

 UFC 3-310-04                          (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
                                       Buildings

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Provide sound controlling units mechanically mounted on a ceiling
 suspension system for acoustical treatment. The unit size, texture,
 finish, and color must be as specified. The location and extent of
 acoustical treatment shall be as shown on the approved detail drawings.
 Coordinate with paragraph RECLAMATION PROCEDURES for reclamation of mineral
 fiber acoustical ceiling panels to be removed from the job site.

1.2.1     Ceiling Sound Absorption

 Determine the Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) in accordance with
 ASTM C 423 Test Method.

1.2.2     Light Reflectance

 Determine light reflectance factor in accordance with ASTM E 1477 Test
 Method.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Approved Detail Drawings

              Drawings showing suspension system, method of anchoring and
            fastening, details, and reflected ceiling plan.

        SD-03 Product Data

            Acoustical Ceiling Systems

              a. Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle material
            in acoustic ceiling tiles to verify affirmative procurement
            compliance.

              b. Total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles
            with recycle material.

        SD-04 Samples



                              SECTION 09 51 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          Acoustical Units
          Acoustic Ceiling Tiles

            Two samples of each type of acoustical unit and each type of
          suspension grid tee section showing texture, finish, and color.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Ceiling Attenuation Class and Test

            Reports by an independent testing laboratory attesting that
          acoustical ceiling systems meet specified sound transmission
          requirements.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Acoustical Units
          Acoustic Ceiling Tiles

            Certificate attesting that the mineral based acoustical units
          furnished for the project contain recycled material and showing an
          estimated percent of such material.

1.4   DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original unopened
 containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Carefully handle and
 store materials in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately before
 installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the same
 temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be installed
 in order to assure proper temperature and moisture acclimation.

1.5   ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

 Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 60 degrees F nor more than
 85 degrees F and a relative humidity of not more than 70 percent for 24
 hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation of acoustical units.

1.6   SCHEDULING

 Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering, concrete and
 terrazzo work before ceiling installation. Complete mechanical,
 electrical, and other work above the ceiling line; install and start
 operating heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in order to
 maintain temperature and humidity requirements.

1.7   WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a one year period. Include an agreement to repair or replace
 acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period in the standard
 performance guarantee or warranty. Failures include, but are not limited
 to, sagging and warping of panels; rusting and manufacturers defects of
 grid system.

1.8   EXTRA MATERIALS

 Furnish spare tiles, from the same lot as those installed, of each color at
 the rate of 5 tiles for each 1000 tiles installed.


                           SECTION 09 51 00    Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022



PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      ACOUSTICAL UNITS

 Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED /
 RECOVERED MATERIALS. Conform acoustical units to ASTM E 1264, Class A, and
 the following requirements:

2.1.1     Affirmative Procurement

 Mineral Wool, Cellulose, and Laminated Paperboard used in acoustic ceiling
 tiles are materials listed in the EPA's Comprehensive Procurement
 Guidelines (CPG) (http://www.epa.gov/cpg/). EPA's recommended Recovered
 Materials Content Levels for Mineral Wool, Cellulose, Structural Fiberboard
 and Laminated Paperboard are:

  Product           Material            Percent of Post         Percent of Total
                                       Consumer Materials      Recovered Materials

Laminate         Post Consumer Paper         100                      100
Paperboard

Rock Wool        Slag                         75

Cellulose        Post Consumer Paper          75                       75

         a. The recommended recovered materials content levels are based on the
         weight (not volume) of materials in the insulating core only.

         b. For informational purposes, a list of known sources for acoustical
         ceiling tiles using recycled material is provided in the EPA/CPG
         Supplier database at
         http://www.ergweb2.com/cpg4review/user/cpg_search.cfm.

         c. Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. A
         product meeting CPG recycle requirements from other sources may be
         submitted for the Government's approval.

         d. Submit recycled material content data for acoustic ceiling tiles
         indicating compliance with affirmative procurement.

         e. Submit total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles
         with recycle material.

2.1.2     Units for Exposed-Grid System

         a.    Type:     I (cellulose composition)

         b.    Flame Spread:    Class A, 25 or less

         c.    Pattern:    A

         d. Minimum NRC: 0.90 in open office areas; 0.70 in conference rooms,
         executive offices, teleconferencing rooms, and other rooms as
         designated; 0.70 in all other rooms and areas when tested on mounting
         Type E-400 of ASTM E 795. See finish schedule and reflected ceiling
         plans for specific locations.



                                   SECTION 09 51 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                       W912HN-11-R-0022


        e.   Minimum Light Reflectance Coefficient:       LR-1, 0.75 or greater.

        f.   Nominal size:     24 by 24 inch.

        g.   Edge detail: Square lay-in.

        h.   Finish:   Factory-applied standard finish.

        i.   Minimum CAC:    35.

2.1.3     Unit Acoustical Absorbers

 Absorbers shall be individually mounted sound absorbing plaques composed of
 glass fibers or non-asbestos mineral fibers and having a NRC range of not
 less than 0.60 - 0.70 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 and
 reported as a 4 frequency average.

2.2     SUSPENSION SYSTEM

 Provide standard exposed-grid narrow width slotted flange suspension system
 conforming to ASTM C 635/C 635M for intermediate-duty systems. Provide
 surfaces exposed to view of white baked-enamel finish. Provide wall
 molding having a flange of not less than 15/16 inch. Provide inside and
 outside corner caps standard corners. Suspended ceiling framing system
 must have the capability to support the finished ceiling, light fixtures,
 air diffusers, and accessories, as shown. Provide a suspension system with
 a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span length. Conform seismic details
 to the guidance in UFC 3-310-04 and ASTM E 580/E 580M.

2.3     HANGERS

 Provide hangers and attachment capable of supporting a minimum 300 pound
 ultimate vertical load without failure of supporting material or attachment.

2.3.1     Wires

 Conform wires to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1,           0.11 inch in diameter.

2.3.2     Straps

 Provide straps of 1 by 3/16 inch galvanized steel conforming to
 ASTM A 653/A 653M, with a light commercial zinc coating or
 ASTM A 1008/A 1008Mwith an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to
 ASTM B 633, Type RS.

2.3.3     Rods

 Provide 3/16 inch diameter threaded steel rods, zinc or cadmium coated.

2.3.4     Eyebolts

 Provide eyebolts of weldless, forged-carbon-steel, with a straight-shank in
 accordance with ASTM A 489. Eyebolt size must be a minimum 1/4 inch, zinc
 coated.

2.3.5     Masonry Anchorage Devices

 Comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M for anchorage devices for machine screws.



                                   SECTION 09 51 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


2.4   ACCESS PANELS

 Provide access panels that match adjacent acoustical units, designed and
 equipped with suitable framing and fastenings for removal and replacement
 without damage. Size panel to be not less than 12 by 12 inch or more than
 12 by 24 inch.

         a. Attach an identification plate of 0.032 inch thick aluminum, 3/4
         inch in diameter, stamped with the letters "AP" and finished the same
         as the unit, near one corner on the face of each access panel.

         b. Identify ceiling access panel by a number utilizing white
         identification plates or plastic buttons with contrasting numerals.
         Provide plates or buttons of minimum 1 inch diameter and securely
         attached to one corner of each access unit. Provide a typewritten card
         framed under glass listing the code identification numbers and
         corresponding system descriptions listed above. Mount the framed card
         where directed and furnish a duplicate card to the Contracting
         Officer. Code identification system is as follows:

             1   Fire detection/alarm system

             2   Air conditioning controls

             3   Plumbing system

             4   Heating and steam systems

             5   Air conditioning duct system

             6   Sprinkler system

             7   Intercommunication system

             8   Telephone junction boxes

2.5   ADHESIVE

 Use adhesive as recommended by tile manufacturer, with a VOC content of
 less than 50 g/L less water.

2.6   FINISHES

 Use manufacturer's standard textures, patterns and finishes as specified
 for acoustical units and suspension system members. Treat ceiling
 suspension system components to inhibit corrosion.

2.7   ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

 Conform acoustical sealant to ASTM C 834, nonstaining, with a VOC content
 equal to or less than required by LEED 2009 credit IEQ 4.1.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1   INSTALLATION

 Examine surfaces to receive directly attached acoustical units for
 uneveness, irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and
 execution of the work. Rid areas, where acoustical units will be cemented,


                              SECTION 09 51 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 of oils, form residue, or other materials that reduce bonding capabilities
 of the adhesive. Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering,
 concrete, and terrazzo work before installation. Complete and approve
 mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line prior to the
 start of acoustical ceiling installation. Provide acoustical work complete
 with necessary fastenings, clips, and other accessories required for a
 complete installation. Do not expose mechanical fastenings in the finished
 work. Lay out hangers for each individual room or space. Provide hangers
 to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles, and other
 penetrations through ceilings. Keep main runners and carrying channels
 clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two main runners
 for each ceiling span. Wherever required to bypass an object with the
 hanger wires, install a subsuspension system so that all hanger wires will
 be plumb.

3.1.1     Suspension System

 Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M and as
 specified herein. Do not suspend hanger wires or other loads from
 underside of steel decking.

3.1.1.1     Plumb Hangers

 Install hangers plumb and not pressing against insulation covering ducts
 and pipes. Where lighting fixtures are supported from the suspended
 ceiling system, provide hangers at a minimum of four hangers per fixture
 and located not more than 6 inch from each corner of each fixture.

3.1.1.2     Splayed Hangers

 Where hangers must be splayed (sloped or slanted) around obstructions,
 offset the resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying, or other
 acceptable means.

3.1.2     Acoustical Units

 Install acoustical units in accordance with the approved installation
 instructions of the manufacturer. Ensure that edges of acoustical units
 are in close contact with metal supports, with each other, and in true
 alignment. Arrange acoustical units so that units less than one-half width
 are minimized. Hold units in exposed-grid system in place with
 manufacturer's standard hold-down clips, if units weigh less than 1 psf or
 if required for fire resistance rating.

3.1.3     Caulking

 Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the
 ceiling. Apply a continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web
 of wall or edge moldings.

3.1.4     Adhesive Application

 Wipe back of tile to remove accumulated dust. Daub acoustical units on
 back side with four equal daubs of adhesive. Apply daubs near corners of
 tiles. Ensure that contact area of each daub is at least 2 inch diameter
 in final position. Press units into place, aligning joints and abutting
 units tight and uniform without differences in joint widths.




                              SECTION 09 51 00   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.2   CEILING ACCESS PANELS

 Locate ceiling access panels directly under the items which require access.

3.3   CLEANING

 Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of acoustical
 units and leave them free from defects. Remove units that are damaged or
 improperly installed and provide new units as directed.

3.4   RECLAMATION PROCEDURES

 Discard of leftover or extra material in accordance with the Waste
 Management Plan.

        -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 09 51 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022




                                 SECTION 09 65 00

                                RESILIENT FLOORING
                                       02/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1     REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM D 4078                         (2002; R 2008) Water Emulsion Floor Polish

 ASTM E 648                          (2009a) Standard Test Method for Critical
                                     Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
                                     Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

 ASTM F 1482                         (2004e1; R 2009) Installation and
                                     Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to
                                     Receive Resilient Flooring

 ASTM F 1859                         (2004e1; R 2009) Rubber Sheet Floor
                                     Covering Without Backing

 ASTM F 1861                         (2008) Resilient Wall Base

 ASTM F 1869                         (2004) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
                                     Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
                                     Calcium Chloride

 ASTM F 2169                         (2002; R 2008) Resilient Stair Treads

 ASTM F 2170                         (2009) Determining Relative Humidity in
                                     Concrete Floor Slabs in situ Probes

 ASTM F 710                          (2008) Standard Practice for Preparing
                                     Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
                                     Flooring

            U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

 LEED                                (2009) Leadership in Energy and
                                     Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
                                     Rating System for New Construction
                                     (LEED-NC) v3.0

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1     Local/Regional Materials

 Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
 manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
 from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)


                             SECTION 09 65 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local/recycled material requirements.
 Flooring materials may be locally available. Flooring and accessories may
 contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

1.2.2     Fire Resistance Requirements

 Provide a minimum average critical radiant flux of 0.22 watts per square
 centimeter for flooring in corridors and exits when tested in accordance
 with ASTM E 648.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Resilient Flooring and Accessories

              Scaled drawings indicating patterns (including location of
            patterns and colors) and dimensions.

        SD-03 Product Data

            Resilient Flooring and Accessories

              Manufacturer's descriptive data.

            Adhesives

              Manufacturer's   descriptive data, documentation stating physical
            characteristics,   and mildew and germicidal characteristics.
            Provide Material   Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all primers and
            adhesives to the   Contracting Officer. Highlight VOC emissions.

        SD-04 Samples

            Resilient Flooring and Accessories

            Three samples of each indicated color and type of flooring, base,
            mouldings, and accessories. Provide a minimum 2-1/2 by 4 inch
            sample.

        SD-06 Test Reports

            Moisture, Alkalinity and Bond Tests

              Copy of test reports for moisture and alkalinity content of
            concrete slab, and bond test stating date of test, person
            conducting the test, and the area tested.

        SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

            Surface Preparation
            Installation



                               SECTION 09 65 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


            Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all
          flooring materials and accessories, including preparation of
          substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives.

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Resilient Flooring and Accessories

            Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
          MAINTENANCE DATA.

          Sustainable Submittals

      SD-11 Closeout Submittals

          Local/Regional Materials

            LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
          in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

          Resilient Flooring and Accessories

            LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
          accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

          Adhesives

            LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in
          accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

            LEED documentation relative to rapidly renewable materials
          credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

1.4   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the building site in original unopened containers
 bearing the manufacturer's name, style name, pattern color name and number,
 production run, project identification, and handling instructions. Store
 materials in a clean, dry, secure, and well-ventilated area with ambient
 air temperature maintained above 68 degrees F and below 85 degrees F,
 stacked according to manufacturer's recommendations.    Protect materials
 from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators and other
 heating fixtures and appliances. Observe ventilation and safety procedures
 specified in the MSDS.    Do not store near materials that may offgas or
 emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.

1.5   ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

 Maintain areas to receive resilient flooring at a temperature above 68
 degrees F and below 85 degrees F for 3 days before application, during
 application and 2 days after application, unless otherwise directed by the
 flooring manufacturer for the flooring being installed. Maintain a minimum
 temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter. Provide adequate ventilation to
 remove moisture from area and to comply with regulations limiting
 concentrations of hazardous vapors.


                           SECTION 09 65 00    Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



1.6    SCHEDULING

 Schedule resilient flooring application after the completion of other work
 which would damage the finished surface of the flooring.

1.7    WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a five year period.

1.8    EXTRA MATERIALS

 Provide extra flooring material of each color and pattern at the rate of 5
 tiles for each 1000 tiles and 5 square feet for each 1000 square feet of
 sheet flooring installed. Provide extra wall base material composed of 20
 linear feet of each type, color and pattern. Package all extra materials
 in original properly marked containers bearing the manufacturer's name,
 brand name, pattern color name and number, production run, and handling
 instructions. Provide extra materials from the same lot as those
 installed. Leave extra stock at the site in location assigned by
 Contracting Officer.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1    RESILIENT LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING

 A.      Sustainable Submittals

      1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Construction Waste
         Management as required by Division 01.

      2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products
         having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by
         weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.

          i. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
             recycled content.

      3. Product Data for Credit MR 6: For products having Rapidly Renewable
         content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of Rapidly
         Renewable content as required by Division 01.

          i. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
             Rapidly Renewable content.

      4. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants,
         including printed statement of VOC content as required by Division
         01.

      5. Confirm that each flooring product complies with the testing and
         product requirements of the California Department of Health Services
         Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
         Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers, including
         2004 Addenda. If a product specified has not been tested as noted
         provide a substitution to the Architect for review and approval of
         an equal product meeting the noted California Department of Health
         standard.



                             SECTION 09 65 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


      6. Product Data and Certification of SMaRT sustainable Product
         Certification pursuant to LEED innovation Credit.

2.2    RUBBER SHEET FLOORING TYPE A

 Rubber sheet flooring shall conform to ASTM F 1859 (flooring without
 backing), Type I homogeneous minimum 36 inch wide. Provide smooth
 surface. Provide 0.118 inch overall thickness. Rubber sheet flooring
 shall contain a minimum of 100 percent post-consumer recycled material.

2.3    WALL BASE

 Conform to ASTM F 1861, Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber). Style A
 (straight - installed with carpet), and Style B (coved - installed with
 resilient flooring). Provide 4 inch high and a minimum 1/8 inch thick wall
 base. Provide preformed corners in matching height, shape, and color.
 Rubber shall contain a minimum of 90 percent post-consumer recycled
 material. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total
 recycled content requirements. Rubber sheet flooring may contain
 post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

2.4    STAIR TREADS, RISERS AND STRINGERS

 Conform to ASTM F 2169, Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber). Conform to
 ASTM F 2169 for surface of treads Class 2 raised diamond stud pattern and
 have Group 1 abrasive non-slip strip abrasive material. Provide square
 nosing. Provide either a one piece nosing/tread/riser or a two piece
 nosing/tread design with a matching coved riser. Rubber shall contain a
 minimum of 100 percent post-consumer recycled material.   Provide stair
 nosing markings of contrasting color or photoluminescent material as
 required by NFPA 101, A.7.2.2.5.4.3. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Rubber
 may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

2.5    ADHESIVES

 Provide adhesives for flooring, base and accessories as recommended by the
 manufacturer and comply with local indoor air quality standards. Interior
 adhesives shall meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit.

2.6    SURFACE PREPARATION MATERIALS

 Provide surface preparation materials, such as panel type underlayment,
 lining felt, and floor crack fillers as recommended by the flooring
 manufacturer for the subfloor conditions. Comply with ASTM F 1482 for
 panel type underlayment products.

2.7    POLISH/FINISH

 Provide polish finish as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to
 ASTM D 4078 for polish.

2.8    CAULKING AND SEALANTS

 Provide caulking and sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT
 SEALANTS.




                               SECTION 09 65 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.9   MANUFACTURER'S COLOR, PATTERN AND TEXTURE

 Provide color, pattern and texture for resilient flooring and accessories
 as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended to limit the
 selection of equal colors from other manufacturers. Provide flooring in
 any one continuous area or replacement of damaged flooring in continuous
 area from same production run with same shade and pattern.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1   EXAMINATION

 Examine and verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design
 package. Report all conditions that will prevent a proper installation.
 Do not take any corrective action without written permission from the
 Government. Work will proceed only when conditions have been corrected and
 accepted by the installer.

3.2      SURFACE PREPARATION

 Provide a smooth, true, level plane for surface preparation of the
 flooring, except where indicated as sloped. Floor to be flat to within
 3/16 inch in 10 feet. Prepare subfloor in accordance with flooring
 manufacturer's recommended instructions. Prepare the surfaces of
 lightweight concrete slabs (as defined by the flooring manufacturer) as
 recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Comply with ASTM F 710 for
 concrete subfloor preparation. Floor fills or toppings may be required as
 recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Install underlayments, when
 required by the flooring manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's
 recommended printed installation instructions. Comply with ASTM F 1482 for
 panel type underlayments. Before any work under this section is begun,
 correct all defects such as rough or scaling concrete, chalk and dust,
 cracks, low spots, high spots, and uneven surfaces. Repair all damaged
 portions of concrete slabs as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
 Remove concrete curing and sealer compounds from the slabs, other than the
 type that does not adversely affect adhesion. Remove paint, varnish, oils,
 release agents, sealers, waxes, and adhesives, as required by the flooring
 product in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

3.3      MOISTURE, ALKALINITY AND BOND TESTS

 Determine the suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the
 resilient flooring with regard to moisture content and pH level by moisture
 and alkalinity tests. Conduct moisture testing in accordance with
 ASTM F 1869 or ASTM F 2170, unless otherwise recommended by the flooring
 manufacturer. Conduct alkalinity testing as recommended by the flooring
 manufacturer. Determine the compatibility of the resilient flooring
 adhesives to the concrete floors by a bond test in accordance with the
 flooring manufacturer's recommendations.

3.4   PLACING LINOLEUM TILES

 Install tile flooring and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
 printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in
 accordance with manufacturer's directions. Keep tile lines and joints
 square, symmetrical, tight, and even. Keep each floor in true, level
 plane, except where slope is indicated. Vary edge width as necessary to
 maintain full-size tiles in the field, no edge tile to be less than
 one-half the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make it


                               SECTION 09 65 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 impossible. Cut flooring to fit around all permanent fixtures, built-in
 furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit, and scribe edge tile
 to walls and partitions after field flooring has been applied.

3.5   PLACING RUBBER SHEET FLOORING

 Install rubber sheet flooring and accessories in accordance with
 manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply
 adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Provide
 square, symmetrical, tight, and even flooring lines and joints. Keep each
 floor in true, level plane, except where slope is indicated. Cut seams by
 overlapping or underscribing as recommended by the manufacturer. Lay out
 sheets to minimize waste. Cut flooring to fit around all permanent
 fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit,
 and scribe flooring to walls and partitions after field flooring has been
 applied.

3.6   PLACING WALL BASE

 Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation
 instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with
 manufacturer's printed directions. Tighten base joints and make even with
 adjacent resilient flooring. Fill voids along the top edge of base at
 masonry walls with caulk. Roll entire vertical surface of base with hand
 roller, and press toe of base with a straight piece of wood to ensure
 proper alignment. Avoid excess adhesive in corners.

3.7   PLACING STAIR TREADS, RISERS, AND STRINGERS

 Secure and install stair treads, risers, and stringers in accordance with
 manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Cover the surface of
 treads and risers the full width of the stairs. Provide equal length
 pieces butted together to cover the treads and risers for stairs wider than
 manufacturer's standard lengths. Provide stringer angles on both the wall
 and banister sides of the stairs, and landing trim. Provide two-part epoxy
 compound as required by the resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing
 substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

3.8   CLEANING

 Immediately upon completion of installation of flooring in a room or an
 area, dry/clean the flooring and adjacent surfaces to remove all surplus
 adhesive. Clean flooring as recommended in accordance with manufacturer's
 printed maintenance instructions. No sooner than 5 days after
 installation, wash flooring with a nonalkaline cleaning solution, rinse
 thoroughly with clear cold water, and, except for rubber flooring and stair
 treads, risers and stringers, vinyl and other flooring not requiring polish
 finish by manufacturer, apply the number of coats of polish in accordance
 with manufacturer's written instructions. Clean and maintain all other
 flooring as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.9   WASTE MANAGEMENT

 Separate offcuts and waste materials and reuse or recycle in accordance
 with the Waste Management Plan, keeping sheet materials larger than 2
 square feet and tiles larger than 1/2 tiles separate for reuse. Identify
 manufacturer's policy for collection or return of construction scrap,
 unused material, demolition scrap, and/or packaging material. Place
 materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers and


                           SECTION 09 65 00   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 dispose of properly. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and
 adhesive containers and store protected in a well ventilated fire-safe area
 at moderate temperature.

3.10   PROTECTION

 From the time of installation until acceptance, protect flooring from
 damage as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove and replace
 flooring which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled and wall base
 which is not tight to wall or securely adhered.

       -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 09 65 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 09 68 13

                                   CARPET TILE
                                      01/07

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS AND COLORISTS (AATCC)

 AATCC 107                          (2002; E 2008) Colorfastness to Water

 AATCC 134                          (2006; E 2008) Standard Test Method for
                                    Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets

 AATCC 16                           (2004) Colorfastness to Light

 AATCC 165                          (2008) Colorfastness to Crocking: Textile
                                    Floor Coverings - AATCC Crockmeter Method

 AATCC 174                          (1998; R 2007) Antimicrobial Activity
                                    Assessment of Carpets

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM D 1423                        (2002; R 2008) Twist in Yarns by
                                    Direct-Counting

 ASTM D 3278                        (1996; R 2004e1) Flash Point of Liquids
                                    by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus

 ASTM D 5252                        (2005) Operation of the Hexapod Drum Tester

 ASTM D 5417                        (2005) Operation of the Vettermann Drum
                                    Tester

 ASTM D 5793                        (2005) Binding Sites Per Unit Length or
                                    Width of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings

 ASTM D 5848                        (2007) Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn
                                    Floor Coverings

 ASTM E 648                         (2009a) Standard Test Method for Critical
                                    Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
                                    Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

            CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)

 CRI 104                            (2002) Standard for Installation
                                    Specification of Commercial Carpet




                            SECTION 09 68 13     Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


            INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

 ISO 2551                            (1981) Machine-made Textile Floor
                                     Coverings - Determination of Dimensional
                                     Changes Due to the Effects of Varied Water
                                     and Heat Conditions

            U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 FS SS-W-40                          (Rev A; Int Am 1, Notice 1) Wall Base:
                                     Rubber, and Vinyl Plastic

            U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

 LEED                                (2009) Leadership in Energy and
                                     Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
                                     Rating System for New Construction
                                     (LEED-NC) v3.0

            U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 16 CFR 1630                         Standard for the Surface Flammability of
                                     Carpets and Rugs (FF 1-70)

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1     Local/Regional Materials

 Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
 manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
 from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Carpet
 materials may be locally available.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Installation
            Molding

              Three copies of drawings indicating areas receiving carpet,
            carpet types, textures and patterns, direction of pile, location
            of seams, and locations of edge molding. Installation drawings
            for the following items diagramming the location of seams, edge
            moldings, and carpet direction for approval prior to installation.

            1) Carpet Moldings
            2) Base

            NSF 140-2007 CERTIFICATION
            Carpet must be certified to NSF 140-2007, the Sustainable Carpet
            Assessment Standard (SCAS), at the Platinum Level. Product


                              SECTION 09 68 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


          certification must be conducted by an independent, third party
          organization such as Scientific Certification Systems. Provide
          documentation.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Carpet
          Carpet Moldings
          Base

            Manufacturer's catalog data and printed documentation stating
          physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and
          flame resistance characteristics for each type of carpet tile
          material and installation accessory. Submit manufacturer's
          catalog data for the following items:

          1) Carpet Moldings
          2) Base

          Surface Preparation
          Installation

            Three copies of the manufacturer's printed installation
          instructions for the carpet tile, including preparation of
          substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives and tapes.

          Regulatory Requirements

            Three copies of report stating that carpet and carpet components
          contain recycled materials and/or involvement in a recycling or
          reuse program. Include in the report percentage of
          post-industrial and post-consumer recycled material. Include
          manufacturer's certification of compliance with Carpet and Rug
          Institute's Green Label Indoor Air Quality program, NSF 140-2007

      SD-04 Samples

          Carpet Tile
          Molding

            a. Carpet: Two "Production Quality" samples 24 by 24 inches of
          each carpet proposed for use, showing quality, pattern, and color
          specified.

            b. Vinyl or Aluminum Moldings:     Two pieces of each type at least
           12 inches long.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Moisture and Alkalinity Tests

            Three copies of test reports of moisture and alkalinity content
          of concrete slab stating date of test, person conducting the test,
          and the area tested.

          The maximum amount of moisture evactuation from the floor is 3.0
          pounds per 1,000 square feet in 24 hours. The acceptable pH level
          of the substrate is between 7.0 and 9.0. Flooring contractor is
          responsible for floor testing.


                            SECTION 09 68 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



          Maintain minimum 65 degrees F ambient temperature and 65% Relative
          humidity for 72 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours installation.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Carpet Tile

            Certificates of compliance from a laboratory accredited by the
          National Laboratory Accreditation Program of the National
          Institute of Standards and Technology attesting that each type of
          carpet and carpet with cushion material conforms to the standards
          specified.

          Regulatory Requirements

            Report stating that the carpet contains recycled materials and
          indicating the actual percentage of recycled material.
          Certificates, showing conformance with the referenced standards
          contained in this section, for the following:

          1) Moldings
          2) Base

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Carpet
          Cleaning and Protection

            Three copies of carpet manufacturer's maintenance instructions
          describing recommended type of cleaning equipment and material,
          spotting and cleaning methods, and cleaning cycles.

          Maintenance Service

            Documentation of manufacturer's maintenance agreement, and
          take-back program for carpet. Include contact information,
          summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions
          applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to
          reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.

      SD-11 Closeout Submittals

          Local/Regional Materialss; (LEED)

            LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit
          in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

          Carpet Tile; (LEED)

            LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
          accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
          Documentation Notebook.

          Carpet Tile; (LEED)
          Adhesives and Concrete Primer; (LEED)

            LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in


                           SECTION 09 68 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


            accordance with LEED Reference Guide.   Include in LEED
            Documentation Notebook.

            Carpet Tile; (LEED)

              LEED documentation relative to rapidly renewable credit in
            accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
            Documentation Notebook.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Provide the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) label
 for carpet tile, carpet backing and adhesives or demonstrate compliance
 space with testing criteria and frequencies through independent laboratory
 test results. Carpet, carpet backing and adhesives bearing the label will
 indicate that the carpet tile has been tested and meets the Regulatory
 Requirements and criteria of the CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program, and
 minimizes the impact on indoor air quality.

1.5     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original wrappings and
 packages clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, size,
 dye lot number, and related information. Remove materials from packaging
 and store them in a clean, dry, well ventilated area protected from damage,
 soiling, and moisture, and maintain at a temperature above 60 degrees F for
 2 days prior to installation.    Do not store carpet near materials that
 may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or
 adhesives.

1.6     ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

 Maintain areas in which carpeting is to be installed at a minimum
 temperature of 65 degrees F and below 90 degrees F for 2 days before
 installation, during installation, and for 2 days after installation.
 Provide temporary ventilation during work of this section. Maintain a
 minimum temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter for the duration of the
 contract. Do not permit traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in
 carpeted area for 24 hours after installation. Complete other work which
 would damage the carpet prior to installation of carpet.

1.7     WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties
 including minimum fifteen (15) year wear warranty, two (2) year material
 and workmanship and ten (10) year tuft bind and delamination.

1.8     MAINTENANCE

1.8.1     Extra Materials

 Provide extra material from same dye lot for future maintenance. Provide a
 minimum of 1 percent of total square yards of each carpet tile type,
 pattern, and color.




                             SECTION 09 68 13   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                           W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      CARPET

 Furnish first quality carpet tile; free of visual blemishes, streaks,
 poorly dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots or stains, and other
 physical and manufacturing defects. Provide carpet tile materials and
 treatments as reasonably nonallergenic and free of other recognized health
 hazards. Provide a static control construction on all grade carpet tiles
 which gives adequate durability and performance. Provide the Carpet and
 Rug Institute (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Label. Carpet tile type
 bearing the label will indicate that the carpet tile has been tested and
 meets the criteria of the CRI Green Label Requirements for Indoor Air
 Quality Test Criteria. Carpet tiles shall have Carpet Component
 Identification Codes as established by the CRI for future recycling. The
 labels shall be permanently printed or attached to the carpet backing. The
 codes shall identify, at minimum, the carpet's face fiber, primary backing,
 and secondary backing. The secondary backing shall be 100% recycled content.

2.1.1     Physical Characteristics

2.1.1     Modular Tile Carpet CPT-1

 Carpet shall comply with the following:

         a.    Carpet Construction:      Tufted.

         b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inch square with 0.15 percent
         growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.

         c.    Pile Type:   Multilevel loop.

         d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
         trademark) nylon staple, minimum 12 percent post-consumer or 28 percent
         post-consumer recycled content with 40 percent minimum total combined
         recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
         not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
         cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
         contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

         e.    Yarn Ply:    Minimum 2.

         f.    Gauge or Pitch:   Minimum 1/12 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.

         g.    Stitches or Rows/Wires:      Minimum 10 per square inch.

         h. Finished Pile Yarn Weight: Minimum 19 ounces per square yard.
         This does not include weight of backings. Determine weight in
         accordance with ASTM D 5848.

         i.    Pile Density:   Minimum 4993.

         j.    Dye Method: Solution dyed.

         k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials like
         synthetic material. Provide secondary backing to suit project
         requirements of those customarily used and accepted by the trade for
         each type of carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for
         gluedown is needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40


                                  SECTION 09 68 13    Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


      percent recycled content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION
      for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may
      contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

      l.   Recycle Efforts:   100% recyclable carpet.

      m.   Environmental Certifications:

           i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified

           ii. Green Label Plus

           iii. Cradle to Cradle certified

2.1.2.2    Modular Tile Carpet CPT-2

 Comply with the following carpet requirements:

      a.   Carpet Construction:   Tufted.

      b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inches square with 0.15 percent
      growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.

      c.   Pile Type:   Random sheared.

      d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
      trademark) nylon staple, minimum 20 percent pre-consumer or 11 percent
      post-consumer recycled content with 31 percent minimum total combined
      recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
      not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
      cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
      contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

      e.   Yarn Ply:    Minimum 2 in accordance with ASTM D 1423.

      f.   Gauge or Pitch:    Minimum 1/10 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.

      g.   Stitches or Rows/Wires:     Minimum 11.0 per square inch.

      h. Finished Pile Yarn Weight: Minimum 30.0 ounces per square yard.
      This does not include weight of backings. Determine weight in
      accordance with ASTM D 5848.

      i.   Pile Density:   Minimum 7248.

      j.   Dye Method: Piece dyed.

      k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials like
      synthetic material. Provide secondary backing to suit project
      requirements of those customarily used and accepted by the trade for
      each type of carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for
      gluedown is needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40
      percent recycled content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION
      for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may
      contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

      l.   Recycle Efforts:   100% recyclable carpet.

      m.   Environmental Certifications:


                              SECTION 09 68 13   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                       W912HN-11-R-0022



             i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified

             ii. Green Label Plus

             iii. Cradle to Cradle certified

2.1.2     Modular Tile Carpet CPT-3

 Comply with the following carpet requirements:

        a.   Carpet Construction:   Tufted.

        b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inch square with 0.15 percent
        growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.

        c.   Pile Type:   Level-loop.

        d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
        trademark) nylon staple, minimum 11 percent post-consumer or 27 percent
        pre-consumer recycled content with 38 percent minimum total combined
        recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
        not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
        cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
        contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

        e.   Yarn Ply:    Minimum 2 in accordance with ASTM D 1423.

        f.   Gauge or Pitch:    Minimum 1/10 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.

        g.   Stitches or Rows/Wires:    Minimum 10 per square inch.

        h. Finished Pile Yarn Weight: Minimum 30 ounces per square yard.
        This does not include weight of backings. Determine weight in
        accordance with ASTM D 5848.

        i.   Pile Density:   Minimum 8120.

        j.   Dye Method: Solution dyed.

        k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials of synthetic
        material. Provide secondary backing to suit project requirements of
        those customarily used and accepted by the trade for each type of
        carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for gluedown is
        needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40 percent recycled
        content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative
        total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may contain
        post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

        l.   Recycle Efforts:   100% recyclable carpet.

        m.   Environmental Certifications:

             i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified

             ii. Green Label Plus

             iii. Cradle to Cradle certified



                                SECTION 09 68 13   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.2.1    Modular Tile Carpet CPT-4

 Comply with the following carpet requirements:

      a.   Carpet Construction:      Tufted.

      b. Type: Modular tile 24 by 24 inch square with 0.15 percent
      growth/shrink rate in accordance with ISO 2551.

      c.   Pile Type:   Level-loop.

      d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered
      trademark) nylon staple, minimum 11 percent post-consumer or 27 percent
      pre-consumer recycled content with 38 percent minimum total combined
      recycled content. Chemical treatments, including moth treatment, are
      not permitted. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
      cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
      contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

      e.   Yarn Ply:    Minimum 2.

      f.   Gauge or Pitch:    Minimum 1/10 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.

      g.   Stitches or Rows/Wires:      Minimum 11.5 per square inch.

      h. Surface Pile Weight: Minimum 30 ounces per square yard. This does
      not include weight of backings. Determine weight in accordance with
      ASTM D 5848.

      i.   Pile Density: Minimum 11613.

      j.   Dye Method: Solution dyed.

      k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials like
      synthetic material. Provide secondary backing to suit project
      requirements of those customarily used and accepted by the trade for
      each type of carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for
      gluedown is needed. Backing system shall contain a minimum of 40
      percent recycled content. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION
      for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may
      contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.

      l.   Recycle Efforts:   100% recyclable carpet.

      m.   Environmental Certifications:

           i. NSF 140 2007 Platinum certified

           ii. Green Label Plus

           iii. Cradle to Cradle certified

2.2   PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      a. ARR (Appearance Retention Rating): Test carpet with the minimum 3.5
      ARR in accordance with either the ASTM D 5252(Hexapod) or ASTM D 5417
      (Vettermann) test methods using the number of cycles for short and long
      term tests as specified.



                              SECTION 09 68 13    Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


      b. Static Control: Provide static control to permanently regulate
      static buildup to less than 3.0 kV when tested at 20 percent relative
      humidity and 70 degrees F in accordance with AATCC 134.

      c. Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements: Comply carpet
      with 16 CFR 1630. Provide carpet in corridors and exits with a minimum
      average critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts per square centimeter when
      tested in accordance with ASTM E 648.

      d. Tuft Bind: Provide tuft bind force required to pull a tuft or loop
      free from carpet backing with a minimum 10 pound average force for loop
      pile.

      e. Colorfastness to Crocking: Comply dry and wet crocking with
      AATCC 165 and with a Class 4 minimum rating on the AATCC Color
      Transference Chart for all colors.

      f. Colorfastness to Light: Comply colorfastness to light with AATCC 16,
      Test Option E "Water-Cooled Xenon-Arc Lamp, Continuous Light" and with
      a minimum 4 grey scale rating after 40 hours.

      g. Colorfastness to Water: Comply colorfastness to water with
      AATCC 107 and with a minimum 4.0 gray scale rating and a minimum 4.0
      transfer scale rating.

      h. Delamination Strength:     No delamination in accordance with ASTM
      D-3936.

      i. Antimicrobial: Nontoxic antimicrobial treatment in accordance with
      AATCC 174 Part I (qualitatiave), guaranteed by the carpet manufacturer
      to last the life of the carpet.

2.3   CARPET MOLDINGS

 Install carpet moldings, either vinyl or aluminum, where floor covering
 material changes or carpet edge does not abut a vertical surface.

2.4   BASE

 Conform to FS SS-W-40 for rubber base. Provide minimum overall thickness
 of base not less than 0.125 inch, color as selected from manufacturer's
 full line. Straight style, 4 inch high. Furnish base in rolls not less
 than 96 feet long. Premold corners with wings not less than 2 inch long.

2.5   ADHESIVES AND CONCRETE PRIMER

 Adhesives and concrete primers shall comply with applicable regulations
 regarding toxic and hazardous materials. Use peel and stick dry adhesive.
 Provide release adhesive for modular tile carpet as recommended by the
 carpet manufacturer. Provide adhesives flashpoint of minimum 140 degrees F
 in accordance with ASTM D 3278.

2.6   COLOR, TEXTURE, AND PATTERN

 Provide color, texture, and pattern in accordance with Drawings.




                          SECTION 09 68 13    Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1      SURFACE PREPARATION

 Do not install carpet tile on surfaces that are unsuitable and will prevent
 a proper installation. Repair holes, cracks, depressions, or rough areas
 using material recommended by the carpet or adhesive manufacturer. Free
 floor of any foreign materials and sweep clean. Before beginning work,
 test subfloor with glue and carpet to determine "open time" and bond.

3.2      MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTS

 Test concrete slab for moisture content and excessive alkalinity in
 accordance with CRI 104.

3.3     PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SUBFLOOR

 Do not commence installation of the carpeting until concrete substrate is
 at least 90 days old. Prepare the concrete surfaces in accordance with
 instructions of the carpet manufacturer. Match carpet, when required, and
 adhesives to prevent off-gassing to a type of curing compounds, leveling
 agents, and concrete sealer.

3.4      INSTALLATION

 Perform all work by installers who are CFI certified (International
 Certified Floorcovering Installer Association), or manufacturer's approved
 installers. Conduct installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
 printed instructions and CRI 104. Protect edges of carpet meeting hard
 surface flooring with molding and install in accordance with the molding
 manufacturer's printed instructions. Follow ventilation, personal
 protection, and other safety precautions recommended by the adhesive
 manufacturer. Continue ventilation during installation and for at least 72
 hours following installation.

3.4.1     Modular Tile Installation

 Install modular tiles with permanent vinyl-compatible adhesive and snugly
 jointed together. Lay tiles in the direction as indicated on the drawings
 with accessibility to the subfloor where required.

3.5      CLEANING AND PROTECTION

3.5.1     Cleaning

 As specified in Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. After installation
 of the carpet tile, remove debris, scraps, and other foreign matter.
 Remove soiled spots and adhesive from the face of the carpet with
 appropriate spot remover. Cut off and remove protruding face yarn. Vacuum
 carpet clean.

3.5.2     Protection

 Protect the installed carpet from soiling and damage with heavy,
 reinforced, nonstaining kraft paper, plywood, or hardboard sheets. Lap and
 secure edges of kraft paper protection to provide a continuous cover.
 Restrict traffic for at least 48 hours. Remove protective covering when
 directed by the Contracting Officer.



                               SECTION 09 68 13   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                             W912HN-11-R-0022


3.6   REMNANTS

 Collect information from manufacturer about maintenance agreement and
 take-back program options, and provide to Contracting Officer. Manage
 waste as specified in the Waste Management Plan. Non-retained scraps shall
 be set aside and returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product.
 Remove non-retained scraps from site and recycle appropriately.

        -- End of Section --




                          SECTION 09 68 13   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022




                                 SECTION 09 69 13

                            RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING
                                       04/07

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 780/A 780M                   (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of
                                     Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
                                     Galvanized Coatings

             CEILINGS & INTERIOR SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION (CISCA)

 CISCA Access Floors                 (2004) Test Procedures for Access Floors

             ICC EVALUATION SERVICE, INC. (ICC-ES)

 ICC-ES AC300                        (2005) Acceptance Criteria for Access
                                     Floors

             NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

 NEMA LD 3                           (2005) Standard for High-Pressure
                                     Decorative Laminates

             NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 75                             (2009) Standard for the Protection of
                                     Information Technology Equipment

 NFPA 99                             (2005; Errata 2005; AMD 2009) Health Care
                                     Facilities

             U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 FS TT-C-490                         (1990; Am 2) Cleaning Methods for Ferrous
                                     Surfaces and Pretreatments for Organic
                                     Coatings

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Install access flooring at the location and elevation and in the
 arrangement shown on the drawings. The floor system shall be complete with
 all supplemental items, and be the standard product of a manufacturer
 specializing in the manufacture of access flooring systems.

         a. Provide for self-alignment of floor panels, adjustable pedestals
         and readily removable floor panels covered as specified.



                             SECTION 09 69 13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


        b. Lateral stability of floor support system shall be independent of
        panels. Provide a finished assembly that is rigid and free of
        vibration, noises, and rocking panels.

        c. Submit Certificates for the complete Access Flooring System
        including, but not limited to the following:

             1) Compliance with ICC-ES AC300. Submit design data
             substantiating compliance with International Building Code
             Acceptance Criteria for Access Floors.

             2) Load-bearing capabilities of pedestals, floor panels, and
             pedestal adhesive resisting force.

             3) Supporting independent laboratory test reports. For panel
             loads, test results include concentrated loads at center of panel,
             panel edge midpoint, and uniform loads.

             4)   Floor electrical characteristics.

             5)   Material requirements

             6) An elevated floor system free of defects in materials,
             fabrication, finish, and installation, that will remain so for a
             period of not less than 1 years after completion.

        d. Warrant that, upon notification by the Government, defective work
        will be immediately replaced with new work at no additional cost to the
        Government.

        e. Submit manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, and
        installation instructions. Include in the data information about any
        design and production techniques, total system including all
        accessories and finish coatings of under-floor components, procedures
        and policies used to conserve energy, reduce material, improve waste
        management or incorporate green building/recycled products into the
        manufacturer of their components or products. Incliude cleaning and
        maintenance instructions. Systems which contain zinc electroplated
        anti-corrosion coatings are prohibited.

1.2.1    Allowable Tolerances

        a. Floor Panel Flatness: Plus or minus 0.02 inches on diagonal on top
        of panel or underneath edge.

        b.   Floor Panel Length:   Plus or minus 0.015 inch.

        c.   Floor Panel Squareness:   Plus or minus 0.02 inch in panel length.

        d. Finish Floor: Level within plus or minus 0.062 inch in 10 feet,
        and plus or minus 0.10 inch for entire floor.

1.2.2    Floor Panels

 Conduct floor panel testing in accordance with CISCA Access Floors. When
 tested as specified, make all deflection and deformation measurements at
 the point of load application on the top surface of the panel. Floor
 panels shall be capable of supporting the following loads:



                              SECTION 09 69 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


        a. Concentrated load of 1250 pounds on Type 1 (office) panel and
        2000 pounds on type 2 (equipment rooms and corridor panels) on one
        square inch, at any point on panel, without deflecting more than .100
        inch, with a safety factor of 2 based on concentrated load.

        b.    Uniform live load of 300 psf, without deflecting more than 0.04 inch.

        c. A rolling load of 800 pounds on type 1 and 1250 pounds on type 2
        panels applied through hard rubber surfaced wheel 6 inch diameter by 1
        1/2 inch wide for 10,000 cycles over the same path. Permanent set at
        conclusion of test shall not exceed 0.010 inch.

        d. A rolling load of 1000 pounds on type 1 panels and 1500 pounds on
        type 2 panels applied through a 3 inch diameter by 1-13/16 inch wide
        caster for 10 cycles over the same path, without deflecting more than
        0.04 inch and without permanent deformation in excess of 0.02 inch. In
        accordance with CISCA Access Floors, the permanent deformation limit
        under rolling load shall be satisfied in all of the specified tests.
        In the specified tests, the permanent deformation shall be measured
        after 10 passes with Wheel 1 and after 10,000 passes with Wheel 2.

        e. An impact load of 150 pounds on one square inch from a height of
        12 inches with permanent set not to exceed 0.060 inch.

1.2.3     Stringers

 Provide stringers capable of supporting a 450 pound concentrated load at
 midspan without permanent deformation in excess of 0.010 inch. Stringers in
 areas where 2000 lb panels are located.

1.2.4     Pedestals

 Pedestals shall be capable of supporting a5000 pound axial load without
 permanent deformation.

1.2.5     Bonding Strength of Pedestal Adhesive

 Adhesive for anchoring pedestal bases shall have a bonding strength capable
 of resisting an overturning moment of 1,000 lbf-in min. when a force is
 applied to the top of the pedestal in any direction.

1.2.6     Bond Strength of Factory Installed Covering

 Bond strength of floor covering shall be sufficient to permit handling of
 the panels by use of the panel lifting device, and to withstand moving
 caster loads up to 1000 pounds, without separation of the covering from the
 panel.

1.2.7        Seismic Calculations

1.2.7.1       Army Requirements

 Submit calculations for special bracing to resist the effects of seismic or
 other forces in accordance with UFC 3-310-04, ICC IBC and ICC-ES AC300.
 Submit design calculations which demonstrate that the proposed floor system
 meets requirements for seismic loading. Certified copies of test reports
 may be submitted in lieu of calculations.




                                  SECTION 09 69 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


1.2.8     Grounding

 Ground the access flooring system for safety hazard and static
 suppression. Provide positive contact between components for safe,
 continuous electrical grounding of entire floor system. Total system
 resistance from wearing surface of floor to building grounding electrode
 shall be within range of 0.5 to 20,000 megohms.

1.2.8.1     Joint Resistance

 Electrical joint resistance between individual stringer and pedestal
 junctions shall be less than 0.1 milliohms. Electrical resistance between
 stringers and floor panels, as mounted in normal use, shall be less than 3
 ohms.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Detailed Installation Drawings; G

        SD-03 Product Data

            Access Flooring System

        SD-04 Samples

            Floor Panels
            Finish Flooring
            Panel Support System
            Accessories

        SD-05 Design Data

            Compliance with ICC-ES AC300
            Seismic Calculations

        SD-06 Test Reports

            Factory Tests
            Electrical Resistance
            Field Tests

        SD-07 Certificates

            Access Flooring System

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Submit drawings showing location, details at floor perimeter, method of
 anchorage to structural subfloor, grounding, description of factory
 coating, installation height above structural floor, stairs, ramps,
 accessories and other details as specified. Take measurements from


                               SECTION 09 69 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 finished areas at site and submit Detailed Installation Drawings indicating:

         a.    Location of panels

         b.    Layout of supports, panels, and cutout locations

         c.    Stair, handrail, and ramp framing

         d.    Sizes and details of components

         e.    Lateral bracing

         f.    Typical cutout details

         g. Gasketing, return air grilles, supply air registers, and perforated
         panels. Include air transfer capacity of grilles, registers and panels

         h.    Floor finishes

         i.    Location of connection to building grounding electrode

1.5     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.5.1     Delivery

 Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition, in original containers or
 packages, complete with accessories and instructions. Label packages with
 manufacturer's name and brand designations. Package materials covered by
 specific references bearing specification number, type and class as
 applicable.

1.5.2     Storage

 Store all materials in original protective packaging in a safe, dry, and
 clean location. Store panels at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F,
 and between 20 and 70 percent humidity. Replace defective or damaged
 materials.

1.5.3     Handling

 Materials shall be handled and protected in a manner to prevent damage
 during the entire construction period.

1.6     EXTRA MATERIALS

         a. ARMY: Furnish spare floor panels, complete pedestal assemblies,
         and stringers at the rate of one for each 100 or fraction thereof
         required.

         b.    Submit three separate samples of the specified finish flooring.

PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      FLOOR PANELS

2.1.1     Floor System Drawings And Planer Quality

         a. Submit Fabrication Drawings for elevated floor systems consisting
         of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory.


                                 SECTION 09 69 13   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



        b. Indicate on Location Drawings exact location of pedestals,
        ventilation openings, cable cutouts, and the panel installation pattern.

        c. Provide Detail Drawings showing details of the pedestals,
        pedestal-floor interlocks, floor panels, panel edging, floor openings,
        floor opening edging, floor registers, floor grilles, cable cutout
        treatment, perimeter base, expansion joints, and peripheral support
        facilities.

        d. Design and workmanship of the floor, as installed, shall be
        completely planar within plus or minus 0.060 inch in 10 feet, 0.100
        inch for the entire floor, and 0.030 inch across panel joints.

        e. Floor-panel joint-width tolerances shall be an average of 0.008 inch
         as measured with a feeler gage at any point in any joint when the
        panels re in the pressure contact required in final nstallation.
        Submit three complete samples of floor panels.

2.1.2     Panel Construction

        a. Base access floor system on a 24 by 24 inch square module providing
        minimum of 24 inch clearance or as specified between structural floor
        and bottom of finished floor. Fabricate so accurate job cutting and
        fitting may be done using standard sizes for perimeters and around
        columns.

        b. Do not expose metal on finished top surface of panels. Provide
        cutouts and cutout closures to accommodate utility systems and
        equipment intercabling. Reinforce cutouts to meet design load
        requirements. Provide extra support pedestals at each corner of cutout
        for cutout panels that do not meet specified design load requirements.

        c. Panel design shall provide for convenient panel removal for
        underfloor servicing and for openings for new equipment. Use panels of
        uniform dimensions within specified tolerances. Permanently mark
        panels to indicate load rating and model number.

        d. Machine square floor panels to within plus or minus 0.005 inch with
        edge straightness plus or minus 0.0025 inch. Tolerances apply to the
        panel before the plastic edging is applied.

2.1.2.1     Metal-Clad Cementitious Fill (Composite Panels)

        a. Provide composite panels of die-formed steel construction totally
        enclosing the panel, including the top surface. Top and bottom sheets
        to be fully welded. Adhesive not acceptable. The void spaces between
        the top sheet and the formed steel bottom sheet shall be completely
        filled with an incombustible cementitious or concrete material. Seal
        cut edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

        b. Grid supported panels shall be further tested by supporting them at
        two opposite edges and applying a 500-pound load at the center of a
        panel selected; the panel shall be similarly tested while supported at
        the other two edges. Weld failure at any point under this loading is
        not acceptable. This additional test shall be applied to one panel per
        500 square feet of floor in the system, but in no case less than two
        panels. When any weld fails, the number of panels designated by the
        Contracting Officer shall be similarly tested; replace those panels


                               SECTION 09 69 13   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


        that have a weld failure at no cost to the Government.

2.1.3     Floor Covering

 Surface floor panels with materials firmly bonded in place with waterproof
 adhesive. The electrical resistance shall remain stable over the life
 expectancy of the floor covering. Any anti-static agent used in the
 manufacturing process shall be an integral part of the material, not
 surface applied. Bolt heads or similar attachments shall not rise above
 the traffic surface.

2.1.3.1     High Pressure Laminate

 Provide high pressure laminate surfacing conforming to NEMA LD 3, Grade HDS
 160. Total system electrical resistance from the wearing surface of the
 floor to the ground connection shall be between 150,000 ohms and
 20,000,000,000 ohms.

2.1.3.2     Linoleum Sheet Flooring

 Provide linoleum sheet goods as specified in the finish schedule. Tiles
 shall be the full size of the floor panel and shall be factory applied with
 a monolithic edge per manufacturer's recommendation.

2.1.4     Edge Strip (where required)

 Edge panels with extruded vinyl edge strips secured in place with
 mechanical interlock or adhesive bond, or use replaceable type. Top of
 strip shall be approximately 1/8 inch wide, and flush with the floor
 surfacing. Metal edge strips exposed at finish floor surface will be
 rejected.

2.1.5     Resilient Base

 Base shall be continuous rolled goods,straight style (installed with
 carpet) coved style (installed with resilient flooring), 4 inches high and
 a minimum 1/8 inch thick. Furnish Job Formed corners with no seams or
 joints less than 6 inches from the corner.

2.1.6     Lifting Device

 Provide a minimum of four floor panel lifting devices standard with the
 floor manufacturer for each floor level of the facility.

2.2     PANEL SUPPORT SYSTEM

 Design support system to allow for 360 degree clearance in laying out cable
 and cutouts for service to machines and so that panel and stringer together
 take up maximum of 2 inches. Submit one sample of each panel type and
 suspension system proposed for use.

2.2.1     Pedestals

 Provide pedestals made of steel or aluminum or a combination thereof.
 Ferrous materials shall have a factory-applied corrosion-resistant finish.
 Provide pedestal base plates with a minimum of 16 square inches of bearing
 surface and a minimum of 1/8 inch thickness. Pedestal shafts shall be
 threaded to permit height adjustment within a range of approximately 2
 inches, to permit overall floor adjustment within plus or minus 0.10 inch


                               SECTION 09 69 13   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


 of the required elevation, and to permit leveling of the finished floor
 surface within 0.062 inch in 10 feet in all directions. Provide locking
 devices to positively lock the final pedestal vertical adjustments in
 place. Pedestal caps shall interlock with panels to preclude tilting or
 rocking of the panels.

2.2.2     Stringers

 Provide stringers of rolled steel or extruded aluminum, to interlock with
 the pedestal heads to prevent lateral movement. Provide stringers that can
 be added or removed after floor is in place.

2.3     FASCIA

 Provide aluminum or steel fascia plates at open ends of floor, at sides of
 ramps and steps, and elsewhere as required to enclose the free area under
 the raised floor. Steel plates shall have a factory applied baked enamel
 finish. Finish on aluminum plates shall be standard with the floor system
 manufacturer. Fascia plates shall be reinforced on the back, and supported
 using the manufacturer's standard lateral bracing at maximum 4 feet on
 center. Provide trim, angles, and fasteners as required.

2.4     FACTORY TESTS

 Factory test access flooring, using an independent laboratory, at the same
 position and maximum design elevation and in the same arrangement as shown
 on the drawings for installation so as to duplicate service conditions as
 much as possible.

2.4.1     Load Tests

 Conduct floor panel, stringer, and pedestal testing in accordance with
 CISCA Access Floors.

2.4.2     Bond Strength of Covering

 Support The test panel on pedestals and stringers as specified for the
 installed floor. Brace the supports as necessary to prevent sideways
 movement during the test. Impose a test load of 1000 pounds on the test
 assembly through a hard plastic caster 3 inches in diameter and 1 inch
 wide. Roll the caster completely across the center of the panel. The
 panel shall withstand 20 passes of the caster with no delamination or
 separation of the covering.

2.5     COLOR

 Color shall be as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended
 to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.

2.6     CUT OUTS

 Provide cable cutouts finished with rigid polyvinylchloride or molded
 polypropylene edging to conform to the appearance level of the floor
 surface and to cover raw edges of the cutout panel. Extrusion shall be of
 a configuration to permit its effective and convenient use when new cable
 openings are required. Provide at least 24 feet of additional extrusion
 for future use.

        a.   Provide non-metallic adapter for openings less than 4 inches wide.


                              SECTION 09 69 13   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


         Secure adapter adhesively in cutout to preclude removal from panel.
         Provide at least four adapters per 1000 square feet for future use.

         b. Openings larger than 4 inches wide shall use rigid
         polyvinylchloride or molded polypropylene edging. Perform cutting of
         panels, including cutouts, outside of the building.

         c. When size of cutout reduces the performance requirement of panel,
         provide intermediate stringers adjacent to cutouts.

2.7     EDGE CLOSURE

 Provide 1/16 inch aluminum closure plate and extruded aluminum nosing at
 exposed edge of floor. Back up the closure plates with aluminum or steel
 framing braced diagonally, or anchor at bottom to continuous angle.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

 Install the floor system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
 and with the approved detail drawings. Open ends of the floor, where the
 floor system does not abut wall or other construction, shall have positive
 anchorage and rigid support. Maintain areas to receive access flooring
 between 60 and 90 degrees F, and between 20 and 70 percent humidity for 24
 hours prior to and during installation.

3.1.1     Preparation for Installation

 Clear of all debris the area in which the floor system is to be installed.
 Thoroughly clean structural floor surfaces and remove all dust. Install
 floor coatings, required for dust or vapor control, prior to installation
 of pedestals, only if the pedestal adhesive will not damage the coating.
 If the coating and adhesive are not compatible, apply the coating after the
 pedestals have been installed and the adhesive has cured.

3.1.2     Pedestals

 Pedestals shall be accurately spaced, and set plumb and in true alignment.
 Set base plates in full and firm contact with the structural floor, and
 secured to the structural floor.

3.1.3     Stringers

 Interlock stringers with the pedestal caps to preclude lateral movement,
 spaced uniformly in parallel lines at the indicated elevation.

3.1.4     Auxiliary Framing

 Provide auxiliary framing or pedestals around columns and other permanent
 construction, at sides of ramps, at open ends of the floor, and beneath
 panels that are substantially cut to accommodate utility systems. Use
 special framing for additional lateral support as shown on the approved
 detail drawings. Provide additional pedestals and stringers designed to
 specific heights and lengths to meet structural irregularities and design
 loads. Connect auxiliary framing to main framing.




                              SECTION 09 69 13   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.1.5    Panels

 Interlock panels with supports in a manner that will preclude lateral
 movement. Fasten perimeter panels, cutout panels, and panels adjoining
 columns, stairs, and ramps to the supporting components to form a rigid
 boundary for the interior panels. Floors shall be level within the
 specified tolerances. Cut edges of panels shall be finished as
 recommended by the panel manufacturer. Secure extruded vinyl edging in
 place at all cut edges of all panel cut-outs to prevent abrasion of
 cables. Where the space below the floor is a plenum, close cutouts for
 conduit and similar penetrations using self-extinguishing sponge rubber.

3.1.6    Resilient Base

 Provide base at vertical wall intersections. Cracks and voids in walls and
 other vertical surfaces to receive base shall be filled with an approved
 filler. Apply the base after the floor system has been completely
 installed with adhesive, in accordance with the base manufacturer's
 recommendations.

3.1.7    Fascia Plates

 Cover exposed floor ends and exposed openings of ramps and stairs with
 steel closures.

3.1.8    Repair of Zinc Coating

 Repair zinc coating that has been damaged, and cut edges of zinc-coated
 components and accessories, by the application of a galvanizing repair
 paint conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Areas to be repaired shall be
 thoroughly cleaned prior to application of the paint.

3.2     FIELD TESTS

 Submit certified copies of test reports from an approved testing
 laboratory, attesting that the proposed floor system components meet the
 performance requirements specified.

3.2.1    Acceptance Tests

 Conduct acceptance tests after installation of floor system. Make at least
 one test for each 400 square feet of floor area. Conduct tests in presence
 of Contracting Officer and representatives of manufacturer and installer.

3.2.2     Electrical Resistance

 Conduct testing of electrical resistance, in the completed installation, in
 the presence of the Contracting Officer in accordance with NFPA 99,
 modified by placing one electrode on the center of the panel surface and
 connecting the other electrode to the metal flooring support. Take
 measurements at five or more locations. Each measurement shall be the
 average of five readings of 15 seconds duration at each location. During
 the tests, relative humidity shall be 45 to 55 percent and temperature set
 at 69 to 75 degrees F. Select panels used in the testing at random and
 include two panels most distant from the ground connection. Measure
 electrical resistance with instruments that are accurate within 2 percent
 and that have been calibrated within 60 days prior to the performance of
 the resistance tests. The metal-to-metal resistance from panel to
 supporting pedestal shall not exceed 10 ohms. The resistance between the


                            SECTION 09 69 13   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 wearing surface of the floor covering and the ground connection, as
 measured on the completed installation, shall be in accordance with
 paragraph FLOOR COVERING.

3.3     CLEANING AND PROTECTION

3.3.1     Cleaning

 Free all debris from the space below the completed floor. Broom clean
 completely below floor.Before any traffic or other work on the completed
 raised floor is started, clean the completed floor in accordance with the
 floor covering manufacturer's instructions. Do not permit seepage of
 cleaner between individual panels. Cleaning of ferrous surfaces shall
 conform to FS TT-C-490.

3.3.2     Protection

 Protect traffic areas of raised floor systems with a covering of building
 paper, fiberboard, or other suitable material to prevent damage to the
 surface. Cover cutouts with material of sufficient strength to support the
 loads to be encountered. Place plywood or similar material on the floor to
 serve as runways for installation of heavy equipment not in excess of
 design load capacity. Maintain protection until the raised floor system
 is accepted.

3.3.3     Surplus Material Removal

 Clean surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the
 work. Remove all installation equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish
 from the work site.

3.4     FIRE SAFETY

 Install an automatic detection system below the raised floor meeting the
 requirements of NFPA 75 paragraph 5-2.1 to sound an audible and visual
 alarm. Air space below the raised floor shall be subdivided into areas not
 exceeding 10,000 square feet by tight, noncombustible bulkheads. Seal all
 penetrations for piping and cables to maintain bulkhead properties.

3.5     SEISMIC SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING

 Perform special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and
 components in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL
 INSPECTION FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS.

3.6     OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

 Submit maintenance instructions for proper care of the floor panel
 surface. When conductive flooring is specified, also submit maintenance
 instructions to identify special cleaning and maintenance requirements to
 maintain "conductivity" properties of the panel finish.

           -- End of Section --




                            SECTION 09 69 13     Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 09 72 00

                                 WALL COVERINGS
                                      08/10

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1    REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM D 1308                          (2002; R 2007) Effect of Household
                                      Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic
                                      Finishes

 ASTM D 751                           (2006) Coated Fabrics

 ASTM E 84                            (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
                                      Burning Characteristics of Building
                                      Materials

            CHEMICAL FABRICS & FILM ASSOCIATION (CFFA)

 CFFA-W-101-D                         (2002) Vinyl Coated Fabric Wallcovering

            GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)

 GEI                                  Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
                                      Products

            GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

 GA 214                               (2007) Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board
                                      Finish

            INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

 ICC IBC                              (2009; Errata First Printing)
                                      International Building Code

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 265                             (2007) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for
                                      Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution
                                      of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels
                                      and Walls

 NFPA 286                             (2006) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for
                                      Evaluating Contribution of Wall and
                                      Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth




                            SECTION 09 72 00    Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


           SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

 SCS                               Scientific Certification Systems
                                   (SCS)Indoor Advantage

           SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)

 SCAQMD Rule 1168                  (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant
                                   Applications

           U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 FS CCC-W-408                      (Rev C) Wallcovering, Vinyl Coated

1.2    SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

       SD-03 Product Data

           Wall Coverings and Accessories; G
           Primer and Adhesive
           Wall Covering
           Certification

       SD-04 Samples

           Wall Coverings and Accessories;
           Wall Coverings;

       SD-07 Certificates

           Wall Coverings and Accessories

       SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

           Wall Coverings and Accessories
           Wall Covering;

1.3    SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION

 Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
 Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
 Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.

1.4    DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver the material to the site in manufacturer's original wrappings and
 packages and clearly label with the manufacturer's name, brand name,
 pattern and color name and number, dye lot number, size, and other related
 information. Store in a safe, dry, clean, and well-ventilated area at
 temperatures not less than 50 degrees F and within a relative humidity
 range of 30 to 60 percent. Store wall covering material in a flat position
 and protected from damage, soiling, and moisture. Do not open containers
 until needed for installation, unless verification inspection is required.


                            SECTION 09 72 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022



1.5   ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

 Comply with wall covering manufacturer's printed installation instructions
 for minimum temperature of area to receive requirements for conditioning
 adhesive and wall covering. Provide a minimum 50 degrees F area
 temperature, 72 hours prior to installation, during installation, and until
 the adhesive dries. Observe ventilation and safety procedures.

1.6   WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a one-year period.

1.7   EXTRA MATERIALS

 Provide one linear foot of full-width wall covering of each pattern and
 color for each 100 linear feet of wall covering installed. Provide the
 same manufacturer, type, pattern, color, and lot number of extra stock as
 the installed wall covering. Provide full rolls, packed for storage and
 marked with content, manufacturer's name, pattern and color name and number
 and dye lot number. Leave extra stock at the site at a location as
 directed by the Contracting Officer.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      WALL COVERINGS

 Provide Wall coverings and accessories material designed specifically for
 the specified use. Furnish wall covering and borders with a mercury,
 cadmium, lead, and chromium free base. Protect wall coverings with
 bactericides and mildew inhibitors against microbiological and mildew
 growth.

 Provide a medium-duty type wall covering, finish as specified, conforming
 to FS CCC-W-408, Type II, and the following modifications:

         Supporting material for wall covering may be mildew-resistant treated
         at the option of the wall covering manufacturer.

         Provide the following physical properties:

                   REQUIREMENT             TEST METHOD            VALUE

              Coating weight,              CFFA-W-101-D,     Not less than
              exclusive of fabric          Test 5041         240 gram 7 ounces
              backing                                        per square
                                                             meter yard

              Adhesion of coating           ASTM D 751       Not less than
              to fabric backing                              13 newton 3 pounds
                                                             pull per 25mm inch
                                                             of width

 Provide a heavy duty type wall covering, finish as specified, conforming to
 FS CCC-W-408, Type III, and the following modifications:

         Supporting material for wall covering may be mildew-resistant treated
         at the option of the wall covering manufacturer.


                                 SECTION 09 72 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022



      Provide the following physical properties:

                  REQUIREMENT             TEST METHOD            VALUE

            Coating weight,               CFFA-W-101-D,     Not less than
            exclusive of fabric           Test 5041         407 gram 12 ounces
            backing                                         per square
                                                            meter yard

            Adhesion of coating            ASTM D 751       Not less than
            to fabric backing                               13 newton 3 pounds
                                                            pull per 25mm inch
                                                            of width

 Provide a stain-resistant wall covering of medium duty type, finish as
 specified, with a polyvinylfluoride film top coating, conforming to
 FS CCC-W-408, Type II, and the following modifications:

      Supporting material for wall covering may be mildew-resistant treated
      at the option of the wall covering manufacturer.

      Use a clear polyvinylfluoride film, not less than 0.13mm 0.005-inch
      thick as a top coating.

      Provide the following physical properties:

                  REQUIREMENT             TEST METHOD            VALUE

            Coating weight,               CFFA-W-101-D,     Not less than
            exclusive of fabric           Test 5041         240 gram 7 ounces
            backing                                         per square
                                                            meter yard

            Adhesion of coating            ASTM D 751       Not less than
            to fabric backing                               13 newton 3 pounds
                                                            pull per 25mm inch
                                                            of width

            Stain-resistance,              ASTM D 1308      No perceptible
            covered spot test,                              staining or
            24-hour exposure, using                         bleaching of coat-
            the household chemical                          ing; stains
            reagents and staining                           readily removed
            agents specified in                             with solvent or
            ASTM D 1308 and the                             cleaning agent
            following:

              ballpoint pen ink
              lipstick
              nicotine
              shoe polish
              stamp-pad ink
              rubber scuff marks
              crayon
              merthiolate

 Match color and grain of wall covering of the sample approved.          Provide a
 53 to 54 inch width wall covering.


                                SECTION 09 72 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



2.1.1     Textile Wall covering Type A

 Provide textile wall covering with a woven fabric with paper or acrylic
 backing of colorfast, stain, and soil resistant. Test in accordance with
 NFPA 286 or have a Class A flame spread rating of 0-25 and smoke
 development rating of 0-450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Meet
 or exceed the following for textile wall covering :

  a.     Face fiber content: 65% Polyolefin, 35% Post-Consumer Recycled
         Polyester; 54% Polyolefin, 46% Polyethylene

  b.     Weave:   Plain

  c.     Total weight:    9.9 and 14.8 ounces/square yard

  d.     Width:   54 inch

2.2      PRIMER AND ADHESIVE

 Provide a type primer and adhesive recommended by the wall covering
 manufacturer, containing a non-mercury based mildewcide, and complying with
 local indoor air quality standards. VOC content shall be less than the
 current VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168. Primer shall permit
 removal of the wall covering and protect the wall surface during removal.
 Do not damage gypsum wallboard facing paper during removal of wall
 covering. Provide a strippable type adhesive. When substrate color
 variations show through vinyl wall covering, provide a white pigmented
 primer as recommended by the wall covering manufacturer used to conceal the
 variations. Provide a recommended type adhesive to install corner guards
 and wainscot cap by the manufacturer of the corner guards and wainscot cap.

2.3     COLOR, TEXTURE, AND PATTERN

 Provide color as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended
 to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     EXAMINATION

 Inspect all areas and conditions under which wall coverings are to be
 installed. Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of any conditions
 detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the installation. Work
 will proceed only when conditions have been corrected and accepted by the
 installer.

3.2     SURFACE PREPARATION

 Do not apply wall covering to surfaces that are rough, that contain stains
 which will bleed through the wall covering, or that are otherwise
 unsuitable for proper installation. Fill cracks and holes; sand rough
 spots smooth. Finish walls to receive presentation dry erase wall covering
 to a Level 4 gypsum wallboard finish in accordance with GA 214 unless Level
 5 is recommended by the wall covering manufacturer. Thoroughly dry
 surfaces at least 30 days prior to installation of vinyl wall covering.
 Provide interior surfaces of new and existing gypsum wallboard with a wall
 covering primer in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
 instructions. As required, use white primer when substrate color


                                SECTION 09 72 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 variations are visible through thin or light color wall covering. Seal
 interior surfaces of exterior masonry walls to prevent moisture
 penetration, then prime with a wall covering primer in accordance with the
 manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide masonry walls with flush
 joints. Test moisture content of plaster, concrete, and masonry with an
 electric moisture meter of a maximum five percent reading. Apply a thin
 coat of joint compound or cement plaster, as recommended by the wall
 covering manufacturer, to the concrete and masonry walls as a substrate
 preparation. To promote adequate adhesion of wall lining over masonry
 walls, prime the walls as recommended by the wall lining manufacturer.
 Prime the surfaces of walls as required by the manufacturer's printed
 instructions to permit ultimate removal of wall covering from the wall
 surfaces. Allow primer to completely dry before adhesive application.

3.3     INSTALLATION

3.3.1     Wall Covering

 Install wall covering in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
 installation instructions. Remove glue and adhesive spillage from wall
 covering face and seams with a remover recommended by the manufacturer.
 After the installation is complete, vacuum the fabric with a ceiling to
 floor motion. Upon completion of presentation dry erase wall covering
 installation, clean the wall covering surface as recommended by the
 manufacturer prior to first use. When frame and tray are required for
 presentation dry erase wall covering, install them in accordance with
 manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.3.1.1     Textile Wall Covering

 When textile wall coverings are specified to comply with NFPA 265 or ICC IBC
  (Section 803.5.1 Textile Wall Coverings) testing, install the wall
 covering in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation
 instructions for compliance with the testing using the same product
 mounting system, including adhesive.

3.3.2     Corner Guards and Wainscot Cap

 Install corner guards where shown on drawings sheet and in accordance with
 the manufacturer's printed instructions. Run corner guards from top of
 base to ceiling in a continuous length.

3.4     CLEAN-UP

 Upon completion of the work, clean wall covering free of dirt, soiling,
 stain, or residual film. Remove and clean surplus materials, rubbish, and
 debris resulting from the wall covering installation.

          -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 09 72 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



                                SECTION 09 90 00

                               PAINTS AND COATINGS
                                      08/08

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

 ACGIH 0100Doc                      (2005) Documentation of the Threshold
                                    Limit Values and Biological Exposure
                                    Indices

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM D 2092                        (1995; R 2001e1) Standard Guide for
                                    Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                                    Steel Surfaces for Painting

 ASTM D 235                         (2002; R 2008) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum
                                    Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)

 ASTM D 4263                        (1983; R 2005) Indicating Moisture in
                                    Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

 ASTM D 4444                        (2008) Use and Calibration of Hand-Held
                                    Moisture Meters

 ASTM D 523                         (2008) Standard Test Method for Specular
                                    Gloss

 ASTM F 1869                        (2004) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
                                    Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
                                    Calcium Chloride

            MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

 MPI 10                             (Oct 2009) Exterior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss
                                    Level 1

 MPI 107                            (Oct 2009) Rust Inhibitive Primer
                                    (Water-Based)

 MPI 11                             (Oct 2009) Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI
                                    Gloss Level 5

 MPI 134                            (Oct 2009) Galvanized Primer (Waterbased)

 MPI 138                            (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance
                                    Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2

 MPI 139                            (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance


                            SECTION 09 90 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


                                   Latex, MPI    Gloss Level 3

 MPI 141                           (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance Latex
                                   MPI Gloss Level 5

 MPI 161                           (Oct 2009) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial
                                   Coating, MPI Gloss Level 3

 MPI 163                           (Oct 2009) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial
                                   Coating, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

 MPI 23                            (Oct 2009) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer

 MPI 26                            (Oct 2009) Cementitious Galvanized Metal
                                   Primer

 MPI 4                             (Oct 2009) Interior/Exterior Latex Block
                                   Filler

 MPI 42                            (Oct 2009) Latex Stucco and Masonry
                                   Textured Coating

 MPI 44                            (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level
                                   2

 MPI 50                            (Oct 2009) Interior Latex Primer Sealer

 MPI 52                            (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level
                                   3

 MPI 57                            (Oct 2009) Interior Oil Modified Urethane
                                   Clear Satin

 MPI 79                            (Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal
                                   Primer

 MPI 8                             (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss
                                   Level I

 MPI 90                            (Oct 2009) Interior Wood Stain,
                                   Semi-Transparent

 MPI 94                            (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI
                                   Gloss Level 5

 MPI 95                            (Oct 2009) Quick Drying Primer for Aluminum

           THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

 SSPC PA 1                         (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and
                                   Maintenance Painting

 SSPC PA Guide 3                   (1982; E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint
                                   Application

 SSPC QP 1                         (1998; E 2004) Standard Procedure for
                                   Evaluating Painting Contractors (Field
                                   Application to Complex Industrial
                                   Structures)


                           SECTION 09 90 00     Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



 SSPC SP 1                        (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning

 SSPC SP 10                       (2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning

 SSPC SP 12                       (2002) Surface Preparation and Cleaning of
                                  Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating

 SSPC SP 2                        (1982; E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning

 SSPC SP 3                        (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning

 SSPC SP 6                        (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning

 SSPC SP 7                        (2007) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

 SSPC VIS 1                       (2002; E 2004) Guide and Reference
                                  Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
                                  Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning

 SSPC VIS 3                       (2004) Visual Standard for Power-and
                                  Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel

 SSPC VIS 4                       (1998; E 2000; E 2004) Guide and Reference
                                  Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
                                  Waterjetting

          U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

 EM 385-1-1                       (2008) Safety and Health Requirements
                                  Manual

          U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

 MIL-STD-101                      (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for
                                  Compressed Gas Cylinders

          U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

 EPA Method 24                    (2000) Determination of Volatile Matter
                                  Content, Water Content, Density, Volume
                                  Solids, and Weight Solids of Surface
                                  Coatings

          U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 FED-STD-313                      (Rev D; Am 1) Material Safety Data,
                                  Transportation Data and Disposal Data for
                                  Hazardous Materials Furnished to
                                  Government Activities

          U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 29 CFR 1910.1000                 Air Contaminants

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation


                          SECTION 09 90 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

 The current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand, label,
 product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be
 used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this
 specification. The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI "Approved
 Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract
 and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on
 a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation
 from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable.

 Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with
 specification requirements.

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Piping identification

          Submit color stencil codes

      SD-03 Product Data

          Coating

          Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets

          Sealant

      SD-04 Samples

          Color;

            Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors.   Cross reference
          color samples to color scheme as indicated.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Applicator's qualifications

          Qualification Testing laboratory for coatings;

      SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

          Application instructions

          Mixing

            Detailed mixing instructions, minimum and maximum application
          temperature and humidity, potlife, and curing and drying times
          between coats.

          Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets

            Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings,
          solvents, and other potentially hazardous materials, as defined in
          FED-STD-313.



                            SECTION 09 90 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


        SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

             Coatings;

               Preprinted cleaning and maintenance instructions for all coating
             systems shall be provided.

        SD-11 Closeout Submittals

             Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)

             LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in
             accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
             Documentation Notebook.

             Materials; (LEED)

             LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in
             accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
             Documentation Notebook.

             LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in
             accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
             Documentation Notebook.

1.3     APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS

1.3.1    Contractor Qualification

 Submit the name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address
 of the contractor that will be performing all surface preparation and
 coating application. Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully
 performed surface preparation and application of coatings on a minimum of
 three similar projects within the past three years. List information by
 individual and include the following:

        a.   Name of individual and proposed position for this work.

        b.   Information about each previous assignment including:

             Position or responsibility

             Employer (if other than the Contractor)

             Name of facility owner

             Mailing address, telephone number, and telex number (if non-US) of
              facility owner

             Name of individual in facility owner's organization who can be
              contacted as a reference

             Location, size and description of structure

             Dates work was carried out

             Description of work carried out on structure




                              SECTION 09 90 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


1.3.2     SSPC QP 1 Certification

 All contractors and subcontractors that perform surface preparation or
 coating application shall be certified by the Society for Protective
 Coatings (formerly Steel Structures Painting Council) (SSPC) to the
 requirements of SSPC QP 1 prior to contract award, and shall remain
 certified while accomplishing any surface preparation or coating
 application. The painting contractors and painting subcontractors must
 remain so certified for the duration of the project. If a contractor's or
 subcontractor's certification expires, the firm will not be allowed to
 perform any work until the certification is reissued. Requests for
 extension of time for any delay to the completion of the project due to an
 inactive certification will not be considered and liquidated damages will
 apply. Notify the Contracting Officer of any change in contractor
 certification status.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1     Field Samples and Tests

 The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been
 delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government. Take
 samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph "Sampling
 Procedures." Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph
 "Testing Procedure." Products which do not conform, shall be removed from
 the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced
 specification. Testing of replacement products that failed initial testing
 shall be at no cost to the Government.

1.4.1.1     Sampling Procedure

 The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that
 have been delivered to the job site for sample testing. The Contractor
 shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials. The
 samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer, and
 labeled, identifying each sample. Provide labels in accordance with the
 paragraph "Packaging, Labeling, and Storage" of this specification.

1.4.1.2     Testing Procedure

 Provide Batch Quality Conformance Testing for specified products, as
 defined by and performed by MPI. As an alternative to Batch Quality
 Conformance Testing, the Contractor may provide Qualification Testing for
 specified products above to the appropriate MPI product specification,
 using the third-party laboratory approved under the paragraph
 "Qualification Testing" laboratory for coatings. The qualification testing
 lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test results.
 The summary shall list all of the reference specification requirements and
 the result of each test. The summary shall clearly indicate whether the
 tested paint meets each test requirement. Note that Qualification Testing
 may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform, due to the extent of testing required.

 Submit name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of
 the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of
 coating samples for compliance with specification requirements. Submit
 documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint
 samples for conformance with specifications, and that employees performing
 testing are qualified. If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch
 Quality Conformance testing, the above submittal information is not


                                SECTION 09 90 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 required, only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI
 will perform the testing.

1.5     REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1     Environmental Protection

 In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental
 protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of
 the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction.
 Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to
 conform.

1.5.2     Lead Content

 Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of
 nonvolatile content.

1.5.3     Chromate Content

 Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.

1.5.4     Asbestos Content

 Materials shall not contain asbestos.

1.5.5     Mercury Content

 Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.

1.5.6     Silica

 Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica.

1.5.7     Human Carcinogens

 Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100Doc and ACGIH 0100Doc confirmed human
 carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).

1.6     PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE

 Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract
 specification number, designation name, formula or specification number,
 batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's
 formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and
 special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented
 paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints
 and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written
 directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with
 sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at
 temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F.

1.7     SAFETY AND HEALTH

 Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance
 with the following:

 Work shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws and
 regulations, and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity


                              SECTION 09 90 00   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY
 REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The Activity Hazard Analysis
 shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on
 painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone.

1.7.1     Safety Methods Used During Coating Application

 Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3.

1.7.2     Toxic Materials

 To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the
 most stringent guidance of:

        a.   The applicable manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
             or local regulation.

        b.   29 CFR 1910.1000.

        c.   ACGIH 0100Doc, threshold limit values.

1.8     ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 Comply, at minimum, with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation
 during and after installation. Isolate area of application from rest of
 building when applying high-emission paints or coatings.

1.8.1     Coatings

 Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:

        a.   Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;

        b.   Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically
             pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product
             manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions
             exceed manufacturer recommendations.

1.9     SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.9.1     Local/Regional Materials

 Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
 manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
 from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Paint and
 coating materials may be locally available.

1.10     COLOR SELECTION

 Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified on the Drawings.
 Manufacturers' names and color identification are used for the purpose of
 color identification only. Named products are acceptable for use only if
 they conform to specified requirements. Products of other manufacturers
 are acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product
 conforms to specified requirements.

 Tint each coat progressively darker to enable confirmation of the number of
 coats.


                             SECTION 09 90 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



 Color, texture, and pattern of wall coating systems shall be as indicated
 on the Drawings.

1.11     LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED

1.11.1        Painting Included

 Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following
 unless indicated otherwise.

         a.    Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles
               readily detachable by removal of fasteners, such as screws and
               bolts.

         b.    New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color
               coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during
               performance of the work.

         c.    Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of
               the work.

1.11.1.1        Exterior Painting

 Includes new surfaces of the building and appurtenances. Also included are
 existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations.

1.11.1.2        Interior Painting

 Includes new surfaces of the building and appurtenances as indicated and
 existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations. Where a space
 or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items, unless
 indicated otherwise.

         a.    Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and

         b.    Other contiguous surfaces.

1.11.2        Painting Excluded

 Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.

         a.    Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed
               ductwork, machinery, and equipment fixed in place.

         b.    Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as
               enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic
               spaces, crawl spaces, elevator shafts and chases.

         c.    Steel to be embedded in concrete.

         d.    Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing
               coated surfaces.

         e.    Hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items.

1.11.3        Mechanical and Electrical Painting

 Includes field coating of interior and exterior new surfaces.


                                  SECTION 09 90 00   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                                       W912HN-11-R-0022



         a.    Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the
               following items unless indicated otherwise.

               (1)   Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;

               (2)   Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;

               (3)   Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.

         b.    Do not paint the following, unless indicated otherwise:

               (1) New zinc-coated, aluminum, and copper surfaces under
               insulation

               (2)   New aluminum jacket on piping

               (3)   New interior ferrous piping under insulation.

1.11.3.1        Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems

 Clean, pretreat, prime, and paint new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems
 including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous
 metalwork, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean, dry surfaces, using
 clean brushes. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, and loose
 mill scale. Immediately after cleaning, provide the metal surfaces with
 one coat primer per schedules. Shield sprinkler heads with protective
 covering while painting is in progress. Upon completion of painting,
 remove protective covering from sprinkler heads. Remove sprinkler heads
 which have been painted and replace with new sprinkler heads. Provide
 primed surfaces with the following:

         a.    Piping in Unfinished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with one coat
               of red alkyd gloss enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness
               of 1.0 mil in attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl
               spaces, pipe chases, mechanical equipment room, and spaces where
               walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a
               prefinished material. In lieu of red enamel finish coat, provide
               piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red
               plastic bands spaced at maximum of 20 foot intervals.

         b.    Piping in Finished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with two coats
               of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except provide valves and
               operating accessories with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel
               applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Provide
               piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red
               plastic bands spaced at maximum of 20 foot intervals throughout
               the piping systems.


1.11.4        Definitions and Abbreviations

1.11.4.1        Qualification Testing

 Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed in
 the product specification. This testing is accomplished by MPI to qualify
 each product for the MPI Approved Product List, and may also be
 accomplished by Contractor's third party testing lab if an alternative to
 Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired.


                                SECTION 09 90 00     Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022



1.11.4.2    Batch Quality Conformance Testing

 Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is
 the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product
 specification. This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab.

1.11.4.3    Coating

 A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate. A
 coating may be a metal, alloy, paint, or solid/liquid suspensions on
 various substrates (metals, plastics, wood, paper, leather, cloth, etc.).
 They may be applied by electrolysis, vapor deposition, vacuum, or
 mechanical means such as brushing, spraying, calendaring, and roller
 coating. A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or
 both. The term "coating" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels,
 stains, varnishes, sealers, epoxies, and other coatings, whether used as
 primer, intermediate, or finish coat. The terms paint and coating are used
 interchangeably.

1.11.4.4    DFT or dft

 Dry film thickness, the film thickness of the fully cured, dry paint or
 coating.

1.11.4.5    DSD

 Degree of Surface Degradation, the MPI system of defining degree of surface
 degradation. Five (5) levels are generically defined under the Assessment
 sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.

1.11.4.6    EPP

 Environmentally Preferred Products, a standard for determining
 environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101.

1.11.4.7    EXT

 MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system.

1.11.4.8    INT

 MPI short term designation for an interior coating system.

1.11.4.9    micron / microns

 The metric measurement for 0.001 mm or one/one-thousandth of a millimeter.

1.11.4.10    mil / mils

 The English measurement for 0.001 in or one/one-thousandth of an inch,
 equal to 25.4 microns or 0.0254 mm.

1.11.4.11    mm

 The metric measurement for millimeter, 0.001 meter or one/one-thousandth of
 a meter.




                           SECTION 09 90 00     Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


1.11.4.12     MPI Gloss Levels

 MPI system of defining gloss. Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are
 generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals.
 Traditionally, Flat refers to G1/G2, Eggshell refers to G3, Semigloss
 refers to G5, and Gloss refers to G6.

 Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows:

 Gloss      Description     Units              Units
 Level                      @ 60 degrees       @ 85 degrees

 G1         Matte or Flat   0 to 5             10   max
 G2         Velvet          0 to 10            10   to 35
 G3         Eggshell        10 to 25           10   to 35
 G4         Satin           20 to 35           35   min
 G5         Semi-Gloss      35 to 70
 G6         Gloss           70 to 85
 G7         High Gloss

 Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D 523. Historically, the
 Government has used Flat (G1 / G2), Eggshell (G3), Semi-Gloss (G5), and
 Gloss (G6).

1.11.4.13     MPI System Number

 The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI
 Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting
 Manual and defined as an exterior (EXT/REX) or interior system (INT/RIN).
 The Division number follows the CSI Master Format.

1.11.4.14     Paint

 See Coating definition.

1.11.4.15     REX

 MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in
 repainting projects or over existing coating systems.

1.11.4.16     RIN

 MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in
 repainting projects or over existing coating systems.

PART 2   PRODUCTS

2.1   MATERIALS

 Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3.
 Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for specified coatings and
 solvents. All consolidated latex paints shall contain a minimum of 100
 percent post-consumer recycled content. Comply with applicable regulations
 regarding toxic and hazardous materials.




                            SECTION 09 90 00   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1     PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED

 Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or
 otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
 radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property,
 and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to
 be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades
 involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by
 coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.

3.2     SURFACE PREPARATION

 Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, and other foreign
 matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for
 each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and
 grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning shall be
 programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly
 painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in
 contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be
 spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of
 preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the
 adjacent areas.

3.3     PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

3.3.1     New Ferrous Surfaces

         a.    Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas
               That Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances:
               Solvent clean or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to
               remove oil and grease. Where shop coat is missing or damaged,
               clean according to SSPC SP 2. Brush-off blast remaining surface
               in accordance with SSPC SP 7; Water jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ-4 may
               be used to remove loose coating and other loose materials. Use
               inhibitor as recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent
               premature rusting. Shop-coated ferrous surfaces shall be
               protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded
               areas immediately upon detection.

         b.    Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust, Mill Scale, and Other
               Foreign Substances: Clean entire surface in accordance with
               SSPC SP 6/SSPC SP 12 WJ-3.

3.3.2     Final Ferrous Surface Condition:

 For tool cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and
 SSPC SP 3. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to
 photographs in SSPC VIS 3.

 For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in
 SSPC SP 7, SSPC SP 6, and SSPC SP 10. As a visual reference, cleaned
 surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 1.

 For waterjet cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 12.
 As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in
 SSPC VIS 4.



                               SECTION 09 90 00   Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


3.3.3     Galvanized Surfaces

        a.   New Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation
             Products: Clean with solvent, or non-alkaline detergent solution
             in accordance with SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has been
             passivated or stabilized, the coating shall be completely removed
             by brush-off abrasive blast. New galvanized steel to be coated
             shall not be "passivated" or "stabilized" If the absence of
             hexavalent stain inhibitors is not documented, test as described
             in ASTM D 2092, Appendix X2, and remove by one of the methods
             described therein.

        b.   Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No
             Rusting: Water jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating
             from surfaces with less than 20 percent coating deterioration and
             no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor as recommended
             by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.

3.3.4     Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces

 Aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal
 surfaces.

        a.   Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and
             wash with mild non-alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water
             soluble contaminants.

3.3.5     Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces

 Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, ASTM D 235.        Wipe dry with
 clean, dry cloths.

3.3.6     Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous or Mastic-Type Coating

 Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution
 of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5
 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.

3.4     PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE

3.4.1     Concrete and Masonry

        a.   Curing: Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to
             cure at least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on
             grade, which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting.

        b.   Surface Cleaning:   Remove the following deleterious substances.

             (1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new surfaces with a
             solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cuphousehold
             detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly
             with fresh water. For large areas, water blasting may be used.

             (2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new surfaces with a solution composed
             of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, 1
             quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm
             water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

             (3)   Paint and Loose Particles:    Remove by wire brushing.


                              SECTION 09 90 00    Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



             (4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed
             by washing with a 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of
             hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. Do not allow acid to remain on the
             surface for more than five minutes before rinsing with fresh
             water. Do not acid clean more than 4 square feet of surface, per
             workman, at one time.

        c.   Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints
             and minor defects, including but not limited to spalls, in
             accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prior to
             coating application.

        d.   Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp
             surfaces, but not to surfaces with droplets of water. Do not
             apply epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by
             ASTM D 4263 or horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture
             per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F 1869. In
             all cases follow manufacturers recommendations. Allow surfaces to
             cure a minimum of 30 days before painting.

3.4.2     Gypsum Board, Plaster, and Stucco

        a.   Surface Cleaning: Plaster and stucco shall be clean and free from
             loose matter; gypsum board shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and
             dust by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a dry cloth, or
             vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first coat material.
             A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.

        b.   Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints,
             cracks, holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects
             with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.

        c.   Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp
             surfaces, but not surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply
             epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by ASTM D 4263. New
             plaster to be coated shall have a maximum moisture content of 8
             percent, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4444, Method A,
             unless otherwise authorized. In addition to moisture content
             requirements, allow new plaster to age a minimum of 30 days before
             preparation for painting.

3.5     PREPARATION OF WOOD AND PLYWOOD SURFACES

3.5.1     New   Plywood and Wood Surfaces, Except Floors:

        a.   Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter.

             Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other
             deleterious substances and in a condition approved by the
             Contracting Officer prior to receiving paint or other finish.    Do
             not use water to clean uncoated wood.

        b.   Removal of Fungus and Mold: Wash existing coated surfaces with a
             solution composed of 3 ounces (2/3 cup) trisodium phosphate, 1
             ounce (1/3 cup) household detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium
             hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water. Rinse
             thoroughly with fresh water.



                             SECTION 09 90 00   Page 15
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


        c.   Moisture content of the wood shall not exceed 12 percent as
             measured by a moisture meter in accordance with ASTM D 4444,
             Method A, unless otherwise authorized.

        d.   Wood surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive water-thinned paints
             shall be primed and/or touched up before applying water-thinned
             paints.

        e.   Cracks and Nailheads: Set and putty stop nailheads and putty
             cracks after the prime coat has dried.

        f.   Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects:

             (1) Knots and Resinous Wood : Prior to application of coating,
             cover knots and stains with two or more coats of 3-pound-cut
             shellac varnish, plasticized with 5 ounces of castor oil per gallon.
             Scrape away existing coatings from knotty areas, and sand before
             treating. Prime before applying any putty over shellacked area.

             (2) Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty,
             linseed oil putty. Sand smooth after putty has dried.

             (3) Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the
             surface, wipe and apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow
             to dry before paint is applied.

3.6     APPLICATION

3.6.1     Coating Application

 Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal, state and local
 laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply
 coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are
 applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein.

 At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration.
 Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application.

 Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint
 may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. Use trigger operated spray
 nozzles for water hoses. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be
 of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be
 coated. Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based
 paints or using spray equipment with any paints.

 Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only to surfaces that
 are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.

 Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces.
 Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges, corners,
 crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of
 adjacent painted surfaces.

 Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform
 thickness and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other
 voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish.
 Hiding shall be complete.

 Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior areas


                             SECTION 09 90 00    Page 16
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of
 coating material.

 Apply paint to new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves,
 piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous metal work, and
 accessories. Shield sprinkler heads with protective coverings while
 painting is in progress. Remove sprinkler heads which have been painted
 and replace with new sprinkler heads. For piping in unfinished spaces,
 provide primed surfaces with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel to a
 minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Unfinished spaces include attic
 spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, pipe chases,
 mechanical equipment room, and space where walls or ceiling are not painted
 or not constructed of a prefinished material. For piping in finished
 areas, provide prime surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent
 surfaces, except provide valves and operating accessories with one coat of
 red alkyd gloss enamel. Upon completion of painting, remove protective
 covering from sprinkler heads.

        a.   Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the
             coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to
             present topcoat adhesion problems. Provide each coat in specified
             condition to receive next coat.

        b.   Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or
             intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than
             recommended by manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats.
             Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if
             primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than
             recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat
             shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely, and
             there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of
             successive coats.

        c.   Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs,
             drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.

        d.   Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies
             and urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window
             recommended by the manufacturer.

3.6.2    Mixing and Thinning of Paints

 Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when
 thinning is mandatory to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions,
 application methods, or for the type of paint being used. Obtain written
 permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written
 permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.

 When thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to
 application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. The
 use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete
 hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause
 the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds. Paints of
 different manufacturers shall not be mixed.

3.6.3    Two-Component Systems

 Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's
 instructions. Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration


                             SECTION 09 90 00   Page 17
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


 and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of
 substrate.

3.6.4     Coating Systems

        a.   Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the
             respective specifications listed in the following Tables:

             Table

             Division 3.     Exterior Concrete Paint Table
             Division 5.     Exterior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
             Division 9:     Exterior Stucco Paint Table

             Division   3.   Interior Concrete Paint Table
             Division   4.   Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
             Division   5.   Interior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
             Division   6.   Interior Wood Paint Table
             Division   9:   Interior Plaster, Gypsum Board, Textured Surfaces
                              Paint Table

        b.   Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers,
             varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum
             dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise
             in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers to the
             minimum dry film thickness.

        c.   Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces
             which have not been specified, the same as surfaces having similar
             conditions of exposure.

        d.   Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work,
             Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with
             the following:

             (1)     One coat of primer.

             (2)     One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.

             (3)     One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.

3.7     COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL

 Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior.

        a.   Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface
             is cleaned, to surfaces that meet all specified surface
             preparation requirements at time of application.

        b.   Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use one coat of
             specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after
             erection.

        c.   Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged
             coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.

        d.   Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MPI 101,
             1.5 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane
             coatings.


                                SECTION 09 90 00   Page 18
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



       e.   Pipes and Tubing: The semitransparent film applied to some pipes
            and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but
            shall be overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior
            to application of finish coats.

       f.   Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous
            Surfaces. On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings,
            spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer
            MPI 107.

3.8    COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES

 Apply coatings of Tables in Division 3, 4 and 9 for Exterior and Interior.

3.9    PIPING IDENTIFICATION

 Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Provide in
 accordance with MIL-STD-101. Place stenciling in clearly visible
 locations. On piping not covered by MIL-STD-101, stencil approved names or
 code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch high for piping and a
 minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on
 piping to indicate direction of flow using black stencil paint.

3.10   INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

 In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate
 mobility of moving components, including swinging and sliding doors,
 cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the Contracting
 Officer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying
 times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.

3.11   WASTE MANAGEMENT

 As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Do not use
 kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints.
 Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers. Close and
 seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary
 for reuse. Store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate
 temperature. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in
 designated containers. Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back
 program. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into
 new product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall
 be sought after to reclaim the materials. Set aside extra paint for future
 color matches or reuse by the Government. Where local options exist for
 leftover paint recycling, collect all waste paint by type and provide for
 delivery to recycling or collection facility for reuse by local
 organizations.

3.12   PAINT TABLES

 All DFT's are minimum values. Use only materials with a GPS green check
 mark having a minimum MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E1 rating based on VOC
 (EPA Method 24) content levels. Use only interior paints and coatings that
 meet VOC requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. Acceptable
 products are listed in the MPI Green Approved Products List, available at
 http://www.specifygreen.com/APL/ProductIdxByMPInum.asp.




                            SECTION 09 90 00   Page 19
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


3.12.1     EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES

        DIVISION 3:   EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE

A.  New and uncoated existing concrete;
  vertical surfaces, including undersides of balconies and soffits but
  excluding tops of slabs:

 1. Latex
    New; MPI EXT 3.1A-G2 (Flat)
    Primer:             Intermediate:           Topcoat:
    MPI 10              MPI 10                  MPI 10
    System DFT: 3.5 mils

  Primer as recommended by manufacturer.    Topcoat:      Coating to match adjacent
  surfaces.

        DIVISION 5:   EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE

STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

A.     New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or
     SSPC SP 3

 1. Alkyd
    New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G5 (Semigloss)
    Primer:             Intermediate:           Topcoat:
    MPI 23              MPI 94                  MPI 94
    System DFT: 5.25 mils

B.    New Steel that has been blast-cleaned to SSPC SP 6:

 1. Alkyd
    New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss)
    Primer:             Intermediate:           Topcoat:
    MPI 79              MPI 94                  MPI 94
    System DFT: 5.25 mils

 EXTERIOR GALVANIZED SURFACES

C.    New Galvanized surfaces:

 1. MPI EXT 5.3A-G5 (Semigloss)
    Primer:             Intermediate:           Topcoat:
    MPI 26              MPI 11                  MPI 11
    System DFT: 4.5 mils

 2. Waterborne Primer / Latex
    MPI EXT 5.3H-G1 (Flat)
    Primer:             Intermediate:           Topcoat:
    MPI 134             MPI 10                  MPI 10
    System DFT: 4.5 mils

      MPI EXT 5.3H-G5 (Semigloss)
      Primer:             Intermediate:         Topcoat:
      MPI 134             MPI 11                MPI 11
      System DFT: 4.5 mils

EXTERIOR SURFACES, OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)


                             SECTION 09 90 00   Page 20
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


EXTERIOR SURFACES, OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)

D.  Aluminum, aluminum alloy and other miscellaneous non-ferrous metal items
  not otherwise specified except hot metal surfaces, roof surfaces, and new
  prefinished equipment. Match surrounding finish:

 1. Waterborne Light Industrial Coating
    MPI EXT 5.4G-G3(Eggshell)
    Primer:             Intermediate:         Topcoat:
    MPI 95              MPI 161            MPI 161
    System DFT: 5 mils

     MPI EXT 5.4G-G5(Semigloss)
     Primer:             Intermediate:        Topcoat:
     MPI 95              MPI 163           MPI 163
     System DFT: 5 mils

E.  Surfaces adjacent to painted surfaces; Mechanical, Electrical, Fire
  extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves, conduit, hangers,
  supports, exposed copper piping, and miscellaneous metal items not
  otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished
  equipment. Match surrounding finish:

 1. Alkyd
    MPI EXT 5.1D-G1 (Flat)
    Primer:             Intermediate:          Topcoat:
    MPI 79              MPI 8                  MPI 8
    System DFT: 5.25 mils

     MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss)
     Primer:             Intermediate:         Topcoat:
     MPI 79              MPI 94                MPI 94
     System DFT: 5.25 mils

3.12.2    INTERIOR PAINT TABLES

       DIVISION 3:   INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE

A.   New Concrete, vertical surfaces, not specified otherwise:

 1. Latex
    New; MPI INT 3.1A-G2 (Flat)
    Primer:             Intermediate:          Topcoat:
    MPI 50              MPI 44                 MPI 44
    System DFT: 4 mils

     New; MPI INT 3.1A-G3 (Eggshell)
     Primer:             Intermediate:         Topcoat:
     MPI 50              MPI 52                MPI 52
     System DFT: 4 mils

B.   Concrete ceilings, uncoated:

 1. Latex Aggregate
    MPI INT 3.1N
    Primer:            Intermediate:           Topcoat:
    N/A                N/A                     MPI 42
    System DFT: Per Manufacturer



                            SECTION 09 90 00   Page 21
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


       DIVISION 3: INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE
     Texture - Fine. Surface preparation, number of
     coats, and primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
     Topcoat: Coating to match adjacent surfaces.

       DIVISION 4:    INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE

A.   New   Concrete masonry:

 1. High Performance Architectural Latex
    MPI INT 4.2D-G2 (Flat)
    Filler              Primer:                   Intermediate:      Topcoat:
    MPI 4               N/A                       MPI 138            MPI 138
    System DFT: 11 mils

     MPI INT 4.2D-G3 (Eggshell)
     Filler              Primer:                  Intermediate:      Topcoat:
     MPI 4              N/A                       MPI 139            MPI 139
     System DFT: 11 mils

       DIVISION 5:    INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE

INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

A.  Metal, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire extinguishing sprinkler systems
  including valves, conduit, hangers, supports, Surfaces adjacent to
  painted surfaces (Match surrounding finish), and miscellaneous metal
items   not otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new
prefinished equipment:

 1. MPI INT 5.1R-G5 (Semigloss)
    Primer:             Intermediate:             Topcoat:
    MPI 79              MPI 141                   MPI 141
    System DFT: 5 mils

       DIVISION 6:    INTERIOR WOOD PAINT TABLE

B.  New and Existing, previously finished or stained Wood Doors; Natural
  Finish or Stained:

 1. Stained, oil-modified polyurethane
    New; MPI INT 6.3E-G4 / Existing; MPI RIN 6.3E-G4
    Stain:              Primer:             Intermediate:            Topcoat:
    MPI 90              MPI 57              MPI 57                   MPI 57
    System DFT: 4 mils

     Note:   Sand between all coats per manufacturers recommendations.

        DIVISION 9:   INTERIOR, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE

A.   New Wallboard not otherwise specified:

 1. New; MPI INT 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell)
    Primer:             Intermediate:             Topcoat:
    MPI 50              MPI 52                    MPI 52
    System DFT: 4 mils




                               SECTION 09 90 00   Page 22
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


     DIVISION 9:   INTERIOR, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE


2.    New; Dry Erase Paint (Eggshell)
      Primer:             Intermediate:         Topcoat:
      Water Based         Premium Satin         Write Up h20
      Stain Killing       Enamel Paint          Clear Finish
      Primer
      System DFT: 4 mils

          -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 09 90 00   Page 23
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022




                                    SECTION 10 10 00

                         VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES
                                       02/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM B 221                            (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                       and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                                       Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

 ASTM E 84                             (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
                                       Burning Characteristics of Building
                                       Materials

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 The term visual display board when used herein includes presentation
 boards, marker boards, tackboards, board cases, display track system and
 horizontal sliding units. Visual display boards shall be from
 manufacturer's standard product line.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-03 Product Data

             Visual Display Board

               Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts.
             Manufacturer's installation instructions, and cleaning and
             maintenance instructions.

         SD-04 Samples

             Aluminum;

               Sections of frame, map rail, and chalktray, and two map hooks.

             Porcelain Enamel;

               Section showing porcelain enamel coating, steel, core material
             and backing.



                              SECTION 10 10 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


             Materials;

               Section of core material showing the lamination of colored cork,
             natural cork, woven fabric, non-woven fabric, and vinyl wall
             covering. Sample of hardwood and plastic laminate finish, and
             glass type. Samples shall be minimum 4 by 4 inches and show range
             of color.

         SD-07 Certificates

             Visual Display Board

               Certificate of compliance signed by Contractor attesting that
             visual display board conform to the requirements specified.

1.4     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the building site in the manufacturer's original
 unopened containers and store them in a clean dry area with temperature
 maintained above 50 degrees F. Stack materials according to manufacturer's
 recommendations. Visual display boards shall be allowed to acclimate to
 the building temperature for 24 hours prior to installation.

1.5     WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a one year period.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

2.1.1      Porcelain Enamel

 Provide marker board writing surface composed of porcelain enamel fused to
 a nominal 28 gauge thick steel, laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick core
 material with a steel or foil backing sheet. Writing surface shall be
 capable of supporting paper by means of magnets. Marker board surface for
 display track system may be a powder paint dry erase surface adhered to a
 nominal 18 gauge thick steel.

2.1.2     Cork

 Cork shall be a continuous resilient sheet made from soft, clean,
 granulated cork relatively free from hardback and dust and bonded with a
 binder suitable for the purpose intended. The wearing surface shall be
 free from streaks, spots, cracks or other imperfections that would impair
 its usefulness or appearance. The material shall be seasoned, and a clean
 cut made not less than 1/2 inch from the edge shall show no evidence of
 soft sticky binder.

2.1.3     Woven Fabric

 Provide plain weave fabric. Fiber content shall be 100 percent polyester.
 Minimum total weight shall be 16 oz. plus or minus 0.5 oz. per lineal yard.
 Fabric shall have a Class A flame spread rating of 0-50 and smoke
 development rating of 0-450 in accordance with ASTM E 84.




                              SECTION 10 10 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.4     Aluminum

 Aluminum frame extrusions shall be alloy 6063-T5 or 6063-T6, conform to
 ASTM B 221, and be a minimum 0.06 inches thick. Exposed aluminum shall
 have an anodized, satin finish. Straight, single lengths shall be used
 wherever possible. Joints shall be kept to a minimum. Corners shall be
 mitered and shall have a hairline closure.

2.1.5     Hardwood

 Exposed hardwood for frames, cabinets, and cases shall be oak, walnut or
 mahogany. Provide hardwood with a durable factory-applied stain and
 lacquer finish of a type standard with the manufacturer.

2.2     PRESENTATION BOARD

 The presentation board shall be a wall hung cabinet with lockable double
 doors and shall not have a projection screen that pulls down over the
 marker board writing surface in the cabinet interior. The doors shall be
 attached to cabinet with piano hinges and have a catch or closure to keep
 doors closed when not in use. The interior of the cabinet shall contain a
 porcelain enamel markerboard writing surface with chalktray, a flip chart
 that can be hung on an interior door panel, and fabric covered tacksurface
 on the interior door panels. The cabinet shall be oak hardwood. The edge
 detailing shall be rectilinear. Dry erase markings shall be removable with
 a felt eraser or dry cloth without ghosting. Each unit shall come complete
 with an eraser and four different color compatible dry erase markers. Two
 keys shall be provided for each unit. The size shall be as shown in the
 drawings.

2.3     MARKERBOARD

 Markerboard shall have a porcelain enamel writing surface and a chalktray.
 Markerboard shall be a factory assembled unit complete in one piece,
 without joints whenever possible. When markerboard dimensions require
 delivery in separate sections, components shall be prefit at the factory,
 disassembled for delivery and jointed at the site. Frame shall be oak.
 Chalktray shall be the same material as the frame and extend the full
 length of the liquid markerboard. The markerboard shall have a map rail.
 The map rail with a tackable insert shall extend the full length of the
 liquid chalkboard, and shall have map hooks with clips for holding sheets
 of paper. Two map hooks shall be provided for each 4 foot of map rail.
 Dry erase markings shall be removable with a felt eraser or dry cloth
 without ghosting. Each unit shall come complete with an eraser and four
 different color compatible dry erase markers. The size shall be as shown
 in the drawings.

2.4     TACKBOARDS

2.4.1     Cork

 Tackboard shall consist of a minimum   1/4 inch thick colored cork with
 burlap backing laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard, and shall
 have an oak frame. The size shall be as shown in the drawings.

2.4.2     Fabric Covered

 Tackboard shall have a woven fabric covering laminated to a minimum   1/4
 inch thick cork laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard or


                             SECTION 10 10 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 particleboard, and shall have an oak frame.    The size shall be as shown on
 the drawings.

2.5   PROJECTION SCREEN

 Recessed mount motorized projection screen shall have 120V motor that is
 lubricated for life, quick reversal type, has overload protector, integral
 gears, and preset accessible limit switches. Recessed mount projection
 screens shall have an operable closure door and access panel. Screen shall
 be flame retardant, mildew resistant, and white matte with black masking
 borders tab tensioned. Tab tensioned screens shall have a vinyl surface
 that is stretchable. Bottom of screen fabric shall be weighted with metal
 rod. Roller shall be a rigid metal at least 3 inches in diameter mounted
 on sound absorbing supports. Motor will be end mounted design. Screen
 shall have a 3 position control switch to stop or reverse screen at any
 point. The switch shall be installed in a flush electrical box with cover
 plate, location(s) as shown on the electrical drawings. All conduit and
 wiring from the control switch to the projection screen shall be furnished
 and installed by the Contractor. Ceiling recessed case shall be wood with
 metal lined motor compartment. Ceiling mounted case shall be wood. Wood
 case shall be finished in medium oak screen shall be UL listed. The size
 shall be as shown in the drawings.

2.6   COLOR

 Finish colors for required items shall be as specified in the drawings.

PART 3    EXECUTION

3.1   PLACEMENT SCHEDULE

 Location and mounting height of visual display boards shall be as shown on
 the drawings.

 Mounting height is defined as distance from finished floor to top of the
 display board frame.

3.2   INSTALLATION

 Perform installation and assembly in accordance with manufacturer's printed
 instructions. Use concealed fasteners. Visual display boards shall be
 attached to the walls with suitable devices to anchor each unit. furnish
 and install trim items, accessories and miscellaneous items in total,
 including but not limited to hardware, grounds, clips, backing materials,
 adhesives, brackets, and anchorages incidental to or necessary for a sound,
 secure, complete and finished installation. Installation shall not be
 initiated until completion of room painting and finishing operations.
 Visual display boards shall be installed in locations and at mounting
 heights indicated. Visual display boards shall be installed level and
 plumb, and if applicable doors shall be aligned and hardware shall be
 adjusted. Damaged units shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the
 Contracting Officer.

3.3   CLEANING

 Writing surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's
 instructions.

         -- End of Section --


                            SECTION 10 10 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                               W912HN-11-R-0022




                  SECTION 10 10 00   Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 10 14 02

                                INTERIOR SIGNAGE
                                      02/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

            ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

 AA DAF-45                          (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
                                    for Aluminum Finishes

 AA PK-1                            (2008) Pink Sheets: Designations and
                                    Chemical Composition Limits for Aluminum
                                    Alloys in the Form of Castings and Ingot

            AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

 AAMA 2604                          (2005) Voluntary Specification,
                                    Performance Requirements and Test
                                    Procedures for High Performance Organic
                                    Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

            AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI Z97.1                         (2009) Safety Glazing Materials Used in
                                    Buildings - Safety Performance
                                    Specifications and Methods of Test

            AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS D1.2/D1.2M                     (2008) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM B 209                         (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                    and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

 ASTM B 221                         (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                    and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                                    Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

            U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 36 CFR 1191                        Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
                                    Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
                                    Facilities

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Provide interior signage of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message


                            SECTION 10 14 02   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 content shown on the drawings/attachments/signage placement schedule (as
 applicable), conforming to the requirements specified, and placed at the
 locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering, framing as
 detailed, and related components for a complete installation. Signage
 shall be obtained from a single manufacturer with edges and corners of
 finished letterforms and graphics true and clean. Recyclable materials
 shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35
 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Detail Drawings; G

            Drawings showing elevations of each type of sign, dimensions,
          details and methods of mounting or anchoring, mounting height,
          shape and thickness of materials, and details of construction. A
          schedule showing the location, each sign type, and message shall
          be included.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Installation;

            Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalogs cuts, installation and
          cleaning instructions.

      SD-04 Samples

          Interior Signage;

            One sample of each of the following sign types showing typical
          quality, workmanship and color. The samples may be installed in
          the work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.

            a.     Directional sign.

            b.     Standard Room sign.

            c.     Changeable message strip sign.

          Software;

            One copy of the software for user produced signs

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Approved Manufacturer's Instructions;

          Protection and Cleaning;

            Six copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step


                             SECTION 10 14 02   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022


               procedures required for system operation. The instructions shall
               include simplified diagrams for the system as installed. Six
               copies of maintenance instructions listing routine procedures,
               repairs, and guides. The instructions shall include the
               manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
               brief description of all equipment and their basic operating
               features. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a
               hard cover. The following identification shall be inscribed on
               the covers: the words "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS",
               name and location of the facility, name of the Contractor, and
               contract number.

1.4     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Materials shall be packaged to prevent damage and deterioration during
 shipment, handling, storage and installation. Product shall be delivered
 to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging and stored in a clean,
 dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.5     EXTRA MATERIALS

 Provide 24 extra frames and extra stock of the following: 100 blank plates
 of each color and size for sign types. 100 pressure-sensitive letters in
 each color and size for sign type. 100 changeable message strips for sign
 type.   Provide 100 paper inserts and software for creating text and
 symbols for PC compatible computers for Owner production of paper inserts
 after project completion.

PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1     STANDARD PRODUCTS

 Signs, plaques, and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a
 manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products that
 essentially duplicate signs that have been in satisfactory use at least 2
 years prior to bid opening.

2.2     ROOM IDENTIFICATION/DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM

2.2.1     Standard Room Signs - See Drawings for further details.

 Signs shall consist of acrylic plastic 0.080 inch thickness minimum
 conforming to ANSI Z97.1 and shall conform to the following:

         a.    Frames shall be aluminum     1/8 inch wide.

         b.    End caps shall be aluminum    with square style corners.

2.2.2     Changeable Message Strip Signs

 Changeable message strip signs shall be of same construction as standard
 room signs to include a clear sleeve that will accept a paper or plastic
 insert identifying changeable text. The insert shall be prepared die-cut
 vinyl letters applied to 0.015 inch rigid vinyl film. Provide paper and
 software for creating text and symbols for PC compatible Macintosh
 computers for Owner production of paper inserts after project completion.
 Sliding inserts or slide knobs that slide horizontally exposing different
 graphic information shall be provided as identified in the signage
 placement schedule and drawings.


                                SECTION 10 14 02    Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



2.2.3     Type of Mounting For Signs

 Provide extruded aluminum brackets for hanging, projecting, and
 double-sided signs. Mounting for framed, hanging, and projecting signs
 shall be by mechanical fasteners. Surface mounted signs shall be mounted
 with countersunk mounting holes in plaques and mounting screws.

2.2.4     Graphics

 Signage graphics for modular signs shall conform to the following:

        a. Surface Applied Photopolymer: Integral graphics and braille
        achieved by photomechanical stratification processes. Photopolymer
        used for ADA compliant graphics shall be of the type that has a minimum
        durometer reading of 90. Tactile graphics shall be raised 1/32 inch
        from the first surface of plaque by photomechanical stratification
        process.

2.2.5     Character Proportions and Heights

 Letters and numbers on signs conform to 36 CFR 1191.

2.2.6     Raised and Braille Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs (Pictograms)

 Raised letters and numbers on signs shall conform to 36 CFR 1191.

2.3     BUILDING DIRECTORIES

 Building directories shall be lobby directories or floor directories, and
 shall be provided with a changeable directory listing consisting of the
 areas, offices and personnel located within the facility. Dimensions,
 details, and materials of sign and message content shall be as shown on the
 drawings.

2.3.1     Header Panel

 Header panel shall have background metal to match frame and shall have
 raised letters.

2.3.2     Changeable Letter/Message Strip Directory System

 Directory shall consist of an internally illuminated unit with step or
 groove, laser or rotary engraved removable name strips. Design of unit
 shall be as shown in the drawings.

2.3.2.1     Construction

 The directory shall be constructed of an aluminum 2 inch deep frame with
 satin dark bronze anodized finish. Unit shall be fully recessed mounted.
 Unit shall have a 3 inch high header with lettering as shown. Unit shall
 have a 3/8 inch face concealed hinge door and locking system with tempered
 safety glassfixed frame. Door frame shall be aluminum with satin dark
 bronze.

2.3.2.2     Message Strips

 Namestrips shall be updatable by user. Namestrips shall be acrylic sized
 in accordance with manufacturer's standard. Namestrips shall be felt


                               SECTION 10 14 02   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


 grooved background with changeable upper and lower case Helvetica Medium
 letters. Tabbed vinyl letters and numbers shall be provided in accordance
 with the drawings and schedule.

2.4     METAL PLAQUES

2.4.1     Cast Metal Plaques

2.4.1.1     Fabrication

 Cast metal plaques shall have the logo, emblem and artwork cast in the flat
 relief technique. Plaques shall be fabricated from prime aluminum.

2.4.1.2     Border

 Border shall be flat band.

2.4.1.3     Background

 Background texture shall be leather.

2.4.1.4     Mounting

 Mounting shall be concealed.

2.4.1.5     Finish

 Finishes shall consist of aluminum light colored sandblasted background.
 Letters shall be satin polished and entire plaque shall be sprayed with two
 coats of clear lacquer. Letters shall be satin polished.

2.4.2     Chemically Etched Metal Plaques

2.4.2.1     Fabrication

 Plaque shall be chemically single-etched one-piece brass 0.032 inch thick.

2.4.2.2     Finish

 Single-etched raised areas shall be in bronze-tone finish and recessed
 areas shall be colorfilled.

2.4.3     Frost and Surface Oxidized Plaques

2.4.3.1     Fabrication

 Plaque shall be frosted and surface oxidized one-piece anodized aluminum
 bronze 0.040 inch thick.

2.4.3.2     Finish

 Material finish shall be satin. Frosted areas shall be oxidized black or
 brown, for brass or bronze.

2.5     DIMENSIONAL BUILDING LETTERS

2.5.1     Fabrication

 Letters shall be fabricated from cast aluminum       0.090 inch aluminum sheet.


                               SECTION 10 14 02   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 Letters shall be cleaned by chemical etching or cleaned ultrasonically in a
 special degreasing bath. Letters shall be packaged for protection until
 installation.

2.5.2     Typeface

 Typeface shall be helvetica medium.

2.5.3     Size

 Letter size shall be as indicated.

2.5.4     Finish

 Anodized aluminum finish shall be provided.

2.5.5     Mounting

 Threaded studs of number and size recommended by manufacturer, shall be
 supplied for concealed anchorage. Letters which project from the mounting
 surface shall have stud spacer sleeves. Letters, studs, and sleeves shall
 be of the same material. Templates for mounting shall be supplied.

2.6     PRESSURE SENSITIVE LETTERS

 Ensure that edges and corners of finished letterforms and graphics are true
 and clean. Do not use letterforms and graphics with rounded positive or
 negative corners, nicked, cut, or ragged edges.

2.6.1     Typeface

 Helvetica medium.

2.6.2     Size

 As indicated.

2.7     ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS

 Aluminum extrusions shall be at least 1/8 inch thick, and aluminum plate or
 sheet shall be at least 0.0508 inch thick. Extrusions shall conform to
 ASTM B 221; plate and sheet shall conform to ASTM B 209. Where anodic
 coatings are specified, alloy shall conform to AA PK-1 alloy designation
 514.0. Exposed anodized aluminum finishes shall be as shown. Welding for
 aluminum products shall conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.

2.8     ANODIC COATING

 Anodized finish shall conform to AA DAF-45 as follows:

        a. Clear (natural) designation AA-M10-C22-A31, Architectural Class II
        0.4 mil or thicker.

        b. Integral color anodized designation AA-M10-C22-A32, Architectural
        Class 0.4 to 0.7 mil.

        c. Electrolytically deposited color-anodized designation
        AA-M10-C22-A34, Architectural Class II 0.4 to 0.7 mil.



                             SECTION 10 14 02   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.9     ORGANIC COATING

 Organic coating shall conform to AAMA 2604, with total dry film thickness
 not less than 1.2 mils.

2.10     FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE

2.10.1     Factory Workmanship

 Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and
 punching shall produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Exposed surfaces of
 work shall have a smooth finish and exposed riveting shall be flush.
 Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.

2.10.2     Dissimilar Materials

 Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the surfaces will be protected to
 prevent galvanic or corrosive action.

2.11     COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST

 Color shall be as indicated on the drawings. Finish of all signs shall be
 eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish as required in
 handicapped-accessible buildings.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

 Signs shall be installed plumb and true and in accordance with approved
 manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the detail drawings.
 Mounting height and mounting location shall conform to 36 CFR 1191.
 Required blocking shall be installed. Signs on doors or other surfaces
 shall not be installed until finishes on such surfaces have been
 installed. Signs installed on glass surfaces shall be installed with
 matching blank back-up plates in accordance with manufacturer's
 instructions.

3.1.1     Anchorage

 Anchorage shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's
 instructions. Anchorage not otherwise specified or shown shall include
 slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners when
 approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine
 carriage bolts for steel; lag bolts and screws for wood. Exposed anchor
 and fastener materials shall be compatible with metal to which applied and
 shall have matching color and finish. Where recommended by signage
 manufacturer, foam tape pads may be used for anchorage. Foam tape pads
 shall be minimum 1/16 inch thick closed cell vinyl foam with adhesive
 backing. Adhesive shall be transparent, long aging, high tech formulation
 on two sides of the vinyl foam. Adhesive surfaces shall be protected with a
  5 mil green flatstock treated with silicone. Foam pads shall be sized for
 the signage in accordance with signage manufacturer's recommendations.
 Signs mounted to painted gypsum board surfaces shall be removable for
 painting maintenance. Signs mounted to lay-in ceiling grids shall be
 mounted with clip connections to ceiling tees.




                             SECTION 10 14 02   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.1.2   Protection and Cleaning

 Protect the work against damage during construction. Hardware and
 electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass,
 frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned at completion of sign
 installation in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.

         -- End of Section --




                           SECTION 10 14 02   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022




                               SECTION 10 21 13

                             TOILET COMPARTMENTS
                                    01/07

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

 AA DAF-45                        (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
                                  for Aluminum Finishes

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 123/A 123M                (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc
                                  (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
                                  Steel Products

 ASTM A 385/A 385M                (2009) Standard Practice for Providing
                                  High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)

 ASTM B 456                       (2003) Standard Specification for
                                  Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus
                                  Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus
                                  Chromium

          INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

 ICC A117.1                       (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and
                                  Usable Buildings and Facilities

          SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

 SAE AMS-QQ-C-320                 (2000) Chromium Plating
                                  (Electrodeposited)-FSC MFFP

          U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 CID A-A-60003                    (Basic) Partitions, Toilet, Complete

          U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 36 CFR 1191                      Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
                                  Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
                                  Facilities

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Provide a complete and usable toilet partition system, including toilet
 enclosures, system of panels, hardware, and support components.   and
 Affirmative Procurement guidelines. Furnish the partition system from a


                           SECTION 10 21 13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 single manufacturer, with a standard product as shown in the most recent
 catalog data. Submit Fabrication Drawings for metal toilet partitions
 consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the
 factory. Submit manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions with
 Fabrication Drawings for review.

1.2.1     Sustainable Design Requirements

1.2.1.1     Local/Regional Materials

 Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as
 manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
 from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Toilet
 partition materials may be locally available.

1.2.2     Plastic Identification

 Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are
 labeled in accordance with ASTM D 1972. Where products are not labeled,
 provide product data indicating polymeric information in the Operation and
 Maintenance Manual.

      a. Type 1: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).

      b. Type 2: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).

      c. Type 3: Polypropylene (PP).

      d. Type 4: Polystyrene (PS).

      e. Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is
         made with a resin other than those listed above, or is made of more
         than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Fabrication Drawings
            Installation Drawings; G

              Drawings showing plans, elevations, details of construction,
            hardware, reinforcing, fittings, mountings, and anchorings for
            metal partitions. Installation drawings as specified.

        SD-03 Product Data

            Toilet Partition System;
            Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions
            Colors And Finishes
            Partition Panels and Doors
            Anchoring Devices and Fasteners


                              SECTION 10 21 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          Hardware and Fittings
          Brackets
          Door Hardware
          Floor-Anchored Partitions

            Manufacturer's technical data and catalog cuts including
          installation and cleaning instructions.

      SD-04 Samples

          Colors and Finishes;
          Sample of Toilet Partition
          Hardware and Fittings
          Anchoring Devices and Fasteners

            Three samples of each item. Approved hardware samples may be
          installed in the work if properly identified.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Warranty

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Waste Management
          Plastic Identification

      SD-11 Closeout Submittals

          Local/Regional Materials Documentaion; (LEED)

          Toilet Enclosures; (LEED)

            Include in LEED Documentation Notebook

1.4   REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

 Conform to ICC A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of
 toilet compartment door and hardware.

1.5   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unopened packages with the
 brand, item identification, and project reference clearly marked. Store
 components in a dry location that is adequately ventilated; free from dust,
 water, other contaminants, and damage during delivery, storage, and
 construction.

1.6   WARRANTY

 Provide Certification or warranties that metal toilet partitions will be
 free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and
 will remain so for a period of not less than 25 years after completion.




                           SECTION 10 21 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1     MATERIALS

2.1.1         Anchoring Devices and Fasteners

 Provide steel anchoring devices and fasteners hot-dipped galvanized after
 fabrication, in conformance with ASTM A 385/A 385M and ASTM A 123/A 123M.
 Conceal all galvanized anchoring devices.

2.1.2         Brackets

 Wall brackets shall be two-ear panel brackets, T-style,     1-inch stock.
 Provide stirrup style panel-to-pilaster brackets.

2.1.3         Hardware and Fittings

2.1.3.1        General Requirements

 Conform hardware for the toilet partition system to CID A-A-60003 for the
 specified type and style of partitions. Provide hardware finish highly
 resistant to alkalies, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Comply
 latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments with 36 CFR 1191;
 provide chrome-plated steel or stainless steel devices and hinges with door
 latches that operate without either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist
 of the operator.

2.1.3.2        Finishes

         a. Chrome plating shall conform to ASTM B 456.

         b. Finish shall conform to SAE AMS-QQ-C-320, Class I, Type I.

         c. Exposed fasteners shall match the hardware and fittings.

2.1.4         Door Hardware

2.1.4.1        Hinges

 Hinges shall be adjustable to hold in-swinging doors open at any angle up
 to 90 degrees and outswinging doors to 10 degrees. Provide
 self-lubricating hinges with the indicated swing. Hinges shall be the
 cutout-insert type and have the following type of return movement:

         a.    Gravity return movement

2.1.4.2        Latch and Pull

 Latch and pull shall be a combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper
 equipped with emergency access.

2.1.4.3        Coat Hooks

 Coat hooks shall be combination units with hooks and rubber tipped pins.

2.2     PARTITION PANELS AND DOORS

 Provide partition panels and doors not less than 1 inch thick with face
 sheets not less than 0.0396 inch thick.


                                 SECTION 10 21 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.2.1     Toilet Enclosures

 Conform toilet enclosures to CID A-A-60003, Type I, Style A, floor
 supported, B, overhead braced. Furnish width, length, and height of toilet
 enclosures as shown. Provide a width of 1 inch. Finish surface of panels
 shall be solid polyethylene, Finish 5; water resistant; graffiti resistant;
 non-absorbent. Enclosures shall contain a minimum of 100 percent
 post-consumer recycled plastic. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. This
 item may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
 Reinforce panels indicated to receive toilet paper holders or grab bars for
 mounting of the items required. Provide grab bars to withstand a bending
 stress, shear stress, shear force, and a tensile force induced by 250 lbf.
 Grab bars shall not rotate within their fittings.

2.3     FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS

 Pilasters shall be not less than 1-1/4 inch thick with face sheets not less
 than 0.0635 inch thick. Provide anchoring device at the bottom of the
 pilaster consisting of a steel bar not less than 1/2 by 7/8 inch welded to
 the reinforced face sheets and having not less than two 3/8 inch round
 anchorage devices for securing to the floor slab. Provide anchorage
 devices complete with threaded rods, expansion shields, lock washers, and
 leveling-adjustment nuts. Trim piece at the floor shall be 3 inch high and
 fabricated from not less than 0.030 inch thick corrosion-resistant steel.

2.4     OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS

 Pilasters shall be not less than 1-1/4 inch thick with face sheets not less
 than 0.0393 inch thick. Provide anchoring device at the bottom of the
 pilaster consistingof a channel-shaped floor stirrup fabricated from not
 less than 0.0635 inch thick material and a leveling bolt. Secure the
 stirrup to the pilaster with not less than a 3/16 inch bolt and nut after
 the pilaster is leveled. Secure the stirrup to the floor with not less
 than two lead expansion shields and sheetmetal screws. Fabricate overhead
 brace from a continuous extruded aluminum tube not less than 1 inchwide by
 1-1/2 inch high, 0.125-inch wall thickness. Finish shall be AA-C22A31 in
 accordance with AA DAF-45. Set and secure brace into the top of each
 pilaster. Fabricate 3 inch high trim piece at the floor from not less than
  0.030 inch thick corrosion-resistant steel.

2.5     PILASTER SHOES

 Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal floor-mounted anchorage. Pilaster
 shoes shall be one piece molded HDPE. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
 DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Pilaster
 shoes may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
 Height shall be 3 inches.

2.6     HARDWARE

 Hardware for the toilet partition system shall conform to CID A-A-60003 for
 the specified type and style of partitions. Hardware shall be pre-drilled
 by manufacturer. Hardware finish shall be highly resistant to alkalies,
 urine, and other common toilet room acids. Hardware shall include: chrome
 plated non ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door
 close positioning; nylon bearings; black anodized aluminum door latch; door
 strike and keeper with rubber bumper; and cast alloy chrome plated coat


                              SECTION 10 21 13   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


 hook and bumper. Latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments
 shall comply with 36 CFR 1191 and shall be chrome-plated steel or stainless
 steel door latches that operate without either tight grasping or twisting
 of the wrist of the operator. Screws and bolts shall be stainless steel,
 tamper proof type. Wall mounting brackets shall be continuous, full
 height, heavy duty plastic in accordance with toilet compartment
 manufacturer's instructions. Floor-mounted anchorage shall consist of
 corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers,
 and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to
 floor.

2.7      COLORS AND FINISHES

2.7.1     Colors

 Provide manufacturer's standard color charts for color of finishes for
 toilet partition system components.

2.7.2     Finishes No.4 and No. 5

 Provide solid plastic fabricated of polymer resins (polyethylene) formed
 under high pressure rendering a single component section not less than one
 inch thick. Colors shall extend throughout the panel thickness. Provide
 exposed finish surfaces: smooth, waterproof, non-absorbant, and resistant
 to staining and marking with pens, pencils, or other writing devices.
 Solid plastic partitions shall not show any sign of deterioration when
 immersed in the following chemicals and maintained at a temperature of 80
 degrees F for a minimum of 30 days:

         a.    Acetic Acid (80 percent)     Hydrochloric Acid (40 percent)
         b.    Acetone                      Hydrogen Peroxide (30 percent)
         c.    Ammonia (liquid)             Isopropyl Alcohol
         d.    Ammonia Phosphate            Lactic Acid (25 percent)
         e.    Bleach (12 percent)          Lime Sulfur
         f.    Borax                        Nicotine
         g.    Brine                        Potassium Bromide
         h.    Caustic Soda                 Soaps
         i.    Chlorine Water               Sodium Bicarbonate
         j.    Citric Acid                  Trisodium Phosphate
         k.    Copper Chloride              Urea; Urine
         l.    Core Oils                    Vinegar

PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1     PREPARATION

 Take field measurements prior to the preparation of drawing and fabrication
 to ensure proper fits. Verify that field measurements, surfaces,
 substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive work.
 Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. Verify correct location of
 built in framing, anchorage, and bracing. Report in writing to Contracting
 Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory
 execution of the work of this section. Do not proceed with work until
 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2     INSTALLATION

 Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level, with the panels
 centered between the fixtures. Provide a panel clearance of not more than


                                SECTION 10 21 13   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 1/2 inch and secure the panels to walls and pilasters with not less than
 two wall brackets attached near the top and bottom of the panel. Locate
 wall brackets so that holes for wall bolts occur in masonry or tile
 joints. Secure Panels to pilasters with brackets matching the wall
 brackets. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. Locate
 head rail joints at pilaster center lines. Install adjacent components for
 consistency of line and plane. Equip each door with hinges, one door
 latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance
 at vertical edges of doors.

      a. Secure panels to ceramic tile on hollow plastered walls or hollow
      concrete-masonry walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1/4-20
      screws of the length required for the wall thickness. Toggle bolts
      shall have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
      anchor.

      b. Submit Installation Drawings for toilet partitions showing plans,
      elevations, details of construction, hardware, reinforcing and
      blocking, fittings, mountings and escutcheons. Indicate on drawingsthe
      type of partition, location, mounting height, cutouts, and
      reinforcement required for toilet-room accessories.

3.3   FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS

 Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make
 all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and
 tightening the installation. Level tops of doors with tops of pilasters
 when doors are in a closed position. Expansion shields shall have a minimum
  2-inch penetration into the concrete slab.

3.4   OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS

 Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make
 all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and
 tightening the installation. Secure overhead brace to the pilaster face
 with not less than two fasteners per face. Expansion shields shall have a
 minimum 2-inch penetration into the concrete slab. Make tops of doors
 parallel with the overhead brace when doors are in a closed position.

3.5   FINAL ADJUSTMENT

 After completion of the installation, make final adjustments to the
 pilaster-leveling devices, door hardware, and other working parts of the
 partition assembly. Doors shall have a uniform vertical edge clearance of
 approximately 3/16 inch and shall rest open at approximately 30 degrees
 when unlatched.

3.6   CLEANING

 Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of
 the work, in an approved manner compliant.



       -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 10 21 13   Page 7
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 10 22 26.33

                             FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
                                       08/10

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1    REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                   (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                     Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                     Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                     the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM E 336                          (2009) Measurement of Airborne Sound
                                     Insulation in Buildings

 ASTM E 413                          (2004) Rating Sound Insulation

 ASTM E 557                          (2000; R 2006e1) Installation of Operable
                                     Partitions

 ASTM E 84                           (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
                                     Burning Characteristics of Building
                                     Materials

 ASTM E 90                           (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory
                                     Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
                                     Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

             GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)

 GEI                                 Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
                                     Products

             NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 101                            (2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code

             SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

 SCS                                 Scientific Certification Systems
                                     (SCS)Indoor Advantage

1.2    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

         a. No less than 30 calendar days prior to the scheduled commencement
         of installation, submit the following to the Contracting Officer:

             Manufacturer's Qualifications
             Manufacturer's Sample Warranty


                            SECTION 10 22 26.33   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


            Statement of Code Compliance
            Statement of Standards Conformity
            Verification of Field Measurements
            Existing Electrical Data
            Fabrication Drawings
            Installation Instructions

        b. Supply and install manual operation, acoustical folding panel
        partitions, factory finished, supported from overhead track without
        floor guides, as shown on the drawings including all hardware, seals,
        track and rollers as needed to close the specified opening.

1.2.1     Manual Operation

 The manual operation shall be a force no greater than 20 lbf to start
 movement at the rate of 3.33 ft/s (200 ft/min). Use a removable handle to
 extend and retract the bottom operable seals; vertical movement of seals
 shall be 2 inches. Closure to the lead wall shall be by use of a flexible
 bulb; accomplish final closing by means of a lever exerting pressure
 against the wall.

1.2.2     Performance Requirements

1.2.2.1     Fire Endurance

 For partitions more than 60 square feet in area, provide covering and
 lining with flame spread rating of 25 or less, fuel contribution rating of
 15 or less, smoke generation of 50 or less in accordance with NFPA 101 when
 tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Submit flame and smoke development
 tests reports. Provide door and partition finishes with a Class A rating
 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

1.2.2.2     Laboratory Acoustical Requirements

 Provide partitions tested in accordance with ASTM E 90, by a laboratory
 accredited by the U.S. Bureau of Standards, that have attained a sound
 transmission class (STC) of not less than 50 in a fully extended position.
 Partition tested shall be of the same construction, materials, and model
 number as the partition to be provided and be fully operable. Test
 specimen shall be not less than 126 square feet in area. Panel weight
 shall be a minimum of 41 kg/square meter 8.5 psf for STC up to 50. Design
 panel thickness (4 inch nominal) and composition to provide the required
 STC rating in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Installation; G
            Layouts;

              Drawings to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and
            will properly function as a unit. Show layout of the work; track


                              SECTION 10 22 26.33   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          and jamb fastening methods; seal and installation details; and
          equipment relationship to other parts of the work including
          clearances for maintenance and operation.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Folding Panel Partitions;
          Installation Instructions;
          Certification

      SD-04 Samples

          Folding Panel Partitions;

            Three Color samples of specified surfaces and finishes to match
          those specified. Finish and color requirements are not limited to
          manufacturer's standard selections in order to meet these
          requirements.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Acoustical Test;
          Flame and Smoke Development Tests;

      SD-07 Certificates

          Materials;
          Folding Panel Partitions;

            Certificate attesting that partitions have specified acoustical
          and flame retardant properties, as determined by test.

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Folding Panel Partitions

            Data Package 1 for folding panel partitions.

1.4   SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION

 Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
 Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
 Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.

1.5   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original, unopened,
 and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Provide labels to
 indicate the manufacturer, brand name, size, finish, and placement
 location. Store partitions and accessories in unopened packages in a
 manner that will prevent damage. Handle partition materials in accordance
 with manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials from the weather,
 humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.

1.6   WARRANTY

 Provide Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a 1 year period. In addition, provide guarantee of the
 pantographs, trolleys and tracks for 10 years from date of acceptance for


                           SECTION 10 22 26.33   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 beneficial use.

PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

 Provide material and equipment which are the standard products of a
 manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and
 essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
 2 year prior to bid opening. Submit Certificate attesting that the
 materials meet the requirements specified. Equipment shall be supported by
 a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer,
 reasonably convenient to the site. Provide heavy-duty type hardware
 standard with the manufacturer. Provide pulls and latches for all
 partitions. Provide finish hardware.

2.2      FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS

 Provide folding panel partitions using top hung ball bearing carriers which
 support modular panels.

         a. Provide partitions made up of a series of rigid panels, each panel
         being a one-piece assembly. Unless otherwise specified, use the least
         number of panels. The mechanical seal of the panel shall actuate with
         a single operating action.

         b.    Provide panels continuously hinged type as indicated.

         c. Submit six complete copies of maintenance instructions explaining
         routine maintenance procedures including inspection, adjustments,
         lubrication, and cleaning. List possible breakdown, methods of repair,
         and a troubleshooting guide. Include instructions for equipment layout
         and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed
         and also the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts
         list, and brief description of all equipment and operating features.
         Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices
         and source of supply, and a list of the parts recommended by the
         manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of service.

2.2.1     Panels

 Provide panels of steel skin, laminated to appropriate structural
 acoustical backing, mounted in full perimeter protective frame. Steel for
 the panel frames shall be a minimum of 18 gauge formed steel with minimum
 22 gauge thick face panels spot welded to the frame. Frame shall enclose
 and protect all edges of the surface material. Panels shall be not more
 than 4 feet wide, except for end closure panels, and be full height to
 track. Panels shall lock in place to form a stable, rigid partition; low
 profile hinges may not project more than 1/4 inch maximum from panel edge.
 Panel surfacing shall wrap around the vertical panel edges without vertical
 trim.

2.2.2     Finish Covering

 Finish material shall be minimum 54 inches wide, acrylic backed fabric of
 100 percent polyolefin. Provide non-allergenic stain and mildew resistant
 fabric which will not rot or support growth of bacteria.




                              SECTION 10 22 26.33   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2.3     Track

 Provide recess enamel finish steel track as shown. Steel shall conform to
 ASTM A 653/A 653M. Provide track that is the manufacturer's standard
 product designed for the weight of the finished partition, including door.
 Provide track sections in the maximum lengths practicable, and not less than
  6 feet long except for narrow doors and at ends of runs where short length
 is required. Provide suitable joint devices such as interlocking keys at
 each joint to provide permanent alignment of track.

2.2.4     Suspension System

 Provide a suspension system consisting of steel track connected to the
 structural support by threaded rods, and trolleys designed to support the
 weight of the partition. Provide steel track of 7 gage minimum, phosphate
 treated or painted. Provide center hung panel with 1 trolley with four
 ball bearing nylon or steel tired wheels per panel.

2.3     ACCESSORIES

2.3.1     Ceiling Guards

 Furnish partitions with ceiling guards or integral track and ceiling guards
 as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.4     SEALS AND SWEEPSTRIPS

 Provide perimeter seals or sound insulation, of manufacturer's standard
 product, to achieve the sound transmission class specified, without crack
 or craze when subjected to severe usage. Provide mechanical bottom seal
 that can be raised or lowered for positive control. Provide manufacturer's
 vertical seals between panels to ensure acoustical rating. Bottom seals
 shall consist of a vinyl sweep mechanical seal which will expand in place,
 or provide panels which can be lowered by a removable operating device.
 Provide vertical seal between panels which is anodized, architectural
 grade, aluminum extrusion with vinyl sound seal. Sweep strips shall be
 vinyl or other material that will not crack or craze with severe usage.
 Provide sweep strip STC to the specified rating.

2.5     COLOR

 Color: in accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE and as indicated
 on the drawings. Color listed is not intended to limit selection of equal
 colors from other manufacturers.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

 Install in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.

3.1.1     Preparation Work

 Verify dimensions and condition of openings scheduled to receive folding
 panel partitions. Install partitions in accordance with the approved
 partition layouts, manufacturer's directions, and ASTM E 557. Provide
 structural support for the track support elements as indicated.




                              SECTION 10 22 26.33   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.1.2     Adjustment

 Adjust manually operated partitions to open and close from any position
 with a maximum horizontal force as specified in paragraph Manual Operation
 applied to pendant pull, box or handle.

3.2     FIELD TESTS

3.2.1     Operational Test

 In the presence of the Contracting Officer, operate partition at least
 three times to demonstrate that partition is capable of being moved from
 the stored position to the fully extended position smoothly and quietly.
 Activate the emergency release mechanism and demonstrate proper operation
 of the partition in the manual mode. Adjust partitions which do not
 operate properly and retest.

3.2.2     Acoustical Test

 Field sound performance: provide partition testing by an independent
 certified acoustical consultant in accordance with ASTM E 336, and achieve
 a Noise Isolation Class (NIC) of 41 plus or minus two. Adjust and/or
 modify partitions which do not comply, and retest. Submit test reports.

3.3     CLEANING

 Clean any soiled parts of the partition in accordance with manufacturer's
 printed instructions.

          -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 10 22 26.33   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 10 26 13

                             WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
                                      05/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

 AA DAF-45                          (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System
                                    for Aluminum Finishes

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 167                         (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Stainless and Heat-Resisting
                                    Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
                                    Strip

 ASTM B 221                         (2008) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                    and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
                                    Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

 ASTM D 256                         (2006e1) Determining the Izod Pendulum
                                    Impact Resistance of Plastics

 ASTM D 543                         (2006) Standard Practices for Evaluating
                                    the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical
                                    Reagents

 ASTM D 635                         (2006) Standard Test Method for Rate of
                                    Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning
                                    of Self-Supporting Plastics in a
                                    Horizontal Position

 ASTM E 84                          (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface
                                    Burning Characteristics of Building
                                    Materials

 ASTM G 21                          (1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of
                                    Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 80                            (2010; TIA 10-1) Standard for Fire Doors
                                    and Other Opening Protectives

            SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

 SAE J1545                          (2005) Instrumental Color Difference
                                    Measurement for Exterior Finishes,


                            SECTION 10 26 13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


                                   Textiles and Colored Trim

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G"
 designationinformation only. When used, a designation following the "G"
 designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
 Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Corner Guards;

            Drawings indicating locations and typical elevations of each
          type of item. Show on the drawings vertical and horizontal
          dimensions, full size sections, thickness of materials, and
          fastening details.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Corner Guards;

            Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, installation
          instructions, and recommended cleaning instructions.

      SD-04 Samples

          Finish;

            Three samples indicating color and texture of materials
          requiring color and finish.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Corner Guards

            Fire rating and extinguishing test results for resilient
          material.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Corner Guards

            Statements attesting that the items comply with specified fire
          and safety code requirements.

1.3   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened
 containers with seals unbroken and labels and trademarks intact. Keep
 materials dry, protected from weather and damage, and stored under cover.
 Materials shall be stored at approximately 70 degrees F for at least 48
 hours prior to installation.

1.4   WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a 1 year period.


                            SECTION 10 26 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     STANDARD PRODCUCTS

 To the maximum extent possible, corner guards shall be the standard
 products of a single manufacturer and shall be furnished as detailed.
 Drawings show general configuration of products required, and items
 differing in minor details from those shown will be acceptable.

2.1.1     Resilient Material

 Provide resilient material consisting of high impact resistant extruded
 acrylic vinyl, polyvinyl chloride, or injection molded thermal plastic
 conforming to the following:

2.1.1.1     Minimum Impact Resistance

 Minimum impact resistance shall be 18 ft-lbs/sq. inch when tested in
 accordance with ASTM D 256, (Izod impact, ft-lbs per sq inch notched).

2.1.1.2     Fire Rating

 Fire rating shall be Class 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84,
 having a maximum flame spread of 25 and a smoke developed rating of 450 or
 less. Material shall be rated self extinguishing when tested in accordance
 with ASTM D 635. Material shall be labeled and tested by an approved
 nationally known testing laboratory. Resilient material used for
 protection on fire rated doors and frames shall be listed by the testing
 laboratory performing the tests. Resilient material installed on fire
 rated wood/steel door and frame assemblies shall have been tested on
 similar type assemblies. Test results of material tested on any other
 combination of door/frame assembly will not be acceptable.

2.1.1.3     Integral Color

 Colored components shall have integral color and shall be matched in
 accordance with SAE J1545 to within plus or minus 1.0 on the CIE-LCH scales.

2.1.1.4     Chemical and Stain Resistance

 Materials shall be resistant to chemicals and stains reagents in accordance
 with ASTM D 543.

2.1.1.5     Fungal and Bacterial Resistance

 Materials shall be resistant to fungi and bacteria in accordance with
 ASTM G 21, as applicable.

2.2      CORNER GUARDS

2.2.1     Resilient Corner Guards

 Corner guard units shall be surface mounted type, radius formed to profile
 shown. Corner guards shall extend from floor to ceiling. Mounting
 hardware, cushions, and base plates shall be furnished. Assembly shall
 consist of a snap-on corner guard formed from high impact resistant
 resilient material, minimum 0.078 inch thick, mounted on a continuous
 aluminum retainer. Extruded aluminum retainer shall conform to ASTM B 221,


                               SECTION 10 26 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6. Flush mounted type guards shall act as a stop
 for adjacent wall finish material. Factory fabricated end closure caps
 shall be furnished for top and bottom of surface mounted corner guards.
 Flush mounted corner guards installed in fire rated wall shall maintain the
 rating of the wall. Insulating materials that are an integral part of the
 corner guard system shall be provided by the manufacturer of the corner
 guard system. Exposed metal portions of fire rated assemblies shall have a
 paintable surface.

2.2.2     Stainless Steel Corner Guards

 Stainless steel corner guards shall be fabricated of 0.0625 inch thick
 material conforming to ASTM A 167, type 302 or 304. Corner guards shall
 extend from floor to ceiling. Corner guard shall be formed to dimensions
 shown.

2.3     TRIM, FASTENERS AND ANCHORS

 Provide vinyl trim, fasteners and anchors for each specific installation as
 shown.

2.4      FINISH

2.4.1     Aluminum Finish

 Finish for aluminum shall be in accordance with AA DAF-45. Exposed
 aluminum shall be designation AA-C22A31 chemically etched medium matte,
 with clear anodic coating class II architectural coating 0.4 mil thick.
 Concealed aluminum shall be mill finish as fabricated, uniform in natural
 color and free from surface blemishes.

2.4.2     Stainless Steel Finish

 Finish for stainless steel shall be in accordance with ASTM A 167, Type 302
 or 304, finish number 4.

2.4.3     Resilient Material Finish

 Finish for resilient material shall be embossed texture with colors in
 accordance with SAE J1545.

2.5     ADHESIVES

 Adhesive for resilient material shall be in accordance with manufacturers
 recommendations.

2.6     COLOR

 Color shall be as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended
 to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

3.1.1     Corner Guards

 Material shall be mounted at location indicated in accordance with
 manufacturer's recommendations.


                             SECTION 10 26 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



3.1.2    Door, Door Frame Protectors, and Wall Panels

 Surfaces to receive protection shall be clean, smooth, and free of
 obstructions. Protectors shall be installed after frames are in place, but
 prior to hanging of doors, in accordance with manufacturer's specific
 instructions. Adhesives shall be applied in controlled environment in
 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protection for fire doors
 and frames shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80.

3.1.3    Stainless Steel Guards

        a. Mount guards on external corners of interior walls, partitions and
        columns as shown.

        b. Where corner guards are installed on walls, partitions or columns
        finished with plaster or ceramic tile, anchor corner guards as
        indicated.

        c. Where corner guards are installed on gypsum board, clean surfaces
        and anchor guards with a neoprene solvent-type contact adhesive
        specifically manufactured for use on gypsum board construction. Remove
        excess adhesive from the guard edges and allow to cure undisturbed for
        24 hours.

        d. For wall guards, space brackets at no more than 3 feet on centers
        and anchor to the wall in accordance with the manufacturer's
        installation instructions.

         -- End of Section --




                            SECTION 10 26 13   Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022




                                   SECTION 10 28 13

                                  TOILET ACCESSORIES
                                         07/06

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM C 1036                          (2006) Standard Specification for Flat
                                      Glass

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

         SD-03 Product Data

             Finishes
             Accessory Items

               Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts indicating
             materials of construction, fasteners proposed for use for each
             type of wall construction, mounting instructions, operation
             instructions, and cleaning instructions.

         SD-04 Samples

             Finishes
             Accessory Items

               One sample of each accessory proposed for use. Incorporate
             approved samples into the finished work, provided they are
             identified and their locations noted.

         SD-07 Certificates

             Accessory Items

               Certificate for each type of accessory specified, attesting that
             the items meet the specified requirements.

         SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

               Four complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine
             maintenance procedures and possible breakdowns. Include repair
             instructions for simplified wiring and control diagrams and other


                               SECTION 10 28 13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


             information necessary for unit maintenance.

1.3     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Wrap toilet accessories for shipment and storage, then deliver to the
 jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and store in a clean, dry
 area protected from construction damage and vandalism.

1.4     WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a 1 year period.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     MANUFACTURED UNITS

 Provide toilet accessories where indicated in accordance with paragraph
 SCHEDULE. Porcelain type, tile-wall accessories are specified in Section
 09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE. Provide each accessory
 item complete with the necessary mounting plates of sturdy construction
 with corrosion resistant surface.

2.1.1     Anchors and Fasteners

 Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a restraining force
 commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted and suited
 for use with the supporting construction. Provide tamperproof design
 exposed fasteners with finish to match the accessory.

2.1.2      Finishes

 Except where noted otherwise, provide the following finishes on metal:

             Metal                                 Finish
             _____                                 ______

      Stainless steel                       No. 4 satin finish

      Carbon steel, copper alloy,           Chromium plated, bright
      and brass

2.2      ACCESSORY ITEMS

 Conform to the requirements for accessory items specified below.

2.2.1     Grab Bar (GB)

 Provide an 18 gauge, 1-1/4 inch grab bar OD Type 304 stainless steel.
 Provide form and length for grab bar as indicated. Provide concealed
 exposed mounting flange. Provide grab with satin finish. Furnish
 installed bars capable of withstanding a 500 pound vertical load without
 coming loose from the fastenings and without obvious permanent
 deformation. Allow 1-1/2 inch space between wall and grab bar.

2.2.2     Mirrors, Glass (MG)

 Provide Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear glass for mirrors.
 Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Coat glass on


                                SECTION 10 28 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


 one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating, and mirror
 backing paint. Provide highly adhesive pure silver coating of a thickness
 which provides reflectivity of 83 percent or more of incident light when
 viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass, free of pinholes or other defects.
 Provide copper protective coating with pure bright reflective copper,
 homogeneous without sludge, pinholes or other defects, of proper thickness
 to prevent "adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Provide mirror backing
 paint with two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint and
 baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and copper
 coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.

2.2.3   Mirror, Tilt (MT)

 Provide surface mounted tilt mirror with full visibility for persons in a
 wheelchair. Furnish fixed tilt mirror, extending at least 4 inch from the
 wall at the top and tapering to 1 inch at the bottom. Provide size in
 accordance with the drawings. Conform to ASTM C 1036 and paragraph Glass
 Mirrors.

2.2.4   Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (PTDWR)

 Provide recessed dispenser/receptacle with a capacity of 600 sheets of
 C-fold, single-fold, or quarter-fold towel. Design waste receptacle to be
 locked in unit and removable for service. Provide tumbler key locking
 mechanism. Provide waste receptacle capacity of 18 gallons. Fabricate a
 minimum 0.03 inch stainless steel welded construction unit with all exposed
 surfaces having a satin finish. Provide waste receptacle that accepts
 reusable liner standard for unit manufacturer.

2.2.5   Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Dispenser (SNTD)

 Provide sanitary napkin and tampon dispenser recessed. Dispenser,
 including door of Type 304 stainless steel that dispense both napkins and
 tampons with a minimum capacity of 20 each. Furnish dispensing mechanism
 for complimentary operation. Hang doors with a full-length
 corrosion-resistant steel piano hinge and secure with a tumbler lock.
 Provide keys for coin box different from the door keys.

2.2.6   Shower Curtain (SC)

 Provide shower curtain, size to suit conditions. Provide anti-bacterial
 nylon/vinyl fabric curtain. Furnish color as shown on Drawings.

2.2.7   Shower Curtain Rods (SCR)

 Provide Type 304 stainless steel shower curtain rods 1-1/4 inch OD by 0.049
 inch minimum straight to meet installation conditions.

2.2.8   Soap Dispenser (SD)

 Provide soap dispenser surface mounted, liquid type consisting of a
 vertical Type 304 stainless steel tank with holding capacity of 40 fluid
 ounces with a corrosion-resistant all-purpose valve that dispenses liquid
 soaps, lotions, detergents and antiseptic soaps.

2.2.9   Towel Pin (TP)

 Provide towel pin with concealed wall fastenings, and a pin integral with
 or permanently fastened to wall flange with maximum projection of 4 inch.


                              SECTION 10 28 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 Provide satin finish.

2.2.10     Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD)

 Furnish Type II - surface mounted toilet tissue holder with two rolls of
 standard tissue mounted horizontally. Provide stainless steel, satin
 finish cabinet.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

 Provide the same finish for the surfaces of fastening devices exposed after
 installation as the attached accessory. Provide oval exposed screw heads.
 Install accessories at the location and height indicated. Protect exposed
 surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other means until the
 installation is accepted. After acceptance of accessories, remove and
 dispose of strippable plastic protection. Coordinate accessory
 manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as their work
 progresses. Use sealants for brackets, plates, anchoring devices and
 similar items in showers (a silicone or polysulphide sealant) as they are
 set to provide a watertight installation. After installation, thoroughly
 clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition
 or replace with new work.

3.1.1     Recessed Accessories

 Fasten accessories with wood screws to studs, blocking or rough frame in
 wood construction. Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction. Fasten
 to metal studs or framing with sheet metal screws in metal construction.

3.1.2     Surface Mounted Accessories

 Mount on concealed backplates, unless specified otherwise. Conceal
 fasteners on accessories without backplates. Install accessories with
 sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined braided jute, teflon or
 neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shields, or with toggle bolts or other
 approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install backplates in
 the same manner, or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required
 by the construction. Fasten accessories mounted on gypsum board and
 plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs or to
 solid wood blocking secured between wood studs, or to metal backplates
 secured to metal studs.

3.2     CLEANING

 Clean material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do mot
 use alkaline or abrasive agents. Take precautions to avoid scratching or
 marring exposed surfaces.


           -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 10 28 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



                                    SECTION 10 44 13

                               FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
                                          05/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

             Manufacturer's Data for each type of required Extinguisher Cabinet
             with all related details, accessories, and recommended operation
             manuals.

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Submit fabrication drawings for the following items consisting of
             fabrication and assembly details performed in the factory. Submit
             installation drawings for the following items in accordance with
             the paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.

             Cabinets
             Wall Brackets

         SD-03 Product Data

             Submit Manufacturer's catalog and warranty data for the following
             items:

             Cabinets
             Wall Brackets
             Replacement Parts

         SD-04 Samples

             One full-sized sample of each type of Cabinet being installed

             Three samples of Wall Brackets and Accessories of each type being
             used

             Approved samples may be used for installation, with proper
             identification and storage.

1.2   DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

 Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
 and construction.

 Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles
 bearing the brand name and the name and type of the material.



                                SECTION 10 44 13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      CABINETS

2.1.1     Material

 Provide enameled steel cabinets.

2.1.2     Type

 Provide recessed type cabinets.

2.1.3     Size

 Dimension cabinets to accommodate the government furnished fire
 extinguishers.

2.2      WALL BRACKETS

 Provide running-board fire extinguisher wall brackets.

 Provide wall bracket and accessories as approved.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

 Install Extinguisher Cabinets where indicated on the drawings.    Verify
 exact locations prior to installation.

 Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations.

3.2     ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS

3.2.1     Repairing

 Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with
 new work at no additional cost to the Government.

 Provide Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part,
 replacement cost, and name, address and contact for replacement parts
 distributor.

3.2.2     Cleaning

 Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a
 result of the work. Remove from the site all construction equipment,
 tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work.

          -- End of Section --




                                SECTION 10 44 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022



                                   SECTION 10 51 13

                                    METAL LOCKERS
                                        07/07

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 1008/A 1008M                  (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel,
                                      Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
                                      High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
                                      Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
                                      Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened

 ASTM A 653/A 653M                    (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
                                      Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
                                      Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                      the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM A 924/A 924M                    (2010) Standard Specification for General
                                      Requirements for Steel Sheet,
                                      Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM D 2092                          (1995; R 2001e1) Standard Guide for
                                      Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                                      Steel Surfaces for Painting

             U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

 MIL-PRF-22750                        (Rev F) Coating, Epoxy, High Solids

 MIL-PRF-23377                        (Rev J; Am 1; Am 2) Primer Coatings:
                                      Epoxy, High Solids

             U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 FS AA-L-00486                        (Rev J) Lockers, Clothing, Steel

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation for
 information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Types G

             Location;


                               SECTION 10 51 13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



             Installation

             Numbering system

         SD-03 Product Data

             Material

             Handles

             Finish

             Locker components

             Assembly instructions

         SD-04 Samples

             Color chips;

1.3     DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

 Deliver lockers and associated materials in their original packages,
 containers, or bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and the name of the
 material. Protect from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
 and construction.

1.4     FIELD MEASUREMENTS

 To ensure proper fits, make field measurements prior to the preparation of
 drawings and fabrication. Verify correct location.

1.5     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1      Color Chips

 Provide a minimum of three color chips, not less than 3 inches square, of
 each color indicated.

 Government may request performance-characteristic tests on assembled
 lockers. Tests and results must conform to FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not
 conforming will be rejected.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      TYPES

 Locker must have the following type and size in the location and quantities
 indicated. Locker finish colors will be as indicated.

2.1.1     Single-tier Lockers

 Single-tier lockers must be as follows:

         Type L-2: Single-tier locker 12 inches wide, 12 inches deep, and 72
         inches high, attached to 6-inch closed base




                                SECTION 10 51 13   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.2     Double-Tier

 Double-tier lockers must be as follows:

        Type L-1: Double-tier locker 15 inches wide, 18 inches deep, and 72
        inches high without base.

2.2     MATERIAL

2.2.1     Galvanized Steel Sheet

 ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial quality, minimized spangle material.
 Prepare material surfaces for baked enamel finishing in accordance with
 FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate locker bodies from not less than 0.0239-inch
 thick steel sheet.

 ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M, commercial quality, minimized
 spangle, galvanized steel sheet with not less than G60 zinc coating.
 Prepare surface of sheet for painting in accordance with ASTM D 2092,
 Method A.   Minimum uncoated sheet thickness as specified.2.2.2   Finish

 FS AA-L-00486.

 Primer, MIL-PRF-23377; topcoat, MIL-PRF-22750

2.2.2.1     Color

 Light gray, to be selected from manufacturer's standard and approved by the
 government.

2.3     COMPONENTS

2.3.1     Built-In Locks

  Built-in locks are not required.
2.3.1   Coat Hooks

 FS AA-L-00486, zinc plated.

2.3.2     Hanger Rods

 FS AA-L-00486.

2.3.3     Door Handles

 FS AA-L-00486.      Provide zinc alloy or steel handles with a chromium coating.

2.3.4     Doors

 FS AA-L-00486, not less than 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet.

2.3.4.1     Hinges

 In addition to the requirements of FS AA-L-00486, provide 5-knuckle hinges,
 minimum 2 inches high. Fabricate knuckle hinges from not less than 0.0787
 inch thick steel sheet.    Weld or bolt hinges to the door frame. Weld,
 bolt, or rivet hinges to the door.




                              SECTION 10 51 13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3.4.2     Latching Mechanisms

 FS AA-L-00486.

2.3.5     Latch Strikes

 FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate from not less than 0.0787 inch thick steel sheet,
 except latch strike may be continuous from top to bottom and fabricated as
 part of the door framing.

2.3.6     Silencers

 FS AA-L-00486.

2.3.7     Back and Side Panels, Tops, and Bottoms

 FS AA-L-00486, not less than 0.0474 inch thick steel sheet.

2.3.8     Sloping Locker Tops

 Provide sloping locker tops in addition to the locker-section flat tops.
 Sloping tops must be continuous in length. Provide fillers or closures at
 the exposed end of sloping tops. Fabricate sloping tops from not less than
 0.0478-inch thick steel sheet.

2.3.9     Shelves

 FS AA-L-00486.       Fabricate from not less than 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet.

2.3.10     Base Panels

 FS AA-L-00486.

2.3.11     Number Plates

 Number plates are not required.2.3.12        Fastening Devices

 Provide bolts, nuts, and rivets as specified in FS AA-L-00486.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1      ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

 Assemble lockers according to the locker manufacturer's instructions.
 Align lockers horizontally and vertically. Secure lockers to wall and
 basewith screws as indicated. Bolt adjacent lockers together. Adjust
 doors to operate freely without sticking or binding and to ensure they
 close tightly.

3.2     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.2.1     Testing

 Government may request performance-characteristic tests on assembled
 lockers in accordance with FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not conforming will be
 rejected.




                                SECTION 10 51 13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.2.2   Repairing

 Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with
 new.

3.2.3   Cleaning

 Clean surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the
 work, in an approved manner. Remove equipment, surplus materials, and
 rubbish from the site.

        -- End of Section --




                           SECTION 10 51 13   Page 5
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



                                   SECTION 12 48 13.13

                                   ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
                                          05/09

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 40 CFR 247                            Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for
                                       Products Containing Recovered Materials

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SB-02 Shop Drawings

             Shop drawings in sufficient detail showing layout of mat/grid and
             frame specified including details indicating construction relative
             to materials, direction of traffic, spline locations, profiles,
             anchors and accessories.

         SD-03 Product Data

             Submit Manufacturer's Data and indicate percentage of recycled
             material content in protective flooring materials Entrance and
             Floor Mats to verify affirmative procurement compliance.

             Submit total weight and volume quantities of protective flooring
             materials with recycle materials content.

             Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.

             Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical
             Radiant Flux, minimum 0.45 watts/m2.

         SD-04 Samples

             Submit manufacturer's standard color charts for Entrance and Floor
             Mats showing the manufacturer's recommended color and finish
             selections.

             Submit one sample 12 inch square, assembled sections of floor mat
             to show corners, intersections, and other details of
             construction. Provide any graphics in drawing for approval.




                               SECTION 12 48 13.13   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


1.3     QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
 Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility
 Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) for installed entrance and
 floor mats.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT

 The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items
 which must contain a specified percent range of recovered or recycled
 materials. EPA designated products specified in this contract comply with
 the stated policy and with the EPA guidelines. Make all reasonable efforts
 to use recycled and recovered materials in providing the EPA designated
 products and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the
 execution of the work. These items, when incorporated into the work under
 this contract, are to contain at least the specified percentage of recycled
 or recovered materials unless adequate justification (non-availability)
 for non-use is provided, per 40 CFR 247.

 Mats are listed in the EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG ) at
 http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/non-hw/procure/products/mats.htm.

 EPA's recommended Recovered Materials Content Levels for Mats.

       Product         Material       Percent Of Post         Percent Of Total
                                      Consumer Materials      Recovered Materials

       Mats            Rubber              75 - 100              85 - 100

                       Plastic             10 - 100                100

                       Rubber/               100                   100
                       Plastic composite

 The recommended recovered materials content levels are based on the dry
 weight of the raw materials, exclusive of any additives such as adhesives,
 binders, or coloring agents. EPA's recommendation does not preclude
 procuring agencies from purchasing mats manufactured from another material.
 It simply recommends that procuring agencies, when purchasing mats made
 from rubber or plastic, purchase these items made from recovered materials.

 For informational purposes, a list of known sources for mats using recycled
 material is provided in the EPA/CPG Supplier database at
 http://www.ergweb2.com/cpg4review/user/cpg_search.cfm.

 Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. A product
 meeting CPG recycle requirements from other sources may be submitted for
 the Government's approval.

2.2     ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

2.2.1     Materials

      2.2.1.1    Aluminum

         ASTM B 221, alloy 6105-T5, 6105-T6 for extrusions.


                            SECTION 12 48 13.13    Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.2.1.2        Flexible and prime EPDM extrusions

      2.2.2     Floor Mats

 Extruded 6105-T5 aluminum alloy with 3/4" deep tread rails joined by an
 EPDM hinge and cushion to compromise the overall grid length (traffic
 direction). The hinge shall be complete with perforations between each
 tread rail for drainage. Rail finish to be standard mill. Unit must
 withstand 1000 lb. wheel loads (load applied to a 5” x 2” wide polyurethane
 wheel, 1000 passes without damage).

 Level Base Frame shall be a 1" (25.4mm) deep recessed frame in
 6063-T6 aluminum alloy with a 1/4"(6.4mm) wide exposed surface. Black
 vinyl fillers shall be furnished as required, when standard 1 1/2"
 (38.1mm) tread spacing cannot be maintained. Installer shall use
 recommended latex screed to ensure level base. Frame color shall be
 supplied in standard mill finish. Note: Mill finish frames in contact
 with concrete to be primer coated.

PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1     DELIVERY OF MATERIALS

 Deliver materials to the project site in their original packages or
 containers bearing labels clearly identifying the manufacturer, brand name,
 and quality or grade.

 Store materials in their original unbroken packages or containers in the
 area in which they will be installed. Unwrap, inspect, and place mats at
 indicated location.

 Remove and dispose all excess packing materials.

3.2     EXAMINATION

 Comply with manufacture's requirements of substrates and floor conditions
 for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor
 mats and frames.

 Field measurements: Check actual openings for mats/grids by accurate field
 measurements before fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop
 drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
 avoid delay of work.

 For recess application coordinate frame installation with concrete
 construction to ensure recess and frame anchorage are accurate and that the
 base is level and flat. Defer frame installation until building enclosure
 is complete and related interior finish work is in progress.

3.3     INSTALLATION

 Install only in satisfactory conditions. Comply with manufacturer's
 written printed instructions for recessed mat frames. Set mat tops at
 height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.
 Coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats
 to provide clearance between doors and mat.

 Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at


                              SECTION 12 48 13.13   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth
 and level. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's
 written printed instructions at locations indicated. Coordinate with other
 trades, entrance locations and traffic patterns.

3.4   PROTECTION

 After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide
 temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames
 with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction
 traffic has ended and project is near time of substantial completion.


        -- End of Section --




                         SECTION 12 48 13.13   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022




                                  SECTION 13 48 00.00 10

                     SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
                                        10/07

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1     REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

 UFC 3-310-04                           (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for
                                        Buildings

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1     General Requirements

 Apply the requirements for seismic protection measures described in this
 section to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below. Structural
 requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC
 PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.

1.2.2     Mechanical Equipment

 Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall include the
 following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections
 of these specifications:

         Boilers
         Water Heaters
         Expansion Air Separator Tanks
         Water Chiller Units
         Cooling Towers

1.2.3     Items Not Covered By This Section

1.2.3.1     Fire Protection Systems

 Seismic protection of piping for fire protection systems shall be installed
 as specified in Sections 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE
 PROTECTION, 21 13 18.00 10 PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, FIRE
 PROTECTION.

1.3      EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1     Rigidly Mounted Equipment

 The following specific items of equipment: Boilers, Chillers, Air-Handling
 Units and Cooling Towers to be furnished under this contract shall be
 constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic forces specified in
 UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid equipment shall be entirely located and
 rigidly attached on one side only of a building expansion joint. Piping,


                             SECTION 13 48 00.00 10   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 duct, electrical conduit, etc., which cross the expansion joint shall be
 provided with flexible joints that are capable of accommodating
 displacements equal to the full width of the joint in both orthogonal
 directions.

             Boilers
             Chillers
             Air-Handling Units
             Cooling Towers

1.4   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
 approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
 identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Coupling and Bracing.
             Equipment Requirements.

               Detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection
             and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed.
             Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness,
             type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show
             construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation
             with relation to the building construction.

         SD-03 Product Data

             Equipment Requirements; G.

               Copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings.
             Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall
             verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is
             attached for carrying the load from the brace.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

PART 3     EXECUTION

          -- End of Section --




                              SECTION 13 48 00.00 10   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022




                                     SECTION 12 21 00

                                     *1 WINDOW BLINDS
                                           08/10

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1    REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

             GREENGUARD ENVIRONMENTAL INSTITUTE (GEI)

 GEI                                    Greenguard Standards for Low Emitting
                                        Products

             NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 701                               (2010) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for
                                        Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films

             SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

 SCS                                    Scientific Certification Systems
                                        (SCS)Indoor Advantage

1.2    SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

         SD-02 Shop Drawings; G

             Installation

               Drawings showing fabrication and installation details. Show
             layout and locations of track, direction of draw, mounting
             heights, and details.

         SD-03 Product Data

             Window Blinds
             Installation
             Certification

         SD-04 Samples

             Window Blinds


               Samples of each type and color of window treatment. Provide
             aluminum horizontal louver blind slats 6 inch in length for each


                              SECTION 12 21 00   Page 1 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022


             color. Provide 6 inch sample of horizontal blind slats in each
             color specified.

         SD-06 Test Reports

             Window Blinds

               Fire resistance, Flame Spread, and smoke contribution data.

         SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

             Window Blinds

         SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

             Window Blinds

1.3   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Provide window treatment, conforming to NFPA 701, complete with necessary
 brackets, fittings, and hardware. Each window treatment type shall be a
 complete unit provided in accordance with paragraph WINDOW TREATMENT
 PLACEMENT SCHEDULE. Mount and operate equipment in accordance with
 manufacturer's instructions. Windows to receive a treatment shall be
 completely covered.

1.4   SUSTAINABLE DESIGN CERTIFICATION

 Product shall be third party certified by GEI Greenguard Indoor Air Quality
 Certified, SCS Scientific Certification Systems Indoor Advantage or equal.
 Certification shall be performed annually and shall be current.

1.5   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver components to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original packaging
 with the brand or company name, item identification, and project reference
 clearly marked. Store components in a dry location that is adequately
 ventilated and free from dust, water, or other contaminants and has easy
 access for inspection and handling. Store materials flat in a clean dry
 area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Do not open
 containers until needed for installation unless verification inspection is
 required.

1.6   WARRANTY

 Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that
 extend beyond a 1 year period.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1      WINDOW BLINDS

 Provide each blind, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets
 and fastenings, as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer. All parts
 shall be one color, unless otherwise indicated, to match the color of the
 blind slat. Treat steel features for corrosion resistance.




                              SECTION 12 21 00   Page 2 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.1     Horizontal Blinds

 Provide horizontal blinds with 1 inch slats. Blind units shall be capable
 of nominally 180 degree partial tilting operation and full-height raising.
 Blinds shall be inside mount. Tapes for 1 inch slats shall be braided
 polyester or nylon.

2.1.1.1     Head Channel and Slats

 Provide head channel made of steel or aluminum with corrosion-resistant
 finish nominal 0.024 inch for 1 inch slats. Provide slats of aluminum, not
 less than 0.006 inch thick, and of sufficient strength to prevent sag or
 bow in the finished blind. Provide a sufficient amount of slats to assure
 proper control, uniform spacing, and adequate overlap. Enclose all
 hardware in the headrail.

2.1.1.2     Controls

 The slats shall be tilted by a transparent tilting wand, hung vertically by
 its own weight, and shall swivel for easy operation. Provide a tilter
 control of enclosed construction. Provide moving parts and mechanical
 drive made of compatible materials which do not require lubrication during
 normal expected life. The tilter shall tilt the slats to any desired angle
 and hold them at that angle so that any vibration or movement of ladders
 and slats will not drive the tilter and change the angle of slats. Include
 a mechanism to prevent over tightening. Provide a wand of sufficient
 length to reach to within 5 feet of the floor.

2.1.1.3     Intermediate Brackets

 Provide intermediate brackets for installation, as recommended by the
 manufacturer, of blinds over 60 inch wide.

2.1.1.4     Bottom Rail

 Provide bottom rail made of corrosion-resistant steel with factory applied
 finish. Provide closed oval shaped bottom rail with double-lock seam for
 maximum strength. Bottom rail and end caps to match slats in color.

2.1.1.5     Braided Ladders

 Provide braided ladders of 100 percent polyester yarn, color to match the
 slat color. Space ladders 15.2 slats per foot of drop in order to provide
 a uniform overlap of the slats in a closed position.

2.2     COLOR

 Provide color, pattern and texture selected from manufacturer's standard
 colors, white. Color listed is not intended to limit the selection of
 equal colors from other manufacturers.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     EXAMINATION

 After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify all dimensions in
 the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
 performing the work.



                          SECTION 12 21 00   Page 3 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


3.2     WINDOW TREATMENT PLACEMENT SCHEDULE

 Provide window covering as follows:

        Room Name/Number         Window Covering Type          Quantity
        105 JNCC CONFERENCE      HB-1                          1
        106 SSP CHIEF            HB-1                          1
        108 OPS                  HB-1                          1
        110 SPECTRUM MGMT        HB-1                          2
        112 JNCC CHIEF&NCO       HB-1                          1
        117 JTEP CHIEF           HB-1                          1
        113 VTC                  HB-1                          3

3.3     INSTALLATION

3.3.1     Horizontal

 Perform installation of Horizontal Blinds in accordance with the approved
 detail drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. Install
 units level, plumb, secure, and at proper height and location relative to
 window units. Provide and install supplementary or miscellaneous items in
 total, including clips, brackets, or anchorages incidental to or necessary
 for a sound, secure, and complete installation. Do not start installation
 until completion of room painting and finishing operations.

3.4     CLEAN-UP

 Upon completion of the installation, free window treatments from soiling,
 damage or blemishes; and adjust them for form and appearance and proper
 operating condition. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the
 Contracting Officer. Isolate metal parts from direct contact with
 concrete, mortar, or dissimilar metals. Ensure blinds installed in
 recessed pockets can be removable without disturbing the pocket. The
 entire blind, when retracted, shall be contained behind the pocket. For
 blinds installed outside the jambs and mullions, overlap each jamb and
 mullion 0.75 inch or more when the jamb and mullion sizes permit. Include
 all hardware, brackets, anchors, fasteners, and accessories necessary for a
 complete, finished installation.

             -- End of Section --




                          SECTION 12 21 00    Page 4 (Added by Amendment No. 0001)
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022




                                SECTION 14 24 00

                               HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
                                      02/09


PART 1     GENERAL


1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS D1.1/D1.1M                     (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel

            ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME A17.1                         (2007; Addenda 2008) Safety Code for
                                    Elevators and Escalators

 ASME A17.2                         (2007) Guide for Inspection of Elevators,
                                    Escalators, and Moving Walks

 ASME B16.11                        (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
                                    Threaded

 ASME B16.9                         (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
                                    Steel Buttwelding Fittings

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 106/A 106M                  (2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
                                    Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
                                    Service

 ASTM A 53/A 53M                    (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
                                    Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
                                    Welded and Seamless

 ASTM D 92                          (2005a) Standard Test Method for Flash and
                                    Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester

 ASTM D 97                          (2009) Pour Point of Petroleum Products

            INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

 ICC IBC                            (2009; Errata First Printing)
                                    International Building Code

            NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

 NEMA MG 1                          (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
                                    and Generators


                            SECTION 14 24 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 70                               (2011) National Electrical Code

            U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 29 CFR 1910.27                        Fixed Ladders

 36 CFR 1191                           Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
                                       Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
                                       Facilities

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Provide a pre-engineered elevator system, by manufacturer regularly engaged
 in the manufacture of elevator systems, that complies with ASME A17.1 and
 ASME A17.2 in their entirety, and additional requirements specified herein.

1.2.1     Miscellaneous Requirements

 Submit one set of wiring diagrams, in plastic or glass cover, framed and
 mounted in elevator machine room for revised building electrical system, if
 needed, to make supplied elevator system function as specified. Deliver
 other sets to Contracting Officer. Coded diagrams are not acceptable
 unless adequately identified. Submit calculations for the Reaction Loads
 imposed on the building by and Heat Loads generated by the elevator system.

1.2.2     Provisions for Earthquake Protection

 The facility is located in a seismic zone 3, and shall comply with all
 ASME A17.1, Part 8.4 requirements.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Detail Drawings; G

              Detail drawings, as specified.

        SD-03 Product Data

            Passenger Elevators;

              Information on motor, pump, gages, piston and cylinder, piping
            and valves, hall station, and buffer on elevators and
            accessories. For elevator supporting systems, include information
            on car control and emergency power systems. On data sheets,
            provide document identification number or bulletin number,
            published or copyrighted prior to the date of contract bid opening.

            Field Quality Control


                              SECTION 14 24 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



            A plan detailing the testing procedures 60 days prior to
          performing the elevator tests.

          Logic Control

            Microprocessor control system, including appropriate hardware
          and software and other specified requirements.

      SD-05 Design Data

          Reaction Loads

            Calculations of reaction loads imposed on building by elevator
          system that comply with ASME A17.1. Calculations shall be
          certified by a Registered Professional Engineer. Do not fabricate
          materials nor perform construction until approved by Contracting
          Officer.

          Heat Loads

            Calculations for total anticipated heat loads generated by all
          the elevator machine room equipment. A Registered Professional
          Engineer shall provide certified calculations. Do not fabricate
          materials nor perform construction until approved by the
          Contracting Officer.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Field Tests Reports

            Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed
          to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
          compliance with the specified performance criteria, within 14 days
          after the successful completion of testing the installed system.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Qualifications

            A letter no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed
          providing the name and Statement of Qualifications, including
          ASME A17.1 Certificate and all required state and local licenses
          of the individual who will perform the duties specified herein for
          the Elevator Inspector.   A letter of endorsement from the
          elevator manufacturer certifying that the Elevator Specialist is
          acceptable to manufacturer no later than 14 days after the Notice
          to Proceed providing the name and Statement of Qualifications of
          the individual who will perform the duties specified herein for
          the Elevator Specialist. Copies of certified welders'
          qualifications, demonstrating compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
          Section 4; list welders' names with corresponding code marks.

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Operation and Maintenance Manuals
          Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools
          Maintenance and Repair Action Plan



                           SECTION 14 24 00    Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


            Data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AMD
            MAINNTENANCE DATA. Three Operation and Maintenance Manuals, 28
            days prior to the Operation and Maintenance Training. Include a
            list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all tools required
            for operation and maintenance.

            Operation and Maintenance Training;

              Proposed Onsite Training schedule, submitted concurrently with
            the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1     Elevator Specialist

 Perform work specified in this section under the direct guidance of the
 Elevator Specialist who is regularly engaged in the installation and
 maintenance of the type and complexity of elevator system specified in the
 contract documents, and who served in a similar capacity for at least three
 systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less
 than 24 months. Provide endorsement letter from the elevator manufacturer
 certifying that the Elevator Specialist is acceptable to manufacturer. The
 Elevator Specialist oversees the acceptance inspections and tests, signs
 and certifies the successful results. Provide the Elevator Specialist's
 written certification that the installation is in accordance with the
 contract requirements, after completion of the acceptance inspections and
 tests. Bring any discrepancy to the attention of the Contracting Officer
 in writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is
 discovered.

1.4.2     Elevator Inspector

 The Elevator Inspector will be provided by the Government to inspect the
 installation of the elevator(s) to ensure that the installation conforms to
 all contract requirements. The Elevator Inspector will witness the
 acceptance inspections and tests, approve all results, and shall sign and
 certify the successful results. The Elevator Inspector, after completion
 of the acceptance inspections and tests, will provide written certification
 that the installation is accordance with the contract requirements.

1.4.3     Welders' Qualifications

 Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 4 Qualification. Provide certified
 copies of welders' qualifications. List welders'names with corresponding
 code marks to identify each welder's work.

1.4.4     Detail Drawings

 Submit detail drawings, including dimensioned layouts in plan and elevation
 showing the arrangement of elevator equipment, accessories, supporting
 systems, anchorage of equipment, clearances for maintenance and operation;
 and details on hoistway, doors and frames, operation and signal stations,
 controllers, motors, guide rails and brackets, cylinder and plunge unit,
 and points of interface with normal power fire alarm system HVAC or exhaust
 systems and interface with emergency power systems. Provide drawings to
 show any revised building electrical system required to make supplied
 elevator system function as specified. Prepare drawings with complete
 wiring diagrams showing electrical connections and other details required
 to demonstrate sequence of operations and functions of system devices.


                                SECTION 14 24 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 Include the appropriate sizing of electrical protective devices on the
 drawings, which are frequently different from National Electrical Code
 standard sizes.

1.5     SCHEDULING

 Every six months, test systems for Emergency Power Operation, Earthquake
 Emergency Operations, and Firefighters' Service. Schedule to not interfere
 with building operations. For Firefighters' Service, test monthly in
 accordance with ASME A17.1, Section 8.6.10.1. Provide written results of
 each test operation to the Contracting Officer. Document all inspection
 and testing. Maintain copy of documentation in machine room.

1.6     WARRANTY

 Provide routine warranty service in accord with manufacturer's warranty
 requirements, for a period of 12 months after the date of acceptance by
 Contracting Officer. Perform work during regular working hours. During
 the warranty service period, include 24-hour emergency service, with 1
 hour response time, without additional cost to the Government. Include
 adjustments, greasing, oiling, and cleaning. Provide routine inspection
 and tests of elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1 Section 8.11.3 and
 ASME A17.2. Provide supplies and parts to keep elevator system in
 operation. Perform service only by factory trained personnel. Maintain a
 maintenance log of all service orders performed during the warranty period
 and submit it to the Contracting Officer 21 days prior to the end of the
 warranty period.

1.7     MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTION PLAN

 Provide plan of action prepared by the Elevator Specialist for emergency
 and routine maintenance in accordance with paragraph titled WARRANTY.
 Provide a list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all maintenance
 and diagnostic tools provided by paragraph "Maintenance and Diagnostic
 Tools", to the Contracting Officer.

1.7.1     Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools

 Provide all special tools and software necessary to service and maintain
 each elevator delivered at time of final acceptance. Provide one of each
 tool per group of elevators. Include solid state or microprocessor
 diagnostic tools unavailable on the open market. Provide necessary
 diagnostic software in cases where the solid state or microprocessor
 diagnostic tools are available on the open market

1.7.2     Keys for Elevator Key Switches

 Provide a minimum of twelve keys per unique cylinder used on all key
 switches for single elevator. If there is more than one elevator,
 additional keys are not required unless there are additional unique
 cylinders. Provide keys with brass or fiberglass tags marked 'PROPERTY OF
 THE U.S. GOVERNMENT' on one side with function of key or approved code
 number on other side.




                             SECTION 14 24 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      PASSENGER ELEVATORS

2.1.1     Basic Requirements

         a.    Rated Load: 4000 lbs.

         b.    Rated Speed: 150 fpm.

         c.    Travel Length: 46'-0" ft..

         d.    Number of Stops: 4

         e.    Number of Hoist Way Openings: 4 Front

         f. Car Inside Dimensions: 7'-8" ft.-in. wide, 5'-5" ft.-in. deep and
         8'-6" ft.-in. high.

         g.    Car Cab Height: 9'-0" high

         h.    Car Door Types: Single-speed center opening 4'-0" (Front Door Only)

         i. Type: Conventional car with a well hole drilled for the hydraulic
         cylinder

         j.    Voltage/phase: 460 Volt, 3 phase

2.1.2     Cab Enclosures and Door Finishes

 Provide finishes as indicated.

         a.    Floor; carpet CPT-1.

         b. Walls; 5WL patterned stainless steel walls with brushed stainless
         steel base at rear and side walls. Brushed stainless steel at front
         wall with column type returns. Provide each cab wall with equally
         spaced and equally sized wall panels. Conceal all fasteners. Wall
         trim. Accessories; 1.5" Diameter hand rails with staight ends, brushed
         stainless steel finish, at rear wall only.Protection Pads and Buttons

         c.    Interior face of door(s); brushed stainless steel.

         d. Ceilings; island type brushed stainless steel panel with perimeter
         flourescent cove type lighting and circular cutouts with (6)
         translucent diffusers. Ceiling frame; concealed. Emergency Exit;
         concealed

         e. Hoistway Doors and Frame Finishes; provide finishes on exterior of
         hoistway as follows:

               (1)   Frame; brushed stainless steel.
               (2)   Exterior face of door; brushed stainless steel.

2.2     SPECIAL OPERATION AND CONTROL

 Provide all special operations and control systems in accordance with
 ASME A17.1. Provide special operation key switches with 5 pin cylinder
 locks with removable cores an a key control lock for each operation system.


                                SECTION 14 24 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.2.1   Firefighters' Service

 Provide equipment and signaling devices. The designated level for
 Firefighters' key operated switch is the ground floor.

2.2.2   Smoke Detectors

 Provide connections directly to elevator controls which will, when smoke is
 detected by any smoke detector, actuate Firefighters' Service and send each
 elevator to the correct floor as required by ASME A17.1. Provide
 dual-contact smoke detectors located in the elevator lobbies and the
 elevator machine room. Provide dual-contact smoke detector at top of
 hoistway. Include only these smoke detectors with the circuit for elevator
 controller actuation of Firefighters' Service. In lieu of dual-contact
 smoke detectors, use an addressable fire alarm system with listed smoke
 detectors in the above stated locations. Ensure that all smoke detectors
 are mounted on finished ceiling.

2.2.3   Fire Sprinklers

 For each elevator, provide control wiring connecting the flow switch to the
 shunt trip equipped circuit breaker within the electrical panel serving the
 main line disconnect. Upon flow of water, equip flow switch to
 instantaneously send a signal to cause opening of shunt-trip equipped
 mainline circuit breaker, in compliance with ASME A17.1, Section 2.8.2, and
 send a signal to fire alarm control panel to indicate water flow
 condition. Provide machine room sprinkler flow switch actuation to shunt
 trip all elevator(s) served by the machine room. Provide hoistway
 sprinkler flow switch actuation to shunt trip all elevator(s) in the
 hoistway.

2.2.4   Top-of-Car Operating Device

 Provide operating device mounted on or from car crosshead, to permit
 operation of car at 150 fpm maximum for adjustment, maintenance, testing,
 and repair. Include integral or remote safety device, continuous pressure
 "UP" and "DOWN" switches or buttons, emergency stop switch, and inspection
 switch.

2.2.5   Hoistway Access Switches

 Provide key-operated hoistway access switch to permit limited movement of
 car at terminal floors for car positioning, operative only when
 "INSPECTION" switch in car operating panel is in the "INSPECTION"
 position. Locate switch 6 feet above floor level, within 12 inches of
 hoistway entrance frame.

2.2.6   Independent Service

 Provide exposed key-operated switch in car operating panel to enable
 independent service and simultaneously disable in-car signals and
 landing-call responses. Provide indicator lights that automatically
 illuminate during independent service.




                              SECTION 14 24 00   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022


2.2.7     Elevator Operation

2.2.7.1     Single, Two-Stop, Automatic Operation

 Provide Single Two-Stop Automatic Operation.        Provide illuminating push
 buttons.

2.2.7.2     Selective Collective Automatic Operation

 Provide Selective Collective Automatic Operation.          Provide illuminating
 push buttons.

2.2.8     Parking Switch

 Provide two-position parking switch in car station service cabinet. One
 position causes car to remain parked at floor landing where last used;
 other position causes car to park at main floor.

2.3     ELEVATOR DRIVE SYSTEM

 Provide hydraulic pump unit, piping, cylinder/plunger assembly, and rated
 equipment in accordance with ASME A17.1, which will operate at a maximum
 working pressure of less than 400 psig.

2.3.1     Hydraulic Pump Unit

 Provide submersible power unit with 50 HP motor. Provide self-contained
 unit including oil-hydraulic elevator pump, electric motor, drive assembly,
 oil strainer in suction line, structural steel outer base with tank and
 supports, oil-tight drip pan, and inner pump-mounting base. Limit acoustic
 output of elevator machine to 80 dbA. Provide sound-insulating panels to
 isolate airborne noise from non oil-immersed pump-motor assembly. Provide
 ventilation to cool hydraulic pump unit. Finish ferrous surfaces with
 rust-inhibiting paint. Provide tank capacity for full plunger displacement
 plus at least 10 gallons.

2.3.2     Hydraulic Controls and Equipment

 Provide electrically operated "UP" valve, constant velocity "DOWN" valve,
 "UP" and "DOWN" leveling valves, "BYPASS UPON STARTING" valve, check valve,
 vacuum relief valve, automatic shutoff (rupture) valve, safety relief
 valve, manually operated lowering valve, and scavenger pump unit.

2.3.2.1     Manual Shutoff Valves

 Provide 1/4 turn ball valve rated at 300 psi at elevator hydraulic pump
 suction inlet if pump is mounted outside the oil reservoir and the suction
 line exits the reservoir below the maximum oil level in the reservoir.
 Provide 1/4 turn ball valve rated at 600 psi at elevator pump discharge
 line in the machine room and in the oil supply line next to and on the pump
 side of the automatic shutoff valve in the pit.

2.3.2.2     Manual Lowering Valve

 Limit car descending speed under manual operation to 20 fpm. Provide rigid
 plastic red tag for valve identification, inscribed "MANUAL LOWERING VALVE."




                                SECTION 14 24 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3.2.3    Pump Discharge Strainer

 Provide strainer in pump discharge to prevent foreign materials from
 entering control system and cylinder-plunger unit (jack).

2.3.2.4    Muffler

 Provide blowout-proof muffler, containing pulsation-absorbing materials in
 oil line between pump unit and jack.

2.3.2.5    Pressure Switch

 Where cylinders are installed with top of cylinder above top of oil
 reservoir, provide pressure switch in oil line between cylinder and
 electric lowering valve(s) to prevent operation of lowering valve(s) unless
 positive pressure exists at top of cylinder.

2.3.2.6    Scavenger Pump Unit

 Provide a scavenge oil reservoir, an electrically operated oil transfer
 pump, scavenge oil lines, a strainer, and pump controls. Connect the
 scavenge oil reservoir to the elevator cylinder between the plunger packing
 area and the plunger drip (wiper) ring, to capture the oil leaking by the
 plunger pressure packing. Provide a vacuum relief valve. Connect the
 scavenge oil pump suction to the scavenge oil reservoir and the strainer,
 and the discharge to the elevator oil reservoir. Provide a scavenge oil
 reservoir level switch to control the scavenge oil pump. Scavenger pump
 shall operate independently of elevator hydraulic fluid pressure. Provide
 a manual-reset pit flood switch to prevent pump operation if pit is
 flooded. Anchor pump and oil reservoir to the pit floor.

2.3.2.7    Piping and Accessories

 Provide ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 80, black steel
 piping with ASME B16.9 and ASME B16.11 fittings. Extend Schedule 80 piping
 from the pump control valve body, inside the pump unit, to the hydraulic
 cylinder in the hoistway. Provide dielectric union at each end of the
 "pump to cylinder" oil supply line. Provide hangers or supports for all
 piping. Provide welded or threaded forged pipe fittings that are located
 between the shut off valve and the cylinder inlet.

2.3.2.8    Low Oil Condition

 Provide device for each elevator to protect pumping equipment in event oil
 level is too low. When device is in operation, the pump and motor shall
 stop, causing car to descend to lowest landing, open car doors and cease
 elevator operation except for door control circuits. Provide illuminating
 indicator on machine room control panel to alert upon a low oil condition.

2.3.2.9    Oil Characteristics

      a.   Viscosity, Saybolt Universal Seconds 145 to 160 at 100 degrees F.

      b.   Pour Point, ASTM D 97,     -15 degrees F maximum.

      c.   American Petroleum Institute (API) Gravity 29 to 33 at 60 degrees F.

      d.   Flash Point, ASTM D 92,     375 degrees F minimum.



                               SECTION 14 24 00   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3.2.10     Oil Temperature Device

 Provide means to maintain oil temperature between 60 and 100 degrees F
 regardless of ambient temperature.

2.3.3     Cylinder-Plunger Unit

 Provide a indirect plunger type hydraulic elevator. Provide a plunger of
 single-piece seamless steel construction. Provide stop plate or ring
 welded to bottom of the plunger. Provide packing and wiper (drip) ring
 with outlet for connection to the scavenge oil reservoir to collect leakage
 oil from cylinder for either inspecting for contamination or returning to
 tank. Use only standard packing glands with bolts that compress packing.
 Provide threaded 1/4 inch bleeder valve at top of cylinder just below
 packing gland. Telescopic cylinder-plunger units are not acceptable.

2.3.4     Cylinder Protection

 Protect the cylinder with a pipe-manufacturer applied "Applied Extruded
 Coating." Include the following steps as a minimum for the AEC coating
 application process: blast clean the bare pipe exterior surfaces to white
 metal, apply a minimum of 0.010 inch undercoating of heated butyl rubber
 adhesive; and apply a minimum of 0.040 inch thickness overcoating of
 polyethylene, hot extruded over the undercoating. Free the overcoating of
 surface blemishes, cracks, voids, and contamination from foreign
 substances. Provide field pipe joints and coating repairs with field
 applied coatings covered with heat-shrinkable pipe sleeves, following the
 cylinder manufacturer's instructions. Protect the AEC coating from damage
 until the cylinder is set into the cylinder well, plumbed, and aligned.

2.3.5     Automatic Shutoff Valve

 Provide automatic shut-off valve in oil supply line as close to cylinder
 inlet as possible. Provide threaded pipe connections to the valve. When
 there is ten percent drop in NO-LOAD operating pressure, activate the
 automatic shut-off valve. When activated, the device must immediately stop
 descent of the elevator and hold the elevator until lowered by use of the
 manual lowering feature of the valve. Configure the manual lowering
 feature of the automatic shut-off valve to limit the descending speed of
 the elevator to 20 fpm. Provide exposed adjustments of the automatic
 shut-off valve with means of adjustment sealed by certified elevator
 inspector after being set to correct position and tested in accordance with
 Paragraph Automatic Shutoff Valve Tests.

2.3.6     Motors

 Provide submersible power unit with 50 HP motor. Provide NEMA MG 1
 induction motors with squirrel cage, motors with drip-proof enclosure,460
 volt / 3 phase, continuous rated, maximum 1800 rpm, and Class F insulation
 rated at 120 starts per hour.

2.3.6.1     Insulation Resistance and Motor Nameplate Data

 Provide minimum of one megohm insulation resistance between conductors and
 motor frame. Provide motor nameplate listing rated wattage (horsepower),
 speed, and ampere, permanently mounted in position visible to viewer
 without use of special tools, such as a mirror. Provide motor and pump
 data on the outside of machine frame.



                            SECTION 14 24 00   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3.6.2     Maximum Allowable Motor Amperage

 Do not exceed its own nameplate amperage when the motor is running and the
 elevator is lifting rated load at rated speed.

2.4     CONTROL EQUIPMENT

 NFPA 70 and ASME A17.1, Section 3.26. Provide elevator motor controller of
 magnetic reduced-voltage resistance or wye-delta start with overload relays
 in each line and reverse phase relay. Provide controls for sequential
 starting, stopping, and speed of elevator and to give specified operation.
 Enclose control equipment in factory-primed and baked-enamel coated
 sheet-metal cabinets with removable or hinged doors and ventilation louvers.

2.4.1     Self-Leveling and Anti-Creep Device

 Provide each elevator with two-way, automatic self-leveling device that
 brings car floor to within 1/4 inch of level with floor landing regardless
 of load, position of hoistway door, or direction of travel.

2.5     OPERATING PANELS, SIGNAL FIXTURES, AND COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS

2.5.1     Capacity and Data Plates

 Attach faceplates with spanner security screws. On car panel, provide
 stainless steel capacity and data plates, with name of elevator
 manufacturer.

2.5.2     Car and Hall Buttons

 Provide recessed tamper-proof push buttons of minimum 3/4 inch size
 satin-finish stainless steel, with illuminating jewel center.

2.5.3     Hall Station Door Operating Buttons

 Identical in size and design to hall call buttons, but not illuminating.

2.5.4     Passenger Car-Operating Panel

 Provide each car with one car operating panel that contains operation
 controls and communication devices. Provide exposed, flush mounted buttons
 for the controls that must be passenger accessible. Provide service
 cabinet or keyed switches for those switches that should not be passenger
 accessible. Allow maximum 48 inch height between car floor and center line
 of top operating buttons. Allow 35 inch height between car floor and
 center line of bottom button. Use engraving and backfilling or photo
 etching for button and switch designations. Do not use attached signs.

2.6     PASSENGER CONTROLS

2.6.1     Passenger Car-Operating Panel

            a. Illuminating operating call buttons identified to correspond
            to landings served by elevator car.

            b.   "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" buttons.

            c.   Keyed "STOP" switch in accordance with ASME A17.1, rule 2.26.2.



                             SECTION 14 24 00   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


            d. "ALARM" button in compliance with UFAS, ADA, and ASME A17.1,
            Rule 2.27.1. Furnish a red alarm button with engraved legend
            "ALARM." Allow alarm button to illuminate when pushed. Locate
            "ALARM" button at panel bottom.

            e. "FIRE DEPARTMENT" key switch, with "OFF-HOLD-ON" positions, in
            that order with key to be removable in all positions. Provide
            fire sign or jewel, and audible signal device, in accordance with
            ASME A17.1 Section 2.27.3. Both visual and audible signals are
            activated when Phase I key switch in hall is activated or when
            smoke detector activates return of elevator(s) to main fire
            response floor. Keep visual and audible signal activated until
            car has reached main or designated alternate fire response floor.
            Upon arrival at fire response floor visual signal remains
            illuminated and audible signal becomes silent.

            f. Emergency two-way communication. Provide momentary pressure,
            single illuminating pushbutton operated communication device that
            complies with ASME A17.1, UFAS, and the Americans with
            Disabilities Act.

2.6.1.1     Service Controls

            a. Inspection switch that transfers car control to top-of-car
            inspection operating controls and prevents car operation from
            in-car control panel.

            b.   Independent service switch.

            c.   Fan switch, two-speed.

            d. 120-volt ac 60 Hz single-phase duplex electrical outlet of
            ground-fault-circuit-interrupt (GFCI) design.

2.6.1.2     Certificate Window

 Provide 4 inch high by 6 inch wide certificate window in car operating
 panel for elevator inspection certificate.

2.6.2     Switches and Devices

 Provide elevator manufacturer's standard grade for switches and devices on
 car operating panel. Legibly and indelibly identify each device and its
 operating positions. Locate car dispatching buttons in identical positions
 in car operating panels for corresponding floors.

2.6.3     In-Car Position and Direction Indicator and Signal

 Include in-car direction indicator in the in-car position indicator fixture.

2.6.3.1     In-Car Position Indicator and Signal

 Provide horizontal electrical or electronic digital position indicator
 located minimum of 84 inch above car floor. Arrange indicator to show
 floor position of car in hoistway and its traveling direction. Indicate
 position by illuminating of numeral or letter corresponding to landing at
 which car is passing or stopping. Provide audible signal to alert
 passenger that elevator is passing or stopping at a floor. Provide audible
 signals exceeding ambient noise level by at least 20 dbA with frequency not


                               SECTION 14 24 00   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 higher than 1500 Hz.

2.6.3.2     In-Car Direction Indicator and Signal

 Provide visual and audible car direction indicators in car, indicating car
 traveling direction. For visual directional signal, provide arrow of
 minimum 2-1/2 inch in size. Use equilateral triangles for arrows, green
 for upward direction and red for downward direction. Provide audible
 signal that sounds once for upward direction and twice for downward
 direction.

2.6.4     Landing Position and Direction Indicator and Signal

 Provide a single fixture containing the landing position and direction
 indicator.

2.7     HOISTWAY AND CAR EQUIPMENT

2.7.1     Guide Rails and Fastenings

 Paint rail shanks with one coat black enamel.        Only T-section type rail is
 acceptable.

2.7.2     Car Buffers

 Provide buffer data plate on each buffer.

2.7.3     Pit Equipment

2.7.3.1     Pit "STOP" Switch

 Provide push/pull type pit "STOP" switch for stopping elevator motor,
 independent of regular operating device. Locate on same side of hoistway
 as ladder.

2.7.3.2     Ladders

 Provide galvanized steel ladder conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27 with minimum 7
 inch distance between rung and wall. Locate ladder on hoistway side wall
 closest to hoistway door opening.

2.7.3.3     Lighting of Pits

 Locate pit light not less than 6 feet above pit floor. Locate switch on
 same side of hoistway as ladder. Provide GFCI duplex receptacle in each
 pit.

2.8     TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES

 Provide each elevator with a terminal stopping device.

2.8.1     Wiring and Traveling Cables

 Suspend traveling cables by means of self-tightening webbed devices.

2.8.2     Emergency Signaling Device

 Provide audible signaling device, operable from Car Operating Panel button
 marked "ALARM". Mount the audible signaling device in hoistway.


                               SECTION 14 24 00   Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



2.9    PASSENGER CAR AND HOISTWAY DOOR ACCESSORIES

 ASME A17.1, Sections 2.12, 2.13, 2.14, and 3. Provide infra-red curtain
 unit (ICU) with multiple infra-red beams that protect to the full height of
 the door opening. Extend minimum coverage from 2 inchs off the floor to 70
 inch above floor level. Door operation must meet the requirements of
 ASME A17.1 Rule 2.27.1 and 2.13.5. Provide high-speed electric operator,
 safety interlocks for car and hoistway doors, and electric safety contact
 to prevent car operation unless doors are closed.

2.10     PASSENGER ELEVATOR GUIDES, FRAME, PLATFORM, AND ENCLOSURE

2.10.1     Roller Guides

 Provide roller guide assemblies in adjustable mountings on each side of car
 in accurate alignment at top and bottom of car frame.

2.10.2     Car Enclosure, Car Door, and Car Illumination

 Provide natural and forced ventilation, stainless steel hooks, with fire
 retardant pads.

2.10.2.1     Return Panels, Entrance Columns, Cove Base, and Transom

 Provide 14 gauge minimum non perforated steel. Apply sound-deadening
 mastic on car shell and all exterior components.

2.10.2.2     Car Top

 Provide reinforced 12 gauge minimum steel with hinged emergency exit
 openable by hand from car top only. Provide electrical contact which
 prevents operation of elevator when emergency exit is open. Provide
 sound-deadening mastic on all exterior components.

2.10.2.3     Car Door

 Provide 16 gauge minimum steel, sandwich construction without binder
 angles. Provide a minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one
 guide at leading and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill
 groove their entire length of travel.

2.10.2.4     Car Entrance Sill

 Provide one piece cast solid nickel silver entrance sill. Set sills level
 and flush with floor finish. Use same material for hoistway and car
 entrance sills.

2.11     PASSENGER ELEVATOR HOISTWAY DOORS AND ENTRANCES

 Provide hoistway entrance assemblies which have a minimum 1-1/2 hour fire
 rating.

2.11.1     Hoistway Entrance Frames

 Frame of 14 gauge thick prefinished carbon sheet steel.    Solidly grout
 uprights of entrances to height of 5 feet.




                            SECTION 14 24 00   Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.11.2     Hoistway Entrance Sills

 Provide one-piece cast solidnickel silver entrance sills. After sill is
 set level and flush with finished floor height, solidly grout under full
 length of sill. Use same material for hoistway and car door sills.

2.11.3     Hoistway Entrance Doors

 Provide hoistway entrance door constructed with hollow metal non-vision
 construction with flush surfaces on car and landing sides. Provide a
 minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one guide at leading edge
 and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill groove the entire
 length of travel.

2.11.4     Entrance Fascias and Dust Covers

 Provide sheet metal hoistway door track dust covers at each landing. Dust
 covers must cover door locks and door roller tracks and extend the full
 width of the door track and associated hardware.

2.11.5     Hoistway Ventilation

 Provide hoistway ventilation directly to outside air by fixed louver
 through top of hoistway or through side wall of hoistway at top of
 hoistway. The net size of the louver shall be a minimum of 3'x3' or 3.5
 percent of the cross section of each hoistway.

2.12     HANDICAPPED AND MEDICAL SERVICES ACCESS

2.12.1     Provision For Handicapped

 Refer to 36 CFR 1191, Sections 4.10 for Elevators, 4.30 for Signage, and
 4.31 for Telephones.

2.12.2     Emergency Medical Service

 ICC IBC - Chapter 30, for elevators and signage

2.13     EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION

 Upon outage of normal power and initiation of emergency power, provide
 circuitry and wiring to operate elevator telephone to accomplish operation
 sequences. For single elevator system, elevator travels automatically to
 main floor, opens doors, and automatically places itself in regular
 service. During emergency power operation, provide a sign reading
 "EMERGENCY POWER" flashing in each car station. At the same time, provide
 operable Firefighters' Service.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ASME A17.1,
 36 CFR 1191, and NFPA 70.

3.1.1     Automatic Shutoff Valve

 Locate in supply-return line, as close as possible to cylinder-plunger unit.



                            SECTION 14 24 00   Page 15
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


3.1.2    Structural Members

 Do not cut or alter.    Restore any damaged or defaced work to original
 condition.

3.1.3    Safety Guards

 Completely enclose selector cables or tapes exposed to possibility of
 accidental contact in machine room with 16 gage thick sheet metal or
 expanded metal guards, both horizontally and vertically. Protect exposed
 gears, sprockets, and selector drums from accidental contact in accordance
 with ASME A17.1.

3.1.4    Other Requirements

 Include recesses, cutouts, slots, holes, patching, grouting, and
 refinishing to accommodate elevator installation. Use core drilling to
 drill all new holes in concrete. Finish work to be straight, level, and
 plumb. During installation, protect machinery and equipment from dirt,
 water, or mechanical damage. At completion, clean all work, and spot
 paint. Completion of firefighters' service includes installation and
 wiring of all smoke detectors in accordance with ASME A17.1, Section
 2.27.3.2. Coordinate smoke detector installation for firefighters' service.

3.2     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

        a. After completing elevators system installation, notify Contracting
        Officer that elevator system is ready for final inspection and
        acceptance test.

        b. Perform all required tests and demonstrate proper operation of each
        elevator system and prove that each system complies with contract
        requirements and ASME A17.1. Inspection procedures in ASME A17.2 form
        a part of this inspection and acceptance testing. Conduct all testing
        and inspections in the presence of both the Elevator Specialist and the
        Elevator Inspector. Demonstrate the proper operation of all equipment
        at various date settings, selected by the Elevator Inspector, ranging
        from the date of contract award through 1 January 2099.

        c. The Elevator Inspector shall complete, sign and post the results of
        all tests and inspection results after successful completion of
        inspection and testing. The Contractor is responsible for all costs
        involved with reinspection and retesting required to correct
        discrepancies discovered during testing and the subsequent retesting
        required, including all costs and expenses incurred by the Government
        Furnished Inspector.

3.2.1    Testing Materials and Instruments

 Provide testing materials and instruments required for final inspection.
 Include calibrated test weights, tachometer, 600-volt megohm meter, volt
 meter and ammeter, three Celsius calibrated thermometers, door pressure
 gage, spirit level, stop watch, hydraulic pressure test gauge, and a 100
 foot tape measure.

3.2.2    Field Tests

 Submit Field Tests Reports after completing each of the specified tests, as
 required in the Submittals paragraph.


                              SECTION 14 24 00   Page 16
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



3.2.2.1   Endurance Tests

 Test each elevator for a period of one hour continuous run, with specified
 rated load in the car. Restart the one hour test period from beginning,
 following any shutdown or failure. During the test run, stop car at each
 floor in both directions of travel for standing period of 10 seconds per
 floor. The requirements for Rated Speed, Leveling, Temperature Rise, and
 Motor Amperes testing specified herein must be met throughout the duration
 of the Endurance test.

3.2.2.2   Automatic Shutoff Valve Tests

 Test the automatic shutoff valve twice. Once at beginning of acceptance
 test and again at conclusion of one-hour Endurance test to ensure
 consistent performance of shutoff valve, regardless of temperature of
 equipment and oil.

3.2.2.3   Speed Tests

 Determine actual speed of each elevator in both directions with rated load
 and with no load in elevator car. Make Speed tests before and immediately
 after Endurance test. Determine speed by tachometer reading, excluding
 accelerating and slow-down zones in accordance with ASME A17.2, Section
 2.22.4. Minimum acceptable speed is the Rated Speed as specified. Maximum
 acceptable elevator speed is 110 percent of Rated Speed.

3.2.2.4   Leveling Tests

 Test elevator car leveling devices for landing accuracy of plus or minus
 1/4 inch at each floor with no load in car, symmetrical load in car, and
 with rated load in car in both directions of travel. Determine accuracy of
 floor landing both before and immediately after endurance tests.

3.2.2.5   Pressure Tests

 Check operating pressure at pump and cylinder head under no load and rated
 load. Test pressure at which relief valve operates.

3.2.2.6   Insulation Resistance Tests

 Perform tests to ensure wiring systems free from short circuits and
 grounds. Minimum acceptable insulation resistance for electrical
 conductors is one megohm between each conductor and ground and between each
 conductor and other conductors. Prior to megohm meter test, make provision
 to prevent damage to the electronic devices.

3.2.2.7   Temperature Rise Tests

 Determine the temperature rise of the hydraulic pump motor during the full
 load test run for a minimum of one hour. Under these conditions, do not
 exceed maximum acceptable temperature rise indicated on the manufacturer's
 data plate. Start test only when equipment is within 5 degrees C of
 ambient temperature.

3.2.2.8   Motor Ampere Tests

 Measure and record motor amperage when motor is running and elevator is
 lifting at rated load and speed. Measure and record motor amperage at the


                            SECTION 14 24 00   Page 17
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 beginning and the end of Endurance test.

3.3    OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING

 The Elevator Specialist shall instruct Government personnel in care,
 adjustment, and maintenance of elevator equipment for a period of not less
 than 5 working days immediately following acceptance of system. Submit
 Operation and Maintenance Manuals as required in the Submittals paragraph.

      -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 14 24 00   Page 18
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022




                              SECTION 21 13 13.00 10

                    WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
                                       05/09

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

 AWWA C104/A21.4                    (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for
                                    Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

 AWWA C110/A21.10                   (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings
                                    for Water

 AWWA C111/A21.11                   (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for
                                    Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

 AWWA C151/A21.51                   (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
                                    Cast, for Water

 AWWA C203                          (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and
                                    Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
                                    and Tape - Hot-Applied

          ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME B16.1                         (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
                                    Fittings; Classes 125 and 250

 ASME B16.11                        (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
                                    Threaded

 ASME B16.21                        (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
                                    Flanges

 ASME B16.3                         (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
                                    Classes 150 and 300

 ASME B16.4                         (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
                                    Fittings; Classes 125 and 250

 ASME B16.9                         (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
                                    Steel Buttwelding Fittings

 ASME B18.2.2                       (1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex
                                     Nuts (Inch Series)

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 135/A 135M                  (2009) Standard Specification for


                          SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


                                   Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe

 ASTM A 183                        (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

 ASTM A 193/A 193M                 (2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
                                   Materials for High-Temperature Service

 ASTM A 449                        (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,
                                   Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
                                   120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
                                   General Use

 ASTM A 47/A 47M                   (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
                                   Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM A 53/A 53M                   (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
                                   Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
                                   Welded and Seamless

 ASTM A 536                        (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Ductile Iron Castings

 ASTM A 563                        (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                   and Alloy Steel Nuts

 ASTM A 795/A 795M                 (2008) Standard Specification for Black
                                   and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                                   Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
                                   Protection Use

 ASTM F 436                        (2009) Hardened Steel Washers

           FM GLOBAL (FM)

 FM P7825a                         (2009) Approval Guide Fire Protection

 FM P7825b                         (2009) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment

           MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
           INDUSTRY (MSS)

 MSS SP-71                         (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
                                   Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

           NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 13                           (2007) Installation of Sprinkler Systems

 NFPA 14                           (2010) Standard for the Installation of
                                   Standpipe, Private Hydrants and Hose
                                   Systems

 NFPA 1963                         (2009) Standard for Fire Hose Connections

 NFPA 24                           (2010) Standard for the Installation of
                                   Private Fire Service Mains and Their


                        SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


                                       Appurtenances

            NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES
            (NICET)

 NICET 1014-7                          (2003) Program Detail Manual for
                                       Certification in the Field of Fire
                                       Protection Engineering Technology (Field
                                       Code 003) Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler
                                       System Layout

            UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 668                                (2004; Rev thru Aug 2008) Hose Valves for
                                       Fire Protection Service

 UL Bld Mat Dir                        (2009) Building Materials Directory

 UL Fire Prot Dir                      (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as required to
 provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other
 construction. Install sprinkler system over and under ducts, piping and
 platforms when such equipment can negatively effect or disrupt the
 sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage. Provide wet pipe sprinkler and
 standpipe system in all areas of the building except in areas with
 preaction systems. Except as modified herein, the systems shall be
 designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Rack
 sprinklers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. Pipe sizes which are not
 indicated on drawings shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Design
 any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated on the drawings
 including locating sprinklers, piping and equipment, and size piping and
 equipment when this information is not indicated on the drawings or is not
 specified herein. The design of the sprinkler system shall be based on
 hydraulic calculations, and the other provisions specified herein.

1.2.1     Hydraulic Design

 Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.10 gpm
 per 3,000 sq feet for light hazard, 0.15 gpm per 3,000 sq feet for ordinary
 hazard group I and 0.20 gpm per 3,000 sq feet for ordinary hazard group II.
 The minimum pipe size for branch lines in gridded systems shall be 1-1/4
 inch. Hydraulic calculations shall be in accordance with the Area/Density
 Method of NFPA 13. Water velocity in the piping shall not exceed 20 ft/s.

1.2.1.1     Hose Demand

 Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm for light hazard and
 500 gpm for ordinary hazardto the sprinkler system demand.

1.2.1.2     Basis for Calculations

 The design of the system shall be based upon a water supply with a static
 pressure, and a flow of at a residual pressure as determined by hydrant
 flow tests performed by the sprinkler contractor in accordance with NFPA
 291. Water supply shall be presumed available at the point of connection
 to existing. Hydraulic calculations shall be based upon the Hazen-Williams


                             SECTION 21 13 13.00 10    Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 formula with a "C" value of 120 for steel piping, 150 for copper tubing,
 140 for new cement-lined ductile-iron piping, and 100 for existing
 underground piping. See drawings for preliminary hydrant flow test
 information.

1.2.1.3     Hydraulic Calculations

 Prepare hydraulic calculations as outlined in NFPA 13, except that
 calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended
 specifically for fire protection system design using the design data shown
 on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch lines is
 not acceptable. Calculations shall be based on the water supply data
 determined by hydrant flow tests to substantiate that the design area used
 in the calculations is the most demanding hydraulically. Water supply
 curves and system requirements shall be plotted on semi-logarithmic graph
 paper so as to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation.
 Provide a summary sheet listing sprinklers in the design area and their
 respective hydraulic reference points, elevations, actual discharge
 pressures and actual flows. Elevations of hydraulic reference points
 (nodes) shall be indicated. Documentation shall identify each pipe
 individually and the nodes connected thereto. Indicate the diameter,
 length, flow, velocity, friction loss, number and type fittings, total
 friction loss in the pipe, equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams
 coefficient for each pipe. For gridded systems, calculations shall show
 peaking of demand area friction loss to verify that the hydraulically most
 demanding area is being used. Also for gridded systems, a flow diagram
 indicating the quantity and direction of flows shall be included. A
 drawing showing hydraulic reference points (nodes) and pipe designations
 used in the calculations shall be included and shall be independent of shop
 drawings.

1.2.2     Sprinkler Coverage

 Sprinklers shall be uniformly spaced on branch lines. In buildings
 protected by automatic sprinklers, sprinklers shall provide coverage
 throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited
 to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear
 rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces.
 Coverage per sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not
 exceed 100 square feet for extra hazard occupancies, 130 square feet for
 ordinary hazard occupancies, and 225 square feet for light hazard
 occupancies.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
 approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies
 the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the
 following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Shop Drawings; G

              Three copies of the Sprinkler System Shop Drawings, no later
            than 21 days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation.

            As-Built Drawings


                          SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022



            As-built shop drawings, at least 14 days after completion of the
          Final Tests, updated to reflect as-built conditions after all
          related work is completed. Drawings shall be on reproducible
          full-size mylar film.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Fire Protection Related Submittals

            A list of the Fire Protection Related Submittals, no later than
          7 days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist.

          Materials and Equipment; G

            Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Sprinkler System
          Drawings for all items specified herein. The data shall be
          highlighted to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended
          for consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate
          compliance with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a
          complete equipment list that includes equipment description, model
          number and quantity.

          Spare Parts

            Spare parts data for each different item of material and
          equipment specified.

          Preliminary Tests; G

            Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days
          prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time
          to begin the preliminary tests.

          Final Acceptance Test; G

            Proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Test, no later than 14
          days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and
          time to begin Final Acceptance Test, submitted with the Final
          Acceptance Test Procedures. Notification shall be provided at
          least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the test.
          Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material &
          Test Certificates.

          Onsite Training; G

            Proposed Onsite Training schedule, at least 14   days prior to
          the start of related training.

          Fire Protection Specialist; G

            The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire
          Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
          Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system
          drawings and hydraulic calculations.

          Sprinkler System Installer; G

            The name and documentation of certification of the proposed


                           SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire
          Protection Specialist Qualifications.

      SD-05 Design Data

          Sway Bracing; G

            Load calculations for sizing of sway bracing, for systems that
          are required to be protected against damage from earthquakes.

          Hydraulic Calculations; G

            Hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic
          reference points and pipe segments.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Preliminary Test Report; G

            Three copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later
          that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The
          Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's
          Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
          Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
          Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed
          by the Fire Protection Specialist.

          Final Acceptance Test Report; G

            Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no
          later that 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance
          Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed
          by the Fire Protection Specialist.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist; G

            Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification
          by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler system is
          installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
          signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test
          Reports.

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Operating and Maintenance Instructions

            Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system
          startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14
          days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the
          manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and
          tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine
          maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified
          wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
          recommended service organization (including address and telephone
          number) for each item of equipment.




                           SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes
 advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though
 the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it
 appears. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this
 specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall
 govern. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted
 to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.4.1     Fire Protection Specialist

 Perform work specified in this section under the supervision of and
 certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is an individual registered
 professional engineer who has passed the fire protection engineering
 written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for
 Engineering and Surveys (NCEES or who is certified as a Level III or IV
 Technician by National Institute for Certification in Engineering
 Technologies (NICET) in the Automatic Sprinkler System Layout subfield of
 Fire Protection Engineering Technology in accordance with NICET 1014-7.
 The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare a list of the fire protection
 related submittals from the Contract Submittal Register that relate to the
 successful installation of the sprinkler systems(s). The submittals
 identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed
 and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to the
 Government. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in
 the design and installation of the type and complexity of system specified
 in the contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for
 at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a
 period of not less than 6 months.

1.4.2     Sprinkler System Installer

 Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System
 Installer who is regularly engaged in the installation of the type and
 complexity of system specified in the contract documents, and shall have
 served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed
 in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.

1.4.3     Shop Drawings

 Shop Drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working
 plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Drawings shall include plan and elevation
 views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with
 clearance for installation and maintenance. All submittals shall be signed
 by the Fire Protection Specialist. Each set of drawings shall include the
 following:

        a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed
        in sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols,
        nomenclature, and conventions used.

        b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which
        clearly show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic
        separation assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test connections,
        drains, and other applicable details necessary to clearly describe the
        proposed arrangement. Each type of fitting used and the locations of
        bushings, reducing couplings, and welded joints shall be indicated.



                            SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


         c. Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on branch
         lines and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to adjacent walls;
         from walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed mains, cross-mains and
         branch lines to finished floor and roof or ceiling. A detail shall
         show the dimension from the sprinkler and sprinkler deflector to the
         ceiling in finished areas.

         d. Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical
         branch line and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of each
         typical sprinkler above finished floor.

         e. Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; sway bracing
         for earthquake protection, and restraint of underground water main at
         point-of-entry into the building, and electrical devices and
         interconnecting wiring.

1.5   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner
 to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature
 variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes
 shall either be capped or plugged until installed.

1.6   EXTRA MATERIALS

 Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
 specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,
 with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
 recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
 service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for
 maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be
 included.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1   STANDARD PRODUCTS

 Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
 manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
 essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
 2 years prior to bid opening.

2.2   NAMEPLATES

 All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's
 name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.

2.3   REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE

 Provide Materials and Equipment that have been tested by Underwriters
 Laboratories, Inc. and are listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by
 Factory Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms
 "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed
 in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b




                           SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


2.4     UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

2.4.1     Pipe

 Piping from a point 6 inches above the floor to a point 5 feet outside the
 building wall shall be ductile iron with a rated working pressure of 175 psi
  conforming to AWWA C151/A21.51, with cement mortar lining conforming to
 AWWA C104/A21.4. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall
 comply with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.

2.4.2     Fittings and Gaskets

 Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10. Gaskets
 shall be suitable in design and size for the pipe with which such gaskets
 are to be used. Gaskets for ductile iron pipe joints shall conform to
 AWWA C111/A21.11.

2.4.3     Gate Valve and Indicator Posts

 Gate valves for underground installation shall be of the inside screw type
 with counter-clockwise rotation to open. Where indicating type valves are
 shown or required, indicating valves shall be gate valves with an approved
 indicator post of a length to permit the top of the post to be located 3
 feet above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator posts shall be listed
 in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.

2.5     ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

 Aboveground piping shall be steel.

2.5.1     Steel Piping Components

2.5.1.1     Steel Pipe

 Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be black as permitted by NFPA 13
  and shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A 795/A 795M,
 ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M. Pipe in which threads or grooves
 are cut or rolled formed shall be Schedule 40 or shall be listed by
 Underwriters' Laboratories to have a corrosion resistance ratio (CRR) of
 1.0 or greater after threads or grooves are cut or rolled formed. Pipe
 shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe, and ASTM
 designation.

2.5.1.2     Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe

 Fittings shall be cast iron conforming to ASME B16.4, steel conforming to
 ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11, or malleable iron conforming to ASME B16.3.
 Galvanized fittings shall be used for piping systems or portions of piping
 systems utilizing galvanized piping. Fittings into which sprinklers, drop
 nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are screwed shall be threaded type.
 Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel
 gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall
 not be used.

2.5.1.3     Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings

 Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and
 shall be the product of the same manufacturer;segmented welded fittings
 shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron


                          SECTION 21 13 13.00 10     Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to
 ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the
 entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be
 heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be cadmium plated or
 zinc electroplated.

2.5.1.4     Flanges

 Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be
 non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
 thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.

2.5.1.5     Bolts, Nut, and Washers

 Bolts shall be conform to ASTM A 449, Type 1 and shall       extend no less than
 three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened       to the required
 torque. Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME        B18.2.2 or
 ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade 5 or   ASTM A 563, Grade DH3.        Washers shall meet
 the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers        shall be provided
 under all bolt heads and nuts.

2.5.2     Copper Tube Components

 Not permitted.

2.5.3     Plastic Piping Components

 Not permitted.

2.5.3.1     Plastic Pipe

 Not permitted.

2.5.4     Pipe Hangers

 Hangers shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b and
 of the type suitable for the application, construction, and pipe type and
 sized to be supported.

2.5.5     Valves

2.5.5.1     Control Valve and Gate Valve

 Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside
 stem and yoke (OS&Y) type and shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM P7825a
  and FM P7825b. Butterfly type valves are not permitted.

2.5.5.2     Check Valve

 Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
 FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the
 swing type with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall
 have a clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for
 Type 3 or 4.

2.5.5.3     Hose Valve

 Valve shall comply with UL 668 and shall have a minimum rating of 300 psi.
 Valve shall be non-rising stem, all bronze, 90 degree angle type, with


                           SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 2-1/2 inch American National Standard Fire Hose Screw Thread (NH) male
 outlet in accordance with NFPA 1963. Hose valve shall be provided with
 2-1/2 to 1-1/2 inch reducer. Hose valves shall be equipped with lugged cap
 with drip drain, cap gasket and chain. Valve finish shall be polished
 brass.

2.6     RISER CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY

 Assembly shall include a riser check valve, standard trim piping, pressure
 gauges, testing valves, main drain, and other components as required for a
 fully operational system.

2.7     WATERFLOW ALARM

 Electrically operated, exterior-mounted, 10-inch waterflow alarm bell shall
 be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Waterflow alarm bell
 shall be rated 24 VDC and shall be connected to the Fire Alarm
 ControlPanel(FACP) in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM
 AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS.

2.8     ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES

2.8.1     Sprinkler Waterflow Indicator Switch, Vane Type

 Switch shall be vane type with a pipe saddle and cast aluminum housing.
 The electro-mechanical device shall include a flexible, low-density
 polyethylene paddle conforming to the inside diameter of the fire
 protection pipe. The device shall sense water movements and be capable of
 detecting a sustained flow of 10 gpm or greater. The device shall contain
 a retard device adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds to reduce the possibility
 of false alarms caused by transient flow surges. The switch shall be
 tamper resistant and contain two SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to
 transfer upon removal of the housing cover, and shall be equipped with a
 silicone rubber gasket to assure positive water seal and a dustproof cover
 and gasket to seal the mechanism from dirt and moisture.

2.8.2     Sprinkler Pressure (Waterflow) Alarm Switch

 Not required.

2.8.3     Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch

 Switch shall be suitable for mounting    to the type of control valve to be
 supervised open. The switch shall be     tamper resistant and contain one set
 of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to    transfer upon removal of the housing
 cover or closure of the valve of more    than two rotations of the valve stem.

2.9     FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

 Fire department connection shall be projecting type with cast brass body,
 matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass
 finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing
 clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2
 inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per
 NFPA 1963.




                          SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.10     SPRINKLERS

2.10.1     Recessed Sprinkler

 Recessed sprinkler shall be white polyester quick-response type and shall
 have a nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.

2.10.2     Pendent Sprinkler

 Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb type,
 recessed quick-response type with nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.
 Pendent sprinklers shall have a white polyester finish.

2.10.3     Upright Sprinkler

 Upright sprinkler shall be brass quick-response type and shall have a
 nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice.

2.10.4     Sidewall Sprinkler

 Sidewall sprinkler shall have a nominal 1/2 inch orifice. Sidewall
 sprinkler shall have a white polyester finish. Sidewall sprinkler shall be
 the quick-response type.

2.10.5     Corrosion Resistant Sprinkler

 Corrosion resistant sprinkler shall be the upright or pendent type
 installed in locations per NFPA13. Corrosion resistant coatings shall be
 factory-applied by the sprinkler manufacturer.

2.10.6     Dry Sprinkler Assembly

 Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the pendent, sidewall, or type.
 Assembly shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length shall not
 exceed maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot Dir. Sprinklers shall have a
 white enamel finish.

2.11     DISINFECTING MATERIALS

 Not required.

2.12     ACCESSORIES

2.12.1     Sprinkler Cabinet

 Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be
 packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be
 representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
 temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of
 each type required shall be provided.

2.12.2     Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon

 Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4
 inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon
 shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.




                         SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


2.12.3     Pipe Escutcheon

 Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
 chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
 split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.

2.12.4     Sprinkler Guard

 Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and
 protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers
 as required by NFPA 13.

2.12.5     Identification Sign

 Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high
 with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum
 with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background.
 Wording of sign shall include, but not be limited to "main drain,"
 "auxiliary drain," "inspector's test," "alarm test," "alarm line," and
 similar wording as required to identify operational components.

2.13     FIRE HOSE REEL ASSEMBLY

 Not required.

2.14     DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY

 Provided by utility company.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1    FIELD MEASUREMENTS

 After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
 in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
 performing the work.

3.2    INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

 The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
 NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 24 and publications referenced therein.
 Installation of in-rack sprinklers shall comply with applicable provisions
 of NFPA 13.

3.3      INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST

 The Fire Protection Specialist shall: 1) inspect the sprinkler system
 (including the sway bracking) periodically during the installation to
 assure that the sprinkler system is being provided and installed in
 accordance with the contract requirements, 2) witness the preliminary and
 final tests, and sign the test results, 3) after completion of the system
 inspections and a successful final test, certify in writing that the system
 has been installed in accordance with the contract requirements. Any
 discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer in
 writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is
 discovered.




                          SECTION 21 13 13.00 10    Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.4     ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

3.4.1     Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage

 Seismically protect the system piping against damage from earthquakes.
 This requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install
 the seismic protection of the system piping in accordance with UFC
 3-310-04, NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and Annex A. Include the required features
 identified therein (including sizing of pipe sleeves) that are applicable
 to the specific piping system.

3.4.2     Piping in Exposed Areas

 Install exposed piping without diminishing exit access widths, corridors or
 equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, shall
 be installed to provide maximum headroom.

3.4.3     Piping in Finished Areas

 In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed
 spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
 shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and
 similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.

3.4.4     Pendent Sprinklers

 Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist of minimum 1 inch pipe
 with a reducing coupling into which the sprinkler shall be threaded.
 Hangers shall be provided on arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent
 sprinklers when the arm-over exceeds 12 inches for steel pipe. Where
 sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples
 shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a
 uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the reducing
 coupling shall not extend more than 1 inch below the underside of the
 ceiling. On pendent sprinklers installed below suspended or dropped
 ceilings, the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the
 ceiling shall not exceed 4 inches. Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be
 installed such that the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the
 underside of the ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's listed range
 and shall be of uniform depth throughout the finished area. Pendent
 sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a minimum of 6 inches from
 ceiling grid.

3.4.5     Upright Sprinklers

 Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings
 between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
 Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.

3.4.6     Pipe Joints

 Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more
 than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be
 permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13
 at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction
 site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by
 NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with
 the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe
 material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings, fittings and


                         SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. The diameter of
 grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
 vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method
 specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
 application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall
 be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify
 compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall
 not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings,
 unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting
 the joint.

3.4.7    Reducers

 Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing
 fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings
 will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not
 manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where
 used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the
 face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in
 elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets
 of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.

3.4.8    Pipe Penetrations

 Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger
 fastenings will not be permitted. All penitratious shall be provided
 sleeves. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or masonry walls or concrete
 floors shall be core-drilled and provided with pipe sleeves. Each sleeve
 shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile iron or cast iron pipe and
 shall extend through its respective wall or floor and be cut flush with
 each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide required clearance between the
 pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13 for earthquake protection. The space
 between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool
 insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors,
 pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00
 FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor
 penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at
 both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but
 pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.

3.4.9    Escutcheons

 Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.
 Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through
 which piping passes.

3.4.10    Inspector's Test Connection

 Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch pipe
 connected at the riser as a combination test and drain valve; a test valve
 located approximately 7 feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet
 equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a
 painted metal identification sign affixed to the valve with the words
 "Inspector's Test." The discharge orifice shall be located outside the
 building wall directed so as not to cause damage to adjacent construction
 or landscaping during full flow discharge. Provide concrete splash blocks
 at discharge unless discharge is to pavement.




                        SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 15
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.4.11   Drains

 Main drain piping shall be provided to discharge at a safe point outside
 the building. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13.
 Provide concrete splash blocks at discharge unless discharge is to pavement.

3.4.12   Installation of Fire Department Connection

 Connection shall be mounted on the exterior wall approximately 3 feet above
 finished grade. The piping between the connection and the check valve
 shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and
 arranged to drain to the outside.

3.4.13   Identification Signs

 Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
 drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as
 required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently
 affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.

3.5   UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

 The fire protection water main shall be laid, and joints anchored, in
 accordance with NFPA 24. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet. The
 supply line shall terminate inside the building with a flanged piece, the
 bottom of which shall be set not less than 6 inches above the finished
 floor. A blind flange shall be installed temporarily on top of the flanged
 piece to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the supply line. A
 concrete thrust block shall be provided at the elbow where the pipe turns
 up toward the floor. In addition, joints shall be anchored in accordance
 with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods from the elbow to the flange
 above the floor and from the elbow to a pipe clamp in the horizontal run of
 pipe. Buried steel components shall be provided with a corrosion
 protective coating in accordance with AWWA C203. Piping more than 5 feet
 outside the building walls shall meet the requirements of Section 33 11 00
 WATER DISTRIBUTION.

3.6   EARTHWORK

 Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with applicable provisions of
 Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.7   ELECTRICAL WORK

 Except as modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in
 accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm
 signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be
 in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS
 NOTIFICATION SYSTEM. All wiring for supervisory and alarm circuits shall be
 #16 AWG solid copper installed in metallic tubing or conduit. Wiring color
 code shall remain uniform throughout the system.

3.8   DISINFECTION

 Not required.




                        SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 16
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


3.9    PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING

 Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.10     PRELIMINARY TESTS

 The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground
 piping and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and
 components function as intended. The underground and aboveground interior
 piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working
 pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Upon
 completion of specified tests, complete certificates as specified in
 paragraph SUBMITTALS.

3.10.1     Underground Piping

3.10.1.1     Flushing

 Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24. This
 includes the requirement to flush the lead-in connection to the fire
 protection system at a flow rate not less that the calculated maximum water
 demand rate of the system.

3.10.1.2     Hydrostatic Testing

 New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
 NFPA 24. The allowable leakage shall be measured at the specified test
 pressure by pumping from a calibrated container. The amount of leakage at
 the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints,
 regardless of pipe diameter.

3.10.2     Aboveground Piping

3.10.2.1     Hydrostatic Testing

 Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
 NFPA 13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system
 operating pressure (which ever is greater) and shall maintain that pressure
 without loss for 2 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure or
 visible leakage when the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The
 test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point
 of the system or portion being tested.

3.10.2.2     Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test

 Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand,
 including all applicable inside hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13.
 Provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete
 forward flow test, including 2.5 inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles,
 calibrated pressure gauges, pitot tube gauge, plus all necessary supports
 to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand
 flow, the pressure readings and pressure drop (friction) across the
 assembly shall be recorded. Provide a metal placard or tag on the backflow
 prevention assembly that lists the pressure readings both upstream and
 downstream of the assembly, total pressure drop, and the system test flow
 rate. The pressure drop shall be compared to the manufacturer's data and
 to that used in the hydraulic calculation.



                         SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 17
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


3.10.3    Testing of Alarm Devices

 Each alarm switch shall be tested by flowing water through the inspector's
 test connection. Each water-operated alarm devices shall be tested to
 verify proper operation.

3.10.4    Main Drain Flow Test

 Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test shall be
 made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual
 pressures shall be recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph
 SUBMITTALS. In addition, a main drain test shall be conducted each time
 after a main control valve is shut and opened.

3.11     FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST

 Begin the Final Acceptance Test only when the Preliminary Test Report has
 been approved. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final
 Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation
 of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing
 of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow
 alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the
 main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the
 open position. In addition, the representative shall have available copies
 of as-built drawings and certificates of tests previously conducted. The
 installation shall not be considered accepted until identified
 discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly
 completed and received. Submit the Final Acceptance Test Report as
 specified in the Submittals paragraph.

3.12     ONSITE TRAINING

 The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct a training course for
 operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting
 Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 2 hours of normal
 working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and
 after the Final Acceptance Test. The Onsite Training shall cover all of
 the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.

         -- End of Section --




                           SECTION 21 13 13.00 10   Page 18
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022




                             SECTION 21 13 18.00 10

             PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, FIRE PROTECTION
                                      05/09

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

 AWWA B300                         (2004) Hypochlorites

 AWWA B301                         (2004) Liquid Chlorine

 AWWA C651                         (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for
                                   Disinfecting Water Mains

 AWWA C652                         (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
                                   Facilities

          ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME B16.1                        (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
                                   Fittings; Classes 125 and 250

 ASME B16.11                       (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
                                   Threaded

 ASME B16.21                       (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
                                   Flanges

 ASME B16.9                        (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought
                                   Steel Buttwelding Fittings

 ASME B18.2.2                      (1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex
                                   Nuts (Inch Series)

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 135/A 135M                 (2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe

 ASTM A 183                        (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

 ASTM A 193/A 193M                 (2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
                                   Materials for High-Temperature Service

 ASTM A 449                        (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,
                                   Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
                                   120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,


                         SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


                                   General Use

 ASTM A 47/A 47M                   (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
                                   Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM A 53/A 53M                   (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
                                   Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
                                   Welded and Seamless

 ASTM A 536                        (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                   Ductile Iron Castings

 ASTM A 563                        (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                   and Alloy Steel Nuts

 ASTM A 795/A 795M                 (2008) Standard Specification for Black
                                   and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                                   Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
                                   Protection Use

 ASTM F 436                        (2009) Hardened Steel Washers

           FM GLOBAL (FM)

 FM P7825a                         (2009) Approval Guide Fire Protection

 FM P7825b                         (2009) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment

           INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

 IEEE C62.41.1                     (2002; R 2008) IEEE Guide on the Surges
                                   Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
                                   Less) AC Power Circuits

 IEEE C62.41.2                     (2002) IEEE Recommended Practice on
                                   Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
                                   (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

           MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
           INDUSTRY (MSS)

 MSS SP-71                         (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
                                   Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

           NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 13                           (2007) Installation of Sprinkler Systems

 NFPA 24                           (2010) Standard for the Installation of
                                   Private Fire Service Mains and Their
                                   Appurtenances

 NFPA 70                           (2011) National Electrical Code

 NFPA 72                           (2010) National Fire Alarm Code




                        SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


            NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES
            (NICET)

 NICET 1014-7                          (2003) Program Detail Manual for
                                       Certification in the Field of Fire
                                       Protection Engineering Technology (Field
                                       Code 003) Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler
                                       System Layout

            UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL Bld Mat Dir                        (2009) Building Materials Directory

 UL Fire Prot Dir                      (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.2     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

        a. Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as
        required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate
        interference with other construction. Install sprinkler over and under
        ducts, piping and platforms when such equipment can negatively affect
        or disrupt the sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage.

        b. Provide preaction sprinkler system(s) in areas indicated on the
        drawings. The sprinkler system shall provide fire sprinkler protection
        for the entire area. Except as modified herein, the system shall meet
        the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 72. The sprinkler system shall be
        a single interlocked system that requires the actuation of an alarm
        initiating device to open the water control (deluge) valve.

        c. Design any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated
        on the drawings or are not specified herein, including locating
        sprinklers, piping, and equipment, and size piping and equipment.
        Determine pipe sizes which are not indicated on the drawings by
        hydraulic calculations.

1.2.1     Hydraulic Design

 Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.10
 gpm/square foot over the room or the hydraulically most demanding 3,000
 square feet of floor area which ever is larger. The minimum pipe size for
 branch lines in gridded systems shall be 1-1/4 inch. Hydraulic
 calculations shall be in accordance with the Area/Density Method of NFPA 13.
 Water velocity in the piping shall not exceed 20 ft/s.

1.2.1.1     Hose Demand

 Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm for light hazard and
 500 gpm for ordinary hazard to the sprinkler system demand.Add an allowance
 for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm for light hazard and 500 gpm for
 ordinary hazard to the sprinkler system demand.

1.2.1.2     Basis for Calculations

 Base the design of the system upon a      water supply   with a static pressure
 and a flow at a residual pressure.        Water supply   shall be presumed
 available at the point of connection      to existing.    Base hydraulic
 calculations upon the Hazen-Williams      formula with   a "C" value of 120 for
 galvanized steel piping, 140 for new      cement-lined   ductile-iron piping, and


                             SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 AWWA C 900 plastic pipe and 100 for existing underground piping. The
 sprinkler Contractor shall conduct hydrant water flow tests per NFPA 291.
 See drawings for preliminary hyrant test information.

        a. Outline hydraulic calculations as in NFPA 13, except that
        calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended
        specifically for fire protection system design using the design data
        shown on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch
        lines is not acceptable. Calculations shall substantiate that the
        design area used in the calculations is the most demanding
        hydraulically.

        b. Plot water supply curves and system requirements on
        semi-logarithmic graph paper so as to present a summary of the complete
        hydraulic calculation. Provide a summary sheet listing sprinklers in
        the design area and their respective hydraulic reference points,
        elevations, actual discharge pressures and actual flows. Indicate
        elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes). Documentation shall
        identify each pipe individually and the nodes connected thereto.
        Indicate for each pipe the diameter, length, flow, velocity, friction
        loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe,
        equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient.

        c. For gridded systems, calculations shall show peaking of demand area
        friction loss to verify that the hydraulically most demanding area is
        being used. Also for gridded systems, include a flow diagram
        indicating the quantity and direction of flows. A drawing showing
        hydraulic reference points (nodes) and pipe designations used in the
        calculations shall be included and shall be independent of shop
        drawings.

1.2.2     Sprinkler Coverage

 Uniformly space sprinklers on branch lines. In buildings protected by
 automatic sprinklers, provide coverage throughout 100 percent of the
 building. This includes, but is not limited to, telephone rooms,
 electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear rooms, transformer
 rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces. Coverage per sprinkler
 shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not exceed 225 square feet
 for light hazard occupancies.

1.2.3     Control System

 The control system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72. The control
 panel shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b for
 "Releasing Device Service". The control panel and the solenoid valve that
 activates the water control valves shall be compatible with each other.
 Compatibility shall be in accordance with specific UL listing or FM
 approval of the control equipment.

1.2.3.1     Power Supply

 Provide the primary operating power from two single-phase 120 VAC
 circuits. Transfer from normal to backup power and restoration from backup
 to normal power shall be fully automatic and shall not initiate a false
 alarm. Loss of primary power shall not prevent actuation of the respective
 automatic water control valve upon activation of any alarm initiating
 device. Provide backup power through use of rechargeable, sealed, lead
 calcium storage batteries.


                           SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



1.2.3.2     Circuit Requirements

 Connect to the Clean Agent Control panel with class A circuits.

1.2.4     System Operational Features

 Include in the system supervisory and alarm switches, alarm notification
 appliances as required, control panel and associated equipment. Provide
 preaction sprinkler system piping with supervisory air pressure not to
 exceed 30 psig.

1.2.4.1     System Actuation

 Activation of any second smoke detector connected to the clean agent fire
 suppressor control panel or a single manual actuation station shall actuate
 alarm zone circuits of the control panel that, in turn, shall actuate the
 corresponding automatic water control valve. Actuation of the automatic
 water control valve shall cause water to fill the preaction system piping
 and be discharged from fused sprinklers.

1.2.4.2     Supervisory Functions

 The reduction of supervisory air pressure within the sprinkler system
 piping to less than 10 psi or the occurrence of a single open or a single
 ground fault in any alarm initiating device circuit, in the automatic water
 control valve actuation circuit, in any alarm indicating appliance circuit
 or in other electrically supervised circuit shall cause the individually
 labelled control panel trouble light to be illuminated, the audible trouble
 alarm to be activated, and a trouble alarm to be transmitted to the
 building fire alarm control panel and to base-wide fire reporting system.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Government and Design Build Fire Protection Engineer approval is required
 for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G"
 designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a
 designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will
 review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
 accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Shop Drawings; G

              Three copies of the Sprinkler System Drawings, no later than 21
            days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation. The
            drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working
            plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Drawings shall include plan and
            elevation views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the
            allotted spaces with clearance for installation and maintenance.

            As-Built Drawings

              As-built drawings, at least 14 days after completion of the
            Final Tests.

        SD-03 Product Data



                             SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          Fire Protection Specialist; G

            The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire
          Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
          Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system shop
          drawings and hydraulic calculations.

          Installer Qualifications; G

            The name and documentation of certification of the proposed
          Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire
          Protection Specialist Qualifications.

          List of the Submittals; G

            A list of the Fire Protection Related Submittals, no later than
          7 days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist.

          Materials and Equipment; G

            Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Sprinkler System
          Drawings for all items specified herein. Highlight the data to
          show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for
          consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance
          with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a complete
          equipment list that includes equipment description, model number
          and quantity.

          Spare Parts

            Spare parts data for each different item of material and
          equipment specified.

          OnSite Training; Government only

            Proposed Onsite Training schedule, at least 14 days prior to the
          start of related training.

      SD-05 Design Data

          Sway Bracing; G

            Load calculations for sizing of sway bracing.

          Hydraulic Calculations; G

            Hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic
          reference points and pipe segments.

          Storage Batteries; G

            Calculations to substantiate the total requirements for
          supervisory and alarm power. Include ampere-hour requirements for
          each system component and each control panel component or module,
          under both normal and alarm conditions. The battery recharging
          period shall be included with the calculations.

      SD-06 Test Reports



                           SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          Preliminary Tests; G

            Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days
          prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time
          to begin Preliminary Tests, submitted with the Preliminary Tests
          Procedures.

            Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no
          later that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests.
          The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's
          Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
          Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
          Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed
          by the Fire Protection Specialist.

          Final Acceptance Tests; G

            Proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Tests, no later than 14
          days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and
          time to begin Final Acceptance Tests, submitted with the Final
          Acceptance Test Procedures. Notification shall be provided at
          least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the test.
          Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material &
          Test Certificates.

            Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no
          later that 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance
          Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed
          by the Fire Protection Specialist.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist; G

            Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification
          by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler system is
          installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
          signed approval of the Preliminary, Detection and Control Systems,
          and Final Acceptance Test Reports.

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Operating and Maintenance Instructions

            Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system
          startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14
          days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the
          manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and
          tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine
          maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified
          wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
          recommended service organization (including address and telephone
          number) for each item of equipment.

1.4   QUALITY ASSURANCE

 Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes
 advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though
 the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it


                           SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 appears. Applicable material and installation standards referenced in
 Annex A of NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 shall be considered mandatory the same as if
 such referenced standards were specifically listed in this specification.
 In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this
 specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall
 govern. Incorporate all requirements that exceed the minimum requirements
 of NFPA 13 into the design. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction"
 shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.4.1   Fire Protection Specialist

 Perform the work specified in this section under the supervision of and
 certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is a registered
 professional engineer and a Full Member of the Society of Fire Protection
 Engineers or who is certified as a Level III or IV Technician by National
 Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in the
 Automatic Sprinkler System Layout subfield of Fire Protection Engineering
 Technology in accordance with NICET 1014-7. The Fire Protection Specialist
 shall prepare a list of the submittals from the Contract Submittal Register
 that relate to the successful installation of the sprinkler systems(s).
 The submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of
 approval signed and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted
 to the Government.The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged
 in the design and installation of the type and complexity of system
 specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar
 capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner
 intended for a period of not less than 6 months. All submittals shall be
 signed by the Fire Protection Specialist.

1.4.2   Installer Qualifications

 Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System
 Installer. The Installer shall be regularly engaged in the installation of
 the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and
 shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that
 have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6
 months.

1.4.3   Shop Drawings

 Submit shop drawings, on reproducible full-size mylar film, as specified
 herein and in the Submittals paragraph; update the Shop Drawings to reflect
 as-built conditions after all related work is completed. All submittals
 shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist. Each set of drawings
 shall include the following:

            a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings
          listed in sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device
          symbols, nomenclature, and conventions used.

            b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which
          clearly show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers,
          seismic separation assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test
          connections, drains, and other applicable details necessary to
          clearly describe the proposed arrangement. Indicate each type of
          fitting used and the locations of bushings, reducing couplings,
          and welded joints.

            c. Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on


                        SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          branch lines and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to
          adjacent walls; from walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed
          mains, cross-mains and branch lines to finished floor and roof or
          ceiling. A detail shall show the dimension from the sprinkler and
          sprinkler deflector to the ceiling in finished areas.

            d. Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical
          branch line and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of
          each typical sprinkler above finished floor.

            e. Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; sway
          bracing for earthquake protection, and restraint of underground
          water main at point-of-entry into the building, and electrical
          devices and interconnecting wiring.

            f. Complete point-to-point wiring diagram of the detection and
          control system. Indicate the detailed interconnection of control
          panel modules to the devices, the number and size of conductors in
          each conduit, and size of conduit. Connection points shall be
          indicated and coordinated with the terminal identification marked
          on the devices. Provide complete internal wiring schematic of the
          control panel and each electrical device. Detailed description of
          the functions of the control panel and each module shall be
          provided.

1.5   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner
 to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature
 variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes
 shall either be capped or plugged until installed.

1.6   EXTRA MATERIALS

 Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
 specified.   The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,
 with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
 recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
 service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for
 maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be
 included.

PART 2   PRODUCTS

2.1   STANDARD PRODUCTS

 Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a
 manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
 essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
 2 years prior to bid opening.

2.2   NAMEPLATES

 All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's
 name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.

2.3   REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE

 Materials and equipment shall have been tested by Underwriters


                          SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 Laboratories, Inc. and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory
 Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms "listed" or
 "approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed in
 UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.

2.4     UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

 Connection shall be to the new wet-pipe sprinkler systesm on each floor.

2.5     ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

2.5.1     Pipe

 Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be galvanized steel as
 permitted by NFPA 13 and shall conform to applicable provisions of
 ASTM A 795/A 795M, ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M. Pipe in which
 threads or grooves are cut or rolled formed shall be Schedule 40 or shall
 be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories to have a corrosion resistance
 ratio (CRR) of 1.0 or greater after threads or grooves are cut or rolled
 formed. Pipe shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of
 pipe, and ASTM designation.

2.5.2     Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe

 Fittings shall be galvanized steel conforming to ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11.
 Fittings that sprinklers, drop nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are
 screwed into shall be threaded type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical
 couplings, fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe
 and segmented welded fittings shall not be used.

2.5.3     Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings

 Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and
 shall be the product of the same manufacturer; segmented welded fittings
 shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron
 conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to
 ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be of silicon compound and
 approved for dry fire protection systems. Gasket shall be the flush type
 that fills the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and
 bolts shall be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be
 cadmium plated or zinc electroplated.

2.5.4     Flanges

 Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be
 non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
 thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.

2.5.4.1     Bolts

 Bolts shall be ASTM A 449, Type 1. Bolts shall extend no less than three
 full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque.

2.5.4.2     Nuts

 Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2, to ASTM A 193/A 193M,
 Grade 5 or to   ASTM A 563, Grade C3 or DH3.




                         SECTION 21 13 18.00 10    Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


2.5.4.3     Washers

 Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436.       Flat circular washers
 shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.

2.5.5     Pipe Hangers

 Hangers (including those provided for sway bracing) shall be listed in
 UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b and of the type suitable for
 the application, construction, and pipe type and size to be supported.

2.5.6     Valves

2.5.6.1     Control Valve and Gate Valve

 Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside
 stem and yoke (OS&Y) type and shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM P7825a
  and FM P7825b.

2.5.6.2     Check Valves

 Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
 FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the
 swing type with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall
 have a clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for
 Type 3 or 4.

2.6     AUTOMATIC WATER CONTROL VALVE (DELUGE VALVE)

 Automatic water control valve (deluge valve) shall be electrically-actuated
 and rated for a working pressure of 175 psi. Valve shall be capable of
 being reset without opening the valve. Electrical solenoid valve used to
 actuate the water control valve shall be an integral component of the valve
 or shall be approved for use by the water control valve manufacturer.
 Solenoid valve shall be rated at 24 volts direct current, and shall be
 normally closed type that operates when energized. Solenoid valves shall
 be rated for a maximum pressure differential of 175 psi. Water control
 valve shall be equipped with a means to prevent the valve from returning to
 the closed position until being manually reset. Assembly shall be complete
 with the valve manufacturer's standard trim piping, drain and test valves,
 pressure gauges, and other required appurtenances. Include with each
 assembly an emergency release device for manually tripping the water
 control valve in the event of a power or other system failure. Device
 shall be a standard accessory component of the valve manufacturer and shall
 be labeled as to its function and method of operation. Valves located in
 hazardous locations shall be approved for the hazard classification of the
 area where located.

2.7     SUPERVISORY AIR SYSTEM

 Solenoid shall be UL listed or FM approved for connection to the deluge
 valve and the releasing panel.

2.7.1     Air Compressor

 Air compressor shall be single stage oil less type, air cooled,
 electric-motor driven, equipped with a check valve, centrifugal pressure
 and moisture unloader, pressure switch for automatic starting and
 stopping. Pressure switch shall be set to start the compressor at 20 psi


                           SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


 and stop it at 30 psi. A safety relief valve, set to operate at 65 psi,
 shall be provided. The compressor shall be sized to pressurize the system
 to 30 psi within 30 minutes.

2.7.2     Air Pressure Maintenance Device

 Device shall be a pressure regulator that automatically reduces supply air
 pressure to the minimum pressure required to be maintained in the piping
 system. The device shall have a cast bronze body and valve housing
 complete with diaphragm assembly, spring, filter, ball check to prevent
 backflow, 1/16 inch restriction to prevent rapid pressurization of the
 system, and adjustment screw. The device shall be capable of reducing
 maximum inlet pressure of 100 psi to a fixed outlet pressure adjustable to
 10 psi.

2.7.3     Air Supply Piping System

 Each preaction system shall be equipped with a separate pressure
 maintenance device, shutoff valve, bypass valve and pressure gauge.   Piping
 shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 795/A 795M or
 ASTM A 53/A 53M.

2.7.4     Low Air Pressure Switch

 Each preaction system shall be provided with an air pressure switch
 connected to the control panel. Upon reduction of supervisory air pressure
 to approximately 10 psi, the low air pressure switch shall actuate the
 audible alarm device and a red low-air alarm light on the control panel
 annunciator.

2.8     FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

 Preaction system to be connected ot the new wet-pipe sprinkler system at
 each floor.

2.9     SPRINKLERS

 Sprinklers for preaction systems shall be automatic, fusible solder or
 glass bulb type. Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used.
 Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed coverage
 limitations. Temperature classification shall be ordinary. Sprinklers in
 high heat areas including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit
 heaters shall have temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13.
 Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used.

2.9.1     Pendent Sprinkler

 Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb type,
 recessed type with nominal 1/2 inch or    17/32 inch orifice. Pendent
 sprinklers shall match the sprinkler finish for the wet pipe systems..

2.9.2     Upright Sprinkler

 Upright sprinkler shall be brass and shall have a nominal   1/2 inch or
 17/32 inch orifice.




                         SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.10     DISINFECTING MATERIALS

2.10.1     Liquid Chlorine

 Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.

2.10.2     Hypochlorites

 Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.

2.11     ACCESSORIES

2.11.1     Sprinkler Cabinet

 Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be
 packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be
 representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
 temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of
 each type required shall be provided. A sprinkler cabinet shall be located
 in each preaction valve closet.

2.11.2     Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon

 Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4
 inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon
 shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.

2.11.3     Pipe Escutcheon

 Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
 chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
 split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.

2.11.4     Sprinkler Guard

 Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and
 protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers
 per NFPA 13.

2.11.5     Identification Sign

 Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high
 with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum
 with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background.
 Wording of sign shall include, but not be limited to "main drain,"
 "auxiliary drain," "inspector's test," "alarm test," "alarm line," and
 similar wording as required to identify operational components.

2.12     DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY

 Connect to the new wet pipe sprinkler systems on each floor.

2.13     CONTROL PANEL

 Panel shall be UL listed or FM approved for "Releasing Device Service" or
 shall have modules approved for this purpose. Panel shall contain all
 components and equipment required to provide the specified operational and
 supervisory functions of the system. House components in a steel cabinet
 with hinged door and cylinder lock. Control panel shall be a clean,


                           SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 uncluttered, and orderly factory assembled and wired unit. Panel shall
 include integral "power on," "alarm," and "trouble" lamps with annunciation
 of each alarm, supervisory and trouble signal. The panel shall have
 prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, zones,
 controls, meters, fuses, and switches. Nameplates for fuses shall also
 include ampere rating. Control panel switches shall be within the locked
 cabinet. Provide a suitable means for testing the working condition and
 accuracy of the control panel visual indicating devices (meter and lamps).
 Meters and lamps shall be plainly visible when the cabinet door is closed.
 Signals shall be provided to indicate by zone any alarm, supervisory or
 trouble condition on the system. Upon restoration of power, startup shall
 be automatic, and shall not require any manual operation. The loss of
 primary power or the sequence of applying primary or emergency power shall
 not affect the transmission of alarm, supervisory or trouble signals.
 Control panel may also be the clean agent control panel if also UL listed
 for this use and meet the requirements in this section.

2.13.1     Primary Power Supply

 Primary power and trouble alarm power to the Control Panel shall be
 supplied from two 120 VAC circuits. Power to the control panel shall be
 two 20-amp circuit breakers for each control panel and with key lock.
 Panel shall be permanently marked "PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM".

2.13.2     Emergency Power Supply

 Emergency power shall be provided for system operation in the event of
 failure of the primary power supply and shall consist of rechargeable
 storage battery system. Transfer from normal to emergency power or
 restoration from emergency to normal power shall be automatic and shall not
 cause transmission of a false alarm.

2.13.2.1     Storage Batteries

 Storage Batteries shall be sealed, lead-calcium type requiring no
 additional water. The batteries shall have ample capacity, with primary
 power disconnected, to operate the system for a period of 90 hours.
 Following this period of operation via batteries, the batteries shall have
 ample capacity to operate all alarm indicating devices in the alarm mode
 for a minimum period of 15 minutes. Battery cabinet shall be a separate
 cabinet. The battery cabinet shall have adequate space for spare duplicate
 storage batteries. Batteries shall be mounted on a noncorrosive and
 nonconductive base or pad.

2.13.2.2     Battery Charger

 Battery charger shall be completely automatic, with high/low charging rate,
 capable of restoring the batteries from full discharge to full charge
 within 24 hours using the high charging rate. A separate ammeter shall be
 provided for indicating rate of charge. A separate voltmeter shall be
 provided to indicate the state of the battery charge. A pilot light
 indicating when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge
 shall be provided as part of the unit assembly. The charger shall be
 located in control panel cabinet.




                         SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.14     ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

2.14.1     Smoke Detectors

 Connected to the clean agent system. Second smoke detector activation shall
 activate preaction sprinkler system.

2.14.2     Sprinkler Pressure Alarm Switch

 Pressure switch shall include a metal housing with a neoprene diaphragm,
 SPDT snap action switches. The switch shall have a service pressure rating
 of 175 psi. There shall be two SPDT (Form C) contacts factory adjusted to
 operate at 4 to 8 psi. The switch shall be capable of being mounted in any
 position in the alarm line trim piping of the alarm check valve.

2.14.3     Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch

 Switch shall be suitable for mounting    to the type of control valve to be
 supervised open. The switch shall be     tamper resistant and contain one set
 of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to    transfer upon removal of the housing
 cover or closure of the valve of more    than two rotations of the valve stem.

2.15     NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

 Preaction system to be connected to the clean agent system.

2.16     WIRING

 Wiring for alternating current (AC) circuits shall be 12 AWG minimum.
 Wiring for low voltage direct current (DC) circuits shall be No. 16 AWG
 minimum. Power wiring (over 28 volts) and control wiring shall be
 isolated. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. System field wiring shall be
 solid copper and installed in electrical metallic tubing or in metallic
 conduit, except rigid plastic conduit may be used under slab-on-grade.
 Conductors shall be color coded. Conductors used for the same function
 shall be similarly color coded. Wiring color code shall remain uniform
 throughout the circuit. Pigtail or T-tap connections to alarm initiating,
 alarm indicating, supervisory, and actuation circuits are prohibited.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1    EXAMINATION

 After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
 in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
 performing the work.

3.2    INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

 The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
 publications referenced herein.

3.3      INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST

  The Fire Protection Specialist shall inspect the sprinkler system
 periodically during the installation to assure that the sprinkler system
 installed in accordance with the contract requirements. The Fire
 Protection Specialist shall witness the preliminary and final tests, and
 shall sign the test results. The Fire Protection Specialist, after


                          SECTION 21 13 18.00 10    Page 15
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 completion of the system inspections and a successful final test, shall
 certify in writing that the system has been installed in accordance with
 the contract requirements. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the
 attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three
 working days after the discrepancy is discovered.

3.4     ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

3.4.1     Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage

 Seismically protect the system piping for earthquake protection. This
 requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install the
 seismic protection of the system piping, including sway bracing as
 required, in accordance with UFC 3-310-04, NFPA 13 and Annex A. Include
 the required features identified therein that are applicable to the
 specific piping system.

3.4.2     Piping in Exposed Areas

 Exposed piping shall be installed so as not diminish exit access widths,
 corridors, or equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain
 piping, shall be installed to provide maximum headroom.

3.4.3     Piping in Finished Areas

 In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed
 spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
 shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and
 similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.

3.4.4     Pendent Sprinklers Locations

 Sprinklers installed in the pendent position shall be of the listed dry
 pendent type, unless otherwise indicated or unless installed in area where
 up oven and down arm over are provided in heated location (per NFPA 13).
 Dry pendent sprinklers shall be of the required length to permit the
 sprinkler to be threaded directly into a branch line tee. Hangers shall be
 provided on arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent sprinklers when the
 arm-over exceeds 12 inches for steel pipe or 6 inches for copper tubing.
 Dry pendent sprinkler assemblies shall be such that sprinkler ceiling
 plates or escutcheons are of the uniform depth throughout the finished
 space. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a minimum of 6
 inches from ceiling grid. Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be installed
 such that the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the
 ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's listed range and shall be of
 uniform depth throughout the finished area.

3.4.5     Upright Sprinklers

 Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings
 between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
 Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.

3.4.6     Pipe Joints

 Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more
 than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be
 permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13
 at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction


                         SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 16
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by
 NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with
 the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe
 material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings and fittings shall be
 from the same manufacturer. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed
 locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel
 is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.

3.4.7    Reducers

 Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing
 fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings
 will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not
 manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where
 used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the
 face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in
 elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets
 of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.

3.4.8    Pipe Penetrations

 Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger
 fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or
 masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with
 pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile
 iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or
 floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide
 required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with
 NFPA 13 (for siezmic protection). The space between the sleeve and the
 pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation. Where pipes
 penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors, pipes shall be fire
 stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations
 that are not fire-rated or not a floor penetration, the space between the
 sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at both ends with plastic waterproof
 cement that will dry to a firm but pliable mass or with a mechanically
 adjustable segmented elastomer seal.

3.4.9    Escutcheons

 Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.
 Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through
 which piping passes.

3.4.10    Inspector's Test Connection

 Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch pipe
 connected to the remote branch line; a test valve located approximately 7
 feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest
 orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a painted metal identification
 sign affixed to the valve with the words "Inspector's Test." The discharge
 orifice shall be located outside the building wall directed so as not to
 cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow
 discharge.

3.4.11    Drains

 Provide main drain piping to discharge at a safe point outside the building
 or to an adequate sized floor drain (sized for full flow). Auxiliary
 drains shall be provided as indicated and as required by NFPA 13. When the


                        SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 17
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 capacity of trapped sections of pipe is less than 3 gallons, the auxiliary
 drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 1/2 inch and a plug or
 nipple and cap. When the capacity of trapped sections of piping is more
 than 3 gallons, the auxiliary drain shall consist of two 1 inch valves and
 one 2 x 12 inch condensate nipple or equivalent, located in an accessible
 location. Tie-in drains shall be provided for multiple adjacent trapped
 branch pipes and shall be a minimum of 1 inch in diameter. Tie-in drain
 lines shall be pitched a minimum of 1/2 inch per 10 feet.

3.4.12     Identification Signs

 Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
 drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as
 required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently
 affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.

3.5     ELECTRICAL WORK

 Unless otherwise specified herein, power supply equipment and wiring shall
 be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3.5.1     Overcurrent and Surge Protection

 All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected
 from surges in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2 and NFPA 70.
 Cables and conductors that serve as communications links, except fiber
 optics, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Fuses
 shall not be used for surge protection.

3.5.2     Grounding

 Grounding shall be provided to building ground.

3.5.3     Wiring

 System field wiring shall be installed in 3/4 inch minimum diameter
 electrical metallic tubing or metallic conduit. Wiring for the sprinkler
 system fire detection and control system shall be installed in tubing or
 conduits dedicated for that use only and not installed in conduit, outlet
 boxes or junction boxes which contain lighting and power wiring or
 equipment. Circuit conductors entering or leaving any mounting box, outlet
 box enclosure or cabinet shall be connected to screw terminals with each
 terminal marked and labeled in accordance with the wiring diagram. No more
 than one conductor shall be installed under any screw terminal.
 Connections and splices shall be made using screw terminal blocks. The use
 of wire nut type connectors is not permitted. Wiring within any control
 equipment shall be readily accessible without removing any component
 parts. Conductors shall be color-coded and shall be identified within each
 enclosure where a connection or termination is made. Conductor
 identification shall be by plastic-coated, self-sticking, printed markers
 or by heat-shrink type sleeves. Circuits shall be wired to maintain
 electrical supervision so that removal of any single wire from any device
 shall cause a "trouble" condition on the control panel.

3.5.4     Control Panel

 The control panel and its assorted components shall be mounted so that no
 part of the enclosing cabinet is less than 24 inches and not more than 78
 inches above the finished floor.


                          SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 18
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



3.5.5     Detectors

 Detectors shall be part of the clean agent fire suppression system and
 shallbe ceiling-mounted or below access floor mounted in accordance with
 NFPA 72 and shall be at least 12 inches from any part of any lighting
 fixture. Detectors shall be located at least 3 feet from diffusers of air
 handling systems. Each detector shall be provided with appropriate
 mounting hardware as required by its mounting location.

3.5.6     Manual Actuation Stations

 Manual actuation stations shall be mounted readily accessible and 42 inches
 above the finished floor adjacent each preaction control valve..

3.5.7     Notification Appliances

 Notification appliances shall be mounted a minimum of 8 feet above the
 finished floor unless limited by ceiling height.

3.6     DISINFECTION

 After all system components are installed and hydrostatic test(s) are
 completed, the entire sprinkler system shall be disinfected. Flush all
 sprinkler system piping with potable water until all entrained dirt and
 other foreign materials have been removed before introducing chlorinating
 material. Remove the flushing fitting of each cross main and of each grid
 branch line, and then back-flush through the sprinkler main drain.

        a. The ater chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with
        AWWA C651 and AWWA C652. Feed either a hypochlorite solution (using a
        hypochlorinator) or liquid chlorine (using a solution-fed chlorinator
        and booster pump) into the system at a constant rate of 50 parts per
        million (ppm) until the entire system is filled.

        b. Monitor the chlorine residual level in the water at six hour
        intervals for a period of 24 hours. If the residual chlorine is below
        25 ppm in any interval sampled, flush all piping and repeat the
        chlorination procedure. Open and close each valve in the system
        several times during this 24 hour period to ensure its proper
        disinfection. Following the 24-hour period, verify that no less than
        25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the system. After the chlorine
        residual level is successfully maintained at or above 25 ppm for a 24
        hour period, flush the system with water from the distribution system
        until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than one ppm.

        c. Take additional samples of water at locations specified by the
        Contracting Officer in disinfected containers for bacterial
        examination. Test these samples in an approved laboratory for total
        coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal,
        and other bacteria) in accordance with EPA Standard Method SM9223,
        Total Coliforms-PA Test.

        d. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of
        coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in
        two separate test samples taken 24 hours apart. The system will not be
        accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.




                         SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 19
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


3.7     PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING

 Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.8     PRELIMINARY TESTS

 The system, including the aboveground piping, detectors and control system
 and system components shall be tested to assure that equipment and
 components function as intended. The aboveground interior piping systems
 and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be
 tested in accordance with NFPA 13. Upon completion of specified tests,
 complete certificates as specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS.

3.8.1     Aboveground Piping

3.8.1.1     Hydrostatic Testing

 Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with
 NFPA 13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system
 operating pressure and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2
 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when
 the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall
 be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or
 portion being tested.

3.8.1.2     Air Pressure Test

 As specified in NFPA 13, an air pressure leakage test at 50 psi shall be
 conducted for 24 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure in excess
 of 1.5 psi for the 24 hours. This air pressure test is in addition to the
 required hydrostatic test.

3.8.2     Detection and Control System Tests

 Upon completion of the installation, the detection and control system shall
 be subjected to functional and operational performance tests including
 tests of each installed initiating device, system actuation device and
 notification appliance. The control system tests specified in paragraph
 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS shall be conducted to ensure that the system is
 completely functional and that wiring has been properly connected. If
 deficiencies are found, corrections shall be made and the system shall be
 retested to assure that the systems have no deficiencies.

3.8.3     Automatic Water Control Valve Test

 Each water control valve shall be independently trip-tested in accordance
 with the manufacturer's published instructions. Each valve shall be
 electrically trip-tested by actuating a respective heat detector and a
 manual actuation station connected to the control panel and a manual
 actuation device that is part of the valve trim. A full-flow main drain
 test shall be made. For preaction systems with supervisory air, the air
 pressure shall be reduced to verify proper operation of the air supply
 system and associated supervisory alarm devices.

3.9     FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS

 Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report has
 been approved. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final


                            SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 20
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


 Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation
 of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing
 of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow
 alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the
 main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the
 open position. Each system shall be completely drained after each trip
 test. The system air supply system shall be tested to verify that system
 pressure is restored in the specified time. In addition, the Fire
 Protection Specialist shall have available copies of as-built drawings and
 certificates of tests previously conducted. The installation shall not be
 considered accepted until identified discrepancies have been corrected and
 test documentation is properly completed and received. After the system
 has been tested and drained, the system shall be drained periodically for
 at least 2 weeks until it can be assured that water from the system has
 been removed.

3.9.1    Control System Test

 Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.      The test shall include the
 following:

        a.   Visual inspection of wiring connections.

        b. Opening the circuit at each alarm initiating device, solenoid
        valve, and notification appliance to test the wiring and supervisory
        features.

        c.   Test of each function of the control panel.

        d.   Test of each circuit in the normal, open and ground fault modes.

        e. Test of each initiating device in both normal and trouble
        conditions.

        f.   Test of each control circuit and device.

        g.   Test of each alarm notification appliance.

        h.   Test of the battery charger and batteries.

        i. Operational tests under emergency power supply, including
        activation of connected alarm notification appliances for the specified
        time period.

3.9.2    Trip-tests of Automatic Water Control Valves

 Each water control valve shall be independently trip-tested in accordance
 with the manufacturer's published instructions. Each valve shall be
 electrically trip-tested by actuating a respective second smoke detector, a
 manual actuation station connected to the system control panel and the
 manual release which is part of the valve trim. Each valve shall be
 returned to normal condition after each test. Prior to trip testing
 precautionary steps shall be taken to prevent water damage to the building
 and equipment from sprinkler discharge. Control valves on preaction
 systems shall remain open until piping is filled with water.

3.9.3    Tests of Supervisory Air System

 Preaction system supervisory air pressure shall be reduced from the normal


                          SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 21
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 system pressure to the point at which a low-pressure alarm is sounded. Air
 pressure shall be restored to verify trouble signal restoration. Automatic
 start/stop features of air compressor shall be tested.

3.10   ONSITE TRAINING

 The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct a training course for
 operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting
 Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 16 hours of normal
 working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and
 after the Final Acceptance Test. The Onsite Training shall cover all of
 the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.

        -- End of Section --




                         SECTION 21 13 18.00 10   Page 22
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



                             SECTION 21 22 00.00 20

                         CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING
                                      04/06

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

            ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME B16.11                        (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and
                                    Threaded

 ASME B16.3                         (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
                                    Classes 150 and 300

            ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 106/A 106M                  (2008) Standard Specification for Seamless
                                    Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
                                    Service

 ASTM A 53/A 53M                    (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
                                    Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
                                    Welded and Seamless

            FM GLOBAL (FM)

 FM P7825                           (2009) Approval Guide

            MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
            INDUSTRY (MSS)

 MSS SP-58                          (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
                                    Supports - Materials, Design and
                                    Manufacture

 MSS SP-69                          (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers
                                    and Supports - Selection and Application

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 12A                           (2008) Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing
                                    Systems

 NFPA 2001                          (2008) Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
                                    Systems

 NFPA 70                            (2011) National Electrical Code

 NFPA 72                            (2010) National Fire Alarm Code

 NFPA 75                            (2009) Standard for the Protection of


                         SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


                                     Information Technology Equipment

 NFPA 90A                            (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
                                     Installation of Air Conditioning and
                                     Ventilating Systems

             U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

 MIL-STD-101                         (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for
                                     Compressed Gas Cylinders

             U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 FS A-A-2962                         (Rev J) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC
                                     Content

 FS A-A-58092                        (Basic) Tape, Antiseize,
                                     Polytetrafluoroethylene

 FS TT-P-645                         (Rev B) Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate,
                                     Alkyd Type

             UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL Fire Prot Dir                    (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.2     DEFINITION

        a.   Year 2000 compliant - means computer controlled facility
             components that accurately process date and time data (including,
             but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from,
             into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and
             the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations.

1.3     GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to
 this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3.1     Description of Work

 The work includes the designing and providing of approved Clean Agent
 underfloor and room flooding extinguishing system(s) for protection of
 designated rooms. The design, equipment, materials, installation and
 workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory
 provisions of NFPA 2001, except as modified herein. Each system shall
 include all materials, accessories and equipment inside and outside the
 building necessary to provide each system complete and ready for use.
 Design and install each system to give full consideration to built-in
 spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork and all other construction
 and equipment and to be free from operating and maintenance difficulties,
 all in accordance with detailed drawings to be submitted to the Contracting
 Officer for approval. Devices and equipment for fire protection service
 shall be of a make and type listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.,
 or approved by the Factory Mutual System. In the publications referred to
 herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as
 though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it
 appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be
 interpreted to mean the Savannah District Fire Protection Engineer.


                          SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



1.4   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
 approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies
 the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The
 following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

 The Fire Protection Engineer, Savannah District Engineering Command will
 review any approve all submittals in this section requiring Government
 approval.


      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Clean Agent system piping layout; G

          Field wiring diagrams; G

      SD-03 Product Data

          Storage cylinders; G

          Discharge heads; G

          Manifolds; G

          Valves; G

          Discharge nozzles; G

          Pipe; G

          Pipe hangers and supports; G

          Control panel; G

          Manual actuation stations; G

          Pressure switches; G

          Storage batteries; G

          Smoke detectors; G

          Audible alarms; G

          Visual alarms; G

          Annunciator panels; G

          Electromagnetic door holder release; G

          Battery charger; G

          Fittings; G



                           SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


            Signs; G

        SD-05 Design Data

            Clean Agent discharge calculations; G

            Battery capacity calculations; G

        SD-07 Certificates

            Record of Prior Installations; G

            Clean Agent fire extinguishing system; G

        SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

            Clean Agent fire extinguishing system, Data Package 3; G

              Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
            MAINTENANCE DATA.

        SD-11 Closeout Submittals

            Remote control station operating instructions; G

            Record drawings; G

1.5     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1     Record of Prior Installations

 Prior to installation, submit data showing installation of Clean Agent fire
 extinguishing systems of the same type and design as specified herein. The
 data shall include the names and locations of at least two locations where
 the Contractor has installed such systems. The Contractor shall indicate
 the type and design of these systems and certify that these systems have
 performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less
 than 18 months.

 Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing
 and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an
 individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and
 is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in
 Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum
 Level-III certification in Special Hazard System program. Contractor shall
 submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved
 individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.

 Contractor shall have successfully installed Clean Agent fire extinguishing
 systems of the same type and design as specified herein.

1.5.2     Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System

 When preliminary field tests have been completed and all necessary
 corrections made, submit to the Contracting Officer a signed and dated
 letter attesting to the satisfactory completion of testing and stating that
 the systems is in operating condition. The letter shall include a written
 request for a formal inspection and test.



                             SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


1.5.3     Manufacturer's Representative

 Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized representative or
 technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of
 system being provided to supervise the installation and testing, including
 final testing, adjustment of the system and to provide instruction to
 Government personnel.

1.6     DESIGN OF CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

 Design and installation of Clean Agent fire extinguishing systems shall
 conform to NFPA 70, NFPA 72, NFPA 75 and NFPA 2001 and to the requirements
 as hereinafter specified.

1.6.1     Piping Layout and Wiring Diagrams

 Annotate Clean Agent system piping layout with reference points for
 design. In field wiring diagrams, show locations of devices and points of
 the system. Prepare working drawings on sheets not smaller than 30 by 42
 inches, in accordance with the requirements for "Plans" as specified in
 NFPA 12A. Include data essential to the proper installation of each system.

1.6.2     Calculations

 Submit Clean Agent discharge calculations verifying total storage
 requirements, flooding concentrations, discharge times, flow through the
 piping network, pipe sizes, and nozzle orifice sizes, in accordance with
 the manufacturer's listed design manual and NFPA 2001. Submit
 substantiating battery capacity calculations showing capacity, supervisory
 and alarm power requirements.

1.6.3     Flooding Concentration

 The system shall totally flood the protected area(s) providing a volumetric
 concentration of Clean Agent of not less than 5 percent nor more than 7
 percent at 70 degrees F.

1.6.3.1     Clean Agent Concentration

 The Clean Agent concentration shall be based upon shutting down the
 heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems at the time of
 agent discharge. The required Clean Agent concentration shall be
 maintained in the protected area(s) for a minimum of ten minutes.

1.6.4     Discharge Time

 The maximum Clean Agent liquid discharge time shall be 10 seconds.

1.6.5     Reserve Supplies

 Each system shall be provided with its own connected reserve supply of
 Clean Agent. Each reserve supply shall contain an amount of Clean Agent
 equal to the primary supply of the system to which it is connected.

1.6.6     Record Drawings

 Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete
 set of as-built (record) working drawings, including complete as-built
 circuit diagrams, of each Clean Agent system for record purposes. The


                             SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 as-built working drawings shall be not smaller than 30 by 42 inches
 reproducible drawings on mylar film with title block (8 by 4 inches)
 similar to full size contract drawings. The as-built working drawings
 shall be furnished in addition to the record drawings required by Section
 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

1.7     SYSTEM CONTROL

 Provide all apparatus, accessories, components and associated materials
 specified or necessary to furnish each system complete and ready for
 operation. All equipment shall be the current products of their
 manufacturers.

1.7.1     Controls

 Detection and actuating control system shall be complete, Class A
 electrically supervised combination automatic and manual. Automatic
 actuation shall be accomplished by smoke detectors. Manual actuation shall
 be accomplished by electrical manual actuation stations.

1.7.2     Sequence of Operation

 Smoke detection system shall be cross-zoned, priority matrix, or have
 common circuit individual detector verification capability. If a
 cross-zoned system is used, each protected area shall contain two smoke
 detection circuits (zones), with each circuit having an equal number of
 detectors connected thereto and no two adjacent detectors connected to the
 same zone. Upon activation of any smoke detector, the system shall
 simultaneously activate pre-discharge alarms in the protected area(s),
 signal the building fire alarm control panel(s) to activate the building
 fire evacuation alarms, and send a signal to the base fire department via
 the base fire alarm system. Upon activation of a second detector (on the
 opposite zone of a cross-zoned system), the systems shall immediately shut
 down computer equipment and air conditioning power, close all fire dampers
 release all doors to permit closing activate the discharge alarms, and
 initiate an adjustable 0-60 second time delay. At the end of the time
 delay, Clean Agent shall discharge into the protected area and
 post-discharge visual alarms shall activate.

1.7.2.1     Activation By Manual Station

 Upon activation by a manual station, the system shall immediately perform
 all the above listed alarm functions and shut-down functions, and initiate
 the adjustable time delay. At the end of the delay, Clean Agent shall
 discharge into the protected area.

1.7.2.2     Manual Activation of Inhibit (Abort) Switch

 Upon manual activation of the inhibit (abort) switch, equipment shutdown
 and agent discharge shall be delayed. All other functions shall continue
 unimpeded. Upon release of inhibit switch, shutdown and discharge functions
 shall resume. Time delay shall not reset and shall resume countdown to
 discharge after release of switch.

1.7.3     Transfer to reserve supply

 Transfer from system main supply to reserve supply shall be controlled by a
 "main-reserve" switch at the system control panel.



                          SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


1.7.4     Remote Control Station Operating Instructions

 Submit the proposed legend for remote control station operating
 instructions.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     PIPING

 Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Piping shall be inspected,
 tested and approved before being concealed. Provide fittings for changes
 in direction of piping and for all connections. Make changes in piping
 sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; the use of bushings is not
 permitted.

2.1.1     Pipe

 ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, black or zinc-coated, threaded,
 Schedule 40.

2.1.2     Fittings

 ASME B16.11 or ASME B16.3, Class 300, zinc-coated, threaded, except Class
 150 or 300 for pipe 3/4 inch or smaller.

2.1.3     Pipe Hangers and Supports

 MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, adjustable type. Rods, hangers and supports shall
 be zinc plated. Provide pipe hangers and supports as follows:

           Nominal Pipe                      Maximum
           Size (inches)                  Spacing (feet)

           1 and under                          7
           1.25                                 8
           1.5                                  9
           2                                   10
           2.5                                 11
           3                                   12
           3.5                                 13
           4                                   14
           5                                   15
           6                                   16

2.1.4     Pipe Sleeves

 Provide where piping passes through masonry or concrete walls, floors,
 roofs and partitions. Sleeves in outside walls below and above grade, in
 floor, and in roof slabs, shall be standard weight zinc coated steel pipe.
 Sleeves in partitions shall be zinc coated sheet steel having a nominal
 weight of not less than 0.90 pounds per square foot. Space between piping
 and the sleeve, shall be not less than 0.5 inch. Sleeves shall be of
 sufficient length to pass through the entire thickness of walls, partitions
 and slabs. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 2 inches above the finished
 floor. Pack space between the pipe and sleeve with asbestos free
 insulation and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof
 cement.




                           SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.5    Escutcheon Plates

 Provide piping passing through floors, walls and ceilings with one piece or
 split type plates. Plates where pipe passes through finished ceilings
 shall be chromium plated. Other plates shall be of steel or cast iron,
 with aluminum paint finish. Securely anchor plates in place.

2.1.6     Discharge Nozzles

 Fabricated of corrosion resistant materials. All nozzles shall be designed
 so that the orifice piece is connected directly to the supply pipe. The
 size of pipe and nozzles shall be determined from the calculated flow and
 terminal pressures in accordance with established, recognized test data
 contained in the manufacturer's listed design manual.

2.1.7     Storage Cylinders

 Constructed of high strength alloy steel, conforming to all applicable
 specifications of the Department of Transportation. Container design shall
 permit on-site reconditioning and refilling when required. Safety valves,
 manifolds, pressure gauges, and pressure switches shall be provided.

2.1.8    Jointing Compound

 Tape conforming to FS A-A-58092.

2.2     CONTROL PANEL

 Provide complete electrical supervision of all circuits. Install modular
 type panel in a surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door and cylinder
 lock. Switches and other controls shall not be accessible without the use
 of a key. The control panel shall be a neat, compact, factory-wired
 assembly containing all parts and equipment required to provide specified
 operating and supervisory functions of the system. Panel cabinet shall be
 finished on the inside and outside with factory-applied enamel finish.
 Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps located on the exterior of the
 cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door for each zone initiating
 circuit. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates
 for all lamps and switches. A single open or ground fault condition in any
 detection or actuation circuit shall not result in any loss of system
 function, but shall cause the actuation of system trouble signals. A
 ground fault condition or single break in any other circuit shall result in
 the activation of the system trouble signals. Supervision of wiring
 external to the control panel for mechanical equipment shutdown is not
 required, provided a break in such wiring will cause the associated
 mechanical equipment to shut down. Loss of AC power, a break in the
 standby battery power circuits, or abnormally low battery voltage shall
 also result in the operation of the system trouble signals. The abnormal
 position of any system switch in the control panel shall also result in the
 operation of the system trouble signals. Trouble signals shall operate
 continuously until the system has been restored to normal at the control
 panel. Panel shall be provided with the following switches:

        1.   Trouble silencing switch which transfers trouble signals to an
             indicating lamp. Upon correction of the trouble condition,
             audible signals will again sound until the switch is returned to
             its normal position, or the trouble circuit shall be automatically
             restored to normal upon correction of the trouble condition.



                          SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


        2.   Evacuation alarm silence switch which when activated will silence
             all alarm devices and cause operation of system trouble signals.

        3.   Disconnect switch which when activated will disconnect the system
             from the base fire alarm system and cause operation of the Clean
             Agent system trouble signals.

 System control panel shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved
 for extinguishing system control (releasing device service).

2.3     SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY

 Supply shall include nickel cadmium, lead calcium or sealed lead acid
 batteries and charger. Drycell batteries are not allowed. House batteries
 in a well constructed steel cabinet with cylinder lock.

2.3.1     Storage Batteries

 Provide batteries of adequate ampere-hour rating to operate the system
 under supervisory conditions for 72 hours at the end of which time
 batteries shall be capable of operating the entire system in a full alarm
 condition for not less than 30 minutes. Provide calculations
 substantiating the battery capacity. Provide reliable separation between
 cells to prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells and between
 battery terminals and other metal parts.

2.3.2     Battery Charger

 Provide completely automatic high/low charging rate type charger capable of
 recovery of the batteries from full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or
 less. Provide an ammeter for recording rate of charge and a voltmeter to
 indicate the state of battery charge. Provide a red pilot light to
 indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as
 part of the unit assembly if a high-rate switch is provided.

2.4     MANUAL ACTUATION STATIONS

 Provide actuation stations for systems at the exits from the protected
 areas. Operation of a manual station shall cause the control panel to go
 into full alarm condition and discharge Clean Agent into the protected area
 following the adjustable time delay. Stations shall be of a type not
 subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall have a dual
 action release configuration to prevent accidental system discharge.
 Break-glass-front stations are not permitted; however a pull lever
 break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color shall be orange or other
 approved color shall not be red. Warning signs shall be placed at each
 station indicating that operation of the station will cause immediate Clean
 Agent discharge. Where building fire alarm pull stations are also mounted
 at the exits from the protected areas, they shall be separated from Clean
 Agent actuation stations by at least 3 feet horizontally, labels shall be
 provided to clearly distinguish building fire alarm stations from Clean
 Agent stations and stations shall be of different colors.

2.5     SMOKE DETECTORS

 Designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the photoelectric
 principle. Necessary control and/or power modules required for operation
 of the device shall be integral with the main control panel. Detectors
 shall be compatible with main control panel provided and shall be suitable


                            SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 for use in a supervised circuit. Detectors shall not draw power from the
 initiating circuit. Operating power shall be taken from a separate
 supervised power supply circuit. Malfunction of the electrical circuitry
 to the detector or its control or power units shall result in the operation
 of the system trouble devices. Detectors shall not be susceptible to
 operation by changes in relative humidity. Each detector shall contain a
 visible indicator lamp that shall show when the unit is activated. Each
 detector shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains
 screw terminals for making all wiring connections. Remote indicator lamp
 (to be in a graphic display) shall be provided for each detector that is
 located above suspended ceilings, beneath raised floors or otherwise
 concealed from view.

2.5.1     Ionization Detectors

 Not permitted.

2.5.2     Photoelectric Detectors

 Operate on a multiple cell concept using a light-emitting diode (LED) light
 source. Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition but shall
 operate the detector trouble indicating lamp.

2.5.3     Detector Spacing and Location

 In accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72, the manufacturer's
 recommendations and the requirements stated herein. Spacing and location
 of detectors shall take into account the airflow into the room and supply
 diffusers. Detectors shall not be placed closer than 5 feet from any
 discharge grille. Spacing of detectors on room ceilings shall not exceed
 450 square feet per detector. Spacing of detectors under raised floors
 shall not exceed 250 square feet per detector. Detectors installed beneath
 raised floors shall be mounted with the detector base within 2 inches of
 the underside of the raised floor framing, with the detector facing
 downward. Where the space under the raised floor is less than 12 inches in
 height, detectors shall be mounted with their bases either horizontal or
 vertical, with the detection chambers mounted in the upper half of the
 underfloor space. Under no circumstances shall detectors be mounted facing
 upward.

2.6     DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS

 In accordance with the requirements of NFPA 90A, the manufacturer's
 recommendations and the requirements stated herein. Detectors required in
 ducts shall be photoelectric type and listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825
 for duct installation. Provide duct detectors with an approved duct
 housing, mounted exterior to the duct, with perforated sampling tubes
 extending across the width of the duct. Activation of duct detectors shall
 cause shut down of the associated air-handling unit, annunciation at the
 control panel, tripping of the transmitter, and sounding of building fire
 evacuation alarms. Detector shall have a test port or switch. Each
 detector shall be provided a remote LED and test switch assembly.

2.7     INHIBIT (ABORT) SWITCH

 Provide one switch where shown. Activation of switch shall delay only
 equipment shutdown and agent discharge. Switch shall be guarded,
 spring-loaded type which operates only when pressure is manually applied to
 the switch. Upon release of manual pressure, switch shall de-activate


                         SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


 allowing delayed functions to resume. After start of agent discharge,
 switch shall have no effect. Activation of switch during normal
 (non-alarm) conditions shall cause activation of system trouble signals.

2.8     ALARM SIGNALLING DEVICES

 Provide each protected area with audible and visual alarms located where
 shown. All alarm circuits shall be electrically supervised. Provide
 separate and distinct audible and visual pre-discharge and discharge
 signals. Where the building is equipped with a separate fire evacuation
 alarm system the discharge signals shall also be distinct from those used
 by the building fire evacuation system. Each signal device shall be
 provided with a rigid plastic or metal identification sign with lettering a
 minimum of 1.5 inches high. The pre-discharge alarm shall be labelled
 "FIRE" and the discharge alarm shall be labelled "CLEAN AGENT DISCHARGE."
 Post-discharge visual alarms shall be located outside all entrances to the
 protected areas, and shall be provided with signs reading "CLEAN AGENT
 DISCHARGED WHEN FLASHING - DO NOT ENTER.

2.8.1     Audible Alarms

        a.   Alarm bells

  10 inch recessed with matching mounting back box. Bells shall be of the
 vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit.
 Bells shall be of the underdome type and produce a sound output rating of
 at least 90 decibels at 10 feet.

        b.   Alarm horns

 Recessed, vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised
 circuit and shall have a sound output rating of at least 90 decibels at 10
 feet.

2.8.2     Visual Alarms

 Flush lamp assembly suitable for use in an electrically supervised
 circuit. Lamp shall be the flashing stroboscopic type and powered from the
 control panel alarm circuit. Lamps shall provide a minimum of 50 candle
 power. Flash rate shall be between 60 and 120 flashes per minute. Lamps
 shall be protected by a thermo-plastic lens, red for pre-discharge alarms
 and blue for discharge and post-discharge alarms. Visual alarms may be
 part of an audio-visual alarm assembly.

2.9     MAIN ANNUNCIATOR

 Annunciator shall be integral with the main control panel. Provide
 separate alarm and trouble lamps for each zone alarm initiating circuit
 located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet
 door. Supervision will not be required provided a fault in the annunciator
 circuits results only in loss of annunciation and will not affect the
 normal functional operation of the remainder of the system. Each lamp
 shall provide specific identification of the device by means of a permanent
 label. In no case shall zone identification consist of the words "Zone 1,"
 "Zone 2," etc., but shall consist of the description of the device.

2.9.1     Annunciation Zones

 Shall be arranged as appropriate to the room or space being protected.


                           SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



2.9.2     Annunciator Panels

         a.    Remote annunicator panels

 Panel shall duplicate all requirements specified for the main control panel
 annunciator, except that in lieu of individual zone trouble lamps a single
 common system trouble lamp may be provided. Panel shall have a lamp test
 switch. Zone identification shall be by means of permanently attached
 rigid plastic or metal plate(s). Panel shall be of the type, flush or
 surface.

         b.    Graphic Annunciator Panel

 Panel shall be of the interior type, flush or surface-mounted. Panel shall
 be provided with the room floor plan, drawn to scale, with remote alarm
 lamps mounted to represent the location of each alarm in initiating
 device. Principal rooms and areas shown shall be labelled with their room
 numbers or titles. The panel location shall be shown on the floor plan.
 Detectors mounted above ceilings, on ceilings, and beneath raised floors
 and different types of initiating devices shall have different symbols or
 lamps of different colors for identification. Lamps shall illuminate upon
 actuation of their corresponding device and shall remain illuminated until
 the system is reset. Panel shall have a lamp test switch.

2.10     AUTOMATIC FIRE DAMPERS

 Provide automatic control of fire dampers in air conditioning supply duct
 work as specified on the drawings. Activation of fire dampers shall occur
 upon second zone detection, or upon activation of Clean Agent discharge by
 manual pull station. Fire dampers are specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR
 SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS. Provide heaters
 for fusible links.

2.11     ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER RELEASE (IF ANY)

 Provide where shown. The armature portion shall be mounted on the door and
 shall have an adjusting screw for setting the angle of the contact plate.
 The electro-magnetic release shall be wall mounted, with a total horizontal
 projection not exceeding 4 inches. All doors shall release to close upon
 first stage (pre-discharge) alarm. Electrical supervision of wiring
 external of control panel for magnetic door holding circuits is not
 required.

2.12     ELECTRICAL WORK

 Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
 SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring.

2.12.1        Wiring

 Control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems,
 shall be provided under this section and shall conform to NFPA 70. Wiring
 for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. Wiring for low voltage
 DC circuits shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. All wiring shall be color coded.
 Use rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical
 metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete and
 where not subject to mechanical damage.



                            SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


2.12.2     Operating Power

 Power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding
 isolation type transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of
 all signal initiating, signal sounding, trouble signal and transmitter
 tripping circuits. Provide secondary DC power supply for operation of
 system in the event of failure of the AC supply. Transfer from normal to
 emergency power or restoration from emergency to normal power shall be
 fully automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm. Obtain
 AC operating power to control panel and battery charger from the building
 emergency panel.

2.12.3     Conductor Identification

 All circuit conductors shall be identified within each enclosure where a
 tap, splice or termination is made. Conductor identification shall be by
 plastic coated self sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type
 sleeves. Attach the markers in a manner that will not permit accidental
 detachment. Properly identify control circuit terminations.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     PIPE INSTALLATION

 Cut screw-jointed pipe accurately and work into place without springing or
 forcing. Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with
 solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assembly. Make
 screw joints with tetrafluoroethylene tape applied to male thread only.

3.2     FIELD PAINTING

 Clean, pretreat, prime, and finish paint new Clean Agent fire extinguishing
 systems, including piping, conduit, hangers and miscellaneous metalwork.
 Apply coatings only to clean, dry, surfaces using clean brushes. Clean
 surfaces to remove all dust, dirt, rust and loose mill scale. Immediately
 after cleaning, the metal surfaces shall receive one coat of primer
 conforming to FS TT-P-645 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one
 mil. Exercise due care to avoid the painting of operating devices.
 Materials which are used to protect devices, while painting is in process,
 shall be removed upon the completion of painting. Remove all devices which
 are painted and provide new clean devices of the proper type in lieu
 thereof. Provide "Clean Agent" lettering (1-inch minimum lettering) at 20
 foot intervals on all clean agent piping.

3.2.1     Systems in Unfinished Areas

 Unfinished areas are defined as attic spaces, spaces above suspended
 ceilings, spaces under raised floors, crawl spaces, pipe chases, and spaces
 where walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished
 material. Primed surfaces shall receive one coat of red enamel conforming
 to FS A-A-2962 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil and color
 coded in accordance with MIL-STD-101.

3.2.2     Systems in All Other Areas

 Primed surfaces shall receive two coats of paint to match adjacent
 surfaces, except stop valves and accessories shall receive one coat of red
 enamel conforming to FS A-A-2962 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of
 one mil. Provide "Clean Agent" lettering (1-inch minimum lettering) at 20


                            SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 foot intervals on all clean agent piping.

3.3     FIELD TESTING

 Perform tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer to determine
 conformance with the specified requirements.

3.3.1     Preliminary Tests

 Each piping system shall be pneumatically tested at 40 psig and shall show
 no leakage or reduction in gage pressure after 30 minutes. The contractor
 shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects
 of system operation. Individually test all detectors, manual actuation
 stations, alarms, control panels, and all other components and accessories
 to demonstrate proper functioning.

3.3.2     Formal Inspection and Tests

 The Savannah District, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests
 and approve all systems before they are accepted. The system shall be
 considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary
 tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the
 satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer's technical representative and
 the Contracting Officer.Submit the request for formal inspection at least
 15 days prior to the date the inspection is to take place. The control
 panel(s) and detection system(s) shall be in service for a "break-in"
 period of at least 15 consecutive days prior to the formal inspection.
 Experienced technicians regularly employed by the contractor in the
 installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems
 shall be present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All
 Clean Agent, instruments, personnel, appliances and equipment for testing
 shall be furnished by the contractor. All necessary tests encompassing all
 aspects of system operation shall be made including the following, and any
 deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to
 the Government.

3.3.2.1      System Function Tests Without Clean Agent Discharge

 The entire detection/alarm/actuation system shall be operated. As a
 minimum, operation and supervision of the following functions and devices
 shall be demonstrated.

        a.   All operational and supervisory functions of the control and
             annunciator panels, including the cross-zoning, pre-discharge
             alarm, discharge alarm, post-discharge alarm and time delay
             features.

        b.   Each manual actuation station and associated circuit(s).

        c.   All smoke detectors and associated circuits.

        d.   All pre-discharge, discharge and post-discharge alarms and
             associated circuits.

        e.   All actuator circuits and discharge heads (without Clean Agent
             discharge).

        f.   Air handing and computer equipment shutdown.



                          SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


      g.    Automatic fire dampers.

      h.    Activation of the building fire evacuation alarm system.

      i.    Activation of the Base fire alarm system (receipt of fire alarm at
            alarm office).

      j.    Room integraty (fan)test

3.3.2.2     Clean Agent Discharge Tests

 Not required.

3.4   OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

 Provide operating instructions at each remote control station. Instructions
 shall clearly indicate all necessary steps for the operation of the
 system. Instructions shall be in raised or embossed white letters on red
 rigid plastic or red enameled steel backgrounds and shall be of adequate
 size to permit them to be easily read.

3.5   TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

 Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operation and
 maintenance training to the Base Fire Department and Public Works, Civil
 Engineering and Computer personnel. Each training session shall include
 computer emergency procedures, and unique maintenance and safety
 requirements. Training areas will be provided by the Government in the
 same building as the protected areas. The training conducted shall use
 operation and maintenance manuals called for in paragraph entitled
 "Operation and Maintenance Instructions, Parts and Testing." Dates and
 times of the training period shall be coordinated through the Contracting
 Officer not less then two weeks prior to the session. Government shall be
 provided with a simplified training manual providing a description of
 operation and controls, possible hazards to personnel, and restart
 procedures for computers and air handling units.

          -- End of Section --




                         SECTION 21 22 00.00 20   Page 15
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



                              SECTION 22 00 00

                          PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
                                    02/10

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

 AHRI 1010                        (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically
                                  Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers

          AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
          ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

 ASHRAE 90.1 - IP                 (2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009;
                                  Errata 2009; INT 1-3 2009) Energy Standard
                                  for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
                                  Buildings, I-P Edition

          AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

 ASSE 1003                        (2009) Performance Requirements for Water
                                  Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic
                                  Water Distribution Systems

 ASSE 1005                        (1999) Water Heater Drain Valves 3/4 Inch
                                  Size

 ASSE 1010                        (2004) Water Hammer Arresters

 ASSE 1018                        (2001) Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable,
                                  Water Supplied

 ASSE 1019                        (2004; Errata 2005) Vacuum Breaker Wall
                                  Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic
                                  Draining Type

          AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

 AWWA 10084                       (2005) Standard Methods for the
                                  Examination of Water and Wastewater

 AWWA B300                        (2004) Hypochlorites

 AWWA B301                        (2004) Liquid Chlorine

 AWWA C203                        (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and
                                  Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
                                  and Tape - Hot-Applied

 AWWA C606                        (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints


                          SECTION 22 00 00   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



 AWWA C651                          (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for
                                    Disinfecting Water Mains

 AWWA C652                          (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
                                    Facilities

 AWWA D100                          (2007) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage

            AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS A5.8/A5.8M                     (2004; Errata 2004) Specification for
                                    Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

 AWS B2.2                           (1991) Brazing Procedure and Performance
                                    Qualification

            ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME A112.14.1                     (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves

 ASME A112.19.2                     (2008) Standard for Vitreous China
                                    Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic
                                    Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals

 ASME A112.19.3                     (2008) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures

 ASME A112.36.2M                    (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts

 ASME A112.6.1M                     (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for
                                    Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
                                    Use

 ASME A112.6.3                      (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and
                                    Trench Drains

 ASME A112.6.4                      (2003: R 2008) Roof, Deck and Balcony
                                    Drains

 ASME B1.20.1                       (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General
                                    Purpose (Inch)

 ASME B16.12                        (2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

 ASME B16.15                        (2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings
                                    Classes 125 and 250

 ASME B16.18                        (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder
                                    Joint Pressure Fittings

 ASME B16.21                        (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe
                                    Flanges

 ASME B16.22                        (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper
                                    and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
                                    Fittings

 ASME B16.23                        (2002; Errata 2003; R 2006) Cast Copper
                                    Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



 ASME B16.24                      (2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and
                                  Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600,
                                  900, 1500, and 2500

 ASME B16.29                      (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper
                                  Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

 ASME B16.3                       (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,
                                  Classes 150 and 300

 ASME B16.34                      (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and
                                  Welding End

 ASME B16.39                      (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron
                                  Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
                                  and 300

 ASME B16.4                       (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded
                                  Fittings; Classes 125 and 250

 ASME B16.5                       (2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and
                                  Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24

 ASME B31.1                       (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power
                                  Piping

 ASME B31.5                       (2006) Refrigeration Piping and Heat
                                  Transfer Components

 ASME B40.100                     (2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge
                                  Attachments

 ASME BPVC SEC IX                 (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Boiler
                                  and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX,
                                  Welding and Brazing Qualifications

 ASME CSD-1                       (2009) Control and Safety Devices for
                                  Automatically Fired Boilers

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 105/A 105M                (2009) Standard Specification for Carbon
                                  Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

 ASTM A 183                       (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                  Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

 ASTM A 193/A 193M                (2009) Standard Specification for
                                  Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
                                  Materials for High-Temperature Service

 ASTM A 47/A 47M                  (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                  Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
                                  Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM A 515/A 515M                (2003; R 2007) Standard Specification for
                                  Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
                                  Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature


                          SECTION 22 00 00   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                        W912HN-11-R-0022


                            Service

 ASTM A 516/A 516M          (2006) Standard Specification for Pressure
                            Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate-
                            and Lower-Temperature Service

 ASTM A 518/A 518M          (1999; R 2008) Standard Specification for
                            Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron
                            Castings

 ASTM A 53/A 53M            (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,
                            Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
                            Welded and Seamless

 ASTM A 536                 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                            Ductile Iron Castings

 ASTM A 733                 (2003e1; R 2009) Standard Specification
                            for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and
                            Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples

 ASTM A 74                  (2009) Standard Specification for Cast
                            Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

 ASTM A 888                 (2009) Standard Specification for Hubless
                            Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
                            Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent
                            Piping Applications

 ASTM B 117                 (2009) Standing Practice for Operating
                            Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

 ASTM B 152/B 152M          (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
                            Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar

 ASTM B 306                 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
                            Drainage Tube (DWV)

 ASTM B 32                  (2008) Standard Specification for Solder
                            Metal

 ASTM B 370                 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
                            Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

 ASTM B 42                  (2002e1) Standard Specification for
                            Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

 ASTM B 43                  (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
                            Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes

 ASTM B 584                 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
                            Alloy Sand Castings for General
                            Applications

 ASTM B 75                  (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless
                            Copper Tube

 ASTM B 813                 (2000; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                            Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of


                     SECTION 22 00 00   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


                                    Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

 ASTM B 828                         (2002) Standard Practice for Making
                                    Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
                                    and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

 ASTM B 88                          (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
                                    Copper Water Tube

 ASTM B 88M                         (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless
                                    Copper Water Tube (Metric)

 ASTM C 564                         (2009) Standard Specification for Rubber
                                    Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
                                    Fittings

 ASTM C 920                         (2010) Standard Specification for
                                    Elastomeric Joint Sealants

 ASTM D 1248                        (2005) Standard Specification for
                                    Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials
                                    for Wire and Cable

 ASTM D 2822                        (2005) Asphalt Roof Cement

 ASTM D 3139                        (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure
                                    Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

 ASTM D 3212                        (2007) Standard Specification for Joints
                                    for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
                                    Flexible Elastomeric Seals

 ASTM D 3311                        (2009a) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)
                                    Plastic Fittings Patterns

 ASTM E 1                           (2007) Standard Specification for ASTM
                                    Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers

 ASTM F 477                         (2008) Standard Specification for
                                    Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
                                    Plastic Pipe

            CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

 CISPI 301                          (2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
                                    Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
                                    Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

 CISPI 310                          (2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with
                                    Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
                                    for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and
                                    Vent Piping Applications

            COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

 CDA A4015                          (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook




                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


           CSA STANDARDS

 CSA/AM Z21.22                     (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R
                                   2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
                                   Systems

           INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS
           (IAPMO)

 IAPMO PS 117                      (2005) Press Type Or Plain End Rub Gsktd
                                   W/ Nail CU & CU Alloy Fittings for Install
                                   On CU Tubing

 UPC                               (2003) Uniform Plumbing Code

           INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

 ICC A117.1                        (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and
                                   Usable Buildings and Facilities

 ICC IPC                           (2009) International Plumbing Code

           MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
           INDUSTRY (MSS)

 MSS SP-110                        (1996) Ball Valves Threaded,
                                   Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
                                   Flared Ends

 MSS SP-25                         (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,
                                   Fittings, Flanges and Unions

 MSS SP-44                         (2006) Steel Pipeline Flanges

 MSS SP-58                         (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
                                   Supports - Materials, Design and
                                   Manufacture

 MSS SP-69                         (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers
                                   and Supports - Selection and Application

 MSS SP-70                         (2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves,
                                   Flanged and Threaded Ends

 MSS SP-71                         (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check
                                   Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

 MSS SP-72                         (1999) Standard for Ball Valves with
                                   Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General
                                   Service

 MSS SP-73                         (2003) Brazing Joints for Copper and
                                   Copper Alloy Pressure Fittings

 MSS SP-80                         (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
                                   Valves

 MSS SP-83                         (2006) Standard for Class 3000 Steel Pipe
                                   Unions Socket Welding and Threaded


                           SECTION 22 00 00   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



            NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

 NACE SP0169                          (2007) Control of External Corrosion on
                                      Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
                                      Systems

            NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

 NEMA 250                             (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
                                      (1000 Volts Maximum)

 NEMA MG 1                            (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
                                      and Generators

 NEMA MG 11                           (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for
                                      Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 90A                             (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the
                                      Installation of Air Conditioning and
                                      Ventilating Systems

            NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

 NSF 14                               (2008) Plastics Piping System Components
                                      and Related Materials

 NSF 61                               (2009) Drinking Water System Components -
                                      Health Effects

            PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)

 PPFA-01                              (1998) Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive
                                      Construction

            PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

 PDI WH 201                           (2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard

            SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

 SAE J1508                            (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications

            U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

 EPA SM 9223                          (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test

 Energy Star                          (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy
                                      Efficiency Labeling System

 PL 93-523                            (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act

            U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

 LEED                                 (2009) Leadership in Energy and
                                      Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
                                      Rating System for New Construction


                            SECTION 22 00 00    Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


                                     (LEED-NC) v3.0

          U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 10 CFR 430                          Energy Conservation Program for Consumer
                                     Products

 21 CFR 175                          Indirect Food Additives: Adhesives and
                                     Components of Coatings

 40 CFR 50.12                        National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air
                                     Quality Standards for Lead

 PL 109-58                           Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)

          UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 174                              (2004; Rev thru Apr 2009) Household
                                     Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. The
 following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

      SD-03 Product Data


          Fixtures; (LEED)

            List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow
          rate.

          Flush valve water closets; G

          Wall hung lavatories; G

          Countertop lavatories; G

          Break room sinks; G

          Service sinks; G

          Drinking-water coolers; G

          Water heaters; G

          Pumps; G

          Shower Faucets; G

          Welding

            A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and
          identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.

          Vibration-Absorbing Features; G


                             SECTION 22 00 00   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



              Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement,
            foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.

            Plumbing System

              Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting.
            Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and
            spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.

        SD-06 Test Reports

            Tests, Flushing and Disinfection

              Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed
            to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
            compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and
            testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate
            the final position of controls.

        SD-07 Certificates

            Materials and Equipment

            Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the
            ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and
            installation shall conform to the code.

            Bolts

              Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts
            furnished comply with the specified requirements.

        SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

            Plumbing System; G.

              Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
            MAINTENANCE DATA.

1.3     STANDARD PRODUCTS

 Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a
 manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
 Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
 performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard
 products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2
 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
 equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
 The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
 advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
 period.

1.3.1     Alternative Qualifications

 Products having less than a two-year field service record will be
 acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
 less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
 tests, can be shown.


                              SECTION 22 00 00   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



1.3.2     Service Support

 The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a
 certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
 the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
 service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
 installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
 regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.3.3     Manufacturer's Nameplate

 Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's
 name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
 conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
 acceptable.

1.3.4     Modification of References

 In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
 provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
 substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
 these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
 similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.3.4.1     Definitions

 For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
 documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
 "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
 shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
 property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
 "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
 shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
 holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.3.4.2     Administrative Interpretations

 For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of
 Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
 requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
 (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer
 in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.
 References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
 appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
 administrative cognizance and the FAR.

1.4     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
 and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
 recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
 damaged or defective items.

1.5     PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1     Welding

 Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and
 welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding
 procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified
 by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The
 Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the
 tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or
 welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they
 make as a permanent record. Structural members shall be welded in
 accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL.   Structural members
 shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL.

1.5.2     Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding

 Cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems shall be in accordance
 with the drawings.

1.6     REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

 Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with
 ICC IPC. Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with
 PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 - IP

1.7     PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

 The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify
 dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
 discrepancy before performing any work.

1.8     INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

 When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent
 instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
 in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
 requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
 thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
 in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

 Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
 equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
 regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
 furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
 for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
 equipment or system.

 When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are
 made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
 acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.9     ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT

 Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,
 maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
 expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
 locations freely accessible through access doors.




                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 11
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


PART 2     PRODUCTS

2.1     Materials

 Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and
 II. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe
 fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic
 pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF 14 and shall be NSF
 listed for the service intended. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall
 conform to ASME B1.20.1. Material or equipment containing lead shall not
 be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as building
 valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow
 preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF 61, Section 8. End point
 devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar
 faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves
 used to dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF 61,
 Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground,
 under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors.

2.1.1     Pipe Joint Materials

 Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground. Solder
 containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil pipe
 and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron
 Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following:

  a.     Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74,
         AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310

  b.     Coupling for Steel Pipe:    AWWA C606.

  c.     Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in
         accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick,
         and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or
         Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self
         centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall
         be bonded with NBR.

  d.     Brazing Material:   Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M,
         BCuP-5.

  e.     Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for
         use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have
         a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents;
         contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.

  f.     Solder Material:    Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.

  g.     Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to
         ASTM B 813, Standard Test 1.

  h.     PTFE Tape:   PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.


  i.     Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot
         type and hubless type): ASTM C 564.

  j.     Flexible Elastomeric Seals:    ASTM D 3139, ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.



                               SECTION 22 00 00   Page 12
SOF C4 Facility                                                         W912HN-11-R-0022



  k.    Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings:        Heat-treated carbon steel,
        ASTM A 183.

  l.    Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc.,
        shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the
        manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange
        material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Blind flange material
        shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M
        for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength
        with material conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.

  m.    Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings           shall
        conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18           or
        ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing            elements
        for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing            elements
        shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting
        manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on
        manufacturer's approved application guidelines.

  n.    Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88, Type K, L or M.

2.1.2    Miscellaneous Materials

 Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:

  a.    Water Hammer Arrester:        PDI WH 201.   Water hammer arrester shall be
        piston type.

  b.    Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction:          ASTM B 370.

  c.    Asphalt Roof Cement:     ASTM D 2822.

  d.    Hose Clamps:     SAE J1508.

  e.    Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures:          ASME A112.6.1M.

  f.    Metallic Cleanouts:     ASME A112.36.2M.

  g.    Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal
        molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be
        nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight,
        gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.

  h.    Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines:
        AWWA C203.

  i.    Hypochlorites:     AWWA B300.

  j.    Liquid Chlorine:     AWWA B301.

  k.    Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element:
        ASME B40.100.

  l.    Thermometers:     ASTM E 1.    Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.

2.1.3    Pipe Insulation Material

 Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR


                               SECTION 22 00 00      Page 13
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022


 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

2.2     PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS

 Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.3     VALVES

 Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves
 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and
 solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have
 flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon
 the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer
 certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable
 MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:

Description                                         Standard

Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends                                       MSS SP-70

Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends                                       MSS SP-71

Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends
for General Service                                 MSS SP-72

Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends               MSS SP-110

Bronze Gate, and Check Valves        MSS SP-80

Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends      ASME B16.34

Backwater Valves                                    ASME A112.14.1

Vacuum Relief Valves                                CSA/AM Z21.22

Water Pressure Reducing Valves                      ASSE 1003

Water Heater Drain Valves                           ASSE 1005

Trap Seal Primer Valves                             ASSE 1018

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves              CSA/AM Z21.22
for Hot Water Supply Systems

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves              ASME CSD-1
for Automatically Fired Hot
Water Boilers                                       Safety Code No., Part CW,
                                                    Article 5

2.3.1     Wall Faucets

 Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with 3/4
 inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose connection.
 Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.




                            SECTION 22 00 00     Page 14
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.3.2    Wall Hydrants (Frostproof)

 ASSE 1019 with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall have a nickel-brass
 or nickel-bronze wall plate or flange with nozzle and detachable key
 handle. A brass or bronze operating rod shall be provided within a
 galvanized iron casing of sufficient length to extend through the wall so
 that the valve is inside the building, and the portion of the hydrant
 between the outlet and valve is self-draining. A brass or bronze valve
 with coupling and union elbow having metal-to-metal seat shall be
 provided. Valve rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of
 the hydrant. The hydrant shall have 3/4 inch exposed hose thread on spout
 and 3/4 inch male pipe thread on inlet.

2.3.3    Relief Valves

 Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure
 and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T
 relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure
 buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of
 heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a
 relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the
 heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be
 rated according to CSA/AM Z21.22. Relief valves for systems where the
 maximum rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have 3/4 inch
 minimum inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems where the
 maximum rate of heat input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall have 1 inch
 minimum inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief
 valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.

2.3.4    Thermostatic Mixing Valves

 Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves,
 thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and
 pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or
 finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be
 constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver
 water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature
 changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall
 be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze,
 corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with
 necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the
 inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F
 of any setting.

2.4     FIXTURES

 Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC.
 Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with
 ICC A117.1. Vitreous China, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified
 throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have
 specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly
 applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks,
 crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped
 with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain
 fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the
 drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a
 trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be
 provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and
 fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply


                           SECTION 22 00 00   Page 15
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers.
 Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves,
 shower head face plates, and pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drainsmay
 contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
 (ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory
 service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not
 less than 2 years Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for
 180 degrees F water temperature.

2.4.1   Lavatories

 Enameled cast-iron lavatories shall be provided with two cast-iron or steel
 brackets secured to the underside of the apron and drilled for bolting to
 the wall in a manner similar to the hanger plate. Exposed brackets shall
 be porcelain enameled. Vitreous china lavatories shall be provided with
 two integral molded lugs on the back-underside of the fixture and drilled
 for bolting to the wall in a manner similar to the hanger plate.

2.4.2   Flush Valve Water Closets

 ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ASME A112.19.3 302 Stainless Steel
 siphon jet, elongated bowl, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet
 seat height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches
 for wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic
 sleeve. Provide white solid plastic elongated open-front seat.

 Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall
 not exceed1.6 gallons per flush. Provide a dual-flush water closet and
 flush valve combination that will also provide a second flushing water
 volume not to exceed 1.28 gallons per flush.

 Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve,
 vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
 components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush
 valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11
 inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not
 interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls. Provide solenoid-activated
 flush valves including electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize
 the solenoid.

2.4.3   Wall Hung Lavatories

 ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ,straight back type, minimum
 dimensions of 19 inches, wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply
 openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and openings for
 concealed arm carrier installation. Provide aerator with faucet. Water
 flow rate shall not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water
 pressure of 60 psi. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with
 vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount
 lavatory with the front rim 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches
 minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor. Provide top
 mounted washerless centerset lavatory faucets.

2.4.4   Countertop Lavatories

 ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, self-rimming, minimum dimensions of
 19 inches wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use
 with top mounted centerset faucets. Furnish template and mounting kit by
 lavatory manufacturer. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall


                          SECTION 22 00 00   Page 16
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi.
 Mount counter with the top surface 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches
 minimum clearance from bottom of the counter face to floor. Provide top
 mounted washerless centerset lavatory faucets.

2.4.5     Break Room Sinks

 ASME A112.19.3, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting rim for
 flush installation, minimum dimensions of 33 inches wide by 21 inches front
 to rear, two compartments, with undersides fully sound deadened, with
 supply openings for use with top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose
 spray, and with 3.5 inch drain outlet. Provide aerator with faucet. Water
 flow rate shall not exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water
 pressure of 60 psi. Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless
 steel cup strainers. Provide separate 1.5 inch P-trap and drain piping to
 vertical vent piping from each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless
 sink faucets with hose spray.

2.4.6     Service Sinks

 ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china with integral back and wall hanger
 supports, minimum dimensions of 22 inches wide by 20 inches front to rear,
 with two supply openings in 10 inch high back. Provide floor supported
 wall outlet cast iron P-trap and stainless steel rim guards as recommended
 by service sink manufacturer. Provide back mounted washerless service sink
 faucets with vacuum breaker and 0.75 inch external hose threads.

2.4.7     Drinking-Water Coolers

 AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable
 water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style,
 air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel
 splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be
 controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near
 the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum
 of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct
 water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or
 nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed
 steel pipe chair carriers.

2.4.8     Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler

 AHRI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair
 carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless
 steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 27 inch
 minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch
 maximum spout height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by
 push levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on front
 and both sides of the cabinet.

2.5     DRAINS

2.5.1     Floor and Shower Drains

 Floor and shower drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral
 seepage pan, and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze,
 nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded
 collar. Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic
 waterproofing membrane is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage


                             SECTION 22 00 00   Page 17
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall
 have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer
 shall be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching
 flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
 flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be provided when required. Drains
 shall be provided with threaded connection. Between the drain outlet and
 waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C 564 may be
 installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber
 gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to
 ASME A112.6.3.

2.5.1.1     Metallic Shower Pan Drains

 Where metallic shower pan membrane is installed, polyethylene drain with
 corrosion-resistant screws securing the clamping device shall be provided.
 Polyethylene drains shall have fittings to adapt drain to waste piping.
 Polyethylene for floor drains shall conform to ASTM D 1248. Drains shall
 have separate cast-iron "P" trap, circular body, seepage pan, and strainer,
 unless otherwise indicated.

2.5.2     Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings

 Provide single control pressure equalizing shower faucets with body mounted
 from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball joint
 self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a maximum of
  2.2 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing mounted
 from behind the wall between bathtub faucets and shower heads and bathtub
 diverter spouts. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union
 connections in each supply to faucet. Provide trip-lever pop-up drain
 fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of drain pop-ups,
 drain outlets, tub overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up drain
 shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Linkage between
 drain pop-up and pop-up control handle at bathtub overflow outlet shall be
 copper alloy or stainless steel. Provide 1.5 inch copper alloy adjustable
 tubing with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and drain
 outlet; chromium-plated finish is not required.

2.5.3     Area Drains

 Area drains shall be plain pattern with polished stainless steel perforated
 or slotted grate and bottom outlet. The drain shall be circular or square
 with a 12 inch nominal overall width or diameter and 10 inch nominal
 overall depth. Drains shall be cast iron with manufacturer's standard
 coating. Grate shall be easily lifted out for cleaning. Outlet shall be
 suitable for inside caulked connection to drain pipe. Drains shall conform
 to ASME A112.6.3.

2.5.4     Boiler Room Drains

 Boiler room drains shall have combined drain and trap, hinged grate,
 removable bucket, and threaded brass cleanout with brass backwater valve.
 The removable galvanized cast-iron sediment bucket shall have rounded
 corners to eliminate fouling and shall be equipped with hand grips. Drain
 shall have a minimum water seal of 4 inches. The grate area shall be not
 less than 100 square inches.

2.5.5     Sight Drains

 Sight drains shall consist of body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable


                               SECTION 22 00 00   Page 18
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 strainer with perforated or slotted grate and funnel extension. The
 strainer shall have a threaded collar to permit adjustment to floor
 thickness. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern suitable for
 embedding in the floor construction. A clamping device for attaching
 flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
 flashing or membrane shall be provided for other than concrete
 construction. Drains shall have a galvanized heavy cast-iron body and
 seepage pan and chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass
 strainer and funnel combination. Drains shall be provided with threaded
 connection and with a separate cast-iron "P" trap, unless otherwise
 indicated. Drains shall be circular, unless otherwise indicated. The
 funnel shall be securely mounted over an opening in the center of the
 strainer. Minimum dimensions shall be as follows:

  Area of strainer and collar:    36 square inches

  Height of funnel:               3-3/4 inches

  Diameter of lower portion:      2 inches of funnel

  Diameter of upper portion:      4 inches of funnel

2.5.6     Roof Drains and Expansion Joints

 Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange,
 and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing
 and flashing. The whole assembly shall be galvanized heavy pattern cast
 iron. For aggregate surface roofing, the drain shall be provided with a
 gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, roof drains shall
 be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the
 insulation thickness where applicable. A clamping device for attaching
 flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
 flashing or membrane shall be provided when required to suit the building
 construction. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice
 that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper
 connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the downspout. An
 expansion joint of proper size to receive the conductor pipe shall be
 provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing,
 brass or bronze sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and
 gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less
 than 0.134 inch. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring
 packing shall be close-cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be
 held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts.

2.6     TRAPS

 Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube
 type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be with a cleanout.
 Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks and
 lavatories. Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.032 inch
  thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where
 the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial
 methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip
 joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the
 discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as
 required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip.
 Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the
 application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections.
 The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior


                            SECTION 22 00 00     Page 19
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size,
 and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper
 alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded
 trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for
 lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may
 have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.

2.7     WATER HEATERS

 Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater
 shall have replaceable anodes. Each gas-fired water heater and booster
 water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 120
 to 180 degrees F. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall
 be tied into building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and
 standby heat losses shall conform to TABLE III for each type of water
 heater specified. The only exception is that storage water heaters and hot
 water storage tanks having more than 500 gallons storage capacity need not
 meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated to
 R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used. Plastic materials
 polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used
 for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory pre-charged expansion tank
 shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater.
 Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water
 systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water temperature and 150 psi
 working pressure. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be
 as indicated.

2.7.1     Automatic Storage Type

 Heaters shall be complete with control system, and shall have ASME rated
 combination pressure and temperature relief valve.

2.7.1.1     Electric Type

 Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating
 elements.   Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so
 that only one element can operate at a time.

2.7.2     Phenolic Resin Coatings for Heater Tubes

 The phenolic resin coating system shall be applied at either the coil or
 coating manufacturer's factory in accordance with manufacturer's standard
 proven production process. The coating system shall be a product
 specifically intended for use on the material the water heating tubes/coils
 are made of and shall be acceptable for use in potable water systems. The
 coating system shall be capable of withstanding temperatures up to 400
 degrees F dry bulb; and meet the requirements of 21 CFR 175.

 The entire exterior surface and the first 5 to 8 inches inside the tubes of
 each coil shall be coated with phenolic resin coating system.

2.7.2.1     Standard Product

 Provide a phenolic resin coating system that is a standard products of a
 manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of
 a similar material, design and workmanship.

 Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have been in
 satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar applications of


                               SECTION 22 00 00   Page 20
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 similar size for at least two years before bid opening.

 Prior to this two year period, these standard products were sold on the
 commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers' catalogs or
 brochures.   These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures shall have been
 copyrighted documents or be identified with a manufacturer's document
 number.

2.8     HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS

 Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME
 stamped for the working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME)
 registration. The tank shall be cement-lined or glass-lined steel type in
 accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss shall conform to TABLE III as
 determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 -
 IP. Each tank shall be equipped with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E 1,
 Type I, Class 3, Range C, style and form as required for the installation,
 and with 7 inch scale. Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable
 for a 3/4 inch tapped opening. Tanks shall be equipped with a pressure
 gauge 6 inch minimum diameter face. Insulation shall be as specified in
 Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Storage tank
 capacity shall be as shown.

2.9     PUMPS

2.9.1     Sump Pumps

 Sump pumps shall be of capacities indicated. The pumps shall be of the
 automatic, electric motor-driven, submerged type, complete with necessary
 control equipment and with a split or solid cast-iron or steel cover plate.
 The pumps shall be direct-connected by an approved flexible coupling to a
 vertical electric motor having a continuous oiling device or packed
 bearings sealed against dirt and moisture. Motors shall be totally
 enclosed, fan-cooled of sizes as indicated and shall be equipped with an
 across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure.
 Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance
 with NEMA MG 1. Each pump shall be fitted with a high-grade thrust bearing
 mounted above the floor. Each shaft shall have an alignment bearing at
 each end, and the suction inlet shall be between 3 and 6 inches above the
 sump bottom. The suction side of each pump shall have a strainer of ample
 capacity. A float switch assembly, with the switch completely enclosed in
 a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure, shall start and stop each motor at
 predetermined water levels. Duplex pumps shall be equipped with an
 automatic alternator to change the lead operation from one pump to the
 other, and for starting the second pump if the flow exceeds the capacity of
 the first pump. The discharge line from each pump shall be provided with a
 union or flange, a nonclog swing check valve, and a stop valve in an
 accessible location near the pump.

2.9.2     Circulating Pumps

 Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven,
 single-stage, centrifugal, with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended
 service. Pump and motor shall be integrally mounted on a cast-iron or steel
 subbase, close-coupled with an overhung impeller, or supported by the
 piping on which it is installed. The shaft shall be one-piece,
 heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smooth-surfaced
 housing of bronze.



                              SECTION 22 00 00   Page 21
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient
 horsepower for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped
 with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure
 with "START-STOP" switch in cover.

 Integral size motors shall be premium efficiency type in accordance with
 NEMA MG 1. Pump motors smaller than 1 hp Fractional horsepower pump motors
 shall have integral thermal overload protection in accordance with Section
 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall shield exposed moving
 parts.

2.9.3     Booster Pumps

2.9.3.1     Centrifugal Pumps

 Horizontal split-case centrifugal-type booster pumps shall be furnished.
 The capacities shall be as shown, and the speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm.
 Pumps shall have a casing of close-grained iron or steel with smooth water
 passages. A gasket shall be provided between the upper and lower halves of
 the casing. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Impellers
 shall be nonoverloading, bronze, balanced to eliminate vibration, and shall
 be keyed to corrosion-resisting steel shafts. The casings shall be fitted
 with bronze wearing or sealing rings. Bearings shall be cartridge type,
 enabling the entire rotating element to be removed without disturbing
 alignment or exposing the bearings to dirt, water, and other foreign
 matter. Pumps shall be provided with mechanical seals. Seal boxes shall
 be machined in the pump casing and at both sides of the pump, and shall be
 of sufficient depth to include a conventional bronze seal ring and rows of
 shaft packing. Bedplates shall be close-grain cast iron or steel with ribs
 and lugs, complete with foundation bolts, and shall have a drip lip with
 drain hole. Each pump shall be tested at the manufacturer's plant for
 operating characteristics at the rated capacity and under specified
 operating conditions. Test curves shall be furnished showing capacity in
 gpm, head in feet, efficiency, brake horsepower, and operation in parallel
 with similar pumps. Multiple pump installations shall have pump
 characteristics compatible for operation in parallel with similar pumps.
 The electric motor shall be sized for non-overload when operating at any
 point along the characteristic curve of the pump. Guards shall shield
 exposed belts and moving parts.

2.9.3.2     Controls

 Each pump motor shall be provided with enclosed across-the-line-type
 magnetic controller complete in a NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with three
 position, "HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC," selector switch in cover. Pumps shall be
 automatically started and stopped by float or pressure switches, as
 indicated. The pumps shall start and stop at the levels and pressures
 indicated. A multiposition sequence selector switch shall be provided so
 that any two pumps may be operated simultaneously beeping a third pump as a
 standby.

2.9.4     Flexible Connectors

 Flexible connectors shall be provided at the suction and discharge of each
 pump that is 1 hp or larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene,
 rubber, or braided bronze, with Class 150 standard flanges. Flexible
 connectors shall be line size and suitable for the pressure and temperature
 of the intended service.



                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 22
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.9.5     Sewage Pumps

 Provide single type duplex type with automatic controls to alternate the
 operation from one pump to the other pump and to start the second pump in
 the event the first pump cannot handle the incoming flow. Provide high
 water alarm and check valve.

2.10     WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM

2.10.1     Constant Speed Pumping System

 Constant speed pumping system with pressure-regulating valves shall employ
 one lead pump for low flows, and one or more lag pumps for higher flows.
 Pressure-regulating valves shall be provided with nonslam check feature.
 The factory prepiped and prewired assembly shall be mounted on a steel
 frame, complete with pumps, motors, and automatic controls. The system
 capacity and capacity of individual pumps shall be as indicated. Current
 sensing relays shall provide staging of the pumps. The pumps shall be
 protected from thermal buildup, when running at no-flow, by a common
 thermal relief valve. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on the suction and
 discharge headers. The control panel shall bear the UL listing label for
 industrial control panels and shall be in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
 The control panel shall include the following: No-flow shutdown; 7-day
 time clock; audiovisual alarm; external resets; manual alternation;
 magnetic motor controllers; time delays; transformer; current relays;
 "HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC" switches for each pump; minimum run timers; low
 suction pressure cutout; and indicating lights for power on, individual
 motor overload, and low suction pressure. The control circuit shall be
 interlocked so that the failure of any controller shall energize the
 succeeding controller.

2.10.2     Hydro-Pneumatic Water Pressure System

 An ASME code constructed tank stamped for 125 psig water working pressure
 shall be provided. The tank shall have a flexible diaphragm made of
 material conforming to FDA requirements for use with potable water and
 shall be factory precharged to meet required system pressure.

2.10.3     Variable Speed Pumping System

 Variable speed pumping system shall provide system pressure by varying
 speed and number of operating pumps. The factory prepiped and prewired
 assembly shall be mounted on a steel frame complete with pumps, variable
 speed drives, motors, and controls. The variable speed drives shall be the
 oil-filled type capable of power transmission throughout their complete
 speed range without vibration, noise, or shock loading. Each variable
 speed drive shall be run-tested by the manufacturer for rated performance,
 and the manufacturer shall furnish written performance certification.
 System shall have suppressors to prevent noise transmission over electric
 feed lines. Required electrical control circuitry and system function
 sensors shall be supplied by the variable speed drive manufacturer. The
 primary power controls and magnetic motor controllers shall be installed in
 the controls supplied by the drive manufacturer. The sensors shall be
 located in the system to control drive speed as a function of constant pump
 discharge pressure. Connection between the sensors and the variable speed
 drive controls shall be accomplished with hydraulic sensing copper
 wiring. Controls shall be in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures.




                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 23
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.11     ELECTRICAL WORK

 Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors,
 motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00
 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of
 packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide high
 efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current
 motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the
 applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. In addition to the
 requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide
 polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings,
 including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency
 ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
 Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive
 the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating
 of the motor.

 Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
 Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
 operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
 torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20
 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals
 during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease
 supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

 Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
 controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
 devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring
 required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be
 provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide
 controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.

 Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided
 under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.12     MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS

2.12.1     Escutcheon Plates

 Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
 walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper
 alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces.
 Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.

2.12.2     Pipe Sleeves

 Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and
 floors. Sleeves are not required where supply drain, waste, and vent (DWV)
 piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where
 penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.

2.12.2.1     Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete

 Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
 Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes
 through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry
 and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the
 core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.


                               SECTION 22 00 00   Page 24
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



2.12.2.2     Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete

 Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.

2.12.3     Pipe Hangers (Supports)

 Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support
 rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists
 with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S
 beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and
 vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel
 adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole
 on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18
 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection
 shield for insulated piping.

2.12.4     Nameplates

 Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte
 finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and
 valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
 Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
 block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
 1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system.
 Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each
 system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

 Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements.
 Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air
 ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of
 plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance
 with PPFA-01. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with
 necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and
 drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless
 otherwise indicated. A gate valve and drain shall be installed on the
 water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the
 floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior
 service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in
 place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except
 when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12
 inches below the average local frost depth or as indicated on the
 drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before
 being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each
 plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means.
 Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.

3.1.1     Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections

3.1.1.1     Utilities

 The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The
 hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to
 permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture,
 except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 25
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable
 isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with
 operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures,
 faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to
 prevent movement.

3.1.1.2   Cutting and Repairing

 The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of
 construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or
 equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in
 the trade involved.

3.1.1.3   Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment

 Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.
 Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt,
 water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the
 fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted,
 and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating
 equipment.

3.1.1.4   Mains, Branches, and Runouts

 Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and
 worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the
 building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with
 the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from
 service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using
 crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions.
 Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from
 other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between
 finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water
 lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to
 transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the
 lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless
 specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made
 with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for
 use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are
 furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change
 in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4
 inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and
 wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not
 less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles,
 flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.

3.1.1.5   Pipe Drains

 Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable
 seat and full port ball valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4
 inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply
 piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.

3.1.1.6   Expansion and Contraction of Piping

 Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water
 pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion
 loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, etc.,
 where indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as


                          SECTION 22 00 00   Page 26
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch
 connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid
 undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe
 over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting
 construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided,
 toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch
 runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of
 piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in
 the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without
 straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the
 deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be
 allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer.

3.1.1.7     Thrust Restraint

 Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more,
 either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or
 larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent
 movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1
 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less
 than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground
 and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed,
 the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured
 against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to
 thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as
 shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are
 accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or
 by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down
 bends into gravity thrust blocks.

3.1.1.8     Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters

 Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and
 cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with
 precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water
 hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access
 doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall
 conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.

3.1.2     Joints

 Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the
 manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching
 of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be
 made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific
 purpose intended.

3.1.2.1     Threaded

 Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming
 to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or
 with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or
 shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.

3.1.2.2     Unions and Flanges

 Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls,
 ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches
 and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.


                               SECTION 22 00 00   Page 27
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



3.1.2.3     Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe

 Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil,
 waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's
 recommendations.

3.1.2.4     Copper Tube and Pipe

  a.    Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2,
        MSS SP-73, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe
        sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of
        copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without
        flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall
        include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus,
        copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.

  b.    Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only
        acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall
        conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used
        in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver.

  c.    Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be
        made in accordance with ICC IPC.

  d.    Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict
        accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for
        manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s)
        approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between
        fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

3.1.2.5     Other Joint Methods

3.1.3     Dissimilar Pipe Materials

 Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made
 with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall
 have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that
 specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal
 connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric
 waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed
 to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges
 shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric
 waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be
 made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.

3.1.4     Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings

 Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a
 protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel
 pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding.
 The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint
 bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with the
 drawings. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance
 with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and
 the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and
 fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe
 tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to
 AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 28
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
 manufacturer.

3.1.5     Pipe Sleeves and Flashing

 Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent
 location.

3.1.5.1     Sleeve Requirements

 Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following
 requirements:

 Secure sleeves in position and location during construction.   Provide
 sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls,
 ceilings, roofs, and floors.

 A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a
 waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
 between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic
 rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
 and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The
 links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber
 belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each
 nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve,
 tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand
 and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal
 assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe
 and sleeve involved.

 Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where
 indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as
 detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof,
 and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances.
 Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical
 equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas
 shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.

  Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a
 minimum of one inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside
 of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing
 walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron
 pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron
 pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic.

 Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve,
 or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated
 with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer, backstop material
 and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
 The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and
 sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for
 interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.

 Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed
 1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and
 sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint
 between the pipe and concrete wall as specified above. Sealant selected
 for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
 dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 29
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the
 requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.5.2   Flashing Requirements

 Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper
 flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be
 suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches
  from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid
 coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a
 minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down
 into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
 pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an
 adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches
  from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a
 watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe
 or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be
 sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the
 pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in
 diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
 installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
 flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield
 shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through
 wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A
 waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.

3.1.5.3   Waterproofing

 Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by
 forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of
 the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches to
 fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter
 of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the
 flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately
 1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level
 between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet
 copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be
 lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement.
 If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the
 pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing
 guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside
 diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor
 flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange
 shall be sealed.

3.1.5.4   Optional Counterflashing

 Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and
 sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or
 metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be
 accomplished by utilizing the following:

  a.   A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.

  b.   A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.

3.1.5.5   Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors

 Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items


                           SECTION 22 00 00   Page 30
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with
 waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and
 Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall
 be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled
 with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.1.5.6     Pipe Penetrations

 Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be
 sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.

3.1.6     Fire Seal

 Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase
 walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in
 Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.7     Supports

3.1.7.1     General

 Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to
 permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.
 Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
 alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling,
 swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when
 operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
 variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In
 the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp
 shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of
 the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing
 required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded
 sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.

3.1.7.2     Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements

 Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic
 loads as specified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. Structural steel required for reinforcement to
 properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be
 provided. Material used for supports shall be as specified in Section
 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.

3.1.7.3     Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

 Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to
 MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.

  a.    Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.

  b.    Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.

  c.    Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is
        placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if
        they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.

  d.    Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have
        both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer.


                            SECTION 22 00 00     Page 31
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


       Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

  e.   Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with
       an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.

  f.   Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated
       frames.

  g.   Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger
       when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39
       saddles shall be welded to the pipe.

  h.   Type 40 shields shall:

       (1)   Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.

       (2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature
       of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.

       (3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes.    High density
       inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.

  i.   Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and
       a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting
       joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall
       be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in
       determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F
       for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include
       allowances for expansion and contraction.

  j.   Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at
       slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8
       feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe
       risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

  k.   Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
       or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe
       movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating
       temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
       Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do
       not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:

       (1)    On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
             60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may
             freely rest on a steel plate.

       (2)    On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe
             or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.

       (3)    On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F
              a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely
             rest on a steel plate.

  l.   Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the
       outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous
       through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.

  m.   Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not
       desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the


                             SECTION 22 00 00   Page 32
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


        guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be
        separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount
        adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.

  n.    Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut
        or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except
        where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.

3.1.7.4     Structural Attachments

 Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in
 concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
 anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
 shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
 the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless
 approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
 applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.

3.1.8     Welded Installation

 Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of
 piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe
 to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be
 permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or
 forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged,
 flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced
 against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and
 inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be
 removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely
 removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its
 original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its
 characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that
 have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.

3.1.9     Pipe Cleanouts

 Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout
 plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in
 connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
 or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy
 cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug
 shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the
 floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be
 T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs,
 except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be
 the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee
 branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste
 stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building
 storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building
 drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks
 in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than
  18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe
 concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze,
 nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover
 plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with
 securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames,
 anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have
 access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts
 installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 33
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to
 the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of
 fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where
 cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron.

3.2     WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS

3.2.1     Relief Valves

 No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or
 storage tank. The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve
 actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever
 possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the
 tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the
 hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the
 cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and
 mounted above and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater.

3.2.2     Heat Traps

 Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be
 routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an
 upward direction.

3.2.3     Connections to Water Heaters

 Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric
 unions or flanges.

3.2.4     Expansion Tank

 A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply
 between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve.
 The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended
 by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.

3.3     FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS

 Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where
 exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the
 faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for
 supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and
 installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and
 faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be
 used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting.
 Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be
 connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise
 specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as
 specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped
 personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish.
 Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.

3.3.1     Fixture Connections

 Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the
 cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided.
 Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be
 made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene
 gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 34
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance
 from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting
 compound or gasket and fixture used.

3.3.2     Flushometer Valves

 Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the
 long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with
 approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be
 installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for
 use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted
 at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid
 interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for
 handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of
 the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the
 flushometer stop.

3.3.3     Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor

 Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor.
 Wall-hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim
 42 inches above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim
 28 inches above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the
 physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.

3.3.4     Fixture Supports

 Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and
 other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the
 chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of
 mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the
 floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the
 desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu
 of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is
 not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.

3.3.4.1     Support for Solid Masonry Construction

 Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored
 chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in
 the masonry wall.

3.3.4.2     Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction

 Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored
 chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to
 the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.

3.3.4.3     Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions

 Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be
 of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a
 square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of
 floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel
 partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to
 these studs.




                               SECTION 22 00 00   Page 35
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


3.3.4.4     Support for Wood Stud Construction

 Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be
 used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be
 installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs
 shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 1/4 inch thick
 minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall
 extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.

3.3.5     Backflow Prevention Devices

 Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect
 or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable
 water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in
 accordance with UPC at all other locations necessary to preclude a
 cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any
 nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed
 at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of
 the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the
 level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so
 that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be
 of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment,
 and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable
 water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow
 preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each
 device shall be a standard commercial unit.

3.3.6     Access Panels

 Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any
 item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
 sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced,
 maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section
 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS.

3.3.7     Sight Drains

 Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 2
 inches above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.

3.3.8     Traps

 Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture
 shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be
 cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be
 recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic
 pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting
 waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.

3.3.9     Shower Pans

 Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as
 nail heads or rough edges of aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down,
 clamping-ring type with weepholes, installed so the lip of the subdrain is
 flush with subfloor.

3.3.9.1     General

 The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination


                            SECTION 22 00 00     Page 36
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 shower and drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two
 are not separated by curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a
 shower pan fabricated in place. The shower pan material shall be cut to
 size and shape of the area indicated, in one piece to the maximum extent
 practicable, allowing a minimum of 6 inches for turnup on walls or
 partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of
 1/4 of curb height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or
 partition finish. Subflooring shall be smooth and clean, with nailheads
 driven flush with surface, and shall be sloped to drain. Shower pans shall
 be clamped to drains with the drain clamping ring.

3.3.9.2     Metal Shower Pans

 When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal
 pieces shall be joined with a flintlock seam and soldered or burned. The
 corners shall be folded, not cut, and the corner seam shall be soldered or
 burned. Pans, including upstands, shall be coated on all surfaces with one
 brush coat of asphalt. Asphalt shall be applied evenly at not less than 1
 gallon per 50 square feet. A layer of felt covered with building paper
 shall be placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining surfaces
 of metal pan and drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan
 is connected to the drain.

3.4     IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

3.4.1     Identification Tags

 Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved
 anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed
 on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures.
 Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or
 engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be
 attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded
 chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.

3.4.2     Pipe Color Code Marking

 Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00
 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.4.3     Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components

 Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The
 color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and
 operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished
 space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling.
 The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages
 and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code
 board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be
 approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels
 with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so
 that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be
 manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling
 panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of
 colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on
 which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the
 approximate dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch
 thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under
 glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed,


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 37
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


 the color code symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the
 related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. The color code board
 shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The
 color code system shall be as indicated below:

      Color           System                      Item       Location

   Green           Potable Domestic Water         Valves      Above Ceiling
   Yellow          Potable Hot Water              Valves      Above Ceiling

3.5     ESCUTCHEONS

 Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated
 piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except
 in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened
 securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish,
 corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished
 chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
 split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.

3.6     PAINTING

 Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in
 concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
 AND COATINGS.

3.6.1     PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

 New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
 be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.6.1.1       Factory Painting Systems

 Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to
 certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors
 shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
 shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance
 criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
 the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no
 loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
 beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

 The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
 shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
 manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
 on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
 painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3.6.1.2       Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

 Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
 need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
 surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
 solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
 subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare
 metal.

 Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after


                               SECTION 22 00 00    Page 38
SOF C4 Facility                                                     W912HN-11-R-0022


 the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
 retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
 aluminum or light gray.

  a.    Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the
        metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
        receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
        thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
        thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
        film thickness of one mil per coat.


  b.    Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
        temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
        400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
        thickness of 2 mils.

  c.    Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to
        temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
        degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
        thickness of 2 mils.

3.7     TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

3.7.1     Plumbing System

 The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance
 with UPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include
 the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test
 in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor
 must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.

  a.    Drainage and Vent Systems Test.    The final test shall include a smoke
        test.

  b.    Building Sewers Tests.

  c.    Water Supply Systems Tests.

3.7.1.1    Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies

 Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically
 designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies.

 Backflow prevention assembly test gauges shall be tested annually for
 accuracy in accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory
 agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements,
 gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the
 requirements of University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross
 Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works
 Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14), or any other approved
 testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and
 field evaluation of backflow prevention assembly test gauges.. Report form
 for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following:

            Data on Device                        Data on Testing Firm
            Type of Assembly                      Name
            Manufacturer                          Address
            Model Number                          Certified Tester


                               SECTION 22 00 00    Page 39
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


            Serial Number                        Certified Tester No.
            Size                                 Date of Test
            Location
            Test Pressure Readings               Serial Number and Test Data of
                                                 Gauges

 If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be
 repaired and retested.

3.7.1.2     Shower Pans

 After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be
 temporarily plugged below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded
 with water to a minimum depth of 1 inch for a period of 24 hours. Any drop
 in the water level during test, except for evaporation, will be reason for
 rejection, repair, and retest.

 3.7.2     Defective Work

 If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall
 be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be
 repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of
 screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.

3.7.3     System Flushing

3.7.3.1     During Flushing

 Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall
 be flushed with potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a
 water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all
 portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all
 fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity
 of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. In the
 event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting
 Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of
 fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate
 personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines
 are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor
 shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the
 system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign
 materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no
 discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any
 device considered as an end point device by NSF 61, Section 9, shall be
 flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14
 day period.

3.7.3.2     After Flushing

  System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed,
 cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be
 prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh
 potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish,
 furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to
 properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When
 the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for
 uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall
 be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
 Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless


                              SECTION 22 00 00    Page 40
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022


 more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall   not exceed
 limits established by 40 CFR 50.12 Part 141.80(c)(1). The    water supply to
 the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any   lead
 contamination found during potable water system testing is   due to work
 being performed inside the building.

3.7.4    Operational Test

 Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the
 Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
 demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
 functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a
 period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the
 following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the
 system:

  a.    Time, date, and duration of test.

  b.    Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.

  c.    Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.

  d.    Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.

  e.    Pump suction and discharge pressures.

  f.    Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.

  g.    Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.

  h.    Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.

  i.    Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including
        pump start pressure and stop pressure.

3.7.5    Disinfection

 After all system components are provided and operational tests are
 complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall
 be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material,
 entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt
 and other foreign materials have been removed.

  Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and
      AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The
      chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The
      chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a
      constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per
      million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected
      into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into
      the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump until
      the entire system is completely filled.

  Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a
      continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the
      chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping
      including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination
      procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet
      shall be opened and closed several times.


                            SECTION 22 00 00    Page 41
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



       After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm
       chlorine residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour
       chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm
       chlorine residual remains in the treated system.

  Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be
      flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced
      to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each
      valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.

  Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial
      examination, at locations specified by the Contracting Officer
      Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria,
      fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with
      EPA SM 9223 or AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be EPA
      approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable
      local and state requirements.

  Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence
      of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters)
      in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be
      accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.

3.8    WASTE MANAGEMENT

 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated
 containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery
 and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used
 sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
 fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
 tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
 copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan
 and place in designated areas for reuse.

3.9    POSTED INSTRUCTIONS

 Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring
 and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system,
 shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
 explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
 system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
 stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified
 above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams.
 The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the
 systems.

3.10    PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT

 Standard rating condition terms are as follows:

       EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.

       ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.

       SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 70 degrees F
       temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements.

       V = Rated volume in gallons


                             SECTION 22 00 00   Page 42
SOF C4 Facility                                                      W912HN-11-R-0022



          Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)

3.10.1      Storage Water Heaters

3.10.1.1      Electric

     a.   Storage capacity of 60 gallons shall have a minimum energy factor (EF)
          of 0.93 or higher per FEMP requirements.

     b.   Storage capacity of 60 gallons or more shall have a minimum energy
          factor (EF) of 0.91 or higher per FEMP requirements.

3.11      TABLES


                                    TABLE I
                        PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
                   DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials             A     B    C     D     E   F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

1    Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub          X        X   X   X     X
     and spigot, ASTM A 74 with
     compression gaskets. Pipe and
     fittings shall be marked with the
     CISPI trademark.

2    Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless,               X   X   X     X
     CISPI 301 and ASTM A 888. Pipe and
     fittings shall be marked with
     the CISPI trademark.

3    Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded,         X            X   X
     ASME B16.12 for use with Item 10

4    Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded)                           X     X
     ASME B16.4 for use with Item 10

7    Bronze sand casting grooved joint              X        X       X     X
     pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
     ASTM B 584, for use with Item 5

8    Wrought copper grooved joint pressure          X        X
     pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
      ASTM B 75 C12200,
     ASTM B 152/B 152M, C11000,
     ASME B16.22
     ASME B16.22 for use with Item 5

9    Malleable-iron threaded fittings,                               X     X
     galvanized ASME B16.3
     for use with Item 10

10    Steel pipe, seamless galvanized,              X                X     X
      ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B


                              SECTION 22 00 00     Page 43
SOF C4 Facility                                                         W912HN-11-R-0022



                                    TABLE I
                        PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
                   DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials             A     B    C     D     E   F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

11   Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B 43                     X       X

12   Bronzed flanged fittings,                                          X     X
     ASME B16.24 for use
     with Items 11 and 14

13   Cast copper alloy solder joint                                     X     X
     pressure fittings, ASME B16.18
     for use with Item 14

14   Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42                                    X

15   Cast bronze threaded fittings,                                     X     X
     ASME B16.15

16   Copper drainage tube, (DWV),                  X*       X   X*      X     X
     ASTM B 306

17   Wrought copper and wrought                    X        X   X       X     X
     alloy solder-joint drainage
     fittings. ASME B16.29

18   Cast copper alloy solder joint                X        X   X       X     X
     drainage fittings, DWV,
     ASME B16.23

22   High-silicon content cast iron pipe                    X                 X   X
     and fittings (hub and spigot, and
     mechanical joint), ASTM A 518/A 518M


     SERVICE:

     A   -   Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
     B   -   Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
     C   -   Underground Vent
     D   -   Aboveground Vent
     E   -   Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
     F   -   Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
     *   -   Hard Temper




                               SECTION 22 00 00   Page 44
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022



                                   TABLE II
            PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials           A       B       C     D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

1   Malleable-iron threaded fittings,           X        X     X     X
    a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3
        for use with Item 4a

    b.   Same as "a" but not galvanized                        X
         for use with Item 4b

2   Ductile iron grooved joint fittings         X        X     X
    for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
    and ASTM A 47/A 47M, for use
    with Item 2

3   Steel pipe:                                 X        X     X      X
    a. Seamless, galvanized,
    ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B

    b. Seamless, black,                                        X
    ASTM A 53/A 53M,
    Type S, Grade B

4   Seamless red brass pipe,                    X        X            X
    ASTM B 43

5   Bronze flanged fittings,                    X        X            X
    ASME B16.24 for use with
    Items 5 and 7

6   Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42             X        X               X

7   Seamless copper water tube,                 X**      X**   X**    X***
    ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M

8   Cast bronze threaded fittings,              X        X            X
    ASME B16.15 for use
    with Items 5 and 7

9   Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint      X        X     X      X
    pressure fittings,
    ASME B16.22 for
    use with Items 5, 7 and 8

10 Cast copper alloy solder-joint               X        X     X      X
   pressure fittings,
   ASME B16.18
   for use with Item 8

11 Bronze and sand castings grooved             X        X     X
   joint pressure fittings for non-
   ferrous pipe ASTM B 584,
   for use with Item 2


                            SECTION 22 00 00   Page 45
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022



                                   TABLE II
            PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials           A       B       C     D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

12 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP-44             X        X

13 Fittings: brass or bronze;                    X        X
   ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18
   ASTM B 828

14 Carbon steel pipe unions,                     X        X       X
   socket-welding and threaded,
   MSS SP-83

15 Malleable-iron threaded pipe                  X        X
   unions ASME B16.39

16 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A 733             X        X       X

17 Press Fittings                                X        X

     A - Cold Water Service Aboveground
     B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum
         Aboveground
     C - Compressed Air Lubricated
     D - Cold Water Service Belowground
     Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
     ** - Type L - Hard
     *** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper
     without joints in or under floors
     **** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints


                                   TABLE III
 STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER HEATING
                                EQUIPMENT (I-P)

A.   STORAGE WATER HEATERS

          STORAGE
          CAPACITY        INPUT
FUEL      GALLONS         RATING       TEST PROCEDURE      REQUIRED
                                                           PERFORMANCE

Elect.   60 min.                       10 CFR 430         EF = 0.91

B.   Unfired Hot Water Storage R-12.5 min.

         -- End of Section --




                             SECTION 22 00 00   Page 46
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022



                              SECTION 22 07 19

                         PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
                                    08/08

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 167                       (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                  Stainless and Heat-Resisting
                                  Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
                                  Strip

 ASTM A 240/A 240M                (2009c) Standard Specification for
                                  Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
                                  Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
                                  Vessels and for General Applications

 ASTM B 209                       (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                  and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

 ASTM C 1136                      (2010) Standard Specification for
                                  Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
                                  for Thermal Insulation

 ASTM C 195                       (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
                                  Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

 ASTM C 449                       (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral
                                  Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
                                  and Finishing Cement

 ASTM C 547                       (2008e1) Standard Specification for
                                  Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

 ASTM C 592                       (2008a) Standard Specification for Mineral
                                  Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
                                  Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered)
                                  (Industrial Type)

 ASTM C 795                       (2008) Standard Specification for Thermal
                                  Insulation for Use in Contact with
                                  Austenitic Stainless Steel

 ASTM C 916                       (1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for
                                  Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation

 ASTM C 920                       (2010) Standard Specification for
                                  Elastomeric Joint Sealants

 ASTM C 921                       (2009) Standard Practice for Determining


                          SECTION 22 07 19   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                   W912HN-11-R-0022


                                    the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
                                    Thermal Insulation

 ASTM D 226                         (2006) Standard Specification for
                                    Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
                                    Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 579                         (2009) Standard Specification for Greige
                                    Woven Glass Fabrics

 ASTM E 96/E 96M                    (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water
                                    Vapor Transmission of Materials

            NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 220                           (2008) Standard on Types of Building
                                    Construction

 NFPA 255                           (2006) Standard Method of Test of Surface
                                    Burning Characteristics of Building
                                    Materials

            SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

 SAE AMS 3779                       (1990; Rev A; R 1994) Tape Adhesive,
                                    Pressure Sensitive Thermal Radiation
                                    Resistant, Aluminum Foil/Glass Cloth

            U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

 FED-STD-595                        (Rev C) Colors Used in Government
                                    Procurement

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to
 work specified in this section.

1.3   PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

 Provide noncombustible thermal-insulation system materials, as defined by
 NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and
 thermal-insulation materials, except cellular elastomers, with a
 flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25 or less , and a smoke-developed
 classification (SDC) of 50 or less . Determine these maximum values in
 accordance with NFPA 255. Provide coatings and sealants that are
 nonflammable in their wet state.

 Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified
 temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures
 normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.

1.4   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit
 the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:




                            SECTION 22 07 19   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


         SD-03 Product Data

             Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:

             Adhesives; G
             Coatings; G
             Insulating Cement; G
             Insulation Materials; G
             Jacketing; G
             Tape; G

         SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

             Installation manual for Insulation Materials

1.5     RECYCLED MATERIALS

 Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent
 practicable, provided that the material meets all other requirements of
 this section. The minimum recycled material content of he following
 insulation are:

 Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight

PART 2     PRODUCTS

 Materials shall be compatible and not contribute to corrosion, soften, or
 otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either the wet or dry state.
 Meet ASTM C 795 requirements for materials to be used on stainless steel
 surfaces. Provide materials that are asbestos free and conform to the
 following.

2.1      INSULATION MATERIALS

 Insulation conductances shall be maximum values, as tested at any point,
 not an average. Replace or augment insulation conductance found by test to
 exceed the specified maximum by an additional thickness to bring it to the
 required maximum conductance and a complete finishing system.

2.1.1     Mineral Fiber Insulation

 Conform to ASTM C 592 for Mineral Fiber Insulation and be suitable for
 surface temperatures up to 370 degrees F, and not less than 4-pound per
 cubic foot density with thermal conductivity not greater than 0.26 Btu per
 hour per square foot square per degree F at 150 degrees F mean.

 Mineral fiber pipe wrap insulation having an insulating efficiency not less
 than that of the specified thickness of fibrous glass pipe insulation may
 be provided in lieu of fibrous glass pipe insulation for pipe sizes 10
 inches and larger.

2.1.2     Fiberglass Insulation

 Conform to ASTM C 547. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not
 exceed 0.54 Btu-inch per hour per square foot per degree F at 200 degrees F
 mean.

 Fiber glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than
 that of the specified thickness of mineral fiber pipe insulation may be


                                SECTION 22 07 19   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 provided in lieu of mineral fiber pipe insulation for aboveground piping.

2.1.3     Pipe Barrel

 Pipe barrel insulation shall be Type II, Molded, Grade A or Type III,
 Precision V-Groove, Grade A for use at temperatures up to and including
 1200 degrees F.

2.1.4     Pipe Fittings

 Provide molding pipe fitting insulation covering for use at temperatures up
 to and including 1200 degrees F.

2.2     ADHESIVES

2.2.1     Cloth Adhesives

 Adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and
 open-weave glass cloth shall be a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion and
 conform to the requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I.

2.2.2     Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives

 Adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and presized glass
 cloth and for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to various
 other substrates, must be solvent-base, synthetic-rubber type and conform
 to the requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I, for attaching fibrous-glass
 insulation to metal surfaces. Solvent shall be nonflammable.

2.3     INSULATING CEMENT

2.3.1     General Purpose Insulating Cement

 General purpose insulating cement shall be diatomaceous silica and conform
 to ASTM C 195. Composite shall be rated for 1800 degrees F service and
 have a thermal-conductivity maximum of 0.85 Btu by inch per hour per
 square foot for each degree F temperature differential at 200 degrees F
 mean temperature for 1 inch thickness.

2.3.2     Finishing Insulating Cement

 Finishing insulating cement shall be mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting type
 conforming to ASTM C 449.

2.4     CALKING

 Calking used with specified insulation materials shall be an elastomeric
 joint sealant in accordance with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
 Use A.

2.5     CORNER ANGLES

 Corner angle piping insulation shall be nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1
 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be in accordance
 with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003.




                             SECTION 22 07 19   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.6     JACKETING

2.6.1    Aluminum Jacket

  ASTM B 209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 0.016 inch, with
 factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside
 surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside diameters less
 than 8 inches. Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside
 diameters 8 inches and larger. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum
 width of 0.5 inch. Provide factory prefabricated aluminum covers for
 insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges. Aboveground jackets and bands
 shall have factory-applied baked-on semigloss brown color conforming to
 Federal Standard FED-STD-595, "Colors," color chip number 20062.

2.6.2    Asphalt-Saturated Felt

 ASTM D 226, without perforations, minimum weight of 10 pounds per 100
 square feet.

2.6.3    Stainless Steel Jacket

 ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M; Type 304, minimum thickness of 0.010 inch,
 smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture
 barrier on inside surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of
 0.5 inch. Provide factory prefabricated stainless steel covers for
 insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges.

2.6.4    Glass Cloth Jacket

 Provide plain-weave glass cloth conforming to ASTM D 579, Style 141 and
 weigh not less than 7.23 ounces per square yard before sizing. Factory
 apply cloth wherever possible.

 Provide leno weave glass reinforcing cloth, 26-end and 12-pick thread
 conservation, with a warp and fill tensile strength of 45 and 30 pounds per
 inch of width, respectively, and with a weight of not less than 1.5 ounces
 per square yard.

2.6.5    PVC Jacket

 Provide 0.010 inch thick, factory-premolded, one-piece fitting pipe-barrel
 sheeting vapor-barrier jacketing polyvinylchloride that is
 self-extinguishing, high-impact strength, moderate chemical resistance with
 a permeability rating of 0.01 grain per hour per square foot per inch of
 mercury pressure difference, determined in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
 Provide manufacturer's standard solvent-weld type vapor-barrier joint
 adhesive.

 Conform to ASTM C 1136 for, Type I, low-vapor transmission, high-puncture
 resistance vapor barrier for use on insulation for piping, ducts, and
 equipment.

2.7     COATINGS

2.7.1    Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing

 Coatings for outdoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces such as
 fittings and elbows shall be a nonasphaltic, hydrocarbon polymer,
 solvent-base mastic containing a blend of nonflammable solvents. Conform


                              SECTION 22 07 19   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 to the requirements of ASTM C 1136 and ASTM C 921 for coatings.

2.7.2     Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing

 Provide pigmented resin and solvent compound coatings for indoor
 vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces and conform to ASTM C 1136,
 Type II.

2.7.3     Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing

 Provide pigmented polymer-emulsion type recommended by the insulation
 material manufacturer for outdoor and indoor nonvapor-barrier finish
 coating of insulation surfaces for the surface to be coated and applied to
 specified dry-film thickness.

2.7.4     Coating Color

 Conform to the color code specified.

2.8      TAPE

 Provide a knitted elastic cloth glass lagging specifically suitable for
 continuous spiral wrapping of insulated pipe bends and fittings and produce
 a smooth, tight, wrinkle-free surface. Conform to requirements of
 SAE AMS 3779, SAE AMS 3779, ASTM D 579, and ASTM C 921 for tape, and weigh
 not less than 10 ounces per square yard.

2.9     HOT-WATER, AND HOT WATER-RETURN PIPING

 Provide mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2, with a
 thickness of not less than 1". Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies,
 fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces.

2.10     COLD-WATER AND CONDENSATE-DRAIN PIPING

 Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and
 miscellaneous surfaces shall be insulated

 Provide 3/8 inch mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type
 T-2, with a thickness of not less than 1".

 Cold-water piping insulation shall be flexible unicellular-elastomeric
 thermal insulation, Type T-3, with a thickness of 1/2 inch per
 calculation. Use expanded, closed-cell pipe insulation only aboveground,
 not for underground piping.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS

 Install smooth and continuous contours on exposed work. Smoothly and
 securely paste down cemented laps, flaps, bands, and tapes. Apply
 adhesives on a full-coverage basis.

 Apply insulation only to system or component surfaces that have been tested
 and approved.

 Install insulation lengths tightly butted against each other at joints.
 Where lengths are cut, provide smooth and square and without breakage of


                             SECTION 22 07 19     Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                               W912HN-11-R-0022


 end surfaces. Where insulation terminates, neatly taper and effectively
 seal ends, or finish as specified. Direct longitudinal seams of exposed
 insulation away from normal view.

 Apply materials in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

 Clean surfaces free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or
 mastics are applied. Provide solvent cleaning required to bring metal
 surfaces to such condition.

 Installation Drawings for pipe insulation shall be in accordance with the
 adhesive manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3.2     SYSTEM TYPES

3.2.1     Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket

 Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and
 field-attached vapor-barrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement
 jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier
 adhesive. Provide jacket overlaps not less than 1-1/2 inches and
 jacketing bands for butt joints 3 inches wide.

 Cover exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies with preformed
 mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the
 pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place
 with light cord ties. Apply a 60-mil coating of white indoor vapor-barrier
 coating and, while still wet, wrap with glass lagging tape with 50 percent
 overlap, and smoothly blend into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional
 coating as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillet or contour coating,
 then allowed to fully cure before the finish coating is applied.
 On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and special
 configurations, build up from mineral fiber and a special mastic consisting
 of a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts
 water. Where standard vapor-barrier jacketing cannot be used, make the
 surfaces vapor tight by using coating and glass lagging cloth or tape as
 previously specified.

 In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be
 wrapped with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required
 thickness and covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Make seams
 vapor tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier
 adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Hold
 all jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel
 straps, 15 mils thick by 1/2 inch wide.

 Set pipe insulation into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of
 6 inches at maximum 12-foot spacing and the ends of the insulation sealed
 to the jacketing with the same material to provide an effective
 vapor-barrier stop.

 Do not use staples in applying insulation. Install continuous
 vapor-barrier materials over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe
 sleeves, hangers, and other concealments.

 Piping insulation at hangers shall consist of 13-pounds per cubic foot
 density, fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell,
 polyvinylchloride. Seal junctions with vapor-barrier jacket where
 required, glass-cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating.


                             SECTION 22 07 19   Page 7
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022



 Expose white-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing to view.

 Finish exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a 6-mil    dry-film
 thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.

3.2.2   Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket

 Cover piping with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached,
 presized, white, glass cloth. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps,
 and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive with jacket overlap not less
 than 1-1/2 inches and jacketing bands for butt joints 3 inches wide.

 Cover exposed-to-view fittings with preformed mineral-fiber fitting
 insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily
 secured in place with light cord ties. Install impregnated glass lagging
 tape with indoor vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap basis and the blend
 tape smoothly into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as
 needed, and rubber gloved to a smooth contour. tape ends of insulation to
 the pipe at valves 2 inches and smaller. Build up on-the-job fabricated
 insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations from mineral
 fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive, diluted with
 3 parts water. Finish surfaces with glass cloth or tape lagging.

 Cover all valves 2-1/2 inches and larger and all flanges with preformed
 insulation of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation.

 Finish exposed-to-view insulation with a minimum 6-mil   dry-film thickness
 of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.

 In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped
 with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and
 covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Hold all jacket ends in
 place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick
 by 1/2 inch wide. Provide fitting insulation, thermally equivalent to
 pipe-barrel insulation to preclude surface temperatures detrimental to
 polyvinylchloride.

3.2.3   Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer

 Cover piping-system surfaces with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or
 preformed insulation. Maintain vapor seal. Cement insulation into
 continuous material with a solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive recommended
 by the manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply adhesive to both of
 the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis to a minimum thickness of 10
 mils wet or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted adhesive.

 Seal insulation on cold water piping to the pipe for a minimum of 6 inches
 at maximum intervals of 12 feet to form an effective vapor barrier. At
 piping supports, insulation shall be continuous through using
 outside-carrying type clevis hangers with insulation shield. Install Wood
 dowel load-bearing inserts between the pipe and insulation shields to
 prevent insulation compression.

 Insulate hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes to the extent
 shown with nominal 1/2 inch thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular elastomer,
 preformed pipe insulation. Seal joints with adhesive.

 At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger


                           SECTION 22 07 19   Page 8
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 strap, cut the insulation with a brass cork borer and a No. 3 superior
 grade cork inserted. Seal seams with approved adhesive. Insulate sweat
 fitting with miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer insulation of the same
 nominal pipe size and thickness as the insulation on the adjacent piping or
 tubing. Joint miter-cut pieces with approved adhesive. Slit and snap
 covers over the fitting, and seal joints with approved adhesive.

 Insulate screwed fittings with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut
 pieces of cellular elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter
 large enough to overlap adjacent pipe insulation. Butt pipe insulation
 against fittings. Overlap shall be not less than 1 inch . Use adhesive to
 join cover pieces and cement the cover to the pipe insulation.

 Finish surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light with a 2-mil minimum
 dry-film thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended
 by the manufacturer, and applied in not less than two coats.

3.2.4   Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket

 Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-attached or
 field-applied aluminum jacketing.

 Cover fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting
 insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation.
 Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place with light cord ties. Apply
 a 60-mil coating of vapor-barrier mastic, and while still tacky, wrapped
 with glass lagging tape.

 Apply additional mastic as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillets or
 contours. Build up on-the-job fabricated insulation for special
 configurations from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and
 lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Only where standard aluminum
 jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor-tight by using mastic and
 glass lagging cloth or tape as specified above with an added finish coat of
 mastic.

 Set pipe insulation into outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of 6
 inches at maximum 12-foot spacing. Seal ends of the insulation to the
 jacketing with the same material to provide effective vapor barrier stops.

 Install continuous vapor barrier over all surfaces, including areas inside
 pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealment.

 Apply piping insulation to both sides of pipe hangers. Insulate junctions
 with a special mastic mixture, glass cloth mesh tape, and mastic as
 previously specified.

 Securely cement jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with aluminum jacket
 sealant. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 6 inches wide.

 Lap joints, wherever possible, against the weather so that the water will
 run off the lower edge and in accordance with the pipe drainage pitch.
 Locate longitudinal laps on horizontal lines 45 degrees below the
 horizontal centerline and alternately staggered 1 inch. Lap jacketing
 material a minimum of 2 inches , circumferentially sealed with mastic, and
 strapped to provide a waterproof covering throughout. Locate straps 8
 inches on center and pull up tight to hold jacketing securely in place.
 Use screws in addition to straps when necessary to obtain a waterproof
 covering. Place extra straps on each side of supporting devices and at


                           SECTION 22 07 19   Page 9
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 openings. Where flanging access occurs, strap a chamfer sheet to the pipe
 at jacketing.

 Stiffen exposed longitudinal edges of aluminum jacketing by bending a 1 inch
  hem on one edge.

 Provide expansion joints for maximum and minimum dimensional fluctuations.

 To prevent corrosion, do not allow the aluminum jacketing to come in direct
 contact with other types of metal.

 At openings in jacket, apply an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for 2 inches
 in all directions. Apply jacketing while waterproofing is tacky.

 Use screws at each corner of each sheet, at fitting jackets, and as
 necessary for the service. Place number 7, 3/8 inch long, binding-head
 aluminum sheet metal screws through the mastic seal.

3.2.5     Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer

 Clean pump surfaces with solvent. Apply not less than 1 inch of general
 purpose insulating cement, mixed with nonvapor-barrier adhesive diluted
 with 3 parts water, to achieve smooth surface and configuration contours.
 After all water has been removed, cover surfaces with 1/2 inch thick
 cellular elastomer insulation attached and joined into a continuous sheet
 with an outdoor vapor-barrier coating recommended by the insulation
 manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply coating to both of the
 surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis with a minimum thickness of 10
 mils wet, or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted
 coating. Blend coating into the adjacent flange insulation and the joint
 covered with a band of cellular elastomer equal to the flange assembly
 width. Use same coating to seal insulation to the casing at penetrations
 and terminations. Insulate pumps in a manner that will permit insulation
 to be removed to repair or replace pumps.

 Finish insulation with a 2-mil minimum dry-film application of a
 polyvinylchloride lacquer coating recommended by the manufacturer and
 applied in not less than two coats.

3.2.6     Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill

 Pack voids surrounding pipe with mineral-fiber fill.

3.2.7     Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket

 Cover piping system surfaces with calcium silicate insulation. Cover
 fittings and valve bodies with preformed insulation of the same material
 and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation.

3.3     ACCEPTANCE

 Final acceptance will depend upon providing construction (Record Drawings)
 details to the Contracting Officer. Include construction details, by
 building area, the insulation material type, amount, and installation
 method. An illustration or map of the duct routing locations may serve




                            SECTION 22 07 19   Page 10
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 this purpose. With data provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with
 the system name, date, and the words "Record Drawings
 insulation/material." Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring
 Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."

        -- End of Section --




                          SECTION 22 07 19   Page 11
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
SOF C4 Facility                                                    W912HN-11-R-0022



                                    SECTION 22 14 29

                                       SUMP PUMPS
                                          08/08

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

             HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)

 HI M100                                (2005) Complete Set of Centrifugal,
                                        Reciprocating, Rotary and Vertical
                                        Centrifugal/Vertical Pump Standards

             INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

 ISO 1940-1                             (2003; Corrigendum 2005) Mechanical
                                        Vibration - Balance Quality Requirements
                                        for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State -
                                        Part 1: Specification and Verification of
                                        Balance Tolerance - International
                                        Restrictions

             NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

 NEMA 250                               (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
                                        (1000 Volts Maximum)

 NEMA MG 1                              (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
                                        and Generators

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit
 the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-03 Product Data

             Submit Manufacturer's Catalog Data in accordance with paragraph
             entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.

             Materials and Equipment; G
             Pump Performance Curve; G
             Pump and Motor Specifications; G

         SD-06 Test Reports

             Submit test reports for the following tests in accordance with the
             paragraph entitled, "Tests," of this section.

             Hydrostatic Leak
             Static Heads


                                SECTION 22 14 29    Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


             Pump Flow Capacity

         SD-07 Certificates

             Listing of product installations for the following items shall
             identify at least five installed units similar to those proposed
             for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of
             five years. List shall include purchaser, address of
             installation, service organization, and date of installation.

             Submersible Pumps

             Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance
             with the referenced standards contained in this section.

             Submersible Pumps
             Accessories

         SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

             Submit the following in accordance with paragraph entitled,
             "General Requirements," of this section.

             Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
             Vibration Specifications

1.3   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 Connection Diagrams for sump pumps shall show details of connection of
 cables and pump motors.

 Submit Control Diagrams for sump pumps showing motor starters, relays, or
 any other component necessary for safe operation.

 Fabrication Drawings for sump pumps shall indicate size, type, and
 efficiency rating.

 Installation Drawings for sump pumps shall be in accordance with the
 manufacturer's recommended instructions.

 Submit Manufacturer's Catalog Data for sump pumps showing equipment
 foundation data and equipment and performance data including performance
 curves and indicating brake horsepower, head (gpm), and NPSH.

 Provide Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and Vibration
 Specifications.

PART 2     PRODUCTS

 Pump and Motor vibration levels shall conform to ISO 1940-1 unless
 otherwise noted. Motor vibration levels shall conform to NEMA MG 1, Motors
 and Generators, Part 7 unless otherwise noted.

2.1      SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

 Construct and furnish pumps and accessories in accordance with the
 requirements of HI M100 standards and those specified herein.

 Simplex pump unit shall include a submersible pump with an integral


                              SECTION 22 14 29   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


 diaphragm or float-switch automatic level-control mechanism.

 Failure of operating switch shall not require breaking of pump-motor seals
 for repairs.

 Requirements for each material designation shall be in accordance with the
 applicable definition listed in the centrifugal pump section of HI M100
 standards. Materials for components and accessories not covered by these
 definitions shall be as specified herein.

 Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Where such contact cannot be
 avoided, protect joints between dissimilar metals against galvanic
 corrosion by plating, organic insulation coatings, gaskets, or other
 suitable means.

2.1.1   Pump Selection

 Select pumps for the service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a
 given casing and impeller series.

 Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated.

 Pump seals, lubricant, and electrical insulation shall be suitable for
 service in liquids up to 140 degrees F.

2.1.2   Pump Housing

 Pump housing shall enclose the pump motor and volute with its integrally
 cast feet. Pump housing shall be cast iron, watertight under all heads
 normal to the service, and constructed to permit inspection and repair.
 Volute shall be designed to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of not less
 than 1-1/2 times the design shutoff head of the pump.

2.1.3   Impeller

 Impeller shall be the cast-iron nonclogging type with design features to
 provide maximum freedom from clogging when liquid containing rags and
 stringy material is handled. Impeller shall be dynamically balanced and
 shall have a minimum size solid-sphere handling capability of 1-1/2 inches.

2.1.4   Pump Shaft

 Pump shaft shall be an extension of the motor shaft and constructed of
 ground and polished AISI Type 300 or 400 series corrosion-resistant steel
 with hard wearing surfaces (over 300 Brinell).

2.1.5   Mechanical Seal

 Pump shaft seal shall be manufacturer's standard mechanical type
 specifically constructed for the service duty temperature and resistance to
 pumped fluid.

2.1.6   Bearings and Lubrication

 Furnish antifriction ball or roller bearings with full provision for the
 mechanical and hydraulic, radial, and thrust loads imposed. Bearings shall
 be sealed and permanently grease- or oil-lubricated.




                           SECTION 22 14 29    Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


2.1.7     Motor and Power Cord

 Motor shall be manufacturer's standard construction for the service and
 permanently sealed, oil-filled, and watertight. Fit the motor space with
 watertight expansion provisions to accommodate temperature normal to
 specified duty. Motor seals shall remain watertight under any pressure
 developed in the volute and under a sump-level static head of not less than
 30 feet of water; shop drawings shall so certify. Motor control for
 three-phase motor shall provide overload protection.

 Single-phase motors shall have automatic-reset thermal-overload protection.

 Power cord shall be of indicated length, waterproof, internally grounded,
 oil-resistant, Type SO chloroprene, with three-prong plug.

2.1.8     Liquid-Level Control

 Simplex unit shall have a float-operated switch mechanism to provide
 automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to a
 predetermined level. Switch shall be cover-mounted, and enclosure shall be
 NEMA 250, Type 1, general purpose. Provide means of adjustment such as
 float-rod stops to allow for variation in the start and stop level-control
 points. Float and stem shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant
 steel; all other wetted parts of the fluid-level sensing mechanism shall be
 bronze, brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive
 effects of pumped fluid.

 Mount the controls on the discharge pipe below the basin cover. Enclosures
 shall be NEMA 250, Type 6, submersible, watertight, dusttight, and sleet
 (ice) resistant.

 Control shall be pedestal mounted above the coverplate, and the enclosures
 shall be NEMA 250, Type 1, general purpose.

 Provide stilling tubes where indicated.

 Floatless electrode level controls may be submitted for approval provided
 the electrodes are isolated from the fluid being sensed.

2.1.9     High-Water Alarm

 Provide a high-water alarm switch complete with actuating mechanism for
 operation on an electrical circuit other than the motor circuit. Design
 the switch to operate indicated alarm device(s) whenever a predetermined
 high-water level is reached in the sump because of failure of either pump
 or a fluid inflow that exceeds the capacity of both pumps. Switch
 enclosure shall be the same as that for the level-control switch.

PART 3     EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION

 Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.1     Alignment

 Before attempting alignment, the contractor will demonstrate that the pump
 does not have any load/force imposed by the piping system. Minimum
 alignment values (below) are for pump and driver at normal running


                             SECTION 22 14 29   Page 4
SOF C4 Facility                                                  W912HN-11-R-0022


 temperatures. Values shall be compensated for thermal growth. Limited
 movement of the pump or driver (commonly known as bolt-bound) shall be
 corrected to ensure alignment capability. Hold down bolts shall not be
 undercut in order to perform adjustment.

 Shims shall be commercially die-cut, without seams or folds, and be made
 of corrosion resistant stainless steel. Do not use more than four shims at
 any single point.

 Units with drive motor over 7.5 hp shall have alignment jack bolts
 installed.

 Pump and driver may have an intermediate shaft, spacer, or spool piece
 (sometimes called a jackshaft) Based on the motor nominal operating speed,
 the Pump and driver shall be aligned to the following minimum
 specifications:

      Speed(RPM)    close-coupled    close-coupled   spool piece angle
                    offset (mils)    angle(mils/in.) (mils/in. @ coupling pt.)

         600           6.0               2.0               3.0
         900           5.0               1.5               2.0
        1200           4.0               1.0               1.5
        1800           3.0               0.5               1.0
        3600           1.5               0.4               0.5
        7200           1.0               0.3               0.4

 Provide final alignment settings as part of the final test data.

3.2     TESTS

3.2.1     Vibration Analyzer

 Contractor shall use an FFT analyzer to measure vibration levels. It shall
 have the following characteristics: A dynamic range greater than 70 dB; a
 minimum of 400 line resolution; a frequency response range of 5 Hz-10
 KHz(300-600000 cpm); the capacity to perform ensemble averaging, the
 capability to use a Hanning window; auto-ranging frequency amplitude; a
 minimum amplitude accuracy over the selected frequency range of plus or
 minus 20 percent or plus or minus 1.5 dB.

 An accelerometer, either stud-mounted or mounted using a rare earth, low
 mass magnet and sound disk(or finished surface) shall be used with the FFT
 analyzer to collect data. The mass of the accelerometer and its mounting
 shall have minimal influence on the frequency response of the system over
 the selected measurement range.

3.2.2     Pump Acceptance

 Vibration analysis shall verify pump conformance to specifications.
 Vibration levels shall not be more than .075 in/sec at 1 times run speed
 and at pump frequency, and .04 in/sec at other multiples of run speed.

 Perform tests, including Hydrostatic Leak checking of piping and operation
 of equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

 Operate pumps against Static Heads indicated, and verify Pump-Flow Capacity.

 Provide final test reports to the Contracting Officer.     Reports shall have


                               SECTION 22 14 29   Page 5
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


 a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the
 words "Final Test Reports - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition
 Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance
 Database."

        -- End of Section --




                           SECTION 22 14 29   Page 6
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022




                           SECTION 22 33 30.00 10

                        SOLAR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
                                    04/08

PART 1   GENERAL

1.1   REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
 basic designation only.

          AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
          ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

 ASHRAE 93                        (2003; Errata 2003) Methods of Testing to
                                  Determine the Thermal Performance of Solar
                                  Collectors

          AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

 AWWA C606                        (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints

          AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS B2.1/B2.1M                   (2009) Welding Procedure and Performance
                                  Qualification

 AWS D1.2/D1.2M                   (2008) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum

          ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME B1.20.1                     (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General
                                  Purpose (Inch)

 ASME B16.15                      (2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings
                                  Classes 125 and 250

 ASME B16.18                      (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder
                                  Joint Pressure Fittings

 ASME B16.22                      (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper
                                  and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
                                  Fittings

 ASME B16.24                      (2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and
                                  Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600,
                                  900, 1500, and 2500

 ASME B16.26                      (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy
                                  Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

 ASME B16.39                      (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron
                                  Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
                                  and 300



                       SECTION 22 33 30.00 10   Page 1
SOF C4 Facility                                                W912HN-11-R-0022


 ASME B31.1                         (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power
                                    Piping

 ASME B40.100                       (2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge
                                    Attachments

 ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1              (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Boiler
                                    and Pressure Vessel Code; Section VIII,
                                    Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
                                    Division 1

 ASME PTC 19.3                      (1974; R 2004) Temperature Measurement
                                    Instruments and Apparatus

          ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

 ASTM A 183                         (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

 ASTM A 536                         (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Ductile Iron Castings

 ASTM B 152/B 152M                  (2009) Standard Specification for Copper
                                    Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar

 ASTM B 209                         (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum
                                    and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

 ASTM B 32                          (2008) Standard Specification for Solder
                                    Metal

 ASTM B 62                          (2009) Standard Specification for
                                    Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

 ASTM B 75                          (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless
                                    Copper Tube

 ASTM B 828                         (2002) Standard Practice for Making
                                    Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
                                    and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

 ASTM B 88                          (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless
                                    Copper Water Tube

 ASTM C 1048                        (2004) Standard Specification for
                                    Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
                                    Coated and Uncoated Glass

 ASTM D 2000                        (2008) Standard Classification System for
                                    Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

 ASTM F 1199                        (1988; R 2004) Cast (All Temperatures and
                                    Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers
                                    (150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)

          CSA STANDARDS

 CSA/AM Z21.22                      (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R
                                    2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply


                          SECTION 22 33 30.00 10   Page 2
SOF C4 Facility                                                 W912HN-11-R-0022


                                     Systems

          MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
          INDUSTRY (MSS)

 MSS SP-110                          (1996) Ball Valves Threaded,
                                     Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
                                     Flared Ends

 MSS SP-58                           (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
                                     Supports - Materials, Design and
                                     Manufacture

 MSS SP-69                           (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers
                                     and Supports - Selection and Application

 MSS SP-72                           (1999) Standard for Ball Valves with
                                     Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General
                                     Service

 MSS SP-80                           (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
                                     Valves

          NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

 NEMA MG 1                           (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors
                                     and Generators

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 Provide a solar energy system arranged for preheating of service (domestic
 and/or process) water using flat plate liquid solar collectors. Include in
 the system components a solar collector array, storage tank, pumps,
 automatic controls, instrumentation, interconnecting piping and fittings,
 uninhibited food-grade propylene-glycol and water heat transfer fluid in a
 closed loop, heat exchanger, expansion tank, and accessories required for
 the operation of the system.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. The
 following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Solar Energy System; G
          As-Built Drawings

            Drawings containing a system schematic; a collector layout and
          roof plan noting reverse-return piping for the collector array; a
          system elevation; an equipment room layout; a schedule of
          operation and installation instructions; and a schedule of design
          information including collector height and width, recommended flow
          rate and pressure drop at that flow rate, and number of collectors
          to be grouped per bank. Include on the drawings complete wiring
          and schematic diagrams and any other details required to
          demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly


                           SECTION 22 33 30.00 10   Page 3
SOF C4 Facility                                              W912HN-11-R-0022


          function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and
          anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
          relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances for
          maintenance and operation. As-built drawings, as specified.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Spare Parts

            A complete list of equipment and materials, as specified.

          Solar Energy System; G

            Manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature; performance
          chart and curves; catalog cuts; and installation instructions.
          Proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets, prior to
          posting. A copy of the posted instructions proposed to be used,
          including a system schematic, wiring and control diagrams, and a
          complete layout of the entire system. Include with the
          instructions, in typed form, condensed operating instructions
          explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking
          the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely
          starting and stopping the system, methods of balancing and testing
          flow in the system, and methods of testing for control failure and
          proper system operation.

          Welder Qualifications; G

            Prior to welding operations, 6 copies of qualified procedures
          and lists of names and identification symbols of qualified welders
          and welding operators.

      SD-06 Test Reports

          Inspection and Testing; G

            An independent testing agency's certified reports of inspections
          and laboratory tests, including analysis, position of
          flow-balancing equipment, and interpretation of test results.
          Each report shall be properly identified. Describe test methods
          used and compliance with recognized test standards.

      SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

          Operation and Mainte